Filter Operating Instructions

I N S T R U C T I O N S
O P E R A T I N G
Row filter
IF-PJS-SR-030-01-04375-S-NNS-S
Translation of the original operating instructions
en-GB
Vokuhlstrae 63
. 42555 Velbert-Langenberg
2012 Intensiv-Filter GmbH & Co. KG. All rights reserved.

Intensiv-Filter GmbH & Co. KG remains the copyright owner of this documentation.
The documentation contains information of a technical nature which may not be copied, distributed or
utilised for purposes of competition or passed on to others without authorisation, in whole or in part.
Technical data and other information on the operation of our products are subject to change without notice.
Operating instructions
Design and function ...............................................5
1.1
Introduction ............................................................................. 5
1.2
Functional description ............................................................. 6
1.3
Designs ................................................................................... 9
1.4
Characteristic properties of filter media ................................ 11
Technical data .......................................................13
2.1
General ................................................................................. 13
2.2
Filter ...................................................................................... 15
2.3
Cleaning ............................................................................... 17
2.4
Dust discharge systems ....................................................... 19
2.5
Fan ....................................................................................... 21
Safety .....................................................................23
3.1
Preliminary comment ............................................................ 23
3.2
Intended use ......................................................................... 23
3.3
Basic safety regulations ........................................................ 23
3.4
Meaning of safety instructions .............................................. 25
3.5
General safety regulations .................................................... 26
3.6
Product-specific dangers and danger zones ........................ 27
Commissioning/decommissioning .....................29
4.1
Commissioning ..................................................................... 29
Operation ...............................................................31
5.1
Introduction ........................................................................... 31
5.2
Inspection door ..................................................................... 31
5.3
Measures in case of alarm signals and warnings ................. 33
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
5.4
Causes of malfunctions .........................................................34
Inspection and maintenance ............................... 39
6.1
Introduction ...........................................................................39
6.2
Cover door ............................................................................41
6.3
Filter bags .............................................................................45
6.4
Inspection cover ....................................................................47
Overhauling .......................................................... 49
7.1
Measures in case of alarm signals and warnings .................51
7.2
Cover door ............................................................................53
7.3
Nozzle tube ...........................................................................57
7.4
Filter bag ...............................................................................61
7.5
Supporting cage ....................................................................63
7.6
Inlet nozzle ............................................................................69
7.7
Fastening the inlet nozzle .....................................................71
7.8
Valve chamber ......................................................................73
7.9
Diaphragm valve ...................................................................75
7.10
Pilot valves ............................................................................77
7.11
Inspection cover ....................................................................79
Disassembly and disposal .................................. 81
8.1
General .................................................................................81
8.2
Disassembly ..........................................................................81
8.3
Disposal ................................................................................83
Appendix A ........................................................... 85
9.1
Spare parts ............................................................................85
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
9.2
Additional information ........................................................... 86
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Design and function
Introduction
Design and function
1.1
Introduction
The filters are dry filters for separating dust from a gas stream.
Operating
principle
The following figure shows the operating principle of a filter and its components.
Figure 1:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Representation of principle of a filter with components
Valve block
Diaphragm valve
Bag bottom
Clean gas area
Filter bag
Supporting cage
Raw gas inlet
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Raw gas baffle plate

Nozzle tube
Clean gas outlet
Inlet nozzle
Filter bag in cleaning
Dust collection area
Dust discharge system
Design and function
Functional description
1.2
Raw gas
The gas stream to be cleaned enters the raw gas plenum through the raw gas
inlet and is divided by the raw gas baffle plate so that it flows evenly through
the filter bags.
Bag Bottom
The bag bottom separates the raw gas plenum from the clean gas area. The
filter bags are the only connection (filter media).
Filter media
There must be a seal between the filter media and the bag bottom and
between the bag bottom and the housing. The dust-laden raw gas flows
through the filter media from the outside in. The dust is then deposited on the
outside of the filter medium.
Dust collection
area
As a consequence of regeneration, the dust particles precipitated on the surface of the filter medium get into the dust collection area by sedimentation.
The dust collection area is designed funnel-shaped; the angle of inclination
is adapted to the flow properties of the precipitated particles.
Dust discharge
Dust is discharged continuously.

The selection of suitable dust conveying systems and dust discharge systems depends on the construction form the filter and the dust properties.
The following dust conveying systems are possible:
Screw conveyor
Chain trough conveyor
Air slide
The following dust discharge systems are possible:
Clean gas
Rotary valve
Double pendulum flap
In row filters, the sedimented dust is normally sent through a screw conveyor
to a central discharge system.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Design and function
The gas stream exits the filter media through the bag bottom, flows into the
clean gas area and continues to the clean gas outlet.
Figure 2:
1
2
3
4
Cleaning control
Constructional layout of the clean gas plenum
Clean gas flap

Raw gas plenum
Supporting cage
Filter bag
5
6
7
8
Valve block
Cover door
Nozzle tube
Clean gas area
Regeneration is done by means of compressed air from the clean gas side.
It can be done in offline mode or online mode.
The dust cake is ejected under the influence of the purge air flowing through
the filter medium, and by the mechanical movement of the filter medium.
Another gas, for example nitrogen (N2) can be used for regeneration instead
of compressed air.
The Technical data chapter indicates which compressed gas is actually
used.
Offline mode
In offline mode, the filter media to be cleaned are regenerated by interrupting

the raw gas flow with the clean gas flaps closed and, with raw gas flaps
closed if available. Semi-offline mode is when only clean gas flaps are available which are closed to regenerate the filter media.
Online mode
In online mode, the filter media to be cleaned are cleaned during operation
without parts of the filter being blocked off by clean gas flaps.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Design and function
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Design and function
Designs
1.3
Designs
General
Various designs are available for different areas of application.
Design
classification
The filtering installations are divided into:
Figure 3:
Diagrammatic illustration of series filters
Series filter clean gas plenum
Series filter bunker attachment
Bag series filter with dust collection chamber and filter screw conveyor
Series double filter
1.3.1
Modular design
General
The components of the row filter are standardised and can be individually
combined into a complete filter according to the required level of performance
and design requirements.
Clean gas chamber
Clean gas plenum with bag bottom, hung filter bags and supporting cages,
injector pipe and inlet nozzles.
Filter compartment
Clean gas chamber

Filter housing
Dust collection chamber
Raw gas duct
Clean gas duct
Dust conveying
sytem
Screw conveyor
Dust discharge
system
Rotary valve
Double pendulum flap
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Design and function
Designs
Steel structure
Supporting
Guard rail / railing
Penthouse
Heating and
insulation
Electrical heating for dust collection chamber

Sound insulation for valve room
Heat insulation
Compressed air
supply
Compressor
Compressed air maintenance unit
Compressed air safety valve
Diaphragm valve
Distributor
Shut-off equipment
Cleaning control
system
JetBus Controller
Pilotbox
Differential pressure transmitter
10
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Design and function
Characteristic properties of filter media
1.4

The filter media quality is vital to the functionality of a filter and is determined
individually for each application.
The decisive factors here are:
Operating data, e.g. temperature and static pressure
Composition of the dust
Particle size distribution of the dust
Composition of the raw gas
Installation technology / process engineering
Required residual dust values in the clean gas
The filter media quality resulting from the technical data has been adapted to
requirements and may not be modified.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
11
Design and function
12
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Technical data
General
Technical data
2.1
General
Order information
Customer: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loesche GmbH

Order number:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14148
Delivery date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02/2012
Operating data
Gas type:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air

Dust type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cement
Raw gas volume flow, actual condition: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6432 m/h
Raw gas temperature:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ambient C
Water dew point

and acid dew point
The dust removal installation is to be operated in such a way that the process
temperatures or the wall temperatures in all operating states are at least 20C
over the water dew point or, as the case may be, over the acid dew point of
the waste gas..
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
13
Technical data
General
14
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Technical data
Filter
2.2
Filter
Identification
Type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IF-PJS-SR-030-01-04375-S-NNS-S
Serial no. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34436
Total weight: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1419,087 kg
Design data
Filter area: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,6 m
Operating data
Expected pressure difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . approx. 1200 1500 Pa

Operating pressure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -50 hPa
Sound pressure level in actual condition (as per DIN 45635 T.1): . 85 dB(A)
Filter bag
Nominal diameter: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 mm

Nominal length: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4375 mm
Quality: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ProTex PES
Quantity: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 pieces
Supporting cage
Nominal separation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1x4375 mm

Material (material number): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . steel wire
Clean gas chamber
Weight: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222,320 kg
2.2.1
Cover doors
Gas spring
Manufacturer, type: . . . Gebrder Dreher, 10-23-230-1-1000-355-585-A-WG

Dimensions: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28x600
Weight: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0,724 kg
Pressurising gas:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . nitrogen oil
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
15
Technical data
Filter
16
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Technical data
Cleaning
2.3
Cleaning
General data
Cleaning pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0,4 MPa

Volume flow of compressed air/gas in normal condition: . . . . . . . . . 5,4 m3/h
Cleaning cycle
Cleaning cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 s

(A cleaning cycle includes cleaning of all filter bags)
Pulse time: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 ms, fixed setting
Compressed air
consumption
Air pressure
before filter maintenance unit:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .at least 6.5 bar
Permissible pressure in valve block: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 bar
Compressed air
quality classes in
line with ISO
8573-1:2001-02
2.3.1
Class
Value
Partikel size
<5
Concentration
<5
mg/m
Pressure dewpoint
< +3
Concentration
total oil
<1
mg/m
Solid particle class
Humidity class
Oil class
Control unit
Manufacturer, type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reco, RM-BV12-6 DP
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
17
Technical data
Cleaning
2.3.2
Valve chamber
Valve block
Manufacturer, type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intensiv-Filter; PJS

Fluid type:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Air or nitrogen
Type of load:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cyclical
Permissible number of load cycles: . 2 million (rated for endurance strength)
Inner pressure deviation range: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 bar
Content: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 litres
Permissible operating overpressure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 bar
Permissible operating temperature: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -10 / +50 C
Use of the permitted calculated tension: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 %
Test overpressure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 bar
Diaphragm valve
Manufacturer, type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intensiv-Filter, DN 1

Quantity: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 pieces
Compressed air
maintenance unit
Manufacturer, type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Norgren, B74G-4GK-AP3-RMN

Connection width:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G 1/2"
Draining method: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic
Container material: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal
Filter element, filter fineness: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 m
Spring: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 bar
18
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Technical data
Dust discharge systems
2.4
2.4.1
Rotary valve
Operating data
Manufacturer, type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intensiv-Filter, ZS-F 190/5

Serial-no.: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34453
Weight without motor: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63,535 kg
Conveying capacity: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,1 m/h
Sealing
Rotary shaft seal type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B2FUD_ 45x 65x10-72 NBR 902
Geared motor
Manufacturer, type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SEW, RF37DRS71M4

Electrical connection values:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 V, 0,55 kW, 50 Hz
Final speed:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 1/min
Design: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IM B5
Type of protection: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP 65
Proximity switch
Manufacturer, type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turck, DBI10U-M30-AP4X2

Operating zone: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (0,81 x Sn) mm
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
19
Technical data
20
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Technical data
Fan
2.5
Fan
Identification
Manufacturer, Type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bisinger, FI 561 N5B

Serial number:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34474
Operating data
Air flow: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6432 m3/h

Gas density (20C):. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,20 kg/m
Gas temperature (Operation): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 C
Shaft rpm: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3000 1/min
Motor max. rpm: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3000 1/min
Power max.: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,00 kW
Motor
Manufacturer, Type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Siemens, 1LE1001-1DA23-3FA4

Power: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 kW
Motor speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3000 1/min
Voltage: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 V
Frequency: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Hz
Design: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IM B5
Protective system:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP 55
Explosion-proof version: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . no
Sound data
Noise level with bilateral

pipe connection in 1 m distance:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 dB(A)
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
21
Technical data
Fan
22
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Safety
Preliminary comment
Safety
3.1
Preliminary comment
These safety instructions are provided for the protection of persons and
objects against damage and dangers. These dangers result from unintended
use, incorrect operation, inadequate or improper maintenance of the plant.
3.2
Intended use
The plant is suitable for separating dusts in accordance with the specifications listed in the technical data.
Gas springs
The gas springs are used solely for support while the cover doors open and
close and for locking the cover doors once open.
Dust discharge
system
Dust discharge systems are suitable only for discharging dust in accordance
with the specifications listed in the technical data.
Conversions and
changes of the
plant
Unauthorised conversions and modifications to the plant or its components

are prohibited for safety reasons.
3.3
Basic safety regulations
If potential hazards change with respect to the original design of the plant, the
safety equipment must be checked and safeguarded by qualified persons.
The following safety regulations must be observed:
3.3.1
Only authorised persons may work on the filtering installation.
Only operate the plant in perfect working condition and while observing
the operating instructions.
Avoid any form of work that endangers the safety of people or impairs
the safety of the plant.
Only perform maintenance and overhauling when the plant is at a standstill.
When shutting down the plant, it is necessary to observe the shutdown

procedures described in the respective chapters of the operating instructions.
Explosion protected plants are to be checked and released before commissioning by a qualified person (Atex, occupational safety regulation).
The plant may not be changed without consulting the manufacturer.
Local laws, regulations and provisions
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
23
Safety
Basic safety regulations
Generally applicable, national and local safety laws, accident prevention laws
and operator's regulations must be observed in addition to the regulations in
these operating instructions.
3.3.2
Area of applicability
Data, instructions and safety-relevant notes in these operating instructions
apply exclusively to the plant supplied.
3.3.3
Target groups
When operating the plant, responsibilities for different activities must be clearly
defined and adhered to.
The operator must ensure that only qualified personnel operate the plant and
that recognised rules for occupational safety are adhered to. Only qualified
personnel may be located within the plant's hazard area.
Operator
Function and area of responsibility
A higher-level, legally-qualified person is responsible both for intended

use of the plant and for training and assigning authorised persons. This
person defines mandatory areas of responsibility and authorisations for
persons authorised to operate the plant.
Qualification for persons in a management position
Maintenance
personnel
Education in business and engineering
Relevant experience in risk assessment and personnel management
Repair defects
Decommission and commission the plant
Authorised to stay in the entire vicinity of the filtering installation
Qualifications
Service personnel
Specialised training (mechanical, electrical)
Specific advanced training in filter technology
Intensiv-Filter personnel or persons authorised by Intensiv-Filter
Carry out initial commissioning
Instruct on-site maintenance personnel
Authorised to stay in the entire vicinity of the filtering installation
Qualifications
24
Specialised training (mechanical, electrical)
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Safety
Meaning of safety instructions
Specific advanced training in filter technology
3.4
Meaning of safety instructions
3.4.1
Types of safety instructions

The safety instructions are divided into four hazard levels:
DANGER
Indicates a dangerous situation leading to death or
serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a dangerous situation that can lead to
death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially dangerous situation that can
lead to minor or moderate injury.
NOTE
Indicates a situation that can lead to damage to
objects.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
25
Safety
General safety regulations
3.5
General safety regulations
3.5.1
Notes on occupational safety
26
Before any work is carried out on the plant, all personnel involved must
have read and understood the contents of the operating instructions.
The responsibilities for working on the plant must be clearly defined and
adhered to.
Supporting structures provided specifically for installing the plant may

neither be modified nor subjected to additional loads or loads caused by
impermissible overfilling of the dust collection areas.
As far as the control system is concerned, the filter is to be integrated

into the system as a whole in such a way that, in case of emergencies,
failures, fires and explosions (also if these occur in components linked
to the filter electrical system, mechanical system, fluid-technical system, functional), the filter is shut down immediately and the respective
protective measures (fire extinguishing, evacuation) are implemented
right away.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Safety
Product-specific dangers and danger zones
3.6

In all setup, maintenance and repair work on the system, the switch-off procedures described in the respective chapters of the operating manuals must
be observed at all times.
3.6.1
Electric dangers
CAUTION
Voltage-carrying components
Electric shock when touched
Switch off the filter at the main switch.
Secure the switch against being accidentally switched back on.
When the main switch is OFF, the socket in the switch cabinet is still
live.
The switch cabinet may be opened only by trained, authorised expert
personnel.
3.6.2
Mechanical dangers
CAUTION
Heavy components with sharp edges
Crushing and cutting injuries
Wear suitable clothing or protective clothing.
Wear gloves when changing components with sharp edges.
Use a crane for heavy components.
When working on the system, do not wear clothing that can get caught on the
components: e.g. neckties, scarves, jewellery, loose clothing and the like.
Protect long hair by wearing a suitable head covering.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
27
Safety
3.6.3
Pneumatic dangers
CAUTION
The pneumatic system is under pressure - even in EMERGENCY OFF
condition
Eye injuries from compressed air
Do NOT change the specified pressure settings.
Before beginning maintenance and overhauling work, switch off the
compressed air supply and vent the system.
When working on the pneumatic system, always wear safety goggles.
3.6.4
Dangers from overloading
CAUTION
Overload from excessive dust load
Material damage from destruction of the filter
Death or serious injury if the filter falls over
Clean the dust collection chamber regularly.
Monitor the fill level in the filter.
The manufacturer is not liable for damage resulting from such use;
the risk is the responsibility of the user alone.
28
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Commissioning/decommissioning
Commissioning
4.1
Commissioning
Functioning
During commissioning, the functioning of the filter and its aggregates is

achieved in two steps.
Cold commissioning
In cold commissioning, the design and function of the filter and its aggregates
are checked and tested without subjecting the system to dust. First, the function of individual aggregates is tested. Then the function of the aggregates
when interacting is tested via the system control.
The cold commissioning is performed by Intensiv-Filter staff.
Warm commissioning
During the warm commissioning, the entire system is tested under operating
conditions. Settings are adjusted when necessary.
Warm commissioning includes functional tests that cannot be performed
during cold commissioning.
Examples:
Shutdown of
the system
(temporary)
Testing the operating conditions:
Temperatures
Operating pressures
Volume flows
Mobility of the flaps (e.g. clean gas flap, raw gas flap, etc.)
Tightness of the compressed air pipe
Functionality of the cleaning control system
When the system is shut down, the assumption is that the system will later be
re-commissioned. The system shutdown can be planned or unplanned.
Planned system shutdown
For performing maintenance

For a product change
During a stop in operation
Shutting down a limited filter unit while the rest of the system continues
to work
Unplanned system shutdown
To perform repairs when serious faults occur
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
29
Commissioning
Re-commissioning
The re-commissioning takes place after a planned shutdown or after an

unplanned shutdown. The procedure is conducted as described under
Warm commissioning.
Decommissioning
(final)
In decommissioning, the assumption is that the system will not be re-commissioned. Following decommissioning, the system will be disposed of. The necessary measures are described in the chapter Disassembly and disposal.
4.1.1
Inspections before commissioning
Prerequisites
The assembly of the filter and its aggregates is completed successfully and
has been confirmed by the assembly acceptance
Compressed air pipes are blown clear with compressed air
To avoid damage to the maintenance unit, the compressed air pipes

were opened directly in front of the maintenance unit
Remaining foreign bodies (such as tools, remnants of welding electrodes,

screws, dirt or wood parts) were carefully removed from all components of
the filtering installation including the ducts.
CAUTION
Danger from foreign bodies in the filter
Physical injury from foreign bodies ejected from rotating components
Material damage from foreign bodies entering rotating components
Spark formation
Remove foreign bodies from the filter and ducts before commissioning
Equipment
The following equipment must be available to operate the filter:
Compressed air
The compressed air must meet the requirements in the chapter

Technical data
Electricity
The operating voltage must meet the specifications defined in
the chapter Technical data
30
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operation
Introduction
Operation
5.1
Introduction
Continuous
operation
Intensiv-Filter filtering installations are designed for continuous operation and

operate independently. The monitoring of some measurements ensures
undisturbed operation in compliance with the stipulated limit values.
5.2
Inspection door
CAUTION
Discharge of large dust quantities
Suffocation due to inhalation of dust
Keep inspection door closed during operation
Closed doors
Inspection doors must be kept closed at all times during operation.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
31
Operation
Inspection door
32
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operation
Measures in case of alarm signals and warnings
5.3
General
For all error messages, the affected aggregate must be checked first. This
test must be carried out as promptly as possible to avoid jeopardising plant
safety and reliability.
Exceeding raw gas

inlet temperature
To prevent damage to the filter bags, the filter must be removed from the
process immediately.
Exceeding the dust

concentration in
clean gas
If the dust concentration in the clean gas is exceeded, the filter must be
removed from the process
CAUTION
Danger due to inhalation of dust or contact with dust
Irritations to eyes, respiratory system or skin by dust
Wear protective equipment.
After the filter has cooled, the cover door should be opened and the filter bags
checked for seal seat, material damage etc.
Dust discharge
systems stoppage
If possible, the dust discharge system should be removed from the process
by closing slide valves. The fault on the affected discharge system should be
resolved immediately.
Differential pressure too high
If the permitted differential pressure is exceeded, the following points should

be checked:
Process parameters (volume flow, pressure, temperature etc.)

Proper operation of cleaning depending on differential pressure
Proper operation of the fan
Proper operation of the dust discharge devices (speed device, level
indicator)
If the fault cannot be resolved quickly, the filter must be shut down.
Faults in cleaning
system
Faults in the cleaning system must be resolved in line with the instructions in
the JetBus controller section.
Fan warning signal
In case of a warning signal from a fan monitoring system (acceleration sensor,

fan bearing temperature monitoring, motor winding temperature monitoring
or motor bearing temperature), immediate measures are required to resolve
the fault. If safe operation of the plant is not impaired, these can be carried
out during operation.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
33
Operation
Causes of malfunctions
Fan alarm signal
In case of an alarm signal from one of the fan monitoring systems (acceleration sensor, fan bearing temperature monitoring, motor winding temperature
monitoring or motor bearing temperature), it is essential to shut down the filter
to resolve the fault.
5.4
The following table of possible malfunctions should provide quick assistance
to the operator.
Malfunction
Possible cause
Remedy
Differential pressure at the filter

is too high
Cleaning system failed

- Compressed gas supply
interrupted
- Compressed air regulator

is not working correctly
- Solenoid valves are not

working correctly
Check compressed gas regulator; repair if need be. Check

the pressure regulator settings; correct setting.
Overhaul solenoid valves,
replace
- Measuring lines clogged
Clean the measuring lines.
- Differential pressure dis-
Check the display and repair it

if required
play is defective
Design data has not been
adhered to
- Unacceptable increase in
the volumetric flow
temperature
the raw gas dust concentration
- Display is defective
34
Check compressor, compressed gas network and

remedy the malfunction
Rectify the process engineering or operating conditions

Overhaul display
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operation
Malfunction
Possible cause
Differential pressure at the filter

is too high
Design data has not been

adhered to
Remedy
- Measuring lines clogged
Clean the measuring lines.
- Filter volume flow is too
Check the volume flow; set to

the design specification
high
- Dust load is too high
Check the process engineering; reduce the dust accumulation
- Changed operating condi-
Correct operating conditions
tions
- Filter bags are no longer

able to function
Cleaning system failed
Compressed gas supply

interrupted
Check compressed gas supply and supply lines; correct

malfunctions
- Compressed air regulator
Correct controller setting,

secure condensate drain,
check filter, clean or replace
is not working correctly
- Solenoid valves are not

working correctly
- Safety valve blows air
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Replace the filter bags that

are sticky, worn out or have
become unusable due to
other conditions.
Check the lines and rectify

interruptions, check valve
functioning, replace magnetic
coils if necessary, rectify damage to valves
Set operating pressure to
maximum response pressure
of the safety valves; see chapter Commissioning.
35
Operation
Malfunction
Possible cause
Remedy
Bag damage
- Inflow at the filter inlet is at
Correct the inflow, remove the

dust streaks
an angle
- Holes in the baffle
Repair or replace baffle
- Volume flow is too high
Correct volume flow
- Temperature is too high
Temperature per chapter 2

Replace filter media
Bags blocked
- Non-intended use of the

plant, for example: temperature below dew point,
insufficient cleaning
Temperature
- too high
- Temperature at the suction
Correct operating conditions

Replace filter bags
Regulate temperature
point is too high
- Temperature control is
Repair temperature control
defective
- too low
Leaks
- Air leaking in
Rectify leaks
- Insulation is defective
Repair insulation
- Seals damaged
Replace seals
- Unsuitable seals
Use prescribed seals
- Housing threaded joints
Retighten the threaded joints
loosened
Condensation
formation
- Cracked welding seams
Repair the welding seams
- Filter inlet temperature is
Adjust the process engineering, check thermal insulation,

and repair it if required
too low
- Water content in the clean

gas is too high (dew point
temperature)
- Missing insulation or insuf-
Adjust the process engineering
Overhaul thermal insulation
ficient insulation
- Air leaking in
36
Rectify leaks
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operation
Malfunction
Possible cause
Remedy
Signs of corrosion (corrosion

due to chemical
or electrochemical effects)
- Condensation (dew point
of water or acid not

reached)
- Corrosive elements are

present
- Halogenated hydrocarbons
are present
Pitting corrosion
(pitting)
- Halides are present (e.g.

chlorine, fluorine, bromine)
Signs of wear
- In the filter inlet
- Velocities are too high
Set the velocity as per the

design specifications
- At the bags
- Flow at an angle
Rectify the incoming flow
- Worn out raw gas baffle
Replace the raw gas baffle

plate and rectify the cause of
wear and tear
plate
- In the dust col-
- Inflow velocity is too high
Ascertain the cause, reduce

the flow, and reduce air-tocloth ratio
- High dust loading
Reduce dust accumulation by

operational measures; if need
be, equip with abrasion-resistant sheets
- Filter bags are defective
Replace the defective filter

bags
- Impermissible filter
Use the original version of filter media
lection area
Dust in the clean

gas area
medium
- Incorrect design of the filter

bags for the replacement
sleeves
- Incorrect installation of the

filter bags
- Leak between the raw and

clean gas areas
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Use the original version of filter media
Check the filter bag attachment and rectify it if required

Check the filter bag attachment and retighten the screw
connection
37
Operation
Malfunction
Possible cause
Remedy
Dust clogging
- Below dew point
- Inadequate heating
Repair the defective heater
- Moist dust
Improve the operating conditions
- Changed operating condi-
Rectify the operating conditions
tions
Dust bridges
- Changed dust properties
Using discharge aids
- Amount of dust too great
Discharge of dust matter in

cycles
Dust discharge
- Dust discharge
blocked
- Dust bridges
because filter cleaning

operation has failed and
been restarted
- Changed dust properties
Rectify process engineering
(moisture, particle size distribution)
- Dust accumulation too high
38
- Changes at the suction

point (dust gathering)
Set the dust gathering at the

suction point to a minimum
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Inspection and maintenance
Introduction
6.1
Introduction
General
Intensiv-Filter filtering installations are designed for permanent operation.

To maintain the functions of the filtering installation, regular inspections and
maintenance are essential.
Accident prevention
To ensure the safety of staff and of the filtering installation, measures for accident prevention must be observed for all maintenance work.
Documentation
All maintenance work performed must be documented in writing.
Prerequisites
The following requirements must be met before starting inspection work:
The plant is not in operation.
Hot components have cooled off.
Live components are disconnected from the mains.
Pressurised components have been depressurised.
Special inspection and maintenance work must be carried out during

operation (e.g. inspection of differential pressure, lubrication of shaft
seals)..
WARNING
Hot surface
Risk of burns on contact
Only carry out maintenance work on components that have cooled off
Wear protective clothing
CAUTION
Live components
Electric shocks on contact
Before working on live components, switch off the main switch and
secure it against being accidentally switched back on.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
39
Introduction
CAUTION
Pressurised plant parts
Bodily injury from compressed air or spontaneously released components
Depressurise any pressurised plant parts before maintenance work
Wear protective equipment
CAUTION
Maintenance work on rotating components
Strangulation from loose articles of clothing or hair being caught in rotating
components
Wear close-fitting clothing
The following articles of clothing must not be worn: neckties, scarves,
jewellery etc.
Protect long hair with adequate head covering
40
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Cover door
6.2
Cover door
For inspection and maintenance work in the clean gas area, the cover door
must be open.
6.2.1
Opening and closing the cover door
Safety
It is imperative that the following safety instructions are observed before

opening the cover door:
WARNING
Danger from open cover door during operation in case of overpressure in the filter
Burns caused by escaping hot gas
Contact with escaping dust
Open cover door only when the plant is at a standstill.
CAUTION
Accidental closure of the cover door
Injury due to crushing of limbs
Covers doors must be secured to stabilise them and prevent them from
closing automatically.
The positioner of the cover door must engage in the securing position.
General
Gas springs support and limit the opening of the cover door.
CAUTION
Pressurised gas spring parts (gas spring internal pressure up to
160 bar) can come loose when the cover door is slammed shut.
Gas spring parts can cause bodily injury
Open the cover door to the end position
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
41
Cover door
Opening
Open the cover door and secure it against accidentally falling shut.
Figure 4:
1
2
3
42
4
5
6
Handle
Cover door
Gas spring
Lift cover door (5) by the handles (1)

As the opening angle of the cover door (5) increases, the force
required to open the cover door (5) decreases due to the support of
the gas spring.
At an opening angle of 50 to 70, spring force and weight force balance each other.
2.
Hold cover door (5) back against the spring force until the end position
has been reached.
Once the end position is reached, the protective tube (1) falls onto
the piston rod of the gas spring (6) and thus stops the piston and piston rod from accidentally closing the cover door (5).
The cover door is opened and secured against accidentally falling shut.
Check the seals and the positioners.

1.
Check if seals are brittle or damaged (see the Overhauling chapter for
information on how to exchange the seals).
2.
Check the funktion of gas springs (see the Gas spring section).
Inspection of the seals and gas springs is complete.
3
Inspecting
Protective tube
Linkage point
Clean gas chamber housing
1.
3
Inspecting
Cover door open
Check the functioning of the gas springs (see the Gas spring section).
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Cover door
Closing
Release and close the cover door.
CAUTION
Cover door falling shut
Crushing of limbs
Slowly close the cover door
Do not allow the cover door to fall
1.
3
6.2.2
Lift protective tube (1) and slowly close the cover door (5) at the same
time.
Never allow cover door (5) to fall.
The cover door is closed.
Gas spring
The gas spring consists of the following components:
Figure 5:
Gas spring
1 Eye (linkage point)

2 Protective tube
3 Piston with piston rod

4 Hinge joint (linkage point)
General
Gas springs are wear parts.
Malfunction
The following causes of malfunction are possible:

Malfunction
Cause
Remedy
Missing supporting effect

when actuating the cover
door
Pressure loss in the gas

spring due to leak
Replace gas spring (see

chapter Overhauling)
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
43
Cover door
Maintenance
44
Maintenance includes the following points:
Each time the cover door is opened and closed, make sure the gas
springs function correctly.
Lubrication of the linkage points when the cover door is actuated in the
context of other maintenance work.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Filter bags
6.3
Filter bags
Inspection
Check the functioning of the filter bags

1.
Monitoring the differential pressure

Differential pressure values under the specified range indicate that
the filter bags are damaged
Differential pressure values over the specified range indicate that the
filter bags are clogged
2.
Open the cover door and secured against accidentally swinging shut
(see chapter Inspection and maintenance, section Cover door).
3.
Checking clean gas chamber for dust deposits

Dust deposits occur at the point where a filter bag is damaged.
4.
Replacing damaged filter bags (see chapter "Overhauling")
5.
Determining the causes of the damage and remedying it

Filter bags can be damaged by chafing, which is due to improper
installation (see chapter "Overhauling" for correct installation).
6.
If there are no dust deposits that could indicate damaged filter bags, the
filter bags could be clogged. Replacing clogged filter bags (see chapter
"Overhauling")
7.
Check the operating conditions of the filter before recommissioning and

remove what is causing the clogged filter bags
8.
Based on the maintenance protocol, check the number of operating

hours of the installed filter bags
9.
After the guaranteed service life of the filter bags has expired (see
"Technical Data"), they must be replaced (see "Overhauling") in order to
guarantee the secure operation of the plant
10. Close the cover door (see chapter Inspection and maintenance, section Cover door).
3 The functioning of the filter bags has now been checked
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
45
Filter bags
46
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Inspection cover
6.4
Inspection cover
6.4.1
Opening and closing the inspection cover
Figure 6:
1
2
3
Dust collection area inspection cover
Dust collection area wall

Seal
Inspection cover inside section
4
5
Inspection cover outer section

Closure/grab handle
CAUTION
Discharge of large dust quantities
Suffocation due to inhalation of dust
Environmental damage due to discharge of harmful dust
Before opening the inspection door, dismantle a filter bag to see
whether any dust has amassed.
Open the inspection door only when the plant is at a standstill.
Opening
Open the inspection cover

1.
Turn both closures anti-clockwise as far as the limit stop

The distance between the inside section and outer section of the
cover will increase
2.
Move the inspection cover in the opening and remove it

The inspection cover is now open
3
Inspecting
Checking the seals

1.
Check if the seal is brittle or damaged (see the Overhauling chapter
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
47
Inspection cover
3
Closing
Close the inspection cover

1.
Position the inspection cover in the opening of the dust collection area
The seal is located between the inside section and outer section of
the inspection cover
2.
Turn both closures clockwise as far as the limit stop

Ensure the inspection cover is positioned so that the cover covers
the seal uniformly.
The distance between the inside section and outer section of the
inspection cover is reduced until the cover sits securely in the opening.
The inspection cover is now closed
48
on how to exchange the seals).

Inspection of the seal is now complete
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Overhauling
Overhauling
General
To ensure safe operation of the filter and its aggregates, components that
have reached their service life through wear, corrosion, mechanical stress,
fatigue etc. must be replaced immediately. It is recommended to use only
original spare parts.
If the filter and its aggregates are still operated despite a defect being identified, the operator is solely responsible for any resulting damage to personnel
or the filtering installation.
Accident prevention
To ensure the safety of staff and of the filtering installation, measures for accident prevention must be observed for all overhauling work.
Protecting the
working area
Before overhauling, observe the following:
The responsible staff will ensure that no unauthorised people or unnecessary objects are in the working area.
The working areas must be blocked off.
Documentation
All overhauling work performed must be documented in writing.
Customer service
For any queries on spare parts, repairs and optimisation of filtering installations, please contact Intensive-Filter customer service.
To order spare parts or send questions to customer service, please contact
us at the following address:
Intensiv-Filter GmbH & Co KG
Vosskuhlstrasse 63
D-42555 VELBERT (Langenberg), Germany
+49 2052 910-0

+49 2052 910-248
www.intensiv-filter.com
if@intensiv-filter.com
Ordering spare
parts
The following information is required when ordering spare parts:
Commission no.
Machine no.
Filter type
Spare part name
Spare part no.
Number of parts required
Shipping address
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
49
Overhauling
(including inventory no., receiving person and installation site)
Type plate
Delivery date
The type plate located in a clearly visible location on the filter. The type plate
contains the following information:
Figure 7:
1
2
3
Data fields
Company logo
Address
Type code number
4
5
6
Machine number
Commission number
Year of construction
Figure 8:
Spare parts list
The spare parts lists can be found in the Appendix.
Prerequisites
The following requirements must be met before starting overhauling work:
Hot components have cooled off.
Live components are disconnected from the mains.
Pressurised components have been depressurised.
WARNING
Hot surface
Risk of burns on contact
Only work on cooled components
50
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Overhauling
CAUTION
Live components
Electric shocks on contact
Before working on live components, switch off the main switch and
secure it against being accidentally switched back on.
CAUTION
Pressurised plant parts
Bodily injury from flow of compressed air or spontaneously released components
Before working on pressurised plant parts, make sure they are depressurised.
WARNING
Walking on uneven surfaces
Slipping or stumbling
Wear personal protective equipment
7.1
General
For all error messages, the affected aggregate must be checked first. This
test must be carried out as promptly as possible to avoid jeopardising plant
safety and reliability.
Exceeding raw gas

inlet temperature
To prevent damage to the filter bags, the filter must be removed from the
process immediately.
Exceeding dust
concentration
CAUTION
Irritations to eyes, respiratory system or skin by dust.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
51
Overhauling
After the section has cooled, the cover door should be opened and the filter
bags checked for seal seat, material damage etc.
Filter wall heating
fault
Dust discharge
devices stoppage
If possible, the dust discharge device should be removed from the process
by closing slide valves. The fault on the affected discharge device should be
resolved immediately.
Activation of level
indicator
CAUTION
Irritations to eyes, respiratory system or skin by dust.
Before opening the inspection doors, make sure that there is no accumulated dust behind them.
Differential pressure too high
If the permitted differential pressure is exceeded, the following points should

be checked:
Process parameters (volume flow, pressure, temperature etc.)

Proper operation of cleaning depending on differential pressure
Proper operation of the fan
Proper operation of the dust discharge devices (speed device, level
indicator)
If the fault cannot be resolved quickly, the filter must be shut down.
Faults in cleaning
system
Faults in the cleaning system must be resolved in line with the instructions in
the JetBus controller section.
Fan warning signal
In case of a warning signal from a fan monitoring system (acceleration sensor, fan bearing temperature monitoring, motor winding temperature monitoring or motor bearing temperature), immediate measures are required to
resolve the fault. If safe operation of the plant is not impaired, these can be
carried out during operation.
Fan alarm signal
In case of an alarm signal from one of the fan monitoring systems (acceleration sensor, fan bearing temperature monitoring, motor winding temperature
monitoring or motor bearing temperature), it is essential to shut down the filter
to resolve the fault.
52
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Overhauling
Cover door
7.2
Cover door
General
If cover doors no longer close tightly or if the installation no longer performs

its function, repairs must be done.
Prerequisites
The cover door is open.
CAUTION
Cover door falling shut
Death or severe bodily injury if the cover door falls shut
Also secure the cover door against falling shut during work on the positioner or gas spring
7.2.1
Cover door seal
Implementation
Replace cover door seal with a new one

1.
Remove cover door seal from the groove, leaving no residue
2.
Cut the new cover door seal to size
3.
Glue cover door seal with silicone into the groove of the cover door
Observe the temperature resistance of the silicone: temperature of
the filtering installation (see chapter "Technical data")
Cover door seal has been replaced
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
53
Overhauling
Cover door
7.2.2
Gas spring
General
Gas springs that no longer fulfil their function must be replaced.
Implementation
Replace the gas spring.
Figure 9:
1
2
1.
Gusset plate, cover door

Screw
2.
54
3
4
Cover door
Gas spring
Unscrew the screw (2) of the gas spring (4) on the gusset plate (1).
Figure 10:
1
2
3
Upper gas spring linkage point
Lower gas spring linkage point
Gas spring
Cap spring (folding spring bolt)
Clean gas chamber
4
5
Bolt (folding spring bolt)

Clevis
Unscrew folding spring bolts (2 and 4) on the bottom end of the gas
spring (1)
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Overhauling
Cover door
3.
Remove the gas spring

3 The gas spring has been removed.
4.
Screw a new gas spring to the cover door

Allow for some play in the linkage point when screwing it together
5.
If it is necessary to turn the piston rod in order to insert the eye into the
clevis (5), then the piston rod may be turned clockwise only.
6.
Fasten the eye of the gas spring in the clevis of the clean gas chamber
with the folding spring bolt
7.
Lubricate both linkage points

The gas spring is replaced.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
55
Overhauling
Cover door
56
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Overhauling
Nozzle tube
7.3
Nozzle tube
Prerequisites
The cover door is open and secured against accidentally swinging shut (see
chapter Inspection and maintenance, section Cover door)
Removal
Removing the nozzle tube, flat packing, valve tube nipple and O-ring
Figure 11:
1
2
3
1.
Nozzle tube fastening (clean gas outlet side)
Cover door frame

Nozzle tube
Screw
4
5
Bushing
Hexagon cap nut
Loosen screw connection (3, 4 and 5) on the cover door frame
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
57
Overhauling
Nozzle tube
Figure 12:
1
2
3
4
Nozzle tube fastening (valve block side)
Valve block
Clean gas chamber front wall
Bag base
Flat packing
5
6
7
Valve tube nipple

O-ring
Nozzle tube
2.
Pull the nozzle tube (7) out of the valve tube nipple (5) by means of
short turns to the right and left
3.
Remove the O-ring (6) from the valve tube nipple
CAUTION
Valve block may collapse if it is not fastened securely
Injury to persons or damage to objects due to collapsing valve block
Only ever remove one valve tube nipple per valve block at one time
After removal, reinstall valve tube nipple immediately
4.
58
Unscrew the valve tube nipple and remove the flat packing (4)
Nozzle tube, flat packing, valve tube nipple and the O-ring are now
removed.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Overhauling
Nozzle tube
Installation
Installing the flat packing, valve tube nipple, O-rings and nozzle tube
1.
Screw in the valve tube nipple (5) with new flat packing (4).
2.
Insert the new O-ring (6) into the valve tube nipple
3.
Push the nozzle tube (7) into the valve tube nipple
4.
Fasten nozzle tube with screw, bushing and hexagon cap nut on the
cover door frame (see illustration Nozzle tube fastening)
Torque setting 30 Nm
The flat packing, valve tube nipple, O-ring and nozzle tube are now
installed.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
59
Overhauling
Nozzle tube
60
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Overhauling
Filter bag
7.4
Filter bag
7.4.1
Changing the filter bag
Prerequisite
The cover door is open (see section Opening and closing the cover door)
The blast connection or nozzle tube has been removed (see section Blast
connection)
The inlet nozzle and supporting cage are removed. (see sections Supporting
cage, Inlet nozzle and Fastening the inlet nozzle)
CAUTION
Contaminated filter bags
Risk of poisoning due to inhalation, eye injuries or skin irritations
Removal
Removing the filter bag

1.
3
Installation
Pick up the filter bag by the wire ring and pull it upwards out of the bag
base
The filter bag is now removed
Installing the filter bag

1.
Insert filter bag still folded together (as when delivered) through the corresponding hole in the bag base.
Figure 13:
1
Filter bag
Filter bag installed

2
Bag base
2.
Unfold the filter bag by shaking it gently
3.
Place the filter bag onto the bag base with the ridge
Turn the seam in the direction of the tension bar or star-shaped ten-
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
61
Overhauling
Filter bag
Concluding tasks
62
sion bar
Filter bag is installed
1.
Install the supporting cage (see Supporting cage section)
2.
Insert the inlet nozzle (see sections Inlet nozzle and Fastening the
inlet nozzle)
3.
Mount the blast connection or nozzle pipe (see section Blast connection)
4.
Close the cover door (see section Closing the cover door)
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Overhauling
Supporting cage
7.5
Supporting cage
7.5.1
Changing the supporting cage
Prerequisite
connection)
The fastening of the inlet nozzles has been released (see section Fastening
the inlet nozzle)
Removal
Removing the supporting cage
Figure 14:
1
2
3
Removal of supporting cage with inlet nozzle
Hexagon cap nut

Inlet nozzle
Filter bag
4
5
6
Star-shaped tension bar

Supporting cage
Bag base
1.
Remove the supporting cage (5) with inlet nozzle (4) from the filter
bag (3)
In case of low removal height or very long supporting cages: Split the
supporting cage at the intermediate ring
2.
Pull the supporting cage out of the filter bag until the intermediate ring is
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
63
Overhauling
Supporting cage
located above the bag base
Figure 15:
3.
Prevent the supporting cage from slipping back down by inserting a rigid
bar at the supporting cage section below the intermediate ring
4.
Splay the lengthways wires apart right and left of the split at the top supporting cage section with the mounting lever and remove the top supporting cage section
Figure 16:
64
Supporting cage secured with bar (example illustration)
Separate upper supporting cage section from intermediate ring
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Overhauling
Supporting cage
(example illustration)
1
2
3
4
Intermediate ring groove

Lower supporting cage section
5.
If necessary, separate further sections of the supporting cage in the

same way
6.
Hold the lower supporting cage section steady, remove the bar and pull
the supporting cage section out of the filter bag
The supporting cage is now removed
3
Intermediate ring
Upper supporting cage section

Mounting lever
Replacing a damaged intermediate ring
NOTE
Connection coming loose from supporting cage sections
Damage to filter bags
Replace damaged intermediate rings
1.
On the supporting cage section, splay the lengthways wires apart right
and left of the split using the mounting lever
Figure 17:
1
2
Removing and installing the intermediate ring (example illustration)
Intermediate ring
Supporting cage
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Mounting lever
65
Overhauling
Supporting cage
2.
Remove the intermediate ring upwards
3.
Insert new intermediate ring from above into the supporting cage
4.
Stop splaying the wires

The intermediate ring has now been replaced
3
Installation
Installing the supporting cage
NOTE
Damage to filter bags
Specified value for residual dust content in clean gas is not maintained
Straighten bent supporting cages
Replace damaged supporting cages
Prerequisites
The filter bag has been installed (see section Filter bag)
The inlet nozzle has been installed in the supporting cage (see section Inlet
nozzle)
1.
Insert supporting cage lower section with intermediate ring into the filter
bag
Figure 18:
66
Inserting the lower supporting cage section (example illustration)
2.
Prevent lower supporting cage part from falling into the filter bag by
inserting a rigid bar
3.
Place the upper supporting cage section on the lower supporting cage
section
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Overhauling
Supporting cage
Split points towards the front
Figure 19:
1
2
Concluding tasks
Installation of supporting cage upper part, lengthways wires splayed
Upper supporting cage section

Mounting lever
3
4
Intermediate ring groove

Lower supporting cage section
4.
On the top supporting cage section, splay the lengthways wires apart
right and left of the split with the mounting lever and press the upper
supporting cage section into the intermediate ring groove
5.
Stop splaying the wires
6.
If necessary, attach further supporting cage parts in the same way
7.
Check the supporting cage parts are connected securely
8.
Remove bar and insert supporting cage into the filter bag
The supporting cage is now installed.
1.
Fasten filter bag, inlet nozzle and supporting cage (see section Fastening the inlet nozzle)
2.
Mount the blast connection or nozzle tube (see section Blast connection)
3.
Close the cover door (see section Cover door)
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
67
Overhauling
Supporting cage
68
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Overhauling
Inlet nozzle
7.6
Inlet nozzle
7.6.1
Changing the inlet nozzle
Prerequisite
connection)
The supporting cage has been removed (see section Supporting cage)
Removal
Removing the inlet nozzle

1.
On the supporting cage, splay the lengthways wires apart right and left
of the split using the mounting lever
Figure 20:
1
2
2.
3
Installation
Removing the inlet nozzle
Inlet nozzle
Supporting cage
Mounting lever
Pull inlet nozzle upwards out of the supporting cage

The inlet nozzle has now been removed
Installing the inlet nozzle

1.
On the supporting cage, splay the lengthways wires apart right and left
of the split using the mounting lever
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
69
Overhauling
Inlet nozzle
Figure 21:
1
2
Inlet nozzle
Supporting cage
Mounting lever
Push inlet nozzle into the supporting cage from above
3.
Stop splaying the lengthways wires apart and remove the mounting
lever
70
2.
Figure 22:
Concluding tasks
Installing the inlet nozzle (example illustration)
Inlet nozzle installed (example illustration)
Upper ring of supporting cage is located in the groove of the inlet

nozzle
Inlet nozzle has been installed
1.
1.
Install the supporting cage (see Supporting cage section)

2.
Close the cover door (see section Opening and closing the cover
door)
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Overhauling
Fastening the inlet nozzle
7.7
Prerequisite
connection)
Removal
Release the inlet nozzle fastening
Figure 23:
Inlet nozzle fastening
1 Wing nut
2 Tension bar
3 Inlet nozzle
4 Star-shaped tension bar

5 Bag base
1.
Undo the wing nuts
2.
Rotate the star-shaped tension bars by 45.
3.
Turn or move the tension bars so that they are no longer lying on the
inlet nozzles
The inlet nozzle fastening is now released
3
Installation
Mount the inlet nozzle fastening
Prerequisites
The filter bag has been installed (see section Filter bag)
The supporting cage has been installed (see section Supporting cage)
The inlet nozzle has been installed (see section Inlet nozzle)
1.
Rotate the star-shaped tension bars by 45
2.
Move tension bar to original position
3.
Tighten the wing nuts

The inlet nozzle fastening has been mounted
3
Concluding tasks
1.
2.
Close the cover door (see section Opening and closing the cover
door)
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
71
Overhauling
72
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Overhauling
Valve chamber
7.8
Valve chamber
Introduction
The valve block, the diaphragm valves and the pilot boxes / pilot valves are
situated in the valve chamber. The latter is closed with a cover plate.
Execution
The following steps must be performed when working on these parts:
WARNING
Closure of the valve chamber's cover plate
Crushing of limbs
Open the valve chamber's cover plate more than 90
1.
Open the valve chamber's cover plate

Opening angle of more than 90
The valve chambers cover plate is opened and secured
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
73
Overhauling
Valve chamber
74
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Overhauling
Diaphragm valve
7.9
Diaphragm valve
Figure 24:
1
2
3
4
Valve block with diaphragm valve
Screw
Connection, compressed air hose
Diaphragm valve cap
Valve block
5
6
7
Membrane
Connection, valve tube nipple
Diaphragm valve housing
WARNING
Danger due to sudden release of pressurised parts or due to being
blasted with compressed air
Physical injuries
Wear protective equipment.
Depressurise valve block before performing work on diaphragm valve
Ensure pressurised parts are connected securely
Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be met when working on the valve block's
diaphragm valves:
The shut-off valve (2) is closed.
The valve block has been depressurised by several cleaning cycles.
Membranes
Replacing membranes
1.
Loosen the screws (1)
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
75
Overhauling
Diaphragm valve
2.
Remove cap (3)
3.
Remove the membrane (5)
4.
The membrane is now removed
5.
Attach a new membrane
6.
Put the cap on
7.
Insert screws
Torque setting 20 Nm
The membrane has now been replaced.
76
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Overhauling
Pilot valves
7.10
Pilot valves
General
The pilot valves are istalled in the pilot-boxes.
NOTE
The seal must sit on the holder.
The reliable function of the pilot valves is ensured only if original spare parts
are used.
Figure 25:
Pilot valve
1 Valve
2 Coil
3 Pilot box housing/holder
4 Seal
Removal and
installation the
pilot valves
5 Nut
6 Hose
7 Coil connection
Replacing the pilot valve

1.
Pull off the hose (6) from the push-on connector by pushing back the
unlocking.
2.
Undo the fastening nut (5) and remove the whole valve (1) upwards.
3 The pilot valve is now removed.
3.
Insert the new valve (1) and screw it tight with the fastening nut (5).
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
77
Overhauling
Pilot valves
78
The pilot valve has now been replaced
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Overhauling
Inspection cover
7.11
Inspection cover
General
If the inspection cover no longer seals on closing, repairs need to be made.
Prerequisites
The inspection cover is open.
7.11.1
Inspection cover seal
Figure 26:
1
Implementation
Seal for inspection cover
Seal
Dust collection area wall
Replace old seal with a new one

1.
Remove inspection cover seal (1) in its entirety
2.
Glue new seal (1) with silcone around the edge of the opening in the
dust collection area wall (2)
Cut off the end so it fits exactly
Inspection cover seal has now been replaced
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
79
Overhauling
Inspection cover
80
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Disassembly and disposal
General
8.1
General
Correct procedure
Filters and their components that have reached the end of their life circle due
to e.g. wear, corrosion, mechanical stress or fatigue must be dismantled and
disposed of professionally and correctly.
Responsibility
The owner and operator are responsible for disassembly and disposal of
components.
8.2
Disassembly
CAUTION
Live components
Death or serious injury from electric shock on contact
Work on live parts such as disconnecting a fan from its electrical connections may only be performed by specialist electricians.
CAUTION
Heavy components
Collapsing and falling components may lead to serious injuries
Use lifting gear
Secure heavy components before and during disassembly
Prerequisites
Before disassembly, the following prerequisites must be fulfilled:
All supply lines and all disposal lines for the component to be disposed
of have been disconnected
The component to be disposed is disconnected from any adjacent components.
8.2.1
Residual dust
Environmental
protection
Remove any toxic or environmentally harmful dust residue from the inside of
filters.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
81
Disassembly
8.2.2
Gas springs on cover door
Prerequisites
The cover door is open.
CAUTION
Cover door swinging shut
Death or severe bodily injury may occur if the cover door swings shut
Secure the cover door against swinging shut during work on the gas
spring too
Removal
Removing the gas spring

1.
Release the gas spring's screw connection at the cover door
2.
Release the folding spring bolt on the lower end of the gas spring
3.
Remove the gas spring

The gas spring has now been removed.
3
Gas springs
Depressurise gas springs and drain oil
Figure 27:
1
1.
Piston rod
Gas spring (schematic diagram)

2
Piston
Clamp piston in the vice between 2 prisms without deforming it

L dimension approx. 30 mm
2.
Slowly saw open piston with a hand saw or drill it open

(approx. 2.5 mm bit)
Cease procedure as soon as hissing noises become audible.
The leaking nitrogen is a natural component of air and may escape into the
environment without any problems.
82
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Disposal
WARNING
Flying chippings, oil splashes
Eye injuries due to chippings
Pollution due to oil
Environmental harm due to leaking oil
Cover up work area
Collect any leaking oil
3 The gas spring is depressurised once the piston rod can be moved
freely by hand.
3.
Saw open the gas spring completely
4.
Pour out the oil and collect this

3 The oil has been removed from the gas spring.
The gas spring has been depressurised and the oil has been removed
from the gas spring.
8.3
Disposal
Regulations
National and regional laws and guidelines must be observed for disposal.
8.3.1
Material groups
Separating materials
Materials must be sorted according to material group (stainless steel, steel,

aluminium, plastic, fibreglass plates, polyurethane, electronic components,
etc.) and taken to the corresponding collection points.
Filter media
Filter media covered with toxic or environmentally harmful dust may be

classed as special waste and can be disposed of according to the specifications for dust.
8.3.2
Disposing of operating resources
NOTE
Improper disposal of operating resources
Environmental damage
Consult the manufacturer's instructions on correct disposal
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
83
Disposal
Environmental
protection
Improper disposal of operating resources can lead to environmental damage.

The operating resources contained at the time of disposal must be disposed
of according to the relevant safety data sheets and the relevant manufacturer
instructions.
8.3.3
Additionally purchased assemblies
Third-party documentation
When disposing of assemblies that have not been manufactured by IntensivFilter, the relevant instructions in the third-party documentation should be
observed.
8.3.4
Notifying authorities and manufacturers
Feedback
Notify responsible waste disposal authorities and other bodies of any disposals.
Please notify the manufacturer (Intensiv-Filter) about any disposals.
E-mail: linda.martin@intensiv-filter.com
84
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Appendix A
Spare parts
Appendix A
9.1
Spare parts
9.1.1
Spare part storage
Recommendation
In order to ensure constant operational readiness and correct overhauling of

the sleeve row filters, it is recommended to build up a supply of spare parts
and wearing parts.
9.1.2
Ordering spare parts
General
Spare parts are generally ordered using the spare parts list.
Note on ordering
Due to the variety and special application of the sleeve row filters, not all
spare parts and wearing parts can be kept in stock in all quantities. For this
reason, we stress the importance of keeping an anticipatory stock (reserve).
Specifications for
the spare parts list
The following information is required:
Spare parts lists
Commission no.
Machine no.
Filter type
Spare part name
Spare part no.
Number of parts required
Shipping address
(including inventory no., receiving person and installation site)
Delivery date
Filter
Rotary valve
Gear
Motor
Fan
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
85
Appendix A
Additional information
9.2
Additional information
This operating instructions (BA) has appendices containing documentation
for the following units.
Filter
Valve block
Compressed air maintenance unit
Control unit
Dust discharge
systems
Rotary valve
Gear
Motor
Proximity switch
Components
Fan
Motor
86
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Notes
Tel. +49 2052 910-0 . Fax +49 2052 910-248
Vokuhlstrae 63
Intensiv-Filter GmbH & Co. KG

Vokuhlstrae 63 42555 Velbert-Langenberg
Deutschland / Germany
Tel. +49 2052 910-0 Fax +49 2052 910-248
if@intensiv-filter.com www.intensiv-filter.com
.
.
Technical changes reserved

Intensiv-Filter14148 A03 001 en-GB
Row filter
IF-PJS-SR-030-01-04375-S-NNS-S
Vokuhlstrae 63

INTENSIV-Filter
GmbH&Co KG
Kunde:
Customer: Loesche GmbH
Cliente:
INTENSIV-Schlauch-Reihenfilter Typ:
INTENSIV-Sleeve-Series-Filter Type: IF-PJS-SR-030-01-04375-S-NNS-S
INTENSIV-Filtro de mangas tipo:
EL 111.01 D_E_F Ersatzteilzeichnung.xls, Formblatt
D-42555 Velbert
TEL.: 0049 2052/910-0
FAX: 0049 2052/910-248
ERSATZTEILZEICHNUNG
SPARE PARTS DRAWING
DIBUJO DE REPUESTO
Auftrags-Nr.:
Order-No.:
14148
N pedido:
DATUM
DATED
DATE
Machinen Nr.:
Machinery-No.:
N mquinas:
14.02.2012
34436
Blatt 1 von 3
Sheet 1 of 3
Page 1 de 3
INTENSIV-Filter
GmbH&Co KG
Kunde:
Cliente:
D-42555 Velbert
TEL.: 0049 2052/910-0
FAX: 0049 2052/910-248
ERSATZTEILZEICHNUNG
SPARE PARTS DRAWING
DIBUJO DE REPUESTO
DATUM
DATED
DATE
Machinen Nr.:
Machinery-No.:
N mquinas:
Auftrags-Nr.:
Order-No.:
14148
N pedido:
Blatt 2 von 3
Sheet 2 of 3
Page 2 de 3
14.02.2012
34436
12
15
14
INTENSIV-Filter
GmbH&Co KG
Kunde:
Cliente:
D-42555 Velbert
TEL.: 0049 2052/910-0
FAX: 0049 2052/910-248
ERSATZTEILZEICHNUNG
SPARE PARTS DRAWING
DIBUJO DE REPUESTO
Auftrags-Nr.:
Order-No.:
14148
N pedido:
DATUM
DATED
DATE
Machinen Nr.:
Machinery-No.:
N mquinas:
Blatt 3 von 3
Sheet 3 of 3
Page 3 de 3
14.02.2012
34436
16,17,18
36
INTENSIV-Filter
GmbH&Co KG
D-42555 Velbert
TEL.: 0049 2052/910-0
FAX: 0049 2052/910-248
ERSATZTEILLISTE
SPARE PARTS LIST
LISTA DE PIEZAS DE REPUESTO
Kunde:
Cliente:
Schlauch-Reihenfilter Typ:
Auftrags-Nr.:
INTENSIV-Sleeve-Series-Filter Type: IF-PJS-SR-030-01-04375-S-NNS-S Order-No.: 14148
N pedido:
NR.
ERSATZTEIL NR.
DESIGNATION
NO.
SPARE PART NO.
DESIGNATION
NO.
Designacin
72873
DATUM
DATED
Blatt 1 von 3
Sheet 1 of 3
Page 1 de 3
14.02.2012
DATE
Maschinen-Nr.:
Machinery-No.:
N mquinas:
EINGEBAUT
INSTALLED
34436
BEMERKUNG
DESIGNATION
Cantidad
Einlaufdse
Inlet nozzle
Tobera de entrada
30
148x95x150
1006077
Spannstern, 4 armig
Tension bar, 4 arms

Estrella tensora 4 brazos
10
3x105x105
1006306
Spannstern, 2 armig
Tension bar, 2 arms

Estrella tensora 2 brazos
11
10x46x78
50469
Flgelmutter DIN 315
Spezial nut
Tuerca de mariposa
21
M 8-5-A2K
1009335
Sttzkorb mit Boden
Supporting cage with bottom

Jaula de soporte
30
123x2163
1009334
Sttzkorb ohne Boden
Supporting cage without bottom

Jaula de soporte
30
123x2200
1009337
Zwischenring
Intermediate ring
Anillo intermedio
30
124x32
8*
2000972
Schlauch
Bag
Manguera filtrante
30
ProTex PES
9*
51480
O-Ring
O-ring
junta trica
47x3, Viton
10
1005428
Dsenrohr
Jet tube
fila de injectores
48,3; PJS-030
Ersatzteilliste.XLS, Formblatt
INTENSIV-Filter
GmbH&Co KG
D-42555 Velbert
TEL.: 0049 2052/910-0
FAX: 0049 2052/910-248
ERSATZTEILLISTE
SPARE PARTS LIST
Kunde:
Cliente:
Auftrags-Nr.:
N pedido:
NR.
ERSATZTEIL NR.
DESIGNATION
NO.
SPARE PART NO.
DESIGNATION
NO.
Designacin
DATUM
DATED
Blatt 2 von 3
Sheet 2 of 3
Page 2 de 3
14.02.2012
DATE
Maschinen-Nr.:
Machinery-No.:
N mquinas:
EINGEBAUT
INSTALLED
34436
BEMERKUNG
DESIGNATION
Cantidad
11*
51513
Dichtung
Sealing
junta
50x70x2
12*
54239
Dichtung
Sealing
junta
5,05 m
13
72864
Membranventil
Diaphragm valve
valvula de membrana
DN 1 1/2"
14*
77284
Membrane
Diaphragm
valvula de membrana
1/4", VITON
15
2001168
Steuergert mit eingebauten

Pilotventilen
Control unit
modulo de mando electrnio
RM-BV12-6 DP
16
88063
Wartungseinheit
Air set
unidad de mantenimiento
1/2", B74G-4GK-AP3-RMN
17
88178
Verschleiteilsatz
Set of part subject to wear

Conjunto de piezas de desgaste
1/2", 4383-700
18
88179
Filterelement
Filter element
1/2", 4338-05, 40m
24 V
20 x 20 > 100C
elemento filtrante
26
2000735
Magnetventil
Solenoid valve
vlvula magntica
INTENSIV-Filter
GmbH&Co KG
D-42555 Velbert
TEL.: 0049 2052/910-0
FAX: 0049 2052/910-248
ERSATZTEILLISTE
SPARE PARTS LIST
Kunde:
Cliente:
Auftrags-Nr.:
N pedido:
NR.
ERSATZTEIL NR.
DESIGNATION
NO.
SPARE PART NO.
DESIGNATION
NO.
Designacin
35
57280
36
1007295
DATED
Blatt 3 von 3
Sheet 3 of 3
Page 3 de 3
14.02.2012
DATE
Maschinen-Nr.:
Machinery-No.:
N mquinas:
EINGEBAUT
INSTALLED
34436
BEMERKUNG
DESIGNATION
Cantidad
U-Rohrmanometer
U-tube manometer
manmetro en tubo U
1.500-0-1.500 PA
Gasfeder
Gas spring
resorte de gas
10-23-230-1-1000-355-585-A-WG
* Verschleiteil
* Part subject to wear
*Piezas de desgaste
DATUM
Notes
Tel. +49 2052 910-0 . Fax +49 2052 910-248
Vokuhlstrae 63

Tel. +49 2052 910-0 Fax +49 2052 910-248
.
.

Rotary valve
ZS-F 190/5
Vokuhlstrae 63

Spare parts list
Item
Piece
Denomination
EDV-No.
Weight
[kg]
[Piece]
Remark
rotary valve wheel
76950
16
RD189,5xRD45x276,5
shaft for rotary valve
76951
4,2
RD45x348
bearing
76949
0,390
6208-2RS1
shaft seal
76948
0,035
B2FUD_ 45x 65x10-72

NBR 902
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Part
subject
to wear
29
Spare parts list
30
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Notes
Tel. +49 2052 910-0 . Fax +49 2052 910-248
Vokuhlstrae 63

Tel. +49 2052 910-0 Fax +49 2052 910-248
.
.

Parts List
01 264 09 97
EN
Page 1 / 3
EG
03.08.2011
2-stage
3-stage
Helical gear unit

RF37
When ordering spare parts always quote nameplate data with serial number and designation with part number!
Mount-on gear units have motors, variable speed gear units or special input shaft assemblies mounted on the drive end. For parts see
appropriate parts list.
Copyright reserved! All rights reserved according to DIN ISO 16016.
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Postfach 3023. D-76642 Bruchsal Tel. (07251) 75-0. Fax (07251) 75-1970. http://www.sew.de
Parts List
01 264 09 97
Helical gear unit

RF37
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
9
9
Description
Pinion
Gear
Pinion shaft
Gear
Pinion shaft
Gear
Output shaft
Output shaft
Output Shaft (inch)
Key
Key
Key (inch)
Oil seal
Oil seal
10
10
Oil seal
Oil seal
11
14
14
16
16
16
16
17
19
20
20
22
23
24
25
29
31
32
33
34
35
37
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
45
47
59
Deep groove ball bearing

Machine screw
Hex head screw
Output Flange
Output Flange
Output Flange
Output Flange
Spacer tube
Key
Breather valve
Breather valve
Gear Housing
Supporting disc
Eyebolt
Sealing compound
Key
Spacer tube
Circlip
Cylindrical roller bearing
Circlip
Circlip
Circlip
Sealing compound
Circlip
Key
Circlip
Screw plug
Additional specifications
SEW standard label
EN
Page 2 / 3
EG
03.08.2011
Part No.
06413900
00452548
06413919
00100226
13228188
08069212
00106569
0017565X
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
00106224
00174882
1
1
00104965
00110450
00110256
06413838
00438073
06413854
06413870
06413927
00115991
00130303
00136239
06413382
00124036
01675966
00117374
09102558
00114839
06413935
00102695
13241265
00102652
00105058
13295128
00103152
00103152
09102558
00130087
00104744
00134899
00104744
00130087
0011426X
1
6
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
stainless; ASEPTICplus
25x50 mm
25x50 mm
1,000x1,97 in.
DIN6885-1 A8x7x40 +C
DIN6885-1 A8x7x40 Niro
W4190 B1/4x1/4x1-5/16 +C
DIN AS35x47x7-NBR
W AS35x47x7-FKM
optional oil seal in FKM (Viton); ATEX

model according to category II2G, II2D,
II3G, II3D; ASEPTICplus
Double sealing as an option
DIN A35x47x7-NBR
W A35x47x7-FKM
optional oil seal in FKM (Viton); Double
sealing as an option; ATEX model
according to category II2G, II2D, II3G, II3D;
ASEPTICplus
6206-Z
for flange 120 mm, 140 mm
DIN6912 M8x16-8.8-A2F
for flange 160 mm, 200 mm
ISO4017 M8x20-8.8-A2F
120 mm
140 mm
160 mm
200 mm
30x38x32 mm
DIN6885-1 B8x7x20 55HRC
W4087 M10x1-CuZn-HEI
W4087 M10x1-Niro-HEI
W4140 S25x33x2-FS
6005
For i 7,97 to 134,82
Only for mounting positions M2, MX
DIN6885-1 B5x5x10 55HRC

17x22x12,5 mm
DIN471 17x1-FS
F554185.01-NUP-T
DIN471 12x1-FS
6301
6301-Z
DIN472 37x1,5-FS
DIN472 37x1,5-FS
DIN472 26x1,2-FS
6000
DIN6885-1 B4x4x8 55HRC
6000
DIN472 26x1,2-FS
W4085 M10x1-St-ADC3K
* Gearing parts have embossed part numbers. These must always be quoted!
X) if required
X)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
X)
1
1
1
1
1
5
Parts List
01 264 09 97
Helical gear unit

RF37
No.
61
61
81
88
100
101
102
131
181
515
516
517
521
522
523
530
531
Description
Circlip
Circlip
O-ring
Circlip
Gearcase cover
Hex head screw
Gasket
Closing cap
Closing cap
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
2-stage
3-stage
SEW standard label

DIN471 16x1-FS
DIN471 14x1-FS
W4283 58x2-NBR70
DIN471 25x1,2-FS
ISO4017 M6x12-8.8-A2F
2-stage
2-stage
W4300 1-37x7
W4300 1-28x7
DIN988 19x26x0,1-St
DIN988 19x26x0,3-St
DIN988 19x26x0,5-St
DIN988 25x35x0,1-St
DIN988 25x35x0,3-St
DIN988 25x35x0,5-St
DIN988 16x22x0,1-St
DIN988 16x22x0,3-St
EN
Page 3 / 3
EG
03.08.2011
Part No.
00102687
00102660
00108537
00102741
06413951
00110221
0641396X
00124966
00106887
00113301
00113433
00104140
00103691
00103934
00104167
00123439
00123447
X) if required
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
6
1
1
1
X)
X)
X)
X)
X)
X)
X)
X)
Parts List
08 114 07 05
AC motor
DR.71S+M/FG/FM/2W/C/AL/LN/Z
Gear unit version
EN
Page 1 / 3
EM
13.07.2011
a) not necessary with W20/W30/R07/R17

b) not necessary with W20/W30
Refer to spare parts list for parts of the bed plate kit 08832__10
Parts List
08 114 07 05
AC motor
Gear unit version
No.
1
2
2
3
3
4
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
9
9
9
10
11
12
13
13
16
22
30
30
32
35
35
35
36
36
36
41
42
42
44
100
100
100
100
100
100
103
103
103
103
103
103
106
106
107
108
109
Description
Rotor
Snap ring
Snap ring
Key
Key
Key
Flange
Flange
Flange
Flange
Flange
Flange
Flange
Screw plug
Screw plug
Screw plug
Circlip
Circlip
Machine screw
Machine screw
Stator
Hex head screw
Oil seal
Oil seal
Circlip
Fan Guard
Fan Guard
Fan Guard
Fan
Aluminum fan
High Inert.Flywheel
Equalizing ring
B bearing end shield
B bearing end shield
Hexagon nut
Hexagon nut
Hexagon nut
Hexagon nut
Hexagon nut
Hexagon nut
Stud
Stud
Stud
Stud
Stud
Stud
Oil seal
Oil seal
Oel finger
Nameplate
Grooved Pin
SEW standard label
EN
Page 2 / 3
EM
13.07.2011
Part No.
*
for pinion shaft end 10 b)
for pinion shaft end 12 b)
for pinion shaft end 10
for pinion shaft end 12
2W
AL; a)
GG; a)
AL; a)
GG; a)
a)
a)
a)
for flange FG100, FG130 a)
for flange FG265 a)
a)
a)
a)
DR.71S
DR.71M
W4173 SW10x1-FS
W4173 SW11x1-FS
DIN6885-1 A2x2x12 +C
DIN6885-1 A3x3x14 +C
DIN6885-1 A4x4x16 +C
FG100 D120
FG100 D120
FG130 D160
FG130 D160
FG165 D200
FG215 D250
FG265 D300
W4085 M10x1-St-ADC3K
W4085 M12x1,5-St-ADC3K
W4085 M22x1,5-St-ADC3K
DIN983 17x1-FS
6303-2Z-C3-K08
DIN472 47x1,75-FS
W4018 M5x131-6.8-ADB3
W4018 M5x156-6.8-ADB3
00115193
00115207
00100005
00100692
00135232
01844768
13613014
01844784
13613030
13615106
13612662
13615122
0011426X
00114308
00114316
0011460X
13236563
00103187
13237160
13237179
with Item no. 998

with Item no. 998; for 2-pole version
EN1665 M5x10-8.8-A2F
W BAOFSF16x28x6/7-NBR
W BAOFSF16x28x6/7-FKM
DIN471 15x1-FS
6203-2Z-C3-K08
EN1661 M6-8-A2F
ISO4032 M6-8-St-A2F
EN1661 M8-8-A2F
ISO4032 M8-8-St-A2F
ISO4032 M10-8-St-A2F
ISO4032 M12-8-St-A2F
DIN939 M6x18-8.8-A2F
W4061 M6x16-8.8-A2F
DIN939 M8x20-8.8-A2F
DIN835 M8x20-8.8-A2F-MV
DIN939 M10x22-8.8-A2F
DIN939 M12x30-8.8-A2F
W A17x30x7-NBR
W A17x30x7-FKM-FKO
W4291 17-A2F
13237616
13262041
13262351
00102679
13610503
13614487
13611690
13611550
13611968
13611593
00115894
13626132
13611615
13236601
19052677
00101982
13309722
00101990
00102008
00102016
00134074
00131687
00100749
13262572
00118451
00100811
00106062
13225820
00116602
ISO8746 2x4-A-Niro
00107646
2W
LN
AL
Z
D=101
D=112
J=0,00213 kgm
W4253 33x39,1x0,5
AL
GG, only for Production in Brazil
for flange FG100 AL a)
for flange FG100 GG a)
for flange FG130 AL a)
for flange FG130 GG a)
for flange FG165 a)
for flange FG100 a)
for flange FG100 gear unit size 27, W37
for flange FG130 a)
for flange FG130 gear unit size W47
for flange FG165 a)
a)
a) for 2-pole version
a)
* order-dependently
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
2
Parts List
08 114 07 05
AC motor
Gear unit version
No.
111
112
112
113
115
116
117
118
119
123
129
129
131
132
134
156
262
392
611
705
706
707
998
1234
1234
1234
Description
Gasket for lower part
Terminal box lower part
Terminal box lower part
Screw
Terminal Block
Terminal clip
Screw
Lock washer
Screw
Screw
Screw plug
Screw plug
Gasket for cover
Terminal Box Cover
Screw plug
Reference Plate
Terminal clip
Gasket
Drain hole plug
Protection canopy
Distance support
Pan head screw
Synthetic grease
Bed plate kit
Bed plate kit
Bed plate kit
EN
Page 3 / 3
EM
13.07.2011
SEW standard label
parts included in stator complete

parts included in stator complete
1x M25x1,5 ; 1x M16x1,5
2x NPT 1/2"-14
W4041 CE-M5x16-TX-A2F-GM1
W4720 KTM4-4.08-AS-KB-
for NPT thread 1/2"
W4041 DE-S-M5x16-A2F-GM1
W4146 5-A2F
W4041 CE-M5x16-TX-SZ-A2F-GM1
W4041 DE-S-M5x16-A2F-GM1
W4411 M25x1,5-PA6.6GF30W4411 M20x1,5-PA6.6GF30-
for TF version
2 pole
DH
C
C
C
for Item no. 30
DR.71S FM
DR.71M FM
DR.71M FM80M
W4411 M16x1,5-PA6.6GF30W4499 - TF
W4036 REMFORM 6,0x35-TX-VZ

Klber Petamo GHY133N
H=71; AxB=112x90
H=71; AxB=112x90
H=80; AxB=125x100
Part No.
01355635
13610570
13612018
00130591
13226193
00104426
13237136
00118206
00130591
13237136
00131385
13256300
01355627
13611763
00131334
01366815
01823183
13740369
13618865
13611623
13618598
13262599
04963458
17534488
17534585
17534682
* order-dependently
X) if required
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
4
4
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
*
1
4
4
X)
1
1
1
S
N
O
PJS
en-GB
Valve block
Vokuhlstrae 63

Operating manual
General .....................................................................3
Design characteristics ............................................4
General safety information ....................................5
Commissioning .......................................................6
Mode of operation ...................................................7
Operational safety and maintenance ....................8
Installation ...............................................................9
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating manual
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating manual
General
General
Rentention of documents
You must take great care to retain the operating manual and the declaration
of conformity supplied with it.
The positions described here only refer to the essential requirements for a
pressure vessel. Notes applying to all equipment are treated in a separate
operating manual for the filtering installation.
Labelling according to DGRL
The pressure vessel is labelled by the plate on the vessel and by the CE
label.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating manual
Design characteristics
Design characteristics
Component: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Valve block
Design: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30l; 6 circuit points 1
Type of fluid:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Air or nitrogen
Type of strain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Cyclical
Permitted number of stress cycles: . 2 million (rated for endurance strength)
Inner pressure deviation range: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 bar
Time period for decrease of pressure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ca. 0.1 s
Content: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 liter
Permissible operating overpressure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 bar
Calculated overpressure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 bar
Permissible operating temperature: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -10/+50C
Calculated temperature: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50C
Capacity usage of the permitted calculated tension: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85%
Material: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0570/1.0038
Wall thickness allowance c1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . permitted minus tolerance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . accordance with the DIN ormanufacturer's specifications
Wear and tear allowance c2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 mm
Test overpressure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 bar
Testing medium:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . air
The effects of earthquakes, wind, snow and frost on the vessel were not
taken into consideration in the design of the vessel.
The effects of external fire or similar sources of heat were not taken into consideration in the design of the vessel.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating manual
General safety information
General safety information

The vessel is only permitted for use in line with the operating conditions
stated on the vessel label.
NOTE
It is not permissible to weld additional components to the vessel or to otherwise modify vessel construction.
The operator must ensure that the vessel is used properly.

The operator must take the necessary measures to ensure regulation of the
temperature and pressure, so that they neither exceed nor fall short of the
permitted operating parameters.
In the case of danger to persons from excessive surface temperatures, the
operator must attach a suitable warning notice near the filter, or use heat
installation.
Before removing components which are subject to pressure, the vessel must
first be depressurised.
Safety devices
You must ensure that the installation conditions are adhered to by applying
suitable safety devices, regulations or procedures.
Notes on dangers
of incorrect operation
Failure to observe these instructions, particularly the safety instructions, can

lead to extensive damage or defects, may endanger persons or may
adversely affect the functioning. In the case of contravention, any claims
relating to the guarantee or to liability are excluded.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating manual
Commissioning
Commissioning
Personell
Before commissioning, a competent person must confirm that the vessel is

assembled properly and that the safety devices have been installed.
Commissioning must be undertaken by competent personnel.
Inspections
Subject the vessel to a controlled, continuous increase in pressure. Check

the flange connection for impermeability.
Tighten the screw connections once they have been positioned.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating manual
Mode of operation
Mode of operation
The vessel is designed for a cyclic pressure load in accordance with the technical data.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating manual
Operational safety and maintenance
Operational safety and maintenance
Recurring checks
For recurring checks, please adhere to the regulations which apply in the
country of operation.
It is recommended, however, that external checks are carried out at least
every 2 years and that internal checks are carried out every 5 years, whereby
the condition of the walls and weld seams which are subject to pressure
should be checked.
The competent operator may extend or shorten the intervals at which checks
are carried out in accordance with the prevailing conditions and operational
experience.
Industrial safetyand maintenance

work
Repairs and maintenance work on components which are subject to pressure

may only be carried out by competent personnel, and then only with the unit
depressurised.
Only suitable spare parts may be used, in accordance with the separate operating manual for the INTENSIV filter.
Leaks caused by loose screw connections or other causes can be detected
by the noisy release of pressurised fluid and by large decreases of pressure
in the system. The operator must initiate repair and maintenance measures.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating manual
Installation
Installation
The assembly and transportation of the vessel may only be carried out by
suitably trained personnel. During assembly and transportation (including lifting), the vessel may only be subject to its own weight. In addition, the regulations which apply in these cases must be observed.
Furnish the valve block with valves which are suitable for the maximum operating pressure.
The fastening of the vessel is carried out with threaded or flange connections
between the valve tubes and the nozzle pipe connection.
Screw connections are to be tightened with the corresponding torque.
Connections
onside
Connections on site must be established without force or tension.

The introduction of torques via the valve tubes caused by the vessel's own
weight is permissible.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating manual
Installation
10
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Notes
Tel. +49 2052 910-0 . Fax +49 2052 910-248
Vokuhlstrae 63

Tel. +49 2052 910-0 Fax +49 2052 910-248
.
.

Back to Selector Page
B74G
EXCELON 74
Filter/Regulator
3/8", 1/2", 3/4" Port Sizes
EXCELON design allows in-line or modular
installation
Quick release bayonet bowl
Highly visible, prismatic liquid level indicator lens
Full flow gauge ports
Balanced valve design minimizes effect of variation in
the inlet pressure on the outlet pressure
Modular installations with EXCELON 72, 73, and 74
series can be made to suit particular applications
Technical Data
Fluid: Compressed air
Maximum pressure:
Transparent bowl: 10 bar (150 psig)
Metal bowl: 17 bar (250 psig)
Operating temperature*:
Transparent bowl: -20 to 50C (0 to 125F)
Metal bowl: -20 to 80C (0 to 175F)
* Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at temperatures below +2C
(+35F).
Particle removal: 5, 25 or 40 m filter element

Air quality: Within ISO 8573-1, Class 3 and Class 5 (particulates)
Typical flow with 10 bar (150 psig) inlet pressure, 6,3 (90 psig) set
pressure and a droop of 1 bar (15 psig) from set:
100 dm3/s (212 scfm)
Manual drain connection: 1/8"
Automatic drain connection: 1/8"
Automatic drain operating conditions (float operated):
Bowl pressure required to close drain: Greater than 0,3 bar
(5 psig)
Bowl pressure required to open drain: Less than 0,2 bar (3 psig)
Minimum air flow required to close drain: 1 dm3/s (2 scfm)
Manual operation: Depress pin inside drain outlet to drain bowl
Nominal bowl size: 0,2 litre (7 fluid ounce)
Gauge ports:
14 PTF with PTF main ports
Rc14 with ISO Rc main ports
Rc18 with ISO G main ports
4/98
Materials:
Body: Aluminum
Bonnet: Aluminum
Valve: Brass
Bowl:
Transparent: Polycarbonate with steel
bowl guard
Metal: Aluminum
Metal bowl liquid level indicator lens:
Transparent nylon
Element: Sintered plastic
Elastomers: Neoprene and Nitrile
Ordering Information
See Ordering Information on the following
pages.
ISO Symbols
Automatic Drain, Relieving
Manual Drain, Relieving
Automatic Drain, Non Relieving
Manual Drain, Non Relieving
Our policy is one of continuous research and development.

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
N/AL.8.200.300.01
B74G
Typical Performance Characteristics

FLOW CHARACTERISTICS
PORT SIZE: 1/2", ELEMENT: 40 m

INLET PRESSURE: 10 bar g (150 psig)
RANGE: 0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig)
100
OUTLET PRESSURE
OUTLET PRESSURE
100
6
80
60
40
6
80
60
40
20
PORT SIZE: 1/2", ELEMENT: 40 m

INLET PRESSURE: 7 bar g (100 psig)
RANGE: 0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig)
bar g
psig
bar g
psig
FLOW CHARACTERISTICS
20
0
0
0
20
40
40
80
60
120
80
160
100
200
dm3/s
scfm
20
40
40
60
80
AIR FLOW
120
80
160
100
dm3/s
200
scfm
AIR FLOW
Ordering Information. Models listed include ISO G parallel threads, knob adjustment, automatic drain, metal bowl with liquid level
indicator, 40 m element, relieving diaphragm and 0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig) outlet pressure adjustment range*.
Main Port Size

G3/8
G1/2
G3/4
Model Number
B74G-3GK-AD3-RMN
B74G-4GK-AD3-RMN
B74G-6GK-AD3-RMN
Flow dm3/s (scfm)

77 (163)
100 (212)
100 (212)
Weight kg (lb)
1,19 (2.62)
1,17 (2.59)
1,16 (2.55)
Typical flow with 10 bar (150 psig) inlet pressure, 6,3 bar (90 psig) set pressure and a 1 bar (15 psig) droop from set.
B 7 4 G - - -
Alternative Models
Port Size
3/8"
1/2"
3/4"
Substitute
3
4
6
Threads
PTF
ISO Rc taper
ISO G parallel
Substitute
A
B
G
Adjustment
Knob
T-bar
Substitute
K
T
Drain
Automatic
Manual, 1/4 turn
Substitute
A
Q
* Outlet pressure can be adjusted to pressures in excess of, and less

than, those specified. Do not use these units to control pressures
outside of the specified ranges.
N/AL.8.200.300.02
Gauge
With
Without
Substitute
G
N
Outlet Pressure
Adjustment Range*
Substitute
0,3 to 4 bar (5 to 60 psig)
F
0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig)
M
0,7 to 17 bar (10 to 250 psig)**
S
Diaphragm
Relieving
Non relieving
Substitute
R
N
Element
5 m
25 m
40 m
Substitute
1
2
3
Bowl
Substitute
Metal with liquid level indicator
D
Transparent with guard
P
** Units with 17 bar (250 psig) outlet pressure range are available only
with the T-bar adjustment; therefore substitute T at the 7th digit and S at
the 12th position.

4/98
B74G
Accessories
Wall Mounting Bracket
Quikclamp and
Quikclamp Wall Bracket
Panel Nut
Tamper Resistant Cover

& Seal Wire
4324-50
4314-52
4348-89
4355-51
Seal Wire: 2117-01
50 mm
R1/4
Pressure Gauge Connection
R1/8
Connection
1/4 PTF
Connection
4 bar (60 psig) 18-013-266

10 bar (150 psig) 18-013-260
20 bar (300 psig) 18-013-267
18-013-011
18-013-013
18-013-014
18-013-208
18-013-209
18-013-210
Use padlock with shackle up to 8 mm (0.3") in diameter.
80 (3.15)
37 (1.45)
74 (2.89)
Panel mounting hole diameter: 52 mm (2.06")

Panel thickness: 2 to 6 mm (0.06" to 0.25")
Optional
Gauge
56 (2.20)
Dimensions mm (inches)
151 (5.95)
177 (6.95)
246 (9.69) *
127 (4.98)
43 (1.69)
161 (6.35)
230 (9.06) *
31 (1.24)
50 (2.00)
Automatic Drain
Manual Drain
* Minimum clearance to remove bowl.
4/98

N/AL.8.200.300.03
B74G
Bracket Mounting
Mounting Bracket
Quikclamp and Quikclamp Wall Bracket
Use 5 mm (3/16") screws to mount bracket to wall.
Use 6 mm (7/32") screws to mount bracket to wall
69 (2.72)
Port CL
51 (2.01)
82,5 (3.25)
101 (3.98)
Port C
L
79 (3.11)
51 (2.00)
24 (0.95)
61 (2.40)
20 (0.77)
Port C
L
6 (0.24)
25 (1.00)
4 (0.16)
50 (1.97)
5 (0.20)
37 (1.46)
Bracket Kit Reference

Item
Wall Bracket
Quikclamp and Quikclamp Wall Bracket
Part Number
4324-50
4314-52
Service Kits
Item
Service kit
Replacement elements
Liquid level lens kit
Replacement drains
Type
Relieving
Non relieving
5 m
25 m
40 m
Prismatic
Automatic (1/8 NPT outlet)
Automatic (G 1/8 outlet)
Manual quarter turn
Part Number
4383-700
4383-701
4338-04
4338-07
4338-05
4380-050
3000-10
3000-97
619-50
Service kit includes diaphragm assembly, valve assembly, valve spring,

louvre o-ring, bowl o-ring, drain seal.
Warning
These products are intended for use in industrial compressed air
systems only. Do not use these products where pressures and temperatures
can exceed those listed under Technical Data.
Before using these products with fluids other than those specified, for
non-industrial applications, life-support systems, or other applications not
within published specifications, consult Norgren.
Through misuse, age, or malfunction, components used in fluid power
systems can fail in various modes. The system designer is warned to
consider the failure modes of all component parts used in fluid power
systems and to provide adequate safeguards to prevent personal injury or
damage to equipment in the event of such failure.
System designers must provide a warning to end users in the
system instructional manual if protection against a failure mode
cannot be adequately provided.
System designers and end users are cautioned to review specific
warnings found in instruction sheets packed and shipped with these
products.
Water vapor will pass through these units and will condense into liquid
if air temperature drops in the downstream system. Install an air dryer if
water condensation could have a detrimental effect on the application.
N/AL.8.200.300.04

4/98
Documentation
RM-BV 12 DP
Filter control
Documentation RM-BV 12 DP
Table of contents
1 Safety instructions .....................................................................................................................................3
2 Device description .....................................................................................................................................3
2.1 Function in "as delivered" condition................................................................................................3
3 Design versions .........................................................................................................................................4
4 Assembly ...................................................................................................................................................5
5 Indicating and configuration elements / electrical connections .................................................................8
6 Parameter setting ....................................................................................................................................13
6.1 Parameter list................................................................................................................................14
7 Operating modes .....................................................................................................................................15
7.1 Differential pressure controlled cleaning (parameters 05, 06)......................................................15
7.2 Permanent cleaning (parameter 05).............................................................................................15
7.3 Downtime (parameters 09, 10) .....................................................................................................15
7.4 Forced cleaning (parameter 11) ...................................................................................................15
7.5 Stopping a running cleaning via the "Stop" input..........................................................................15
8 Technical specifications...........................................................................................................................16
Regulations
VDE 0160
EN 60.439 Part 500
EN 50178
2004/108/ EC
Legends
Important note
Important warning
RDN 10000416
04.10.2011
1 Safety instructions
Improper installation of the RM-BV 12 DP or associated equipment may cause the failure of the device,
serious or even fatal injuries. In addition to general safety rules for equipment in industrial electrical
installations pay particular attention to the following points:
-
The RM-BV 12 DP must only be installed by qualified persons according to the provisions of the
standards IEC 364 and DIN VDE 0105 for electrical equipment.
All applicable laws, conditions, rules and regulations governing the installation of electrical equipment
must be observed.
Equipment with protection rating IP00 without covers must only be configured by authorised expert
staff when disconnected and whilst observing the local safety and accident prevention rules.
The RM-BV 12 DP is only allowed to be operated in its specified operating range.
Switch off the supply voltage before replacing the RM-BV 12 DP or components connected to
it. Failure to do so may cause equipment damage.
2 Device description
The RM-BV 12 DP filter controller is used to control solenoid valves on filtering separators. One
RM-BV 12 DP can control up to 12 solenoid valves featuring a rated voltage of 24 VDC.
2.1 Function in "as delivered" condition
The start input for downtime cleaning (terminals 25, 26) is factory-bridged. Cleaning starts when the
filters differential pressure p has reached the "Press.thresh." value (factory setting: 10 mbar). The
solenoid valves are controlled one after the after. By cleaning the differential pressure drops after a
certain period of time. When the differential pressure has reached the value Press.thresh. minus
dP Hysteresis (factory setting: 4 mbar), i.e. the differential pressure is 10 mbar - 4 mbar = 6 mbar,
cleaning stops.
If a different function is desired or additional functions shall be activated, the parameter setting of the
"Parameterisation keys" on page 11 and section
RM-BV 12 DP must be changed. For this, refer to
6 "Parameter setting" on page 13.
RDN 10000416
04.10.2011
3 Design versions
Enclosed housing with integrated solenoid valves (refer to figure 1, left)
Enclosed housing without integrated solenoid valves (refer to figure 1, right)
on a carrier for rail mounting (refer to figure 6 on page 7)
Figure 1: Design versions with and without solenoid valves
RDN 10000416
04.10.2011
4 Assembly
Figure 2: Design versions within enclosed housings
RDN 10000416
04.10.2011
Figure 3: RM-BV 12 6V with separate valve box V-Box 6V
Figure 4: Housing assembly
RDN 10000416
04.10.2011
Figure 5: Valve numbering
Figure 6: Design version with carrier for rail mounting
Connection of the differential pressure measurement lines
Figure 7: Connection of the differential pressure measurement lines
RDN 10000416
04.10.2011
5 Indicating and configuration elements / electrical connections

Figure 8 shows the design of the RM-BV-12 board with all indicating and configuration elements and
electrical terminals. For a detailed description see the next page.
Figure 8: Design of the RM-BV-12-DP board and connection diagram
RDN 10000416
04.10.2011
Item number
in figure 8
Description
Supply voltage
There are separate controller models for the supply voltages 230 V AC / 110 V AC and
24 V DC. Before connecting the supply voltage, check whether the rated voltage of the
controller matches with the supply voltage (see nameplate).
230 / 110 VAC version
24 VDC version
Valve outputs
It is possible to connect up to 12 solenoid valves featuring a rated voltage of 24 VDC to the
terminals 1 ... 24.
Start input
The start input for downtime cleaning (terminals 25, 26) is factory-bridged. When a contact (NC)
connected to this input is opened, the set downtime cycles are started, beginning with the pulse
time. Downtime cleaning is resumed with the valve following to the last controlled valve. The
pause time during downtime can be set by the "10 DT pause" parameter.
RDN 10000416
04.10.2011
Item number
in figure 8
Description
Stop input
When a contact (NO) connected to the input (terminals 27, 28) is closed, a running cleaning
process (p-controlled cleaning, permanent cleaning and forced cleaning) is immediately stopped.
When the contact opens again, cleaning is resumed with the valve that follows to the last operated
valve. Active downtime cycles remain unaffected by the stop input.
Cleaning output
The potential-free relay output "Cleaning", terminals 29 (NO), 30 (COM) and 31 (NC), is active
during a running cleaning process (p-controlled cleaning, permanent cleaning, downtime
cleaning and forced cleaning).
Alarm output
The potential-free "Alarm" relay output, terminals 32 (NO), 33 (COM) and 34 (NC) is used for selfmonitoring of the RM-BV 12 DP. This output is energised during trouble-free operation. Following
events will cause the relay contact to drop off:
Failure of the supply voltage
For the 24 V version: supply voltage higher than 25 VAC or 30 VDC
Broken wire on one of the connected valves
Short-circuit of a valve output
LED "ON"
The LED "ON" lights when the supply voltage is applied. This LED blinks during the downtime
cleaning.
LED "Stop"
The "Stop" LED lights when the "Stop" input is energised (refer to
"Stop input").
LEDs V1 ... V12

A LED assigned to a valve output lights when the relevant output is closed.
Plug-type connectors for p module
The RM-DPC module is plugged on four 2-pin plug connectors on the base board.
LED "ON"
Lights when the supply voltage is applied.
RDN 10000416
10
04.10.2011
Item number
in figure 8
Description
LED "Service"
Blinks when the set service hours have expired.
LED "Alarm"
Blinks when one of the following alarms occurs:
p max alarm (the set "p max alarm" switch point is reached)
p pre-alarm (the set "p pre-alarm" switch point is reached)
Valve alarm (broken wire or short-circuit on the valve output indicated by a number on the
display)
On the display, clear text indicates the alarm type. The valve alarm remains stored.
With the key, you can clear (acknowledge) the alarm. The "dP max alarm" and
"dP pre-alarm" messages are not stored. They are automatically cleared when the
pressure values drops under the "p max alarm" or "p pre-alarm" switch points again.
Parameterisation keys
Parameter selection: Press
Simultaneous pressing of the key and the key longer than 3 seconds. Then, select your
desired parameter by short pressing on the keys (scroll up) or (scroll down).
Parameter value setting:
After parameter selection, by simultaneous pressing of the keys and longer than
3 seconds. Then, set your desired value by short pressing on the keys (scroll up) or
(scroll down). Then, confirm the set value by simultaneous pressing of the keys and
longer than 3 seconds. The new value is stored. You can select further parameters for setting
or checking by short pressing on the keys -or .
Returning to the "Operation" mode: Press
Simultaneous short actuation of the keys - and .
The program automatically returns to the "Operation" mode when no key has been
pressed for 1 minute.
RDN 10000416
11
04.10.2011
Item number
in figure 8
Description
Alarm output, parameterisable

The function of the "Alarm" relay output, terminals M1, M2, is set by the parameter 12 "Relay
funct." (for this, refer to
"Parameterisation keys" on page 11 and section 6 "Parameter setting
on page 13). You can choose from following functions:
Parameter setting: /dP+valve alarm factory setting
The contact opens at p alarm (switch point "p pre-alarm" or "p max alarm" reached) or at
valve alarm (broken wire or short-circuit on the valve output indicated by the number on the
display).
Parameter setting: /dP alarm
The contact only opens at p alarm (switch point "p pre-alarm" or "p max alarm" reached).
Parameter setting: dP+valve alarm
The contact closes at p alarm (switch point "p pre-alarm" or "p max alarm" reached) or at
valve alarm (broken wire or short-circuit on the valve output indicated by the number on the
display).
Parameter setting: dP alarm
The contact only closes at p alarm (switch point "p pre-alarm" or "p max alarm" reached).
4-20 mA output
4-20 mA output (4 ... 20 mA
0 ... 50 mbar), active
max. 500
RDN 10000416
12
04.10.2011
6 Parameter setting
Figure 9: Brief instructions on how to check or edit parameter values
RDN 10000416
13
04.10.2011
Parameter
6.1 Parameter list
3
4
Meaning
Factory setting
Setting range
D, GB, F, E
Acc. to order
2 - 12
10 s
5 - 99 s
100 ms
50 - 200 ms
01 01 Language
Language of display text
02 02 No. of valves
Number of valves
03 03 Interval
Pause time
04 04 Pulsetime
Pulse time of the cleaning valves
05 05 Press.thresh.
p ON
10 mbar
01, 5 - 20 mbar
06 06 dP Hysteresis
p OFF
4 mbar
0.5 - 8 mbar
07 07 dP pre-alarm
p pre-alarm switch point
0 mbar1
01, 10 - 19 mbar
08 08 dP max alarm
p-Max alarm switch point
20 mbar
01, 15 - 30 mbar
09 09 Downtime cyc.
Number of downtime cycles
0 - 11
10 10 DT pause
Pause time during downtime

and forced cycle
5s
5 - 30 s
11 11 Forced cycle
Time until start of forced cleaning
0 min1
01, 10 - 990 min
12 12 Relay funct.
Function of "Alarm" relay output,

M1, M2
/dP+valve alarm2
4 functions2
13 13 Operation hrs
Operating hour counter3
14 14 Service hrs.
Service interval4
25000 h
01, 5000 - 25000 h
mbar
mbar, Pa,
inch H2O, hPa
15
Display text
15 Maintenance
acknowledge
Acknowledgement of the service

message
16 16 dP unit
Unit of the displayed differential

pressure
17 17 Software vers
Software version
0 = function deactivated
dP+valve alarm (contact closes at p alarm and valve alarm),
dP alarm (contact only closes at p alarm),
/dP+valve alarm (contact opens at p alarm and valve alarm),
/dP alarm (contact only opens at p alarm),
The operating hour counter runs when the supply voltage is applied.
The service hour counter runs when the differential pressure p is 2 mbar or higher and the "14 Service hrs." parameter is not
set to "0".
RDN 10000416
14
04.10.2011
7 Operating modes
7.1 Differential pressure controlled cleaning (parameters 05, 06)
In "Operation" mode, the filter's current differential pressure p is displayed in the text display (row 2) of
the p module. Cleaning starts when the differential pressure has reached the value "05 Press.thresh.".
The solenoid valves are controlled one after the other using the interval set in parameter 03. By cleaning
the differential pressure drops after a certain period of time. When the differential pressure has reached
the value "05 Press.thresh." minus "06 dP Hysteresis", the current cleaning cycle is run up to the end.
Then, the cleaning process stops.
7.2 Permanent cleaning (parameter 05)

If the parameter 05 is set to "0", cleaning will take place permanently. Using the set control times for pulse
time and pause time, all connected solenoid valves are controlled one after the other starting with a
cleaning pulse. Once the last valve has been operated, the control circulation is continued with the first
valve. This happens until the supply voltage is turned off. Once the supply voltage has been turned on
again, a restart occurs as described above.
Figure 10: Permanent cleaning when the parameter 05 is set to "0"
7.3 Downtime (parameters 09, 10)

Refer to
"Start input" on page 9.
7.4 Forced cleaning (parameter 11)

To activate the forced cleaning, the parameter "05 Press.thresh." must be set to a value higher than "0".
When the filter's differential pressure p does not reach the value "Press.thresh." after expiration of the
time set under parameter "11 Forced cycle" (p-dependent cleaning was not started), a cleaning cycle is
executed.
When the "Press.thresh." value has been reached before the above time has expired (start of pdependent cleaning), the internal timer for forced cleaning initiation is restarted.
7.5 Stopping a running cleaning via the "Stop" input

Refer to
"Stop input" on page 10.
RDN 10000416
15
04.10.2011
8 Technical specifications
Item
Data
Terminals
Supply voltage
Design version 230 / 110 V AC:

230 V AC +/-10 % 50-60 Hz
Power consumption: approx. 125 mA
110 V AC +/-10 % 50-60 Hz
Power consumption: approx. 220 mA
Outputs for
solenoid valves
Design version 24 V DC:

24 V ... 30 V DC
Power consumption: approx. 1.5 A
12 short-circuit-proof outputs,
24 V DC, max. 1.9 A
Signal input
2 inputs 24 VDC, to be served potential-free
Signal outputs
2 relay outputs (changeover contact), potential-free

Max. contact rating:
250 V AC, 10 A
50 V DC, 1,5 A / 30 V DC, 10 A (ohmic)
1 relay output (configurable as NO or NC contact),
potential-free
35 (L)
37 (N)
38 (PE)
36 (L)
37 (N)
38 (PE)
35 (-)
37 (+)
1 (valve 1)
3 (valve 2)
5 (valve 3)
to
23 (valve 12)
2, 4, 6 24 (COM)
25, 26
27, 28
29, 30, 31
32, 33, 34
M1, M2
Max. contact rating:

250 V AC, 10 A
50 V DC, 1,5 A / 30 V DC, 10 A (ohmic)
Fuse
Temperature range
Weight
Installation height
Measuring range
Dimensions
1 analog output, active

0 ... 50 mbar
4 ... 20 mA
Design version 230 / 110 V AC:
T 0.8 A, 250 V, 5 x 20 mm
Design version 24 V DC:
T 2.5 A, 250 V, 5 x 20 mm
-20 C ... +60 C
within housing with
10 integrated valves:
approx. 2,700 g
on carrier:
approx. 850 g
Max. 3000 m above sea level
0 ... 50 mbar
see section 4 Assembly on page 5
M3, M4
Disclaimer
The contents of this documentation has been verified for correctness and completeness. Nevertheless, errors can not be excluded
so that we cannot guarantee the correctness of this information. Subject to alterations at any time.
RDN 10000416
16
04.10.2011
I N S T R U C T I O N S
O P E R A T I N G
Rotary valve
ZS-F 190/5
en-GB
Vokuhlstrae 63

Technical data .........................................................3
Construction features .............................................5
2.1
Constructive design ................................................................ 5
2.2
Function .................................................................................. 6
Erection of the rotary valve ....................................7
Commissioning .......................................................9
Maintenance ..........................................................11
Spare parts and customer service ......................13
6.1
Storing spare parts ............................................................... 13
6.2
Ordering spare parts ............................................................. 13
6.3
Customer service .................................................................. 13
6.4
Spare part and customer service addresses ........................ 14
Separate documentation ......................................15
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Technical data
Technical data
Operating data
Manufacturer, type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intensiv-Filter, ZS-F 190/5

Serial-no.: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34453
Weight without motor: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63,535 kg
Conveying capacity: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,1 m/h
Sealing
Rotary shaft seal type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B2FUD_ 45x 65x10-72 NBR 902
Geared motor
Manufacturer, type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SEW, RF37DRS71M4

Electrical connection values:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 V, 0,55 kW, 50 Hz
Final speed:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 1/min
Design: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IM B5
Type of protection: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP 65
Proximity switch
Manufacturer, type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turck, DBI10U-M30-AP4X2

Operating zone: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (0,81 x Sn) mm
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Technical data
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Construction features
Constructive design
Rotary valves type ZS are used on filter plants, separators, hoppers, screw
conveyors and a wide range of applications where a continuous discharge of
dust or granular material is required, at the same time providing an air seal.
2.1
Constructive design
Figure 1:
1 Housing
2 Rotary wheel
3 Shaft
4 Bearing cover
Construction design of rotary valve serie: ZS-F

5 Shaft sealing ring
6 Ball bearing
7 Geared motor
In the housing (1) is a rotary wheel (2) which has 6 blades forming segments.
The rotary wheel (2) is keyed to the shaft (3) and the bearing covers (4) bolt
to each end of the housing to form an air tight unit.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Function
2.2
Function
The dust falls into a rotary wheel segment formed by the dividing vanes in the
rotary wheel and is moved to the bottom of the valve by the rotation of the
rotary wheel, with the vanes forming a seal against the housing wall. The dust
can be discharged when the segment points downwards. As a general rule,
the valve will operate on a continuous basis. The filling level depends on the
type of dust and the rotary wheel speed.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Erection of the rotary valve

The rotary valve is fitted to filters or screw conveyors, using its mounting
flange. The mating flange must be completely smooth and flat in order to prevent tension and stress in the valve. The two flanges are sealed against each
other by means of either a flat gasket or suitable sealant.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Commissioning
Commissioning
The following items must be checked before carrying out the commissioning:
Oil level in the gear box (see the separate instructions supplied by the
manufacturer)
Ensure that there are no installation residues left in the conveyor unit or
in the valve itself.
The rotary valve is started when its motor is switched on.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Commissioning
10
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Maintenance
Maintenance
Rotary valve
The rotary valve is maintenance-free.
Gears
Gears are delivered lubricated and ready for use. For lubrication intervals
refer to the lubricating point list and manufacturer's lubricating instructions.
NOTE
Use only suitable lubricants!
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
11
Maintenance
12
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Spare parts and customer service
Storing spare parts
6.1
Storing spare parts

A stock of spare parts and parts subject-to-wear is an important precondition
for permanent operational readiness and proper repair work on the rotary
valves.
6.2
Ordering spare parts

Spare parts are generally ordered using the spare part designation.
The following information is required:
Comm. No.
Job No.
rotary valve type
spare parts designation
spare part no. (EDP no.)
required quantity
exact delivery address

(e.g. indicate exact installation site, inventory no., contact person)
delivery date
Note that due to the variety and special application of the rotary valve not all
spare parts and parts subject-to-wear can be stored in unlimited quantities.
For this reason we urgently recommend keeping an anticipatory stock.
We can only guarantee original spare parts delivered by INTENSIV-FILTER.
6.3
Customer service
Contact INTENSIV-FILTER customer service for all problems which effect
the screw conveyorsrotary valves.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
13
Spare part and customer service addresses
6.4
Spare part and customer service addresses

NOTE
Using of wrong spare parts
Safe function of rotary valve will be impared.
Using spare parts with original design.
Make sure that you have a sufficient stock of spare parts and parts subject-to-wear!
All spare parts or customer service requests can be sent to any of the
addresses listed below or directly to our main office at the following address:
INTENSIV-FILTER GmbH & Co KG
Postfach 11 03 06
D-42531 VELBERT (Langenberg)
Tel. +49 2052 910-0
Fax +49 2052 910-248
http://www.intensiv-filter.com
E-mail: if@intensiv-filter.com
14
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Separate documentation
1. Gear motor
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
15
16
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Notes
Tel. +49 2052 910-0 . Fax +49 2052 910-248
Vokuhlstrae 63

Tel. +49 2052 910-0 Fax +49 2052 910-248
.
.

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services
Assembly and Operating Instructions
Gear Units
R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Edition 06/2010
16970411 / EN
SEW-EURODRIVEDriving the world
Contents
Contents
1
General Information ............................................................................................ 5

1.1
How to use the operating instructions ......................................................... 5
1.2
Structure of the safety notes ....................................................................... 5
1.3
Rights to claim under limited warranty ........................................................ 6
1.4
Exclusion of liability..................................................................................... 6
1.5
Copyright..................................................................................................... 6
Safety Notes ........................................................................................................ 7

2.1
Preface........................................................................................................ 7
2.2
General information .................................................................................... 7
2.3
Target group ............................................................................................... 8
2.4
Designated use ........................................................................................... 8
2.5
Other applicable documentation ................................................................. 8
2.6
Transport..................................................................................................... 9
2.7
Extended storage........................................................................................ 9
2.8
Installation/assembly................................................................................... 9
2.9
Startup/operation ........................................................................................ 9
2.10 Inspection/maintenance .............................................................................. 9

3
Gear Unit Structure ........................................................................................... 10

3.1
Basic structure of helical gear units .......................................................... 10
3.2
Basic structure of parallel shaft helical gear units ..................................... 11
3.3
Basic structure of helical-bevel gear units ................................................ 12
3.4
Basic structure of helical-worm gear units ................................................ 13
3.5
Basic structure of SPIROPLAN W10-W30 gear units............................. 14
3.6
Basic structure of SPIROPLAN W37 gear units ..................................... 15
3.7
Nameplate/unit designation ...................................................................... 16
Mechanical Installation..................................................................................... 17
4.1
Required tools/resources .......................................................................... 17
4.2
Prerequisites for assembly........................................................................ 18
4.3
Installing the gear unit............................................................................... 19
4.4
Gear units with solid shaft......................................................................... 25
4.5
Torque arms for shaft-mounted gear units................................................ 27
4.6
Shaft-mounted gear units with keyway or splined hollow shaft................. 30
4.7
Shaft-mounted gear units with shrink disk ................................................ 37
4.8
Shaft-mounted gear units with TorqLOC ................................................ 41
4.9
Installing the protective cover ................................................................... 48
4.10 AM adapter coupling ................................................................................. 50

4.11 AQ adapter coupling ................................................................................. 54
4.12 AD input shaft assembly ........................................................................... 56
5
Startup................................................................................................................ 61
5.1
Checking the oil level ................................................................................ 61
5.2
Helical-worm and SPIROPLAN W gear units ......................................... 61
5.3
Helical/parallel shaft helical/helical-bevel gear units ................................. 62
5.4
Gear units with backstop........................................................................... 62
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Contents
Inspection/Maintenance ................................................................................... 63
6.1
Preliminary work regarding gear unit inspection/maintenance ................. 63
6.2
Inspection/maintenance intervals.............................................................. 64
6.3
Lubricant change intervals ........................................................................ 65
6.4
Inspection/maintenance for the AL/AM/AQ adapter ................................. 66
6.5
Inspection/maintenance for the AD input cover ........................................ 66
6.6
Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit.................................................. 67
Mounting Positions ........................................................................................... 82

7.1
10
Designation of the mounting positions ...................................................... 82
7.2
Churning losses ........................................................................................ 83
7.3
Key............................................................................................................ 83
7.4
Helical gearmotors R ................................................................................ 84
7.5
Helical gearmotors RX .............................................................................. 87
7.6
Parallel-shaft helical gearmotors F ........................................................... 89
7.7
Helical-bevel gearmotors K ....................................................................... 92
7.8
Helical-worm gearmotors S....................................................................... 97
7.9
SPIROPLAN W gearmotors.................................................................. 103
Technical Data................................................................................................. 109

8.1
Extended storage.................................................................................... 109
8.2
Lubricants ............................................................................................... 110
Malfunctions/Service ...................................................................................... 118

9.1
Gear unit ................................................................................................. 118
9.2
AM/AQ/AL adapter ................................................................................. 119
9.3
AD input shaft assembly ......................................................................... 119
9.4
Customer service .................................................................................... 120
9.5
Disposal .................................................................................................. 120
Address List .................................................................................................... 121

Index................................................................................................................. 131
General Information
How to use the operating instructions
General Information
1.1
How to use the operating instructions
The operating instructions are an integral part of the product and contain important information on operation and service. The operating instructions are written for all employees who assemble, install, startup, and service this product.
The operating instructions must be accessible and legible. Make sure that persons responsible for the system and its operation, as well as persons who work independently
on the unit, have read through the operating instructions carefully and understood them.
Consult SEW-EURODRIVE if you have any questions or if you require further information.
1.2
Structure of the safety notes
1.2.1
Meaning of the signal words

The following table shows the grading and meaning of the signal words for safety notes,
notes on potential risks of damage to property, and other notes.
Signal word
1.2.2
Meaning
Consequences if disregarded
DANGER
Imminent danger
Severe or fatal injuries
WARNING
Possible dangerous situation
CAUTION
Minor injuries
NOTICE
Possible damage to property
Damage to the drive system or its environment
INFORMATION
Useful information or tip: Simplifies the handling of the drive

system.
Structure of the section-specific safety notes

Section safety notes do not apply to a specific action, but to several actions pertaining
to one subject. The used symbols indicate either a general or a specific hazard.
This is the formal structure of a section safety note:
SIGNAL WORD
Type and source of danger.
Possible consequence(s) if disregarded.
1.2.3
Measure(s) to prevent the danger.
Structure of the embedded safety notes

Embedded safety notes are directly integrated in the instructions just before the description of the dangerous action.
This is the formal structure of an embedded safety note:
SIGNAL WORD Nature and source of hazard.

General Information
Rights to claim under limited warranty
1.3
Rights to claim under limited warranty

Adhering to the operating instructions is a prerequisite for fault-free operation and the
fulfillment of any right to claim under warranty. Read the operating instructions before
you start working with the unit.
1.4
Exclusion of liability
You must comply with the information contained in these operating instructions to ensure safe operation of the R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W series gear units and
to achieve the specified product characteristics and performance requirements.
SEW-EURODRIVE does not assume liability for injury to persons or damage to equipment or property resulting from non-observance of these operating instructions. In such
cases, any liability for defects is excluded.
1.5
Copyright
2010 - SEW-EURODRIVE. All rights reserved.
Copyright law prohibits the unauthorized duplication, modification, distribution, and use
of this document, in whole or in part.
Safety Notes
Preface
Safety Notes
The following basic safety notes are intended to prevent injury to persons and damage
to property. The operator must ensure that the basic safety notes are read and observed. Make sure that persons responsible for the system and its operation, as well as
persons who work independently on the unit, have read through the operating instructions carefully and understood them. If you are unclear about any of the information in
this documentation, please contact SEW-EURODRIVE.
2.1
Preface
The following safety notes are primarily concerned with the use of gear units. If using
gearmotors, please also refer to the safety notes for motors in the corresponding operating instructions.
Also observe the supplementary safety notes in the individual sections of these operating instructions.
2.2
General information
DANGER
During operation, the motors, gearmotors and brakes can have live, bare and movable
or rotating parts as well as hot surfaces, depending on their enclosure.
Severe or fatal injuries.
All work related to transportation, storage, setup/mounting, connection, startup,

maintenance and repair may only be carried out by qualified personnel, in strict
observation of:
The relevant detailed operating instructions
The warning and safety signs on the motor/gearmotor
All other project planning documents, operating instructions and wiring
diagrams related to the drive
The specific regulations and requirements for the system
The national/regional regulations governing safety and the prevention of
accidents
Never install damaged products
Immediately report any damage to the shipping company
Removing covers without authorization, improper use as well as incorrect installation or

operation may result in severe injuries to persons or damage to property.
Refer to the documentation for additional information.
Safety Notes
Target group
2.3
Target group
Any mechanical work may only be performed by adequately qualified personnel. Qualified personnel in this context are persons who are familiar with the setup, mechanical
installation, trouble shooting and maintenance for this product. Further, they are qualified as follows:
Training in mechanical engineering, e.g. as a mechanic or mechatronics technician

(final examinations must have been passed).
They are familiar with these operating instructions.
Any electronic work may only be performed by adequately qualified electricians. Qualified electricians in this context are persons who are familiar with the electronic installation, startup, trouble shooting and maintenance for this product. Further, they are qualified as follows:
Training in electrical engineering, e.g. as an electrician or mechatronics technician

All work in further areas of transportation, storage, operation and waste disposal must
only be carried out by persons who are trained appropriately.
All qualified personnel must wear appropriate protective clothing.
2.4
Designated use
The gear units are intended for industrial systems and may only be used in accordance
with the information provided in SEW-EURODRIVE's technical documentation and the
information given on the nameplate. They fulfill the applicable standards and regulations.
According to the 2006/42/EC Machinery Directive, the gear units are components for the
installation in machines and plants. In the scope of the Directive, you must not take the
machinery into operation in the proper fashion until you have established that the end
product complies with Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC.
Using these products in potentially explosive atmospheres is prohibited, unless specifically designated otherwise.
2.5
Other applicable documentation

The following publications and documents have to be observed as well:
"DR.71-225, 315 AC Motors" operating instructions for gearmotors
Operating instructions of any attached options
"Gear Units" catalog or
"Gearmotors" catalog
Safety Notes
Transport
2.6
Transport
Inspect the shipment immediately upon receipt for any damage that may have occurred
during transportation. Inform the shipping company immediately. It may be necessary to
preclude startup.
Tighten installed eyebolts. They are only intended for the weight of the motor/gearmotor;
do not attach any additional loads.
The built-in lifting eyebolts comply with DIN 580. Always observe the loads and regulations listed in this standard. If the gearmotor is equipped with two suspension eye lugs
or lifting eyebolts, then both of the suspension eye lugs should be used for transportation. In this case, the tension force vector of the slings must not exceed a 45 angle according to DIN 580.
Use suitable, sufficiently rated handling equipment if necessary. Remove any transportation fixtures prior to startup.
2.7
Extended storage
Observe the notes in section "Extended storage" (page 109).
2.8
Installation/assembly
Observe the notes in section "Mechanical Installation" (page 17)!
2.9
Startup/operation
Check the oil level before startup as described in chapter Inspection/Maintenance
(page 63).
Check that the direction of rotation is correct in decoupled status. Listen out for unusual
grinding noises as the shaft rotates.
Secure keys for test mode without output elements. Do not deactivate monitoring and
protection equipment even in test mode.
Switch off the gearmotor if in doubt whenever changes occur in relation to normal operation (e.g. increased temperature, noise, vibration). Determine the cause and contact
SEW-EURODRIVE, if required.
2.10
Inspection/maintenance
Observe the notes in chapter "Inspection/Maintenance" (page 63)!
Gear Unit Structure

Basic structure of helical gear units
3
3
Gear Unit Structure

INFORMATION
The following figures are block diagrams. They help you to assign components to the
spare parts list. Discrepancies may occur depending on the gear unit size and version.
3.1
Basic structure of helical gear units

[59]
[20]
[24]
[101]
[515]
[516]
[517]
[100]
[47]
[2]
[181]
[42] [3]
[41]
[1]
[102]
[45]
[59]
[43]
[6] [25]
[88]
[22]
[11]
[12]
[17]
[9]
[19]
[8]
[521]
[522]
[523]
[7]
[59]
[31]
[32]
[34]
[30]
[4]
[5]
[506]
[39] [507]
[131]
[508]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[11]
[12]
[17]
10
Pinion
Gearwheel
Pinion shaft
Gearwheel
Pinion shaft
Gearwheel
Output shaft
Key
Oil seal
Roller bearing
Circlip
Spacer tube
[19]
[20]
[22]
[24]
[25]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[34]
[37]
[39]
[41]
[37]
19194251
Key
Breather valve
Gear unit housing
Lifting eyebolt
Roller bearing
Roller bearing
Key
Spacer tube
Roller bearing
Roller bearing
Circlip
Circlip
[42]
[43]
[45]
[47]
[59]
[88]
[100]
[101]
[102]
[131]
[181]
[506]
Roller bearing
Key
Roller bearing
Circlip
Screw plug
Circlip
Gear cover plate
Hex head screw
Seal
Closing cap
Closing cap
Shim
[507]
[508]
[515]
[516]
[517]
[521]
[522]
[523]
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Gear Unit Structure

Basic structure of parallel shaft helical gear units
3.2
Basic structure of parallel shaft helical gear units

[2]
[515]
[516]
[517]
[42]
[41]
[181]
[20]
[45]
[43]
[59]
[22]
[1]
[3]
[161]
[30]
[4]
[32]
[59]
[31]
[506]
[37]
[507] [39]
[508]
[131]
[5]
[165]
[183]
[160]
[19]
[94]
[92]
[91]
[93]
[25]
[102]
[88]
[521]
[522]
[523]
[100]
[101]
[7]
[59]
[17]
[9]
[6]
[11]
[81]
[14]
[16]
19298059
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[9]
[11]
[14]
[16]
[17]
[19]
[20]
Pinion
Gearwheel
Pinion shaft
Gearwheel
Pinion shaft
Gearwheel
Hollow shaft
Oil seal
Roller bearing
Hex head screw
output flange
Spacer tube
Key
Breather valve
[22]
[25]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[37]
[39]
[41]
[42]
[43]
[45]
[59]
[81]
[88]
Gear unit housing

Roller bearing
Roller bearing
Key
Spacer tube
Roller bearing
Circlip
Circlip
Roller bearing
Key
Roller bearing
Screw plug
Nilos ring
Circlip
[91]
[92]
[93]
[94]
[100]
[101]
[102]
[131]
[160]
[161]
[165]
[181]
[183]
Circlip
Disc
Lock washer
Hex head screw
Gear cover plate
Hex head screw
Seal
Closing cap
Closing plug
Closing cap
Closing plug
Closing cap
Oil seal
[506]
[507]
[508]
[515]
[516]
[517]
[521]
[522]
[523]
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
11
Gear Unit Structure

Basic structure of helical-bevel gear units
3.3
Basic structure of helical-bevel gear units

[100]
[102]
[3]
[20]
[536]
[43] [537] [533]
[538] [534]
[535]
[22]
[45]
[101]
[59]
[2]
[114]
[113]
[42]
[19]
[59]
[119]
[25]
[84]
[116]
[523] [89] [59]
[522]
[521][88]
[1]
[7]
[8]
[59]
[6]
[59]
[83] [17]
[11]
[12]
[9]
[132]
[133]
[31]
[161]
[30] [542]
[543]
[135] [544]
[4]
[5]
[131]
[37]
[506]
[507]
[137] [508]
19301131
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[11]
[12]
[17]
[19]
[20]
[22]
12
Pinion
Gearwheel
Pinion shaft
Gearwheel
Pinion shaft
Gearwheel
Output shaft
Key
Oil seal
Roller bearing
Circlip
Spacer tube
Key
Breather valve
Gear unit housing
[25]
[30]
[31]
[37]
[39]
[42]
[43]
[45]
[59]
[83]
[84]
[88]
[89]
[100]
[101]
Roller bearing
Roller bearing
Key
Roller bearing
Circlip
Roller bearing
Key
Roller bearing
Screw plug
Nilos ring
Nilos ring
Circlip
Closing cap
Gear cover plate
Hex head screw
[102]
[113]
[114]
[116]
[119]
[131]
[132]
[133]
[135]
[161]
[506]
[507]
[508]
[521]
[521]
Seal
Slotted nut
Multi-tang washer
Thread locker
Spacer tube
Closing cap
Circlip
Supporting ring
Nilos ring
Closing cap
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
[522]
[523]
[533]
[534]
[535]
[536]
[537]
[538]
[542]
[543]
[544]
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Gear Unit Structure

Basic structure of helical-worm gear units
3.4
Basic structure of helical-worm gear units
[59]
[101]
[131]
[20]
[100]
[506]
[507]
[39] [137]
[102]
[37]
[22]
[5]
[43]
[30]
[2] [61] [59]

[1]
[19]
[89]
[523] [88]
[25] [522]
[521]
[59]
[7]
[6]
[9]
[520]
[12] [519]
[518]
[11]
19304203
[1]
[2]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[9]
[11]
[12]
[19]
Pinion
Gearwheel
Worm
Worm gear
Output shaft
Oil seal
Roller bearing
Circlip
Key
[20]
[22]
[25]
[30]
[37]
[39]
[43]
[59]
[61]
Breather valve
Gear unit housing
Roller bearing
Roller bearing
Roller bearing
Circlip
Key
Screw plug
Circlip
[88]
[89]
[100]
[101]
[102]
[131]
[137]
[506]
[507]
Circlip
Closing cap
Gear cover plate
Hex head screw
Seal
Closing cap
Supporting ring
Shim
Shim
[518]
[519]
[520]
[521]
[522]
[523]
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
13
Gear Unit Structure

Basic structure of SPIROPLAN W10-W30 gear units
3.5
Basic structure of SPIROPLAN W10-W30 gear units

[100]
[101]
[65]
[66]
[102]
[71]
[68]
[143]
[72]
[1]
[22]
[89]
[25]
[88]
[521]
[522]
[523]
[6]
[19]
[250]
[251]
[17]
[8]
[7]
[11]
[518]
[519]
[12] [520]
[9]
19307275
[1]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[11]
[12]
[17]
14
Pinion
Gearwheel
Output shaft
Key
Oil seal
Roller bearing
Circlip
Spacer tube
[19]
[22]
[25]
[65]
[66]
[71]
[72]
[143]
Key
Gear unit housing
Roller bearing
Oil seal
Roller bearing
Supporting ring
Circlip
Supporting ring
[88]
[89]
[100]
[101]
[102]
[132]
[183]
[250]
Circlip
Closing cap
Gear cover plate
Hex head screw
Seal
Circlip
Oil seal
Circlip
[251]
[518]
[519]
[520]
[521]
[522]
[523]
Circlip
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Gear Unit Structure

Basic structure of SPIROPLAN W37 gear units
3.6
Basic structure of SPIROPLAN W37 gear units

[521]
[522]
[523] [88]
[6]
[89]
[25]
[22]
[19]
[7]
[8]
[59]
[12]
[9]
[5]
[518]
[519] [11]
[520]
[33]
[32]
[59]
[44] [133]
[506]
[1]
[37]
[5]
[31]
[30]
[137]
[2]
[61]
[26] [36]
605872395
[1]
[2]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[11]
[12]
[19]
Pinion
Wheel
Pinion shaft
Wheel
Output shaft
Key
Oil seal
Grooved ball bearing
Retaining ring
Key
[22]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[33]
[36]
[37]
Gear unit housing

Eyebolt
Housing stage 1
Key
Spacer tube
Retaining ring
Hex head screw
[44]
[59]
[61]
[68]
[72]
[80]
[88]
[89]
[106]
[133]
O-ring
Screw plug
Retaining ring
Retaining ring
Retaining ring
Key
Retaining ring
Closing cap
Stud
Shim
[137]
[150]
[183]
[506]
[518]
[519]
[520]
[521]
[522]
[523]
Shim
Hex nut
Oil seal
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
15
Gear Unit Structure

Nameplate/unit designation
3.7
Nameplate/unit designation
3.7.1
Nameplate
The following figure shows an example of a nameplate for a helical-bevel gear unit with
AQ adapter:
76646 Bruchsal / Germany
K57 AQH140/1
01.1234567890.0001.08
IM
i
na pk r/min
232
ne pk r/min
4500
M3B
19,34
65
665
kg
32
IP
Ma pk Nm
Made in Germany
0641 543 1
CLP HC 220 Synth.l / 2,4L
624901899
i
IM
IP
nepk
napk
Mapk
3.7.2
[rpm]
[rpm]
[Nm]
Gear unit reduction ratio

Mounting position
Degree of protection
Maximum permitted input speed
Maximum permitted output speed
Maximum permitted output torque
Type designation
INFORMATION
For a detailed overview of unit designations and additional information, refer to the following publications:
Example: Helicalbevel gear unit
"Gear Units" catalog or
"Gearmotors" catalog
A helical-bevel gear unit with adapter has, for example, the following unit designation:
K
37
/R
AQA
80
/1
Variants
Flange classification
Adapter designation: e.g. for servomotors
- AQA: Adapter with keyway
- AQH: Adapter with clamping ring hub
Option: e.g. for servo gear units .../ R: Reduced circumferential backlash
Gear unit size: e.g. 37
Gear unit type: e.g. K
16
Mechanical Installation
Required tools/resources
4.1
Required tools/resources
Set of wrenches
Torque wrench for:
Shrink disks
AQH motor adapter
Input shaft assembly with centering shoulder
4.1.1
Mounting device
Compensation elements (shims, spacing rings)
Fasteners for input and output elements
Lubricant (e.g. NOCO Fluid)
Bolt locking compound (for input shaft assembly with centering shoulder), e.g.
Loctite 243
Standard parts are not included in the delivery
Installation tolerances
Shaft end
Flanges
Diameter tolerance in accordance with DIN 748

ISO k6 for solid shafts with 50 mm
ISO m6 for solid shafts with > 50 mm
ISO H7 for hollow shafts
Center bore in accordance with DIN 332, shape
DR
Centering shoulder tolerance to DIN 42948

ISO j6 for b1 230 mm
ISO h6 with b1 > 230 mm
17
Prerequisites for assembly
4.2
Prerequisites for assembly

Check that the following conditions have been met:
The entries on the nameplate of the gearmotor match the voltage supply system.
The drive has not been damaged during transportation or storage.
Ensure that the following requirements have been met:

For standard gear units:
Ambient temperature according to the technical documentation, nameplate and
lubricant table in section "Lubricants" (page 111).
No harmful oils, acids, gases, vapors, radiation etc. in the vicinity
For special versions:
The drive is designed in accordance with the ambient conditions. Refer to the information on the nameplate.
For helical-worm/SPIROPLAN W gear units:
No large external mass moments of inertia which could exert a retrodriving load
on the gear unit.
[for (retrodriving) = 2 1/ < 0.5 self-locking]
18
You must clean the output shafts and flange surfaces thoroughly to ensure they are
free of anti-corrosion agents, contamination or similar. Use a commercially available
solvent. Do not expose the sealing lips of the oil seals to the solvent damage to the
material.
When the drive is installed in abrasive ambient conditions, protect the output end oil
seals against wear.
Installing the gear unit
4.3

NOTICE
Improper assembly may result in damages to the gear unit/gearmotor.
Possible damage to property.
Do closely observe the notes in this chapter.
Work on the gear unit only when the machine is not in use. Secure the drive unit
against unintentional power-up.
Protect the gear unit from direct cold air currents. Condensation may cause water to
accumulate in the oil.
The gear unit or gearmotor is only allowed to be installed in the specified mounting position. Refer to the information on the nameplate. SPIROPLAN gear units of sizes
W10-W30 do not depend on a particular mounting position.
The support structure must have the following characteristics:
Level
Vibration damping
Torsionally rigid
The maximum permitted flatness error for foot and flange mounting (guide values with
reference to DIN ISO 1101):
Gear unit size 67:
Max. 0.4 mm
Gear unit size 77 107:
Max. 0.5 mm
Max. 0.7 mm
Max. 0.8 mm
Do not tighten the housing legs and mounting flanges against one another and ensure
that you comply with the permitted overhung and axial loads! Observe chapter "Project
Planning" in the Gear unit/gearmotor catalog for calculating the permitted overhung and
axial loads.
Secure gearmotors using quality 8.8 screws.
Secure the following gearmotors using quality 10.9 screws:
RF37, R37F with flange = 120 mm
and RZ37, RZ47, RZ57, RZ67, RZ77, RZ87
INFORMATION
When installing the gear unit, make sure that the oil level and drain plugs as well as
the breather plugs are easily accessible!
19
At the same time, also check that the oil fill corresponds to the specifications for the intended mounting position (see section "Lubricant fill quantities" (page 113) or refer to the
information on the nameplate). The gear units are filled with the required oil volume at
the factory. There may be slight deviations at the oil level plug as a result of the mounting
position, which are permitted within the manufacturing tolerances.
If you change the mounting position, make sure that you change the lubricant fill
quantities and the position of the breather valve accordingly. Observe section"Lubricant fill quantities" (page 113) and chapter "Mounting Positions" (page 82).
Consult the SEW customer service if you intend to change the mounting position of K
gear units to or between M5 and M6.
Consult the SEW customer service if you intend to change the mounting position of S
gear units sizes S47 ... S97, to M2 and M3.
In case there is a risk of electrochemical corrosion between the gear unit and the driven
machine, use plastic inserts that are 2 to 3 mm thick. The material used must have an
electrical leakage resistance < 109 . Electrochemical corrosion can occur between various metals, for example, cast iron and high-grade steel. Also fit the bolts with plastic
washers. Ground the housing additionally use the grounding bolts on the motor.
20
4.3.1
Tightening torques for retaining screws

Mount the gearmotors with the following tightening torques:
Tightening torque screw / nut
Strength class 8.8
Screw/nut
[Nm]
M6
11
M8
25
M10
48
M12
86
M16
210
M20
410
M24
710
M30
1450
M36
2500
M42
4600
M48
6950
M56
11100
Mount the helical gearmotors in flange-mounted design with the following increased
tightening torques:
Screw/nut
Tightening torque screw / nut

Strength class 10.9
Flange
Gear unit
120
RF37
M6
14
140
RF47
M8
35
[Nm]
160
RF57
M8
35
60ZR
RZ37
M8
35
70ZR
RZ47
M8
35
80ZR
RZ57
M10
69
95ZR
RZ67
M10
69
110ZR
RZ77
M12
120
130ZR
RZ87
M12
120
21
4
4.3.2
Mounting the gear units
Foot-mounted gear
unit
The following table shows the thread sizes of the gear units in foot-mounted design depending on the gear unit type and size:
Gear unit type
Screw
R / R..F
M6
07
M8
17/27/37
RX
Gear unit with B5

flange
K / KH..B /
KV..B / KA..B
37
30/37/47
10/20
27/37
M10
Gear unit with B14

flange and/or hollow shaft
F/
FH..B / FA..B
57
47
37/47
47/57
M12
47/57/67
67
57/67
57/67
67
M16
77/87
77/87
77/87
77
77
M20
97
97/107
97
87
87
M24
107
107
97
97
M30
137
127
107/167
M36
147/167
157
127/157/187
The following table shows the thread sizes of the gear units with B14 flange and/or hollow shaft depending on the gear unit type and size:
Gear unit type
Screw
RZ
M6
07/17/27
M8
37/47
M10
57/67
M12
77/87
FAZ / FHZ
KAZ /
KHZ / KVZ
SA /
SAZ / SHZ
WA
37
10/20/30
27/37/47
37/47
47/57
37
57/67/77
57/67/77
67/77
87/97
47
M16
87/97
87/97
M20
107/127
107/127
M24
157
157
The following table shows the thread sizes of the gear units with B5 flange depending
on the gear unit type,size and flange diameter:
Gear unit type
Flange
[mm]
22
Screw
RF /
R..F / RM
FF /
FAF / FHF
KF / KAF /
KHF / KVF
SF /
SAF /SHF
80
M6
110
M8
120
M6
140
M8
07/17/27
160
M8
07/17/27/37/47
27/37
200
M10
37/47/57/67
47
250
M12
57/67/77/87
300
M12
67/77/87
350
M16
77/87/97/107
87
87
87
450
M16
97/107/137/147
97/107
97/107
97
550
M16
107/137/147/167
127
127
660
M20
147/167
157
157
WF / WAF
10
20
07/17/27
37
10/20/30/37
37
37/47
30/37/47
47
57/67
57/67
57/67
77
77
77
4.3.3
Installation in damp locations or in the open

Drives are supplied in corrosion-resistant versions with an according surface protection
coating for use in damp areas or outdoors. Repair any damage to the paint work
(e.g. on the breather valve or the eyebolts).
When mounting the motors onto AM, AQ, AR, AT adapters and to start-up and friction
couplings, seal the flange areas with a suitable sealing compound, e.g. Loctite 574.
Units installed outdoors must be protected from the sun. Suitable protective devices are
required, such as covers or roofs. Avoid any heat accumulation. The operator must ensure that foreign objects do not impair the function of the gear unit (e.g., by falling objects
or coverings).
4.3.4
Breather
The following gear units do not require a breather:
R07 in mounting positions M1, M2, M3, M5 and M6
R17, R27 and F27 in mounting positions M1, M3, M5 and M6
SPIROPLAN W10, W20, W30 gear units
SPIROPLAN W37 and W47 gear units in mounting positions M1, M2, M3, M5, M6
SEW-EURODRIVE supplies all other gear units with the breather valve installed and activated according to the particular mounting position.
Exceptions:
1. SEW supplies the following gear units with a screw plug on the vent hole provided:
Pivoted mounting positions, if possible
Gear units for mounting on a slant
The breather valve is located in the motor terminal box. Before startup, you must replace the highest screw plug with the provided breather valve.
2. SEW supplies a breather valve in a plastic bag for gear head units requiring venting
on the input end.
3. Enclosed gear units are supplied without a breather valve.
23
Activating the
breather valve
Check whether the breather valve is activated. If the breather valve has not been activated, you must remove the transport fixture from the breather valve before starting up
the gear unit!
1. Breather valve with transport fixture
211319051
2. Removing the transport fixture
211316875
3. Activated breather valve
211314699
24
Gear units with solid shaft
4.3.5
Painting the gear unit
NOTICE
Breather valves and oil seals may be damaged during painting or re-painting.
Potential damage to property.
Thoroughly cover the breather valves and the sealing lip of the oil seals with strips
prior to painting.
Remove the strips after painting.
4.4
4.4.1
Assembling input and output elements
NOTICE
Bearing, hosing or shaft may be damaged due to improper assembly.
Using a mounting
device
Only assemble the input and output components with a mounting device. Use the
center bore and the thread on the shaft end for positioning.
Never force belt pulleys, couplings, pinions, etc. onto the shaft end by hitting them
with a hammer.
In the case of belt pulleys, make sure the belt is tensioned correctly in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.
Power transmission elements should be balanced after fitting and must not give
rise to any impermissible radial or axial forces (see the "Gearmotors" or "ExplosionProof Drives" catalog for permitted values).
The following figure shows a mounting device for installing couplings or hubs on gear
unit or motor shaft ends. Should you be able to tighten the screw without any problems,
you may not need the thrust bearing on the mounting device.
[2]
[1]
[3]
211368587
[1] Gear shaft end
[2] Thrust bearing
[3] Coupling hub
25
Avoiding excessive
overhung loads
Avoid high overhung loads by: Installing the gear or chain sprocket according to figure
B if possible.
[1]
[1]
[A]
[B]
211364235
[1] Hub
[A] unfavorable
[B] correct
INFORMATION
Mounting is easier if you first apply lubricant to the output element or heat it up briefly
(to 80 - 100 C).
4.4.2
Mounting of couplings
CAUTION
Input and output components such as belt pulleys, couplings etc. are in fast motion
during operation.
Risk of jamming and crushing.
Cover input and output components with a touch guard.
Adjust the following misalignments according to the coupling manufacturer's specifications when mounting couplings.
a) Maximum and minimum clearance
b) Axial offset
c) Angular offset
a)
b)
c)
211395595
26
Torque arms for shaft-mounted gear units
4.5

NOTICE
Improper assembling may result in damages to the gear unit.
4.5.1
Do not place torque arms under strain during installation.
Use bolts of quality 8.8 to fasten torque arms.
Parallel shaft helical gear units

The following figure shows the toque arm for parallel shaft helical gear units.
c
[3]
a
d
[1]
b +0.5
[2]
9007199466107403
[1]
[2]
[3]
Screw
Washer
Nut
Proceed as follows to mount the rubber buffers:

1. Use screws [1] and washers according to the following table.
2. Use two nuts to secure the screw connection [3].
3. Tighten the screw until the initial stress " L" of the buffers is reached according to
the table.
rubber buffer
Gear unit
Diameter
Internal
diameter
Length
(loose)
Washer width
d [mm]
b [mm]
c [mm]
FA27
40
12.5
20
FA37
40
12.5
20
FA47
40
12.5
20
1.5
FA57
40
12.5
20
1.5
FA67
40
12.5
20
1.5
FA77
60
21.0
30
10
1.5
FA87
60
21.0
30
10
1.5
FA97
80
25.0
40
12
FA107
80
25.0
40
12
FA127
100
32.0
60
15
FA157
120
32.0
60
15
a [mm]
L (taut)
[mm]
1
27
4
4.5.2
Helical-bevel gear units

The following figure shows the toque arm for helical-bevel gear units.
Bushing [1] with bearings on both ends.
Install connection end B as a mirror image of A.
[1]
211362059
Gear unit
4.5.3
bolts
Tightening torque
KA37
4 M10 25 8.8
48 Nm
KA47
4 M10 30 8.8
48 Nm
KA67
4 M12 35 8.8
86 Nm
KA77
4 M16 40 8.8
210 Nm
KA87
4 M16 45 8.8
210 Nm
KA97
4 M20 50 8.8
410 Nm
KA107
4 M24 60 8.8
710 Nm
KA127
4 M36 130 8.8
2500 Nm
KA157
4 M36 130 8.8
2500 Nm
Helical worm gear units

The following figure shows the toque arm for helical-worm gear units.
[1]
211491723
Gear unit
28
bolts
Tightening torque
SA37
4 x M6 16 8.8
11 Nm
SA47
4 x M8 20 8.8
25 Nm
SA57
6 x M8 20 8.8
25 Nm
SA67
8 x M12 25 8.8
86 Nm
SA77
8 x M12 35 8.8
86 Nm
SA87
8 x M16 35 8.8
210 Nm
SA97
8 x M16 35 8.8
210 Nm
4.5.4
SPIROPLANW gear units

The following figure shows the toque arm for SPIROPLAN W gear units.
45
[1]
211489547
Gear unit
bolts
Tightening torque Nm
WA10
4 x M6 16 - 8.8
11
WA20
4 x M6 16 - 8.8
11
WA30
4 x M6 16 - 10.9
15
WA37
4 x M8 20 - 10.9
35
WA47
4 x M10 25 - 10.9
70
29
Shaft-mounted gear units with keyway or splined hollow shaft
4.6

INFORMATION
Concerning the configuration of the customer shaft, please also refer to the design
notes in the Gearmotors catalog.
4.6.1
Assembly notes
1. Apply and thoroughly spread NOCO Fluid
C
O I
N U
L
F
C
O I
N U
L
F
211516171
2. Install the shaft and secure it axially

(mounting is facilitated by using a mounting device)
The three mounting types are described below:
2A: Standard scope of delivery
2B: installation and removal kit for customer shaft with contact shoulder
2C: installation and removal kit for customer shaft without contact shoulder
2A: Installation with standard scope of delivery
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
211518347
[1] Short retaining bolt (standard delivery scope)
[2] Lock washer
[3] Washer
[4] Retaining ring
[5] Customer shaft
30
2B: Installation with SEW-EURODRIVE installation and removal kit (page 35)
customer shaft with contact shoulder
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
B
[5]
211520523
[1] Retaining screw
[2] Lock washer
[3] Washer
[4] Retaining ring
[5] Customer shaft with contact shoulder
2C: Installation with SEW-EURODRIVE installation and removal kit (page 35)
customer shaft without contact shoulder
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
C
[6]
211522699
[1] Retaining screw
[2] Lock washer
[3] Washer
[4] Retaining ring
[5] Spacer tube
[6] Customer shaft without contact shoulder
31
3. Tighten the retaining screw to the appropriate torque (see table).
211524875
Screw
Tightening torque [Nm]
M5
M6
M10/12
20
M16
40
M20
80
M24
200
INFORMATION
To avoid contact corrosion, we recommend that the customer shaft should additionally
be lathed down between the 2 contact surfaces.
32
4.6.2
Removal notes
This description is only applicable when the gear unit was assembled using the installation and removal kit (page 35) from SEW-EURODRIVE. Observe section "Installation
notes (page 30)", 2B or 2C.
1. Loosen the retaining screw [1].
2. Remove parts [2] to [4] and, if applicable, the distance piece [5].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
211527051
[1] Retaining screw
[2] Lock washer
[3] Washer
[4] Retaining ring
[5] Spacer tube
[6] Customer shaft
3. Insert the forcing disk [8] and the fixed nut [7] from the SEW-EURODRIVE installation/removal kit between the customer shaft [6] and the retaining ring [4].
4. Re-install the retaining ring [4].
33
5. Screw the retaining screw [1] back in. Now you can force the gear unit off the shaft
by tightening the bolt.
[1]
[4]
[7]
[8]
[6]
211529227
[1] Retaining screw
[4] Retaining ring
[6] Customer shaft
[7] Fixed nut
[8] Forcing disk
34
4.6.3
SEW installation and removal kit

The SEW-EURODRIVE installation/removal kit can be ordered by quoting the specified
part number.
[1]
[7]
[8]
[7]
[1]
211531403
[1] Retaining screw
Fixed nut for disassembly [7]
[8] Forcing disk
DH7
[mm]
M1)
C4
[mm]
C5
[mm]
C6
[mm]
U-0.5
[mm]
T -0.5
[mm]
D3-0.5
[mm]
L4
[mm]
WA..10
16
M5
WA..20
18
M6
12
13.5
4.5
18
15.7
50
643 712 5
5.5
20.5
17.7
25
643 682 X
WA..20, WA..30, SA..37, WA..37
20
M6
FA..27, SA..47, WA..47
25
M10
10
15.5
5.5
22.5
19.7
25
643 683 8
20
7.5
28
24.7
35
643 684 6
FA..37, KA..37, SA..47, SA..57, WA..47
30
M10
FA..47, KA..47, SA..57
35
M12
5
5
10
25
7.5
33
29.7
35
643 685 4
12
29
9.5
38
34.7
45
FA..57, KA..57, FA..67, KA..67, SA..67
40
M16
643 686 2
12
34
11.5
41.9
39.7
50
SA..67
45
643 687 0
M16
12
38.5
13.5
48.5
44.7
50
643 688 9
FA..77, KA..77, SA..77

FA..87, KA..87, SA..77, SA..87
50
M16
12
43.5
13.5
53.5
49.7
50
643 689 7
60
M20
16
56
17.5
64
59.7
60
643 690 0
FA..97, KA..97, SA..87, SA..97
70
M20
16
65.5
19.5
74.5
69.7
60
643 691 9
FA..107, KA..107, SA..97
90
M24
20
80
24.5
95
89.7
70
643 692 7
FA..127, KA..127
100
M24
20
89
27.5
106
99.7
70
643 693 5
FA..157, KA..157
120
M24
20
107
31
127
119.7
70
643 694 3
Type
Part number of
the installation/
removal kit
1) Retaining screw
35
INFORMATION
The SEW installation kit for attaching the customer shaft is a recommendation by
SEW-EURODRIVE. You must always check whether this design can compensate the
axial loads. In particular applications (e.g. mounting mixer shafts), a different design
may have to be used to secure the shaft axially. In these cases, customers can use
their own devices. However, you must ensure that these designs do not cause potential sources of combustion according to DIN EN 13463 (for example, impact sparks).
36
Shaft-mounted gear units with shrink disk
4.7
4.7.1
Assembly notes
NOTICE
Tightening the screws without installed shaft may result in the hollow shaft being deformed.
Only tighten the locking screws with the shaft installed.
1. Loosen the locking screws by a few turns (do not unscrew them completely).
211533579
2. Carefully degrease the hollow shaft hole and the input shaft using a commercial
solvent.
211535755
37
3. Hollow shaft/input shaft after degreasing.
211537931
4. Apply NOCO fluid to the input shaft in the area of the bushing.
It is essential to make sure that the clamping area of the shrink disk is free from
grease. As a result, never apply NOCO Fluid directly to the bush. This is because
the paste may be able to get into the clamping area of the shrink disk when the input
shaft is put on.
211540107
38
5. Install the input shaft.

Make sure that the locking collars of the shrink disk are installed in parallel to each
other.
For gear unit housings with shaft shoulder:
Mount the shrink disk onto the stop on the shaft shoulder.
For gear unit housings without shaft shoulder:
Install the shrink disk with a 1 to 2 mm distance from the gear unit housing.
Tighten the locking screws by working round with the torque wrench several times
from one screw to the next (not in diametrically opposite sequence). For tightening torques, refer to the following table.
s>0mm
1-2mm
211542283
6. After the installation, make sure the remaining gap between the outer rings
is > 0 mm.
7. Grease the the area around the shrink disk outside of the hollow shaft to prevent
corrosion.
Gear unit type
Screw
Nm
5
SH37
WH37
M5
WH47
M6
12
M8
30
KH37...77
FH37...77
SH47...77
KH87/97
FH87/97
SH87/97
KH107
FH107
M10
59
KH127/157
FH127/157
M12
100
KH167
M16
250
KH187
M20
470
max.1)
60
1) Maximum tightening angle per rotation
39
4
4.7.2
Removal notes
CAUTION
Risk of jamming and crushing due to improper removal of heavy components.
Risk of injury.
Observe the following removal notes.
Removing the shrink disk properly.
1. Loosen the locking screws one after the other by a quarter rotation to avoid tilting the
outer rings.
2. Unscrew the locking bolts evenly one after the other. Do not remove the locking
screws completely.
3. Remove the shaft or pull the hub off the shaft. (remove any rust that may have formed
between the hub and the end of the shaft beforehand).
4. Remove the shrink disk from the hub.
4.7.3
Cleaning and lubrication

There is no need to dismantle removed shrink disks before they are reinstalled.
Clean and lubricate the shrink disk if it is dirty.
Lubricate the tapered surfaces with one of the following solid lubricants:
Lubricant (Mo S2)
Sold as
Molykote 321 (lube coat)

Molykote spray (powder spray)
Molykote G Rapid
Aemasol MO 19P
Aemasol DIO-stral 57 N (lube coat)
Spray
Spray
Spray or paste
Spray or paste
Spray
Grease the locking screws with a multipurpose grease such as Molykote BR 2 or similar.
40
Shaft-mounted gear units with TorqLOC
4.8
4.8.1
Assembly notes
1. Clean the customer shaft and the inside of the hollow shaft. Ensure that all traces of
grease or oil are removed.
2. Install the stop ring and the bushing on the customer shaft.
211941003
3. Apply and thoroughly spread NOCO Fluid on the bushing.

O
C
O D
N UI
L
F
211938827
4. Push the gear unit onto the customer shaft.
211936651
41
5. Preassemble the torque arm (do not tighten the screws).
K...
F...
S...
211943179
6. Push the busing onto the gear unit up to the stop.
211945355
7. Tighten all the retaining screws of the torque arm.
211947531
42
8. Secure the bushing with the split ring. Tighten the split ring on the bushing using the
appropriate torque as specified in the following table:
212000907
Type
nickel-plated
[Standard]
Stainless steel
KT/FT
ST/WT
37
18
Torque [Nm]
7.5
37
47
18
7.5
47
57
18
7.5
57, 67
67
35
18
77
77
35
18
87
87
35
18
97
97
35
18
107
38
38
127
65
65
157
150
150
9. Make sure that all screws are loosened and slide the shrink disk onto the hollow
shaft.
212003083
43
10.Slide the counter bushing onto the customer shaft and into the hollow shaft
212005259
11.until the shrink disk is properly seated.

12.Tap lightly on the flange of the counter bushing to ensure that the socket is fitted securely in the hollow shaft.
212007435
13.Make sure that the customer shaft is seated in the counter bushing.
212009611
44
14.Manually tighten the screws of the shrink disk and ensure that the end rings of the
shrink disk are parallel.
212011787
15.Tighten the locking screws with a torque wrench by working round several times from
one bolt to the next (not in diametrically opposite sequence) according to the following table:
> 0mm
212013963
Type
KT/FT
nickel-plated
[Standard]
ST/WT
Stainless steel
Torque [Nm]
37
4.0
37
47
10
47
57
12
57, 67
67
12
15
77
77
30
30
87
87
30
50
97
97
30
50
107
59
65
127
100
120
157
100
120
45
16.After the installation, make sure the remaining gap between the outer rings
is > 0 mm.
17.The remaining gap between counter bushing and hollow shaft end as well as stop
ring bushing and split ring must be > 0 mm.
> 0 mm
> 0 mm
212016139
46
4.8.2
Removal notes
CAUTION
Risk of jamming and crushing due to improper removal of heavy components.
Risk of injury.
Removing the shrink disk properly.
Observe the following removal notes.
1. Loosen the locking screws one after the other by a quarter rotation to
avoid tilting the outer rings.
212013963
2. Unscrew the locking bolts evenly one after the other.

Do not remove the locking screws completely.
3. Dismantle the conical steel bushing.
If required, use the outer rings as pullers as follows:
Remove all the locking screws.
Screw the respective number of screws in the tapped holes of the shrink disk.
Support the inner ring against the gear unit housing.
Pull off the conical steel bushing by tightening the screws.
4. Remove the gear unit from the shaft.
2903780235
5. Remove the shrink disk from the hub.
47
Installing the protective cover
4
4.8.3
Cleaning and lubrication

There is no need to dismantle removed shrink disks before they are reinstalled.
Clean and lubricate the shrink disk if it is dirty.
Lubricate the tapered surfaces with one of the following solid lubricants:
Lubricant (Mo S2)
Sold as
Molykote 321 (lube coat)
Spray
Molykote spray (powder spray)
Spray
Molykote G Rapid
Spray or paste
Aemasol MO 19P
Spray or paste
Aemasol DIO-stral 57 N (lube coat)
Spray
Grease the locking screws with a multipurpose grease such as Molykote BR 2 or similar.
4.9

CAUTION
During operation, output components are in fast motion.
Risk of jamming and crushing.
4.9.1
Disconnect the motor from the power supply before starting work and safeguard
against accidental startup.
Cover input and output components with a touch guard.
Installing the rotating cover
1
1. Slide the rotating cover onto the shrink disk until it snaps in.
48
4.9.2
Installing the fixed cover
1. To fasten the cover, remove the plastic plug on the gear unit housing (see figure 1)
2. Use the delivered screws to mount the cover to the gear unit housing (see figure 2).
4.9.3
Installation without cover

In certain individual cases (e.g. through-shaft), you cannot install the cover. In such
cases, the cover is not necessary if the system or unit manufacturer provides corresponding components to guarantee for the compliance with the required degree of protection.
If this results in additional maintenance, you have to describe this in the operating instructions for system/component.
49
AM adapter coupling
4.10
AM adapter coupling
4.10.1 IEC adapter AM63 - 280 / NEMA adapter AM56 - 365
212099979
[1]
[479]
[481]
[484]
[491]
Motor shaft
Coupling half
Setscrew
Key
Spacer tube
1. Clean the motor shaft and the flange surfaces of the motor and the adapter.
2. Remove the key from the motor shaft and replace it with the supplied key [484] (not
AM63 and AM250).
3. Heat the coupling half [479] to approx. 80 - 100 C and push the coupling half onto
the motor shaft. Position as follows:
IEC adapter AM63 - 225 Until stop at motor shaft shoulder.
IEC adapter AM250 - 280 to dimensionA.
NEMA adapter with spacer tube [491] to dimension A.
4. Secure the key and coupling half using the setscrew [481] and tightening torque TA
according to the table on the motor shaft.
50
AM adapter coupling
5. Check the dimension A.

6. Seal the contact surfaces between the adapter and motor using a suitable sealing
compound.
7. Mount the motor on the adapter. Ensure that the coupling claw of the adapter shaft
is engaged in the plastic cam ring.
IEC AM
63 / 71
80 / 90
100 / 112
132
160 / 180
200
225
250 / 280
24.5
31.5
41.5
54
76
78.5
93.5
139
TA
1.5
1.5
4.8
4.8
10
17
17
17
Thread
M4
M4
M6
M6
M8
M10
M10
M10
NEMA AM
56
143 / 145
182 / 184
213 / 215
254 / 256
284 / 286
324 / 326
364 / 365
46
43
55
63.5
78.5
85.5
107
107
TA
1.5
1.5
4.8
4.8
10
17
17
17
Thread
M4
M4
M6
M6
M8
M10
M10
M10
INFORMATION
To avoid contact corrosion, we recommend applying NOCO Fluid to the motor shaft
before mounting the coupling half.
NOTICE
Dampness might enter the adapter when mounting a motor to the adapter.
Potential damage to property
Seal adapter with anaerobic fluid seal.
51
AM adapter coupling
Permitted loads
NOTICE
Impermissibly high loads may occur when mounting a motor.
The load data specified in the following table are not to be exceeded.
X
Fq
18513419
Fq1) [N]
Adapter type
IEC
NEMA
1)
x [mm]
IEC adapter
NEMA adapter
AM63/71
AM56
77
530
410
AM80/90
AM143/145
113
420
380
AM100/112
AM182/184
144
AM1322)
AM213/2152)
AM132..
AM213/215
AM160/180
AM254/286
251
AM200/225
AM324-AM365
AM250/280
186
2000
1760
1600
1250
4700
3690
4600
4340
297
5600
5250
390
11200
1) The maximum permitted weight of the attached motor Fqmax must be reduced linearly as the center of gravity distance x increases. If this distance is reduced, the maximum permitted weight
Fqmax cannot be increased.
2) Diameter of the adapter output flange: 160 mm
52
AM adapter coupling
AM../RS adapter
AM with backstop
Check the direction of rotation of the drive prior to assembly or startup. Inform the
SEW-EURODRIVE service in the case of incorrect direction of rotation.
The backstop is maintenance-free in operation, and does not require any further maintenance work. Backstops have a minimum lift-off speed depending on the size (see following table).
.
NOTICE
If the actual speed level is below the minimum lift-off speed level, the backstops are
subject to wear, and the resulting friction causes the temperature to increase.
In rated operation, the lift-off speeds must not drop below the minimum values.
During startup or braking, the lift-off speeds may drop below the minimum levels.
Maximum locking torque of the backstop

[Nm]
Minimum lift-off speed

[rpm]
AM80/90/RS,
AM143/145/RS
65
820
AM100/112/RS,
AM182/184/RS
425
620
AM132/RS,
AM213/215/RS
850
530
AM160/180/RS,
AM254/286/RS
1450
480
AM200/225/RS,
AM324-365/RS
1950
450
AM250/280/RS,
1950
450
Type
53
AQ adapter coupling
4.11
AQ adapter coupling
4.11.1 AQA80 - 190 adapter / AQH80 - 190 adapter
AQA
AQH
479
479
1
1
2
212114955
1 Motor shaft
2 Grub screw
3 screws
AQA = With keyway
AQH = Without keyway
1. Clean the motor shaft and the flange surfaces of the motor and the adapter.
2. Type AQH:Loosen the screws of the coupling half (479) and loosen the conical connection.
3. Heat up the coupling half (80 C - 100 C) and slide it onto the motor shaft.
AQA / AQH design: up to clearance "A" (see table)
54
AQ adapter coupling
4. Type AQH:Tighten the screws evenly in diametrically opposite sequence, working

round several times. Make sure that all the screws are tightened with the tightening
torque TA according to the following table.
Type AQA:Secure the coupling halves using the setscrew (see table).
5. Check the position of the coupling half (clearance "A", see table).
Mount the motor onto the adapter, making sure that the claws of the two coupling
halves engage in each other. The force that must be applied when joining the two
coupling halves is dissipated after final assembly, so there is no risk of any axial load
being applied to adjacent bearings.
INFORMATION
Only for AQA, not permitted for AQH:To avoid contact corrosion, we recommend
applying NOCO Fluid to the motor shaft before mounting the coupling half.
NOTICE
Dampness might enter the adapter when mounting a motor to the adapter.
Seal adapter with anaerobic fluid seal
4.11.2 Setting dimensions/tightening torques
Type
Coupling size
AQA /AQH 80 /1/2/3

AQA /AQH 100 /1/2
AQA /AQH 100 /3/4
AQA /AQH 140 /1/2

AQA /AQH 140 /3
AQA /AQH 190 /1/2
AQA /AQH 190 /3
Bolts DIN 912
Tightening torque TA
[Nm]
AQA
AQH
AQA
AQH
M5
M4
M5
M5
M8
M5
10
M8
M6
10
10
44,5
19/24
AQA /AQH 115 /1/2

AQA /AQH 115 /3
Clearance "A"
[mm]
39
53
62
24/28
28/38
38/45
62
62
74,5
76,5
100
55
AD input shaft assembly
4.12

Observe section "Assembling the input and output components" (page 25) when installing input components.
4.12.1 AD../P cover with motor mounting platform

Mounting the motor and adjusting the motor mounting platform.
212119307
[1] Motor mounting platform
[2] Stud bolt (only AD6/P / AD7/P)
[3] Support (only AD6/P / AD7/P)
[4] Nut
[5] Threaded column
1. Set the motor mounting platform to the required mounting position by evenly
tightening the adjusting nuts. Remove the lifting eyebolt from helical gear units in
order to achieve the lowest adjustment position. Touch up any damage to the paint
work.
2. Align the motor on the motor mounting platform (shaft ends must be in alignment)
and secure it.
3. Mount the input elements on the input shaft end and the motor shaft, line them up
with one another and correct the motor position again, if necessary.
4. Put on the traction elements (V-belt, chain, etc.) and apply a preload by evenly
adjusting the motor mounting platform. Do not stress the motor mounting platform
and the columns against each other when doing this.
5. Tighten all the nuts not used for adjustment in order to fix the threaded columns.
56
4.12.2 Only AD6/P and AD7/P

Unscrew the nuts on the stud bolts before adjustment to allow the stud bolts to move
axially in the support without restriction. Do not tighten the nuts until the final adjustment
position has been reached. Do not adjust the motor mounting platform using the support.
4.12.3 AD../ZR input cover with centering shoulder
Mounting applications on the input shaft assembly with centering shoulder.
1. Retaining bolts of a suitable length must be used to secure the application. The
length l of the new bolts is calculated as follows:
212121483
[l] t+a
[t] Screw-in depth (see table)
[a] Thickness of the application
[s] Retaining thread (see table)
Round down the calculated screw length to the next smaller standard length.
2. Remove the retaining screws from the centering shoulder.
3. Clean the contact surface and the centering shoulder.
57
4. Clean the threads of the new bolts and apply a bolt locking compound
(e.g. Loctite 243) to the first few threads.
5. Attach the application to the centering shoulder and tighten the retaining screws with
the specified tightening torque TA (see table).
58
Type
Screw-in
depth
t [mm]
AD2/ZR
25,5
M8
25
AD3/ZR
31,5
M10
48
Retaining thread
s
Tightening torque
TA for connection screws of strength class
8.8 [Nm]
AD4/ZR
36
M12
86
AD5/ZR
44
M12
86
AD6/ZR
48,5
M16
210
AD7/ZR
49
M20
410
AD8/ZR
42
M12
86
Permitted loads
NOTICE
Impermissibly high loads may occur when mounting a motor.
The load data specified in the following table are not to be exceeded.
x
Fq
212123659
Type
x1)
[mm]
Fq1)
[N]
AD2/ZR
193
330
AD3/ZR
274
1400
AD4/ZR2)
AD4/ZR
1)
2)
361
1120
3300
AD5/ZR
487
3200
AD6/ZR
567
3900
AD7/ZR
663
10000
AD8/ZR
516
4300
Maximum load values for connection screws of strength class 8.8. The maximum permitted weight of
the attached motor Fqmax must be reduced linearly as the center of gravity distance x increases. When
this distance is reduced, Fqmax cannot be increased.
Diameter of the adapter output flange: 160 mm
59
4.12.4 AD../RS cover with backstop

Check the direction of rotation of the drive prior to assembly or startup. Inform the SEWEURODRIVE service in the case of incorrect direction of rotation.
The backstop is maintenance-free in operation, and does not require any further maintenance work. Backstops have a minimum lift-off speed depending on the size (see following table).
NOTICE
If the actual speed level is below the minimum lift-off speed level, the backstops are
subject to wear, and the resulting friction causes the temperature to increase.
In rated operation, the lift-off speeds must not drop below the minimum values.
During startup or braking, the lift-off speeds may drop below the minimum levels.
Type
60
Maximum locking torque of the backstop

[Nm]
Minimum lift-off speed

[rpm]
AD2/RS
65
820
AD3/RS
425
620
AD4/RS
850
530
AD5/RS
1450
480
AD6/RS
1950
450
AD7/RS
1950
450
AD8/RS
1950
450
Startup
Checking the oil level
Startup
5.1
Checking the oil level

Before startup, make sure that the oil level corresponds to the mounting position. Observe section "Checking the oil level and changing the oil" (page 67).
5.2
Helical-worm and SPIROPLAN W gear units
5.2.1
Run-in period
SPIROPLAN and helical-worm gear units require a running-in period of at least 48 h
before reaching their maximum efficiency. A separate run-in period applies for each direction of rotation if the gear unit is operated in both directions of rotation. The table
shows the average power reduction during the run-in period.
Helical-worm gear
unit
Worm
i range
reduction
1-start
approx. 50 ... 280
approx. 12 %
2-start
approx. 20 ... 75
approx. 6 %
3-start
approx. 20 ... 90
approx. 3 %
4-start
5-start
approx. 6 ... 25
approx. 3 %
6-start
approx. 7 ... 25
approx. 2 %
SPIROPLAN
gear units
W10 / W20 / W30

i range
reduction
approx. 35 ... 75
approx. 15 %
approx. 20 ... 35
approx. 10 %
approx. 10 ... 20
About 8
About 6
W37 / W47
i range
reduction
approx. 8 %
about 30...70
approx. 8 %
approx. 5 %
approx. 10 ... 30
approx. 5%
approx. 3 %
about 3...10
approx. 3%
61
Startup
Helical/parallel shaft helical/helical-bevel gear units
5.3
Helical/parallel shaft helical/helical-bevel gear units

No special startup instructions are required for helical, parallel shaft helical and helicalbevel gear units providing the gear units have been installed in accordance with section
"Mechanical Installation" (page 17).
5.4
Gear units with backstop

The purpose of a backstop is to prevent undesirable reverse rotation. During operation,
the backstop permits rotation in one specified direction of rotation only.
NOTICE
Operating the motor in the blocking direction could destroy the backstop.
Do not start up the motor in the blocking direction. Be sure that the motor power
supply is correctly connected so that the motor rotates in the required direction.
The backstop can be operated in blocking direction with half the output torque once
for control purposes.
B
CCW
CW
CW
CCW
659173899
The direction of rotation is determined with a view to the output shaft (LSS).
Clockwise (CW)
Counterclockwise (CCW)
The permitted direction of rotation is indicated on the housing.
62
Inspection/Maintenance
Preliminary work regarding gear unit inspection/maintenance
The following gear units are lubricated for life:
Helical gear units R07, R17, R27
Parallel shaft helical gear unit F27
SPIROPLAN gear units
Depending on external factors, the surface/corrosion protection might have to be repaired or renewed.
6.1
Preliminary work regarding gear unit inspection/maintenance

Observe the following notes before you start with the inspection/maintenance work.
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
Disconnect the gearmotor from the power supply before starting work and protect
it against unintentional re-start.
WARNING
Danger of burns due to hot gear unit and hot gear unit oil.
Severe injuries.
Let the gear unit cool down before you begin with your work.
Only remove the oil level and oil drain plug very carefully.
NOTICE
Filling in the wrong oil may result in significantly different lubricant characteristics.
Do not mix different synthetic lubricants and do not mix synthetic with mineral lubricants.
Mineral oil is used as standard lubricant.
NOTICE
Improper maintenance may result in damages to the gear unit.
Heed the information in this chapter.
INFORMATION
The position of the oil level plug, oil drain plug and the breather valve depends on the
mounting position. Refer to the diagrams of the mounting positions. See chapter
"Mounting Positions" (page 82).
63
Inspection/maintenance intervals
6.2
Strict adherence to the inspection and maintenance intervals is absolutely necessary

to ensure safe working conditions.
Before releasing shaft connections, be sure that there are no active torsional moments present (tensions within the system).
Prevent foreign bodies from entering into the gear unit during maintenance and inspection work.
Do not clean the gear unit with a high-pressure cleaning system as water might enter
the gear unit and the seals might be damaged.
Perform safety and function tests following all maintenance and repair work.
Inspection/maintenance intervals
Time interval
What do I do?
Every 3000 operating hours, at least every 6

months
Depending on the operating conditions (see

illustration below), at the latest every 3 years
according to oil temperature
Change mineral oil
Replace anti-friction bearing grease

(recommendation)
Replace oil seal (do not install it in the same
track)
Depending on the operating conditions (see

illustration below), at the latest every 5 years
according to oil temperature
Change synthetic oil
Replace anti-friction bearing grease

(recommendation)
Replace oil seal (do not install it in the same
track)
64
Varying (depending on external factors)
Check oil and oil level

Check running noise for possible bearing
damage
Visually check the seals for leakage
For gear units with a torque arm: Check the
rubber buffer and change it, if necessary
Touch up or renew the surfaces/anticorrosion

coating
Lubricant change intervals
6.3
Lubricant change intervals

The following figure shows the change intervals for standard gear units under normal
environmental conditions. Change the oil more frequently when using special versions
subject to more severe/aggressive environmental conditions!
30000
[h]
25000
[3]
20000
15000
[4]
[1]
10000
[5]
5000
70
80
110
100
90
120
[C]
[2]
[1] Operating hours
[3] CLP PG
[2] Sustained oil bath temperature
[4] CLP HC / HCE
[5] CLP / HLP / E
Average value per oil type at 70 C
115
Oil
65
Inspection/maintenance for the AL/AM/AQ adapter
6.4
Inspection/maintenance for the AL/AM/AQ adapter

Time interval
What do I do?
Every 3000 operating hours, at least every 6 months

damage
Visually check the adapter for leakage
After 10000 operating hours
Check torsional play

Visually check the elastic annular gear
after 25 000 - 30 000 hours of operation
Renew the anti-friction bearing grease

Replace oil seal (do not install it in the
same track)
Change the elastic annular gear
6.5
66
Inspection/maintenance for the AD input cover

Time interval
What do I do?
Every 3000 operating hours, at least every 6 months

damage
Visually check the adapter for leakage
after 25 000 - 30 000 hours of operation
Renew the anti-friction bearing grease
Replace the oil seal
Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit
6.6
6.6.1
Checking the oil level and changing the oil
The procedure when checking the oil level and changing the oil depends on the following
factors:
Gear unit type
Size
Mounting position
Observe the references to the respective sections as well as the following table. Refer
to chapter "Mounting Positions" (page 82) for notes on the mounting positions. You cannot check the oil level of gear units in pivoted mounting position. The gear units are delivered with the correct oil level. Observe the designations and fill quantities on the
nameplate if you have to change the oil.
Code letter
Section "Checking the oil level and changing the oil"
A:
Reference
Helical gear units...

Parallel shaft helical gear units...
Helical-bevel gear units...
Helical-worm gear units...
(page 68)
With oil level plug

B:
Helical gear units...

Parallel shaft helical gear units...
SPIROPLAN gear units...
(page 70)
without oil level plug, with cover plate

C:
S37... helical-worm gear units
(page 74)
without oil level plug and cover plate

D:
SPIROPLAN W37 / W47...
(page 77)
in mounting positions: M1, M2, M3, M5, M6 with oil level plug
E:
SPIROPLAN W37 / W47...
(page 79)
in M4 mounting position without oil level plug and cover plate
Series
Gear unit
Code letter for section "Checking the oil level and changing the oil"
M1
M2
M3
R07...R27
R37 / R67
R
F
K
S
W
M4
M6
R47 / R57
R77...R167
RX57...R107
F27
F37..F157
K37...K187
S37
S47...S97
W10...W30
W37...W47
M5
67
6
6.6.2
A: Helical, parallel shaft helical, helical-bevel and helical-worm gear units with oil level plug
Checking the oil

levelvia the oil
level plug
Proceed as follows to check the oil level of the gear unit:

1. Observe the notes in section "Preliminary work regarding gear unit inspection/
maintenance" (page 63).
2. Determine the position of the oil level plug and the breather valve using the mounting
position sheets. See chapter "Mounting Positions" (page 82).
3. Place a container underneath the oil level plug.
4. Slowly remove the oil level plug. Small amounts of oil may leak out as the permitted
max. oil level is higher than the lower edge of the oil level bore.
5. Check the oil level according to the following figure and the corresponding table.
[1]
[2]
X max.
Oil
min. X
18634635
[1] Oil level bore
[2] Reference oil level
? Oil level bore
Min and max fill level = x [mm]
M10 x 1
1.5
M12 x 1.5
M22 x 1.5
M33 x 2
M42 x 2
6. If the oil level is too low, do the following:

Remove the breather valve.
Fill in additional oil of the same type via the vent hole until the oil level is at the
lower edge of the oil level bore.
Re-insert the breather valve.
7. Re-insert the oil level plug.
68
Checking the oil

via the oil drain
plug
Proceed as follows to check the oil of the gear unit:

2. Determine the position of the oil drain plug using the mounting position sheets. See
chapter "Mounting Positions" (page 82).
3. Remove a little oil from the oil drain plug.
4. Check the oil consistency.
Viscosity
If you can see that the oil is heavily contaminated, we recommend that you
change the oil even if this is outside the service intervals specified in "Inspection
and maintenance intervals" (page 64).
5. Check the oil level. See previous section.
Changing the oil

via the oil drain
plug and the
breather valve
WARNING
Severe injuries.
However, the gear unit must still be warm otherwise the high viscosity of
excessively cold oil will make it harder to drain the oil properly.
2. Determine the position of the oil drain plug, the oil level plug and the breather valve
using the mounting position sheets. See chapter "Mounting Positions" (page 82).
3. Place a container underneath the oil drain plug.
4. Remove the oil level plug, the breather valve and the oil drain plug.
5. Drain all the oil.
6. Re-insert the oil drain plug.
7. Fill in new oil of the same type via the vent hole (otherwise consult the customer service). Do not mix different synthetic lubricants.
Observe the oil fill quantities according to the specifications on the nameplate or
according to the mounting position. See sect "Lubricant fill quantities" (page 110).
Check the oil level at the oil level plug.
8. Re-insert the oil level plug and the breather valve.
69
6
6.6.3
B: Helical, parallel shaft helical, SPIROPLAN gear units without oil level plug with cover plate
Checking the oil

level via the cover
plate
For gear units without oil level bore, the oil level is checked via the cover plate opening.
Proceed as follows:
2. For the cover plate to be on top, you have to set up the gear unit in the following
mounting position.
R07 - R57 in M1 mounting position
F27 in M3 mounting position
W10 - W30 in M1 mounting position
3. Loosen the screws [1] of the cover plate [2] and remove the cover plate [2] and the
corresponding seal [3] (see following figure).
[1]
[2]
[3]
18643211
4. Determine the vertical distance "x" between oil level and sealing surface of the gear
unit housing (see following figure).
90
X
18646283
70
5. Compare the determined value "x" to the max. distance between oil level and sealing
surface of the gear unit housing specified in the following table. Adjust the fill level if
required.
Gear unit type
R07
R17
R27
R47
R57
F27
Max. distance x [mm] between oil level and sealing surface of the gear
unit housing for mounting position
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
2 stages
52 1
27 1
27 1
27 1
27 1
27 1
3 stages
49 1
21 1
21 1
21 1
21 1
21 1
2 stages
63 1
18 1
46 1
18 1
46 1
46 1
3 stages
58 1
11 2
40 2
11 2
40 2
40 2
2 stages
74 1
22 1
45 1
22 1
45 1
45 1
3 stages
76 1
19 1
42 1
19 1
42 1
42 1
2 stages
39 1
3 stages
32 1
2 stages
32 1
3 stages
28 1
2 stages
78 1
31 1
72 1
56 1
78 1
78 1
3 stages
71 1
24 1
70 1
45 1
71 1
71 1
irrespective of the mounting position

W10
12 1
W20
19 1
W30
31 1
71
6. Close the gear unit after the oil level check:
Re-attach the seal of the cover plate. Make sure that the sealing surfaces are
clean and dry.
Screw on the cover plate. Tighten the cover screws with the rated tightening
torque according to the following table from the inside to the outside in the order
illustrated in the figure. Repeat the tightening procedure until the screws are
properly tightened. Only use impulse drivers or torque wrenches in order to
prevent the cover plate from being damaged (no impact drivers).
7
1
5
1
3
4
1
E
18649739
Gear unit
type
72
Figure
Retaining
thread
Rated tightening torque TN

[Nm]
Minimum tightening torque TN

[Nm]
R/RF07
M5
R/RF17/27
R/RF47/57
M6
11
M5
M6
11
F27
W10
W20
W30
Checking the oil

via the cover plate

2. Open the cover plate of the gear unit according to section "Checking the oil via the
cover plate" (page 70).
3. Take an oil sample via the cover plate opening.
Viscosity
5. Check the oil level. See section "Checking the oil level via the cover plate" (page 70).
6. Screw on the cover plate. Observe the order and the tightening torques according to
section "Checking the oil level via the cover plate" (page 70)
Checking the oil

via the cover plate
WARNING
Severe injuries.
cover plate".
3. Completely drain the oil in to a vessel via the cover plate opening.
4. Fill in new oil of the same type via the cover plate opening (otherwise consult the
customer service). Do not mix different synthetic lubricants.
Pour in the oil in accordance with the mounting position or as specified on the
nameplate. See section "Lubricant fill quantities" (page 110).
5. Check the oil level.
6. Screw on the cover plate. Observe the order and the tightening torques according to
section "Checking the oil level via the cover plate" (page 70)
73
6
6.6.4
C: S37 helical-worm gear units without oil level plug and cover plate
Checking the oil

level via the screw
plug
The S37 gear unit is not equipped with an oil level plug or a cover plate. This is why the
oil level is checked via the control bore.
2. Set up the gear unit in M5 or M6 mounting position, i.e. control bore always on top.
3. Remove the screw plug [1] (see following figure).
[1]
18655371
4. Insert the dipstick vertically via the control bore all the way to the bottom of the gear
unit housing. Pull out the dipstick vertically (see following figure).
90
18658699
74
5. Determine the size of the section "x" of the dipstick covered with lubricant using a caliper (see following figure).
X
18661771
6. Compare the determined value "x" to the min. value depending on the mounting position specified in the following table. Correct the fill level if required.
Oil level = wetted section x [mm] of the dipstick
Gear unit
type
S37
Mounting position
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
10 1
24 1
34 1
37 1
24 1
24 1
7. Re-insert and tighten the screw plug.
75
Checking the oil

via the screw plug
screw plug".
3. Take an oil sample via the screw plug bore.
Viscosity
Changing the oil

via the screw plug
WARNING
Severe injuries.
screw plug".
3. Completely drain the oil via the screw plug bore.
4. Fill in new oil of the same type via the control bore (otherwise consult the customer
service). Do not mix different synthetic lubricants.
according to the mounting position. Observe section "Lubricant fill quantities"
(page 111).
5. Check the oil level.
76
6.6.5
D: SPIROPLAN W37/W47 in mounting positions M1, M2, M3, M5, M6 with oil level plug
Checking the oil

levelvia the oil
level plug
Proceed as follows to check the oil level of the gear unit:

2. Set up the gear unit in M1 mounting position.
3. Slowly remove the oil level plug (see following figure). Small amounts of oil may leak
out.
787235211
4. Check the oil level according to the following figure.

[1]
[2]
X max.
Oil
min. X
634361867
[1] Oil level bore
[2] Reference oil level
oil level bore
Min and max fill level = x [mm]
M10 x 1
1.5
5. If the oil level is too low, fill in new oil of the same type via the oil level bore until the
oil level reaches the lower edge of the bore.
6. Re-insert the oil level plug.
77
Checking the oil

via the oil level
plug

2. Remove a little oil at the oil level plug.
Viscosity
Changing the oil

via the oil level
plug
WARNING
Severe injuries.
2. Set up the gear unit in M5 or M6 mounting position.
Positions" (page 82).
See chapter "Mounting
3. Place a container underneath the oil level plug.

4. Remove the oil level plugs on the A and B side of the gear unit.
6. Re-insert the lower oil level plug.
7. Fill in new oil of the same type via the upper oil level plug bore (otherwise consult the
Check the oil level according to section "Checking the oil level via the oil level
plug"
8. Re-insert the upper oil level plug.
78
6.6.6
E: SPIROPLAN W37/W47 in M4 mounting position without oil level plug and cover plate
Checking the oil

level via the screw
plug
The W37/W47 gear units are not equipped with an oil level plug or a cover plate. This is
why the oil level is checked via the control bore.
3. Remove the screw plug.
4. Insert the dipstick vertically via the control bore all the way to the bottom of the gear
unit housing. Mark the point of the dipstick where it exits the gear unit. Pull out the
dipstick vertically (see following figure).
784447371
5. Determine the section "x" between the wetted part and the marking using a caliper
(see following figure).
X
785020811
79
6. Compare the determined value "x" to the min. value depending on the mounting position specified in the following table. Correct the fill level if required.
Oil level = wetted section x [mm] of the dipstick
Mounting position during the check
Gear unit type
M5
Lying on the A side
M6
Lying on the B side
W37 in M4 mounting
position
37 1
29 1
W47 in M4 mounting
position
41 1
30 1

Checking the oil
via the screw plug

2. Remove a little oil at the oil screw plug.
Viscosity
Changing the oil

via the screw plug
WARNING
Severe injuries.
Positions" (page 82).
See chapter "Mounting
3. Place a container underneath the screw plug.

4. Remove the screw plugs on the A and B side of the gear unit.
80
6. Re-insert the lower screw plug.

7. Fill in new oil of the same type via the upper screw plug bore (otherwise consult the
Check the oil level according to section "Checking the oil level via the oil level
plug"
8. Re-insert the upper screw plug.
6.6.7
Replacing the oil seal
NOTICE
Oil seals with a temperature below 0 C may get damaged during installation.
Store oil seals at ambient temperatures over 0 C.
Warm up the oil seals prior to installation if required.
1. When changing the oil seal, ensure that there is a sufficient grease reservoir between
the dust lip and protective lip, depending on the type of gear unit.
2. If you use double oil seals, fill one-third of the gap with grease.
6.6.8
Gear unit coating
NOTICE
Breather valves and oil seals may be damaged during painting or re-painting.
Thoroughly cover the breather valves and the sealing lip of the oil seals with strips
prior to painting.
Remove the strips after painting.
81
kVA
Mounting Positions
Designation of the mounting positions
P Hz
Mounting Positions
7.1
Designation of the mounting positions

SEW differentiates between six mounting positions, M1 M6. The following figure
shows the spatial orientation of the gearmotor in mounting positions M1 M6.
M6
M6
M1
M1
M2
M5
M2
M5
M4
M4
M3
M3
R..
M6
M6
M1
M2
M2
M1
M5
M5
M4
M4
M3
M3
F..
M6
M1
M1
M6
M2
M5
M5
M2
M4
M4
M3
M3
W..
82
Mounting Positions
Churning losses
7.2
kVA
i
P Hz
Churning losses
Churning losses may occur in some mounting positions. Contact SEW-EURODRIVE in
case of the following combinations:
Mounting position
M2, M4
Gear unit type
Gear unit size
Input speed
[rpm]
97 107
> 2500
> 107
>1500
R
F
M2, M3, M4, M5, M6
M1, M2, M3, M4, M5, M6
7.3
97 107
> 2500
> 107
> 1500
77 107
> 2500
> 107
> 1500
77 97
> 2500
37 47
> 1500
Key
INFORMATION
The SPIROPLAN gearmotors are not dependent on the mounting position, except for
W37 and W47 in the M4 mounting position. However, mounting positions M1 to M6
are also shown for SPIROPLAN gearmotors to assist you in working with this documentation.
Note: SPIROPLAN gearmotors of sizes W10 W30 cannot be equipped with breather
valves, oil level plugs or drain plugs.
7.3.1
Symbols used
The following table shows the symbols used in the mounting position sheets and what
they mean:
Symbol
Meaning
Breather valve
Oil level plug
Oil drain plug
83
84
kVA
i
Mounting Positions
Helical gearmotors R
P Hz
7.4
7.4.1
R07 ... R167
Mounting Positions
7.4.2
kVA
i
P Hz
RF07 ... RF167, RZ07 ... RZ87
85
kVA
i
7.4.3
86
Mounting Positions
P Hz
R07F ... R87F
Mounting Positions
Helical gearmotors RX
7.5
7.5.1
RX57 ... RX107
kVA
i
P Hz
87
kVA
i
7.5.2
88
Mounting Positions
P Hz
RXF57 ... RXF107
Mounting Positions
Parallel-shaft helical gearmotors F
7.6
7.6.1
F27 ... F157 / FA27B ... F157B / FH27B .. FH157B / FV27B ... FV107B
kVA
i
P Hz
89
kVA
i
7.6.2
90
Mounting Positions
P Hz
FF27 ... FF157 / FAF27 ... FAF157 / FHF27 ... FHF157 / FAZ27 ... FAZ157 / FHZ27 ... FHZ157 / FVF27
... FVF107 / FVZ27 ... FVZ107
Mounting Positions
7.6.3
kVA
i
P Hz
FA27 ... FA157 / FH27 ... FH157 / FV27 ... FV107 / FT37 ... FT157
91
92
kVA
i
Mounting Positions
Helical-bevel gearmotors K
P Hz
7.7
7.7.1
K37 ... K157 / KA37B ... KA157B / KH37B ... KH157B / KV37B ... KV107B
Mounting Positions
7.7.2
kVA
i
P Hz
K167 ... K187 / KH167B ... KH187B
93
kVA
i
7.7.3
94
Mounting Positions
P Hz
KF37 ... KF157 / KAF37 ... KAF157 / KHF37 ... KHF157 / KAZ37 ... KAZ157 / KHZ37 ... KHZ157 /
KVF37 ... KVF107 / KVZ37 ... KVZ107
Mounting Positions
7.7.4
kVA
i
P Hz
KA37 ... KA157 / KH37 ... KH157 / KV37 ... KV107 / KT37 ... KT157
95
kVA
i
7.7.5
96
Mounting Positions
P Hz
KH167 ... KH187
Mounting Positions
Helical-worm gearmotors S
7.8
7.8.1
S37
kVA
i
P Hz
97
kVA
i
7.8.2
98
Mounting Positions
P Hz
S47 ... S97
Mounting Positions
7.8.3
kVA
i
P Hz
SF37 / SAF37 / SHF37
99
kVA
i
7.8.4
100
Mounting Positions
P Hz
SF47 ... SF97 / SAF47 ... SAF97 / SHF47 ... SHF97 / SAZ47 ... SAZ97 / SHZ47 ... SHZ97
Mounting Positions
7.8.5
kVA
i
P Hz
SA37 / SH37 / ST37
101
kVA
i
7.8.6
102
Mounting Positions
P Hz
SA47 ... SA97 / SH47 ... SH97 / ST47 ... ST97
Mounting Positions
SPIROPLAN W gearmotors
7.9
7.9.1
W10 ... W30
kVA
i
P Hz
103
kVA
i
7.9.2
104
P Hz
Mounting Positions
WF10 ... WF30 / WAF10 ... WAF30
Mounting Positions
7.9.3
kVA
i
P Hz
WA10 ... WA30
105
kVA
i
7.9.4
106
P Hz
Mounting Positions
W37 ... W47 / WA37B ... WA47B / WH37B ... WH47B
Mounting Positions
7.9.5
kVA
i
P Hz
WF37 ... WF47 / WAF37 ... WAF47 / WHF37 ... WHF47
107
kVA
i
7.9.6
108
P Hz
Mounting Positions
WA37 ... WA47 / WH37 ... WH47 / WT37 ... WT47
Technical Data
Extended storage
Technical Data
8.1
Extended storage
kVA
i
P Hz
INFORMATION
For storage periods longer than 9 months, SEW-EURODRIVE recommends the "Extended storage" design. Gear units in this design are designated with a corresponding
label.
In this case, a VCI corrosion inhibitor (volatile corrosion inhibitor) is added to the lubricant in these gear units. Please note that this VCI anti-corrosion agent is only effective
in a temperature range of -25 C to +50 C. The flange contact surfaces and shaft ends
are also treated with an anti-corrosion agent.
Observe the storage conditions specified in the following table for extended storage:
8.1.1
Storage conditions
The gear units must remain tightly sealed until taken into operation to prevent the VCI
corrosion protection agent from evaporating.
The gear units come with the oil fill according to the specified mounting position (M1
M6). Check the oil level before you start operating the gear unit for the first time.
Climate zone
Temperate
(Europe, USA,
Canada, China
and Russia,
excluding tropical zones)
Tropical (Asia,
Africa, Central
and South America, Australia,
New Zealand
excluding temperate zones)
Packaging1)
Storage2)
Storage duration
Packed in containers, with

desiccant and moisture
indicator sealed in the plastic wrap.
Under roof, protected against rain and snow, no

shock loads.
Up to 3 years with regular

checks of the packaging and
moisture indicator (rel. humidity < 50%).
Open
Under roof and enclosed at constant temperature

and atmospheric humidity (5C < < 60C,
< 50% relative humidity).
No sudden temperature fluctuations. Controlled
ventilation with filter (free from dust and dirt). Protected against aggressive vapors and shocks.
2 years or more with regular

inspections. Check for cleanliness and mechanical damage during inspection. Check
corrosion protection.
Packed in containers, with

desiccant and moisture
indicator sealed in the plastic wrap.
Protected against insect
damage and mildew by
chemical treatment.
With roof, protected against rain and shocks.
Up to 3 years with regular

checks of the packaging and
moisture indicator (rel. humidity < 50%).
Open
Under roof and enclosed at constant temperature

and atmospheric humidity (5C < < 50C,
< 50% relative humidity).
No sudden temperature fluctuations. Controlled
ventilation with filter (free from dust and dirt). Protected against aggressive vapors and shocks.
Protected against insect damage.
2 years or more with regular

inspections. Check for cleanliness and mechanical damage during inspection. Check
corrosion protection.
1) The packaging must be carried out by an experienced company using the packaging materials that have been explicitly specified for
the particular application.
2) SEW-EURODRIVE recommends to store the gear units according to the mounting position.
109
kVA
i
8.2
Technical Data
Lubricants
P Hz
Lubricants
Unless a special arrangement is made, SEW-EURODRIVE supplies the drives with a
lubricant fill adapted for the specific gear unit and mounting position. The mounting position (M1 M6 section "Mounting positions") must be specified with the order. You must
adapt the lubricant fill in case of any subsequent changes made to the mounting position, see section "Lubricant fill quantities (page 113)"
8.2.1
Anti-friction bearing greases

The rolling bearings in gear units and motors are given a factory-fill with the greases
listed below. SEW-EURODRIVE recommends regreasing anti-friction bearings with a
grease fill at the same time as changing the oil.
Gear unit rolling bearings
Ambient temperature
Manufacturer
Type
-40 C to +80 C
Fuchs
Renolit CX-TOM 15
-40 C to +80 C
Klber
Petamo GHY 133 N
-40 C to +40 C
Castrol
Obeen FS 2
-20 C to +40 C
Fuchs
Plantogel 2S
Oil
INFORMATION
The following grease quantities are required:
For fast-running bearings (gear unit input end):

Fill the cavities between the rolling elements one-third full with grease.
For slow-running bearings (gear unit output end):

Fill the cavities between the rolling elements two-thirds full with grease.
110
Technical Data
Lubricants
8.2.2
kVA
i
P Hz
Lubricant table
The lubricant table on the following page shows the permitted lubricants for
SEW-EURODRIVE gear units. Observe the following legend with regards to the lubricant table.
Key to the lubricant

table
Abbreviations, meaning of shading and notes:

CLP
= Mineral oil
CLP PG
= Polyglycol (W gear units, conforms to USDA-H1)
CLP HC
= Synthetic hydrocarbons
= Ester oil (water hazard classification 1)
HCE
= Synthetic hydrocarbons + ester oil (USDA - H1 certification)
HLP
= Hydraulic oil
= Synthetic lubricant (= synthetic-based roller bearing grease)
= Mineral lubricant (= mineral-based rolling bearing grease)
1)
Helical-worm gear units with PG oil: consult SEW-EURODRIVE.
2)
Special lubricant for Spiroplan gear units only
3)
Recommendation: Select SEW fB 1.2
4)
Observe the critical starting behavior at low temperatures.
5)
Low-viscosity grease
6)
Ambient temperature
7)
Grease
Lubricant for the food industry (food grade oil)
Biodegradable oil (lubricant for agriculture, forestry, and water management)
Oil
111
112
BS.F..
PS.C..
PS.F..
W...(HW...)
R...,K...(HK...),
F...,S...(HS...)
S...(HS...)
4)
4)
4)
4)
4)
4)
4)
4)
4)
F...
+30
+40
+10
-20
-40
+60
+40
Standard
+40
-20
-40
+40
+60
+40
-20
+40
+40
Standard
-20
-40
+20
+10
+30
+80
+60
+40
Standard
-20
-40
Standard
-20
+0
+20
+10
Standard
-20
-40
-20
-10
-40
-40
-20
-20
-40
-20
-20
-40
-40
-40
-30
+25
+40
+60
+80
CLP (CC)
Oil
H1 PG
API GL5
CLP HC
DIN
51 818
CLP (CC)
CLP HC
H1 PG
CLP PG
H1 PG
API GL5
CLP PG 460
-SEW
CLPHC
NSF H1
CLP HC
CLP HC
2)
1)
1)
Mobil
SHC 626
Mobil
SHC 624
Mobil
Glygoyle 220
Mobil
SHC 624
7)
5)
Mobil
SHC 624
Mobillux
EP 004
Mobilgear 600
XP 220
VG 460
2)
3)
SAE 75W90 Mobil Synth Gear

Oil 75 W90
(~VG 100)
VG 32
00
VG 220
VG 32
Klbersynth
UH1 6-460
Klbersynth
UH1 14-151
Klbersynth
UH1 6-460
Klbersynth
UH1 6-460
Klber SEW
HT-460-5
Klberbio
CA2-460
Klberoil
4UH1-460 N
Klberoil
4UH1-220 N
Klberoil
4UH1-68 N
Klber-Summit
HySyn FG-32
Klbersynth
GH 6-220
Shell Cassida
Fluid HF 68
Shell Cassida
Fluid GL 220
Shell Cassida
Fluid GL 460
Shell Omala
HD 68
Shell Tivela Klbersynth

S 220
GH 6-220
2)
VG 460
3)
2)
3)
Shell Omala Klbersynth

HD 150
GEM 4-150 N

GEM 4-460 N
HD 460

S 680
GH 6-680
Mobilgear 600 Shell Omala

Klberoil
XP 100
GEM 1-150 N
100
Mobil
SHC 629
Mobil
SHC 634
Mobil Glygoyle
680
Mobilgear 600 Shell Omala Klberoil

XP 680
GEM 1-680 N
680
Isoflex
MT 30 ROT
Klber-Summit
HySyn FG-32
VG 220
VG 460
Shell Omala
HD 68
Mobil DTE 10 Shell Tellus

T 15
Excel 15
Mobil
SHC 624
Mobil
SHC 626
SAE 75W90 Mobil Synthetic

Gear Oil
(~VG 100)
75 W90
VG 460
VG 460
VG 68
VG 220
VG 460
VG 32
VG 68
VG 220
VG 150
VG 100
CLP PG
VG 150
CLP HC
VG 460
VG 680
CLP PG
CLP HC
VG 680
VG 22
VG 15
VG 32
CLP (CC)
HLP (HM)
CLP HC
VG 68
HLP (HM)
CLP HC
Klberoil
Mobilgear 600 Shell Omala
GEM 1-150 N
100
XP 100
Klberoil
Mobil DTE 10 Shell Tellus
GEM 1-68 N
T 32
Excel 32
VG 150
VG 100
VG 68-46
VG 32

HD 150
GEM 4-150 N
CLP (CC)
Mobil
SHC 629
VG 150
Aral Degol
GS 220
Aral Degol
BG 100
Aral Degol
BG 680
Aral Degol
BG 46
Aral Degol
BG 100
Aral Degol
PAS 220
Aral Degol
GS 220

GEM 4-220 N
HD 220

GH 6-220
S 220
Mobil
SHC 630
Mobil
Glygoyle 220
Aral Degol
BG 220
Mobilgear 600 Shell Omala Klberoil

GEM 1-220 N
220
XP 220
CLP HC
VG 220
VG 220
CLP PG
CLP HC
VG 220
CLP(CC)
Mobil
BP Enersyn
SG-XP 220
BP Energol
GR-XP 100
BP Enersyn
SG-XP 680
BP Energol
GR-XP 680
BP Energol
HLP-HM 15
BP Energol
GR-XP 100
BP Enersyn
SG-XP 220
BP Energol
GR-XP 220
Cetus
PAO 46
Synlube
CLP 220
Meropa 150
Pinnacle
EP 150
Pinnacle
EP 460
Synlube
CLP 680
Meropa 680
Rando
HDZ 15
Cetus
PAO 46
Rando EP
Ashless 46
Meropa 150
Pinnacle
EP 150
Tribol Bio Top

1418/460
Tribol
800/220
Tribol
1100/100
Tribol
800/680
Tribol
1100/680
Tribol
1100/68
Tribol
1100/100
Tribol
1510/220
Tribol
800/220
Synlube
CLP 220
Pinnacle
EP 220
Tribol
1100/220
Tribol
Meropa 220
Optimol
Renolin
PG 220
Renolin
CLP 220
TO T A L
Carter SY 220
Carter EP 220
Renolin Unisyn
CLP 68
Renolin
B 46 HVI
Renolin
CLP 150
Carter EP 100
Equivis ZS 46
OL 32
Renolin
PG 680
Renolin
SEW 680
Renolin
MR 310
Carter EP 680
Equivis ZS 15
Optileb
GT 220
Optileb
HY 68
Optileb
GT 460
Plantogear
460 S
Geralyn
SF 460
OL 32
Renolin Unisyn
CLP 68
Renolin
PG 220
Renolin
CLP 150
Carter SY 220
Carter EP 100
Alphasyn T32 Renolin Unisyn Dacnis SH 32
Optiflex A 220
Optigear
BM 100
Renolin Unisyn
Optigear
Carter SH 150
CLP 150
Synthetic X 150
Renolin Unisyn
Optigear
CLP 460
Synthetic X 460
Optiflex
A 680
Optigear
BM 680
Hyspin
AWS 22
Optilieb HY 32 Renolin Unisyn Dacnis SH 32
Optigear 32
Optigear
BM 100
Optigear
Renolin Unisyn Carter SH 150
Synthetic X 150
CLP 150
Optigear
Renolin Unisyn
Synthetic X 220
CLP 220
Optiflex A 220
Optigear BM 220
-20
-40
-20
-20
+40
ISO,NLGI
4)
4)
-15
Oil
DIN (ISO)
+50 +100
0
Standard
kVA
K...(HK...)
R...
C -50
6)
8
Technical Data
Lubricants
P Hz
Lubricant table
01 751 05 04
2845002123
Technical Data
Lubricants
8.2.3
kVA
i
P Hz
Lubricant fill quantities

The specified fill quantities are recommended values. The precise values vary depending on the number of stages and gear ratio. When filling, it is essential to check the oil
level plug since it indicates the precise oil volume.
The following tables show guide values for lubricant fill quantities in relation to the
mounting position M1 ... M6.
Helical (R) gear

units
R.., R..F
Gear unit
R07
Fill quantity in liters

M11)
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
0.12
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
R17
0.25
0.55
0.35
0.55
0.35
0.40
R27
0.25/0.40
0.70
0.50
0.70
0.50
0.50
R37
0.30/0.95
0.85
0.95
1.05
0.75
0.95
R47
0.70/1.50
1.60
1.50
1.65
1.50
1.50
R57
0.80/1.70
1.90
1.70
2.10
1.70
1.70
R67
1.10/2.30
2.40
2.80
2.90
1.80
2.00
R77
1.20/3.00
3.30
3.60
3.80
2.50
3.40
R87
2.30/6.0
6.4
7.2
7.2
6.3
6.5
R97
4.60/9.8
11.7
11.7
13.4
11.3
11.7
R107
6.0/13.7
16.3
16.9
19.2
13.2
15.9
R137
10.0/25.0
28.0
29.5
31.5
25.0
25.0
R147
15.4/40.0
46.5
48.0
52.0
39.5
41.0
R167
27.0/70.0
82.0
78.0
88.0
66.0
69.0
1) The larger gear unit of multi-stage gear units must be filled with the larger oil volume.
RF..
Gear unit
RF07

M11)
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
0.12
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
RF17
0.25
0.55
0.35
0.55
0.35
0.40
RF27
0.25/0.40
0.70
0.50
0.70
0.50
0.50
RF37
0.35/0.95
0.90
0.95
1.05
0.75
0.95
RF47
0.65/1.50
1.60
1.50
1.65
1.50
1.50
RF57
0.80/1.70
1.80
1.70
2.00
1.70
1.70
RF67
1.20/2.50
2.50
2.70
2.80
1.90
2.10
RF77
1.20/2.60
3.10
3.30
3.60
2.40
3.00
RF87
2.40/6.0
6.4
7.1
7.2
6.3
6.4
RF97
5.1/10.2
11.9
11.2
14.0
11.2
11.8
RF107
6.3/14.9
15.9
17.0
19.2
13.1
15.9
RF137
9.5/25.0
27.0
29.0
32.5
25.0
25.0
RF147
16.4/42.0
47.0
48.0
52.0
42.0
42.0
RF167
26.0/70.0
82.0
78.0
88.0
65.0
71.0
113
kVA
i
Technical Data
Lubricants
P Hz
RX..
Gear unit

M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
RX57
0.60
0.80
1.30
1.30
0.90
0.90
RX67
0.80
0.80
1.70
1.90
1.10
1.10
RX77
1.10
1.50
2.60
2.70
1.60
1.60
RX87
1.70
2.50
4.80
4.80
2.90
2.90
RX97
2.10
3.40
7.4
7.0
4.80
4.80
RX107
3.90
5.6
11.6
11.9
7.7
7.7
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
RXF57
0.50
0.80
1.10
1.10
0.70
0.70
RXF67
0.70
0.80
1.50
1.40
1.00
1.00
RXF77
0.90
1.30
2.40
2.00
1.60
1.60
RXF87
1.60
1.95
4.90
3.95
2.90
2.90
RXF97
2.10
3.70
7.1
6.3
4.80
4.80
RXF107
3.10
5.7
11.2
9.3
7.2
7.2
RXF..
Gear unit
114
Technical Data
Lubricants
Parallel shaft helical (F) gear units
kVA
i
P Hz
F.., FA..B, FH..B, FV..B

Gear unit

M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
F..27
0.60
0.80
0.65
0.70
0.60
0.60
F..37
0.95
1.25
0.70
1.25
1.00
1.10
F..47
1.50
1.80
1.10
1.90
1.50
1.70
F..57
2.60
3.50
2.10
3.50
2.80
2.90
F..67
2.70
3.80
1.90
3.80
2.90
3.20
F..77
5.9
7.3
4.30
8.0
6.0
6.3
F..87
10.8
13.0
7.7
13.8
10.8
11.0
F..97
18.5
22.5
12.6
25.2
18.5
20.0
F..107
24.5
32.0
19.5
37.5
27.0
27.0
F..127
40.5
54.5
34.0
61.0
46.3
47.0
F..157
69.0
104.0
63.0
105.0
86.0
78.0
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
FF27
0.60
0.80
0.65
0.70
0.60
0.60
FF37
1.00
1.25
0.70
1.30
1.00
1.10
FF47
1.60
1.85
1.10
1.90
1.50
1.70
FF57
2.80
3.50
2.10
3.70
2.90
3.00
FF67
2.70
3.80
1.90
3.80
2.90
3.20
FF77
5.9
7.3
4.30
8.1
6.0
6.3
FF87
10.8
13.2
7.8
14.1
11.0
11.2
FF..
Gear unit
FF97
19.0
22.5
12.6
25.6
18.9
20.5
FF107
25.5
32.0
19.5
38.5
27.5
28.0
FF127
41.5
55.5
34.0
63.0
46.3
49.0
FF157
72.0
105.0
64.0
106.0
87.0
79.0
FA.., FH.., FV.., FAF.., FAZ.., FHF.., FHZ.., FVF.., FVZ.., FT..
Gear unit

M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
F..27
0.60
0.80
0.65
0.70
0.60
0.60
F..37
0.95
1.25
0.70
1.25
1.00
1.10
F..47
1.50
1.80
1.10
1.90
1.50
1.70
F..57
2.70
3.50
2.10
3.40
2.90
3.00
F..67
2.70
3.80
1.90
3.80
2.90
3.20
F..77
5.9
7.3
4.30
8.0
6.0
6.3
F..87
10.8
13.0
7.7
13.8
10.8
11.0
F..97
18.5
22.5
12.6
25.2
18.5
20.0
F..107
24.5
32.0
19.5
37.5
27.0
27.0
F..127
39.0
54.5
34.0
61.0
45.0
46.5
F..157
68.0
103.0
62.0
104.0
85.0
79.5
115
kVA
i
Technical Data
Lubricants
P Hz
Helical-bevel (K)
gear units
K.., KA..B, KH..B, KV..B

Gear unit

M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
K..37
0.50
1.00
1.00
1.25
0.95
0.95
K..47
0.80
1.30
1.50
2.00
1.60
1.60
K..57
1.10
2.20
2.20
2.80
2.30
2.10
K..67
1.10
2.40
2.60
3.45
2.60
2.60
K..77
2.20
4.10
4.40
5.8
4.20
4.40
K..87
3.70
8.0
8.7
10.9
8.0
8.0
K..97
7.0
14.0
15.7
20.0
15.7
15.5
K..107
10.0
21.0
25.5
33.5
24.0
24.0
K..127
21.0
41.5
44.0
54.0
40.0
41.0
K..157
31.0
62.0
65.0
90.0
58.0
62.0
K..167
33.0
95.0
105.0
123.0
85.0
84.0
K..187
53.0
152.0
167.0
200
143.0
143.0
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
KF37
0.50
1.10
1.10
1.50
1.00
1.00
KF47
0.80
1.30
1.70
2.20
1.60
1.60
KF57
1.20
2.20
2.40
3.15
2.50
2.30
KF67
1.10
2.40
2.80
3.70
2.70
2.70
KF77
2.10
4.10
4.40
5.9
4.50
4.50
KF87
3.70
8.2
9.0
11.9
8.4
8.4
KF97
7.0
14.7
17.3
21.5
15.7
16.5
KF..
Gear unit
KF107
10.0
21.8
25.8
35.1
25.2
25.2
KF127
21.0
41.5
46.0
55.0
41.0
41.0
KF157
31.0
66.0
69.0
92.0
62.0
62.0
KA.., KH.., KV.., KAF.., KHF.., KVF.., KAZ.., KHZ.., KVZ.., KT..
Gear unit
116

M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
K..37
0.50
1.00
1.00
1.40
1.00
1.00
K..47
0.80
1.30
1.60
2.15
1.60
1.60
K..57
1.20
2.20
2.40
3.15
2.70
2.40
K..67
1.10
2.40
2.70
3.70
2.60
2.60
K..77
2.10
4.10
4.60
5.9
4.40
4.40
K..87
3.70
8.2
8.8
11.1
8.0
8.0
K..97
7.0
14.7
15.7
20.0
15.7
15.7
K..107
10.0
20.5
24.0
32.4
24.0
24.0
K..127
21.0
41.5
43.0
52.0
40.0
40.0
K..157
31.0
66.0
67.0
87.0
62.0
62.0
K..167
33.0
95.0
105.0
123.0
85.0
84.0
K..187
53.0
152.0
167.0
200
143.0
143.0
Technical Data
Lubricants
Helical-worm (S)
gear units
kVA
i
P Hz
S
Gear unit

M1
M2
M31)
M4
M5
M6
S..37
0.25
0.40
0.50
0.55
0.40
0.40
S..47
0.35
0.80
0.70/0.90
1.00
0.80
0.80
S..57
0.50
1.20
1.00/1.20
1.45
1.30
1.30
S..67
1.00
2.00
2.20/3.10
3.10
2.60
2.60
S..77
1.90
4.20
3.70/5.4
5.9
4.40
4.40
S..87
3.30
8.1
6.9/10.4
11.3
8.4
8.4
S..97
6.8
15.0
13.4/18.0
21.8
17.0
17.0
SF..
Gear unit

M1
M2
M31)
M4
M5
M6
SF37
0.25
0.40
0.50
0.55
0.40
0.40
SF47
0.40
0.90
0.90/1.05
1.05
1.00
1.00
SF57
0.50
1.20
1.00/1.50
1.55
1.40
1.40
SF67
1.00
2.20
2.30/3.00
3.20
2.70
2.70
SF77
1.90
4.10
3.90/5.8
6.5
4.90
4.90
SF87
3.80
8.0
7.1/10.1
12.0
9.1
9.1
SF97
7.4
15.0
13.8/18.8
22.6
18.0
18.0
SA.., SH.., SAF.., SHZ.., SAZ.., SHF.., ST..

Gear unit

M1
M2
M31)
M4
M5
M6
S..37
0.25
0.40
0.50
0.50
0.40
0.40
S..47
0.40
0.80
0.70/0.90
1.00
0.80
0.80
S..57
0.50
1.10
1.00/1.50
1.50
1.20
1.20
S..67
1.00
2.00
1.80/2.60
2.90
2.50
2.50
S..77
1.80
3.90
3.60/5.0
5.8
4.50
4.50
S..87
3.80
7.4
6.0/8.7
10.8
8.0
8.0
S..97
7.0
14.0
11.4/16.0
20.5
15.7
15.7
SPIROPLAN
(W) gear units
The fill quantity of SPIROPLAN gear units W..10 to W..30 does not vary, irrespective
of their mounting position. Only the fill quantity of SPIROPLAN gear units W..37 and
W..47 in mounting position M4 are different from that of other mounting positions.
Gear unit

M1
M2
M3
M4
W..10
0.16
W..20
0.24
W..30
M5
M6
0.40
W..37
0.50
0.70
0.50
W..47
0.90
1.40
0.90
WF47
0.90
1.40
0.90
WA47
0.90
1.25
0.90
117
kVA
Malfunctions/Service
Gear unit
P Hz
WARNING
De-energize the motor before you start working on the unit.
Secure the motor against unintended power-up.
CAUTION
Severe injuries.
Let the gear unit cool down before you start working on it.
Only remove the oil level and oil drain plug very carefully.
NOTICE
Improper handling of the gear unit and the motor may lead to damages.
9.1
Any repair work on SEW drives may be performed by qualified personnel only.
Only qualified personnel is permitted to separate drive and motor.
Consult SEW-EURODRIVE customer service.
Gear unit
Fault
Possible cause
Remedy
Unusual, regular running

noise
Meshing/grinding noise: Bearing damage
Check the oil see "Inspection/maintenance for the

gear unit" (page 67), change bearings.
Knocking noise: Irregularity in the gearing
Contact customer service.
Unusual, irregular running

noise
Foreign bodies in the oil
Oil leakage1)
From inspection cover
From the motor flange
From the motor oil seal
From the gear unit
flange
From the output end oil
seal.
Rubber seal on the gear cover plate leaking
Tighten the screws on the gear cover plate and

observe the gear unit. If oil still leaks: Contact customer
service.
Seal defective.
Contact customer service.
Gear unit not ventilated
Vent the gear unit see "Mounting Positions

(page 82)".
Too much oil
Correct the oil fill quantity see "Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit" (page 67),
Drive installed in incorrect mounting position
Oil leaking from breather

valve
Output shaft does not turn

although the motor is running or the input shaft is
rotated
Check the oil see "Inspection/maintenance for

the gear unit" (page 67),
Stop the drive, contact customer service
Properly adjust the breather valve, see "Mounting

Positions (page 82)"
Correct the oil level see "Inspection/
maintenance for the gear unit" (page 67),
Frequent cold starts (oil foams) and/or high oil

level.
Use an oil expansion tank
Connection between shaft and hub in gear unit

interrupted
Send in the gear unit/gearmotor for repair.
1) Short-term oil / grease leakage at the oil seal is possible in the run-in phase (48 hours running time).
118
AM/AQ/AL adapter
9.2
AM/AQ/AL adapter
Malfunction
Possible cause
Remedy

noise
Meshing/grinding noise: Bearing damage.
Contact SEW-EURODRIVE customer service
Oil leaking
Seal defective

although the motor is running or the input shaft is
rotated
Connection between shaft and hub in gear

unit interrupted
Send the gear unit to SEW-EURODRIVE for repair.
Change in running noise

and / or vibrations.
Annular gear wear, short-term torque transfer

through metal contact
Change the annular gear
Bolts to secure hub axially are loose.
Tighten the screws
Premature wear in annular

gear
9.3
Contact with aggressive fluids / oils;

ozone influence; too high ambient
temperatures etc, which can cause a
change in the physical properties of the
annular gear.
Impermissibly high ambient/contact
temperature for the annular gear;
maximum permitted temperature: -20 C
to +80 C
Overload
Malfunction
Possible cause
Remedy

noise
Meshing/grinding noise: Bearing damage.
Oil leaking
Seal defective

although the input shaft is
rotated.
Connection between shaft and hub in gear

unit or cover interrupted
Send the gear unit to SEW-EURODRIVE for repair.
119
Customer service
9.4
Customer service
Please have the following information available if you require customer service
assistance:
Nameplate data (complete)
Type and extent of the problem
Time the problem occurred and any accompanying circumstances
Assumed cause
A digital photograph if possible
9.5
Disposal
Dispose gear units in accordance with the regulations in force regarding respective materials:
Steel scrap
Housing parts
Gears
Shafts
Roller bearing
120
Parts of the worm gears are made of non-ferrous metals. Dispose of the worm gears
as appropriate.
Collect waste oil and dispose of it according to the regulations in force.
Address List
10
10
Address List
Germany
Headquarters
Production
Sales
Bruchsal
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG

Ernst-Blickle-Strae 42
D-76646 Bruchsal
P.O. Box
Postfach 3023 D-76642 Bruchsal
Tel. +49 7251 75-0

Fax +49 7251 75-1970
http://www.sew-eurodrive.de
sew@sew-eurodrive.de
Service Competence Center
Central

D-76676 Graben-Neudorf
Tel. +49 7251 75-1710

Fax +49 7251 75-1711
sc-mitte@sew-eurodrive.de
North

Alte Ricklinger Strae 40-42
D-30823 Garbsen (near Hannover)
Tel. +49 5137 8798-30

Fax +49 5137 8798-55
sc-nord@sew-eurodrive.de
East

Dnkritzer Weg 1
D-08393 Meerane (near Zwickau)
Tel. +49 3764 7606-0

Fax +49 3764 7606-30
sc-ost@sew-eurodrive.de
South

Domagkstrae 5
D-85551 Kirchheim (near Mnchen)
Tel. +49 89 909552-10

Fax +49 89 909552-50
sc-sued@sew-eurodrive.de
West

Siemensstrae 1
D-40764 Langenfeld (near Dsseldorf)
Tel. +49 2173 8507-30

Fax +49 2173 8507-55
sc-west@sew-eurodrive.de
Electronics

D-76646 Bruchsal
Tel. +49 7251 75-1780

Fax +49 7251 75-1769
sc-elektronik@sew-eurodrive.de
Drive Service Hotline / 24 Hour Service
+49 180 5 SEWHELP

+49 180 5 7394357
Additional addresses for service in Germany provided on request!

France
Production
Sales
Service
Haguenau
SEW-USOCOME
48-54 route de Soufflenheim
B. P. 20185
F-67506 Haguenau Cedex
Tel. +33 3 88 73 67 00
Fax +33 3 88 73 66 00
http://www.usocome.com
sew@usocome.com
Production
Forbach
SEW-USOCOME
Zone industrielle
Technople Forbach Sud
B. P. 30269
F-57604 Forbach Cedex
Tel. +33 3 87 29 38 00
Assembly
Sales
Service
Bordeaux
SEW-USOCOME
Parc d'activits de Magellan
62 avenue de Magellan - B. P. 182
F-33607 Pessac Cedex
Tel. +33 5 57 26 39 00
Fax +33 5 57 26 39 09
Lyon
SEW-USOCOME
Parc d'affaires Roosevelt
Rue Jacques Tati
F-69120 Vaulx en Velin
Tel. +33 4 72 15 37 00
Fax +33 4 72 15 37 15
Nantes
SEW-USOCOME
Parc dactivits de la fort
4 rue des Fontenelles
F-44140 Le Bignon
Tel. +33 2 40 78 42 00
Fax +33 2 40 78 42 20
Paris
SEW-USOCOME
Zone industrielle
2 rue Denis Papin
F-77390 Verneuil I'Etang
Tel. +33 1 64 42 40 80
Fax +33 1 64 42 40 88
Additional addresses for service in France provided on request!
121
Address List
10
Algeria
Sales
Alger
REDUCOM Sarl
16, rue des Frres Zaghnoune
Bellevue
16200 El Harrach Alger
Tel. +213 21 8214-91

Fax +213 21 8222-84
sew-algeria@reducom-dz.com
http://www.reducom-dz.com
Buenos Aires
SEW EURODRIVE ARGENTINA S.A.

Centro Industrial Garin, Lote 35
Ruta Panamericana Km 37,5
1619 Garin
Tel. +54 3327 4572-84

Fax +54 3327 4572-21
sewar@sew-eurodrive.com.ar
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.ar
Melbourne
SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD.

27 Beverage Drive
Tullamarine, Victoria 3043
Tel. +61 3 9933-1000

Fax +61 3 9933-1003
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.au
enquires@sew-eurodrive.com.au
Sydney

9, Sleigh Place, Wetherill Park
New South Wales, 2164
Tel. +61 2 9725-9900

Fax +61 2 9725-9905
Wien
SEW-EURODRIVE Ges.m.b.H.
Richard-Strauss-Strasse 24
A-1230 Wien
Tel. +43 1 617 55 00-0

Fax +43 1 617 55 00-30
http://www.sew-eurodrive.at
sew@sew-eurodrive.at
Minsk
SEW-EURODRIVE BY
RybalkoStr. 26
BY-220033 Minsk
Tel.+375 (17) 298 38 50

Fax +375 (17) 29838 50
sales@sew.by
Assembly
Sales
Service
Brussels
SEW Caron-Vector
Research park Haasrode
Evenementenlaan 7
BE-3001 Leuven
Tel. +32 16 386-311

Fax +32 16 386-336
http://www.sew-eurodrive.be
info@sew-eurodrive.be
Industrial Gears
SEW Caron-Vector
Rue de Parc Industriel, 31
BE-6900 Marche-en-Famenne
Tel. +32 84 219-878

Fax +32 84 219-879
service-wallonie@sew-eurodrive.be
Antwerp
SEW Caron-Vector
Glasstraat, 19
BE-2170 Merksem
Tel. +32 3 64 19 333

Fax +32 3 64 19 336
service-antwerpen@sew-eurodrive.be
Sao Paulo
SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda.

Avenida Amncio Gaiolli, 152 - Rodovia Presidente Dutra Km 208
Guarulhos - 07251-250 - SP
SAT - SEW ATENDE - 0800 7700496
Tel. +55 11 2489-9133

Fax +55 11 2480-3328
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.br
sew@sew.com.br
Sofia
BEVER-DRIVE GmbH
Bogdanovetz Str.1
BG-1606 Sofia
Tel. +359 2 9151160

Fax +359 2 9151166
bever@mail.bg
Argentina
Assembly
Sales
Service
Australia
Assembly
Sales
Service
Austria
Assembly
Sales
Service
Belarus
Sales
Belgium
Brazil
Production
Sales
Service
Bulgaria
Sales
122
Address List
10
Cameroon
Sales
Douala
Electro-Services
Rue Drouot Akwa
B.P. 2024
Douala
Tel. +237 33 431137

Fax +237 33 431137
electrojemba@yahoo.fr
Toronto
SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD.

210 Walker Drive
Bramalea, ON L6T 3W1
Tel. +1 905 791-1553

Fax +1 905 791-2999
http://www.sew-eurodrive.ca
l.watson@sew-eurodrive.ca
Vancouver

Tilbury Industrial Park
7188 Honeyman Street
Delta, BC V4G 1G1
Tel. +1 604 946-5535

Fax +1 604 946-2513
b.wake@sew-eurodrive.ca
Montreal

2555 Rue Leger
Lasalle, PQ H8N 2V9
Tel. +1 514 367-1124

Fax +1 514 367-3677
a.peluso@sew-eurodrive.ca
Canada
Assembly
Sales
Service
Additional addresses for service in Canada provided on request!

Chile
Santiago de
Chile
SEW-EURODRIVE CHILE LTDA.

Las Encinas 1295
Parque Industrial Valle Grande
LAMPA
RCH-Santiago de Chile
P.O. Box
Casilla 23 Correo Quilicura - Santiago - Chile
Tel. +56 2 75770-00

Fax +56 2 75770-01
http://www.sew-eurodrive.cl
ventas@sew-eurodrive.cl
Production
Assembly
Sales
Service
Tianjin
SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd.

No. 46, 7th Avenue, TEDA
Tianjin 300457
Tel. +86 22 25322612

Fax +86 22 25323273
info@sew-eurodrive.cn
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.cn
Assembly
Sales
Service
Suzhou
SEW-EURODRIVE (Suzhou) Co., Ltd.

333, Suhong Middle Road
Suzhou Industrial Park
Jiangsu Province, 215021
Tel. +86 512 62581781

Fax +86 512 62581783
suzhou@sew-eurodrive.cn
Guangzhou
SEW-EURODRIVE (Guangzhou) Co., Ltd.

No. 9, JunDa Road
East Section of GETDD
Guangzhou 510530
Tel. +86 20 82267890

Fax +86 20 82267922
guangzhou@sew-eurodrive.cn
Shenyang
SEW-EURODRIVE (Shenyang) Co., Ltd.

10A-2, 6th Road
Shenyang Economic Technological Development Area
Shenyang, 110141
Tel. +86 24 25382538

Fax +86 24 25382580
shenyang@sew-eurodrive.cn
Wuhan
SEW-EURODRIVE (Wuhan) Co., Ltd.

10A-2, 6th Road
No. 59, the 4th Quanli Road, WEDA
430056 Wuhan
Tel. +86 27 84478388

Fax +86 27 84478389
wuhan@sew-eurodrive.cn
Xi'An
SEW-EURODRIVE (Xi'An) Co., Ltd.

No. 12 Jinye 2nd Road
Xi'An High-Technology Industrial Development
Zone
Xi'An 710065
Tel. +86 29 68686262

Fax +86 29 68686311
xian@sew-eurodrive.cn
Assembly
Sales
Service
China
Additional addresses for service in China provided on request!
123
Address List
10
Colombia
Assembly
Sales
Service
Bogot
SEW-EURODRIVE COLOMBIA LTDA.

Calle 22 No. 132-60
Bodega 6, Manzana B
Santaf de Bogot
Tel. +57 1 54750-50

Fax +57 1 54750-44
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.co
sewcol@sew-eurodrive.com.co
Zagreb
KOMPEKS d. o. o.
Zeleni dol 10
HR 10 000 Zagreb
Tel. +385 1 4613-158

Fax +385 1 4613-158
kompeks@inet.hr
Prague
SEW-EURODRIVE CZ S.R.O.
Business Centrum Praha
Lun 591
CZ-16000 Praha 6 - Vokovice
Tel. +420 255 709 601

Fax +420 220 121 237
http://www.sew-eurodrive.cz
sew@sew-eurodrive.cz
Copenhagen
SEW-EURODRIVEA/S
Geminivej 28-30
DK-2670 Greve
Tel. +45 43 9585-00

Fax +45 43 9585-09
http://www.sew-eurodrive.dk
sew@sew-eurodrive.dk
Cairo
Copam Egypt
for Engineering & Agencies
33 EI Hegaz ST, Heliopolis, Cairo
Tel. +20 2 22566-299 + 1 23143088

Fax +20 2 22594-757
http://www.copam-egypt.com/
copam@datum.com.eg
Tallin
ALAS-KUUL AS
Reti tee 4
EE-75301 Peetri kla, Rae vald, Harjumaa
Tel. +372 6593230

Fax +372 6593231
veiko.soots@alas-kuul.ee
Assembly
Sales
Service
Lahti
SEW-EURODRIVE OY
Vesimentie 4
FIN-15860 Hollola 2
Tel. +358 201 589-300

Fax +358 3 780-6211
sew@sew.fi
http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
Production
Assembly
Karkkila
SEW Industrial Gears Oy

Valurinkatu 6, PL 8
FI-03600 Karkkila, 03601 Karkkila
Tel. +358 201 589-300

Fax +358 201 589-310
sew@sew.fi
Libreville
ESG Electro Services Gabun

Feu Rouge Lalala
1889 Libreville
Gabun
Tel. +241 741059

Fax +241 741059
esg_services@yahoo.fr
Normanton
SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd.
Beckbridge Industrial Estate
P.O. Box No.1
Normanton, West-Yorkshire
WF6 1QR
Tel. +44 1924 893-855

Fax +44 1924 893-702
http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.uk
info@sew-eurodrive.co.uk
Croatia
Sales
Service
Czech Republic
Sales
Denmark
Assembly
Sales
Service
Egypt
Sales
Service
Estonia
Sales
Finland
Gabon
Sales
Great Britain
Assembly
Sales
Service
124
Address List
10
Greece
Sales
Service
Athens
Christ. Boznos & Son S.A.

12, K. Mavromichali Street
P.O. Box 80136
GR-18545 Piraeus
Tel. +30 2 1042 251-34

Fax +30 2 1042 251-59
http://www.boznos.gr
info@boznos.gr
Hong Kong
SEW-EURODRIVE LTD.
Unit No. 801-806, 8th Floor
Hong Leong Industrial Complex
No. 4, Wang Kwong Road
Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel. +852 36902200

Fax +852 36902211
contact@sew-eurodrive.hk
Budapest
SEW-EURODRIVE Kft.
H-1037 Budapest
Kunigunda u. 18
Tel. +36 1 437 06-58

Fax +36 1 437 06-50
office@sew-eurodrive.hu
Registered Office
Assembly
Sales
Service
Vadodara
SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited

Plot No. 4, GIDC
POR Ramangamdi Vadodara - 391 243
Gujarat
Tel. +91 265 3045200, +91 265

2831086
Fax +91 265 3045300, +91 265
2831087
http://www.seweurodriveindia.com
sales@seweurodriveindia.com
subodh.ladwa@seweurodriveindia.com
Assembly
Sales
Service
Chennai

Plot No. K3/1, Sipcot Industrial Park Phase II
Mambakkam Village
Sriperumbudur - 602105
Kancheepuram Dist, Tamil Nadu
Tel. +91 44 37188888

Fax +91 44 37188811
c.v.shivkumar@seweurodriveindia.com
Dublin
Alperton Engineering Ltd.

48 Moyle Road
Dublin Industrial Estate
Glasnevin, Dublin 11
Tel. +353 1 830-6277

Fax +353 1 830-6458
info@alperton.ie
http://www.alperton.ie
Tel-Aviv
Liraz Handasa Ltd.

Ahofer Str 34B / 228
58858 Holon
Tel. +972 3 5599511

Fax +972 3 5599512
http://www.liraz-handasa.co.il
office@liraz-handasa.co.il
Solaro
SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s.

Via Bernini,14
I-20020 Solaro (Milano)
Tel. +39 02 96 9801

Fax +39 02 96 799781
http://www.sew-eurodrive.it
sewit@sew-eurodrive.it
Abidjan
SICA
Socit industrielle & commerciale pour
l'Afrique
165, Boulevard de Marseille
26 BP 1115 Abidjan 26
Tel. +225 21 25 79 44
Fax +225 21 25 88 28
sicamot@aviso.ci
Hong Kong
Assembly
Sales
Service
Hungary
Sales
Service
India
Ireland
Sales
Service
Israel
Sales
Italy
Assembly
Sales
Service
Ivory Coast
Sales
125
Address List
10
Japan
Assembly
Sales
Service
Iwata
SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD

250-1, Shimoman-no,
Iwata
Shizuoka 438-0818
Tel. +81 538 373811

Fax +81 538 373855
http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.jp
sewjapan@sew-eurodrive.co.jp
Almaty
"-"
050061,
., ., 348
. +7 (727) 334 1880

+7 (727) 334 1881
http://www.sew-eurodrive.kz
sew@sew-eurodrive.kz
Riga
SIA Alas-Kuul
Katlakalna 11C
LV-1073 Riga
Tel. +371 6 7139253

Fax +371 6 7139386
http://www.alas-kuul.com
info@alas-kuul.com
Sales
Beirut
Gabriel Acar & Fils sarl

B. P. 80484
Bourj Hammoud, Beirut
Tel. +961 1 510 532

Fax +961 1 494 971
ssacar@info.com.lb
Jordan
Kuwait
Saudi Arabia
Syria
Beirut
Middle East Drives S.A.L. (offshore)

Sin El Fil.
B. P. 55-378
Beirut
Tel. +961 1 494 786

Fax +961 1 494 971
info@medrives.com
http://www.medrives.com
Alytus
UAB Irseva
Statybininku 106C
LT-63431 Alytus
Tel. +370 315 79204

Fax +370 315 56175
info@irseva.lt
http://www.sew-eurodrive.lt
Brssel
CARON-VECTOR S.A.
Avenue Eiffel 5
B-1300 Wavre
Tel. +32 10 231-311

Fax +32 10 231-336
http://www.sew-eurodrive.lu
info@caron-vector.be
Johore
SEW-EURODRIVE SDN BHD

No. 95, Jalan Seroja 39, Taman Johor Jaya
81000 Johor Bahru, Johor
West Malaysia
Tel. +60 7 3549409

Fax +60 7 3541404
sales@sew-eurodrive.com.my
Quretaro
SEW-EURODRIVE MEXICO SA DE CV
SEM-981118-M93
Tequisquiapan No. 102
Parque Industrial Quretaro
C.P. 76220
Quretaro, Mxico
Tel. +52 442 1030-300

Fax +52 442 1030-301
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.mx
scmexico@seweurodrive.com.mx
Casablanca
Afit
Route DEl Jadida
KM 14 RP8
Province de Nouaceur
Commune Rurale de Bouskoura
MA 20300 Casablanca
Tel. +212 522633700

Fax +212 522621588
fatima.haquiq@premium.net
http://www.groupe-premium.com
Kazakhstan
Sales
Latvia
Sales
Lebanon
Lithuania
Sales
Luxembourg
Assembly
Sales
Service
Malaysia
Assembly
Sales
Service
Mexico
Assembly
Sales
Service
Morocco
Sales
126
Address List
10
Netherlands
Assembly
Sales
Service
Rotterdam
VECTOR Aandrijftechniek B.V.

Industrieweg 175
NL-3044 AS Rotterdam
Postbus 10085
NL-3004 AB Rotterdam
Tel. +31 10 4463-700

Fax +31 10 4155-552
http://www.vector.nu
info@vector.nu
Auckland
SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD.

P.O. Box 58-428
82 Greenmount drive
East Tamaki Auckland
Tel. +64 9 2745627

Fax +64 9 2740165
http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.nz
sales@sew-eurodrive.co.nz
Christchurch

10 Settlers Crescent, Ferrymead
Christchurch
Tel. +64 3 384-6251

Fax +64 3 384-6455
Moss
SEW-EURODRIVE A/S
Solgaard skog 71
N-1599 Moss
Tel. +47 69 24 10 20
Fax +47 69 24 10 40
http://www.sew-eurodrive.no
sew@sew-eurodrive.no
Karachi
Industrial Power Drives

Al-Fatah Chamber A/3, 1st Floor Central Commercial Area,
Sultan Ahmed Shah Road, Block 7/8,
Karachi
Tel. +92 21 452 9369

Fax +92-21-454 7365
seweurodrive@cyber.net.pk
Lima
SEW DEL PERU MOTORES REDUCTORES

S.A.C.
Los Calderos, 120-124
Urbanizacion Industrial Vulcano, ATE, Lima
Tel. +51 1 3495280

Fax +51 1 3493002
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.pe
sewperu@sew-eurodrive.com.pe
Lodz
SEW-EURODRIVE Polska Sp.z.o.o.

ul. Techniczna 5
PL-92-518 d
Tel. +48 42 676 53 00

Fax +48 42 676 53 45
http://www.sew-eurodrive.pl
sew@sew-eurodrive.pl
New Zealand
Assembly
Sales
Service
Norway
Assembly
Sales
Service
Pakistan
Sales
Peru
Assembly
Sales
Service
Poland
Assembly
Sales
Service
24 Hour Service
Tel. +48 602 739 739

(+48 602 SEW SEW)
serwis@sew-eurodrive.pl
Portugal
Assembly
Sales
Service
Coimbra
SEW-EURODRIVE, LDA.
Apartado 15
P-3050-901 Mealhada
Tel. +351 231 20 9670

Fax +351 231 20 3685
http://www.sew-eurodrive.pt
infosew@sew-eurodrive.pt
Bucharest
Sialco Trading SRL

str. Madrid nr.4
011785 Bucuresti
Tel. +40 21 230-1328

Fax +40 21 230-7170
sialco@sialco.ro
St. Petersburg
ZAO SEW-EURODRIVE
P.O. Box 36
195220 St. Petersburg Russia
Tel. +7 812 3332522 +7 812 5357142

Fax +7 812 3332523
http://www.sew-eurodrive.ru
sew@sew-eurodrive.ru
Romania
Sales
Service
Russia
Assembly
Sales
Service
127
Address List
10
Senegal
Sales
Dakar
SENEMECA
Mcanique Gnrale
Km 8, Route de Rufisque
B.P. 3251, Dakar
Tel. +221 338 494 770

Fax +221 338 494 771
senemeca@sentoo.sn
http://www.senemeca.com
Beograd
DIPAR d.o.o.
Ustanicka 128a
PC Koum, IV floor
SCG-11000 Beograd
Tel. +381 11 347 3244 / +381 11 288

0393
Fax +381 11 347 1337
office@dipar.rs
Singapore
SEW-EURODRIVE PTE. LTD.

No 9, Tuas Drive 2
Jurong Industrial Estate
Singapore 638644
Tel. +65 68621701

Fax +65 68612827
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.sg
sewsingapore@sew-eurodrive.com
Bratislava
SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o.
Rybnin 40
SK-831 06 Bratislava
Tel. +421 2 33595 202

Fax +421 2 33595 200
sew@sew-eurodrive.sk
http://www.sew-eurodrive.sk
ilina
Industry Park - PChZ
ulica M.R.tefnika 71
SK-010 01 ilina
Tel. +421 41 700 2513

Fax +421 41 700 2514
Bansk Bystrica
Rudlovsk cesta 85
SK-974 11 Bansk Bystrica
Tel. +421 48 414 6564

Fax +421 48 414 6566
Koice
Slovensk ulica 26
SK-040 01 Koice
Tel. +421 55 671 2245

Fax +421 55 671 2254
Celje
Pakman - Pogonska Tehnika d.o.o.

UI. XIV. divizije 14
SLO - 3000 Celje
Tel. +386 3 490 83-20

Fax +386 3 490 83-21
pakman@siol.net
Johannesburg
SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED

Eurodrive House
Cnr. Adcock Ingram and Aerodrome Roads
Aeroton Ext. 2
Johannesburg 2013
P.O.Box 90004
Bertsham 2013
Tel. +27 11 248-7000

Fax +27 11 494-3104
http://www.sew.co.za
info@sew.co.za
Cape Town

Rainbow Park
Cnr. Racecourse & Omuramba Road
Montague Gardens
Cape Town
P.O.Box 36556
Chempet 7442
Cape Town
Tel. +27 21 552-9820

Fax +27 21 552-9830
Telex 576 062
cfoster@sew.co.za
Serbia
Sales
Singapore
Assembly
Sales
Service
Slovakia
Sales
Slovenia
Sales
Service
South Africa
Assembly
Sales
Service
128
Address List
10
South Africa
Durban

2 Monaco Place
Pinetown
Durban
P.O. Box 10433, Ashwood 3605
Tel. +27 31 700-3451

Fax +27 31 700-3847
cdejager@sew.co.za
Nelspruit
SEW-EURODRIVE (PTY) LTD.

7 Christie Crescent
Vintonia
P.O.Box 1942
Nelspruit 1200
Tel. +27 13 752-8007

Fax +27 13 752-8008
robermeyer@sew.co.za
Ansan-City
SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD.

B 601-4, Banweol Industrial Estate
1048-4, Shingil-Dong
Ansan 425-120
Tel. +82 31 492-8051

Fax +82 31 492-8056
http://www.sew-korea.co.kr
master.korea@sew-eurodrive.com
Busan
SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA Co., Ltd.

No. 1720 - 11, Songjeong - dong
Gangseo-ku
Busan 618-270
Tel. +82 51 832-0204

Fax +82 51 832-0230
master@sew-korea.co.kr
Bilbao
SEW-EURODRIVE ESPAA, S.L.

Parque Tecnolgico, Edificio, 302
E-48170 Zamudio (Vizcaya)
Tel. +34 94 43184-70

Fax +34 94 43184-71
http://www.sew-eurodrive.es
sew.spain@sew-eurodrive.es
Jnkping
SEW-EURODRIVE AB
Gnejsvgen 6-8
S-55303 Jnkping
Box 3100 S-55003 Jnkping
Tel. +46 36 3442 00

Fax +46 36 3442 80
http://www.sew-eurodrive.se
jonkoping@sew.se
Basel
Alfred lmhof A.G.

Jurastrasse 10
CH-4142 Mnchenstein bei Basel
Tel. +41 61 417 1717

Fax +41 61 417 1700
http://www.imhof-sew.ch
info@imhof-sew.ch
Chonburi
SEW-EURODRIVE (Thailand) Ltd.

700/456, Moo.7, Donhuaroh
Muang
Chonburi 20000
Tel. +66 38 454281

Fax +66 38 454288
sewthailand@sew-eurodrive.com
Tunis
T. M.S. Technic Marketing Service

Zone Industrielle Mghira 2
Lot No. 39
2082 Fouchana
Tel. +216 79 40 88 77
Fax +216 79 40 88 66
tms@tms.com.tn
Istanbul
SEW-EURODRIVE
Hareket Sistemleri San. ve Tic. Ltd. Sti.
Bagdat Cad. Koruma Cikmazi No. 3
TR-34846 Maltepe ISTANBUL
Tel. +90 216 4419163 / 4419164

Fax +90 216 3055867
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.tr
sew@sew-eurodrive.com.tr
South Korea
Assembly
Sales
Service
Spain
Assembly
Sales
Service
Sweden
Assembly
Sales
Service
Switzerland
Assembly
Sales
Service
Thailand
Assembly
Sales
Service
Tunisia
Sales
Turkey
Assembly
Sales
Service
129
Address List
10
Ukraine
Sales
Service
Dnepropetrovsk
SEW-EURODRIVE
Str. Rabochaja 23-B, Office 409
49008 Dnepropetrovsk
Tel. +380 56 370 3211

Fax +380 56 372 2078
http://www.sew-eurodrive.ua
sew@sew-eurodrive.ua
Sharjah
Copam Middle East (FZC)

Sharjah Airport International Free Zone
P.O. Box 120709
Sharjah
Tel. +971 6 5578-488

Fax +971 6 5578-499
copam_me@eim.ae
Production
Assembly
Sales
Service
Corporate Offices
Southeast
Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
1295 Old Spartanburg Highway
P.O. Box 518
Lyman, S.C. 29365
Tel. +1 864 439-7537

Fax Sales +1 864 439-7830
Fax Manufacturing +1 864 439-9948
Fax Assembly +1 864 439-0566
Fax Confidential/HR +1 864 949-5557
http://www.seweurodrive.com
cslyman@seweurodrive.com
Assembly
Sales
Service
Northeast
Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
Pureland Ind. Complex
2107 High Hill Road, P.O. Box 481
Bridgeport, New Jersey 08014
Tel. +1 856 467-2277

Fax +1 856 845-3179
csbridgeport@seweurodrive.com
Midwest Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
2001 West Main Street
Troy, Ohio 45373
Tel. +1 937 335-0036

Fax +1 937 332-0038
cstroy@seweurodrive.com
Southwest
Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
3950 Platinum Way
Dallas, Texas 75237
Tel. +1 214 330-4824

Fax +1 214 330-4724
csdallas@seweurodrive.com
Western Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
30599 San Antonio St.
Hayward, CA 94544
Tel. +1 510 487-3560

Fax +1 510 487-6433
cshayward@seweurodrive.com
United Arab Emirates

Sales
Service
USA
Additional addresses for service in the USA provided on request!

Venezuela
Assembly
Sales
Service
Valencia
SEW-EURODRIVE Venezuela S.A.

Av. Norte Sur No. 3, Galpon 84-319
Zona Industrial Municipal Norte
Valencia, Estado Carabobo
Tel. +58 241 832-9804

Fax +58 241 838-6275
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.ve
ventas@sew-eurodrive.com.ve
sewfinanzas@cantv.net
Ho Chi Minh City
Nam Trung Co., Ltd

91 - 93 Tran Minh Quyen Street,
District 10, HCMC
Tel. +84 8 8301026

Fax +84 8 8392223
namtrungco@hcm.vnn.vn
Vietnam
Sales
130
Index
Index
A
AD input shaft assembly ........................................56
Anti-friction bearing greases ................................110
Gear units
Coating ..............................................................81
Gear units with solid shaft......................................25
Backstop ................................................................62
Breather .................................................................23
Helical gear units ...................................................10

Helical-bevel gear units .........................................12
Helical-worm gear units .........................................13
C
Changing the mounting position ............................20
Changing the oil .....................................................67
Checking the oil .....................................................67
Checking the oil level .............................................67
Via oil level plug ...............................68, 77, 78, 81
Via the cover plate .............................................70
Via the screw plug........................................74, 79
Churning losses .....................................................83
Coating
Gear unit ............................................................81
Copyright..................................................................6
Customer service .................................................120
I
Inspection ..............................................................63
AD input cover ...................................................66
AL/AM/AQ adapter.............................................66
Changing the oil.................................................67
Checking the oil .................................................67
Checking the oil level.........................................67
Gear unit ............................................................67
Inspection intervals ................................................64
Installation
Mechanical.........................................................17
Installation tolerances ............................................17
Installing the gear unit............................................19
D
Disposal ...............................................................120
Lubricant change intervals.....................................65

Lubricant fill quantities ......................................... 113
Lubricant table .....................................................112
Lubricants ............................................................110
Embedded safety notes ...........................................5

Exclusion of liability ..................................................6
Extended storage .............................................9, 109
M
F
Flatness errors .......................................................19
G
Gear unit
Installation..........................................................19
Gear unit painting...................................................25
Gear unit structre
Helical-worm gear units .....................................13
SPIROPLAN W10-W30 gear units ..................14
Gear unit structure .................................................10
Helical gear units ...............................................10
Helical-bevel gear units......................................12
Parallel-shaft helical gear units ..........................11
SPIROPLAN W37-W47 gear units ..................15
Maintenance ..........................................................63
AL/AM/AQ adapter.............................................66
Changing the oil.................................................67
Checking the oil .................................................67
Checking the oil level.........................................67
Gear unit ............................................................67
Input cover AD ...................................................66
Maintenance intervals............................................64
Malfunctions
AD input shaft assembly ..................................119
AM/AQ/AL adapter...........................................119
Gear unit .......................................................... 118
Mechanical installation...........................................17
131
Index
Mounting positions .................................................82

Designation ........................................................82
Helical gearmotors R .........................................84
Helical gearmotors RX .......................................87
Helical-bevel gearmotors K................................92
Helical-worm gearmotors S................................97
Key.....................................................................83
Parallel-shaft helical gearmotors F ....................89
SPIROPLAN W gearmotors ..........................103
Symbols .............................................................83
Mounting the gear units .........................................22
N
Notes
Designation in the documentation........................5
O
Other applicable documentation ..............................8
P
Painting the gear unit .............................................25
Parallel-shaft helical gear units ..............................11
R
Repair ..................................................................120
Rights to claim under limited warranty .....................6
Run-in period .........................................................61
132
S
Safety notes
Designation in the documentation .......................5
Structure of the embedded safety notes..............5
Structure of the section-specific safety notes ......5
Section-specific safety notes ...................................5
Service................................................................. 120
Shaft-mounted gear units
Keyway ..............................................................30
Shrink disk .........................................................37
Splined hollow shaft...........................................30
TorqLOC .........................................................41
Signal words in the safety notes ..............................5
Solid shaft ..............................................................25
SPIROPLAN W10-W30 gear units......................14
SPIROPLAN W37-W47 gear units......................15
Startup ...................................................................61
Structure
Helical gear units ...............................................10
Helical-bevel gear units .....................................12
Parallel-shaft helical gear units..........................11
SPIROPLAN W10-W30 gear units..................14
SPIROPLAN W37-W47 gear units..................15
T
Tightening torques .................................................21
Helical-bevel gear units .....................................28
Parallel shaft helical gear units ..........................27
SPIROPLAN W gear units ..............................29
SEW-EURODRIVE
Driving the world

P.O. Box 3023
D-76642 Bruchsal/Germany
Phone +49 7251 75-0
Fax +49 7251 75-1970
sew@sew-eurodrive.com
www.sew-eurodrive.com
Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services
Operating Instructions
DR.71 225, 315 AC Motors
Edition 03/2011
17055628 / EN
Contents
Contents
1
General Information ............................................................................................ 6

1.1
How to use this documentation................................................................... 6
1.2
Structure of the safety notes ....................................................................... 6
1.3
Rights to claim under warranty ................................................................... 7
1.4
Exclusion of liability..................................................................................... 7
1.5
Copyright..................................................................................................... 7
1.6
Product name and trademarks.................................................................... 7
Safety Notes ........................................................................................................ 8

2.1
Preliminary information ............................................................................... 8
2.2
General information .................................................................................... 8
2.3
Target group ............................................................................................... 9
2.4
Functional safety technology (FS) .............................................................. 9
2.5
Designated use ......................................................................................... 10
2.6
Other applicable documentation ............................................................... 11
2.7
Transport/storage...................................................................................... 11
2.8
Installation ................................................................................................ 12
2.9
Electrical connection ................................................................................. 12
2.10 Startup/operation ...................................................................................... 13

3
Motor Structure ................................................................................................. 14

3.1
DR.71 - DR.132 basic structure ............................................................. 14
3.2
DR.160 - DR.180 basic structure ........................................................... 15
3.3
DR.200 - DR.225 basic structure ........................................................... 16
3.4
DR.315 basic structure .......................................................................... 17
3.5
Nameplate, unit designation ..................................................................... 18
3.6
Additional features .................................................................................... 19
Mechanical Installation..................................................................................... 22
4.1
Before you start......................................................................................... 22
4.2
Long-term storage of motors..................................................................... 23
4.3
Motor installation notes ............................................................................. 25
4.4
Mounting tolerances.................................................................................. 26
4.5
Assembling the input elements ................................................................. 26
4.6
HR/HF manual brake release ................................................................... 27
4.7
Non-SEW encoder mounting .................................................................... 28
4.8
Connecting XV.A encoder mounting adapter to DR.71 225 motors ...... 29
4.9
Turning the terminal box ........................................................................... 31
4.10 Accessory equipment................................................................................ 32

5
Electrical Installation ........................................................................................ 35

5.1
Additional regulations................................................................................ 35
5.2
Wiring diagrams and terminal assignment diagrams ................................ 35
5.3
Wiring notes .............................................................................................. 35
5.4
Special aspects for operation with a frequency inverter ........................... 36
5.5
Improving the grounding (EMC) ................................................................ 38
5.6
Specifics regarding switching operation.................................................... 41
Operating Instructions DR.71-225, 315 AC Motors
Contents
5.7
Special aspects of torque motors and low-speed motors ......................... 41
5.8
Ambient conditions during operation......................................................... 42
5.9
Notes regarding the connection of the motor ............................................ 43
5.10 Connecting the motor via terminal block ................................................... 44

5.11 Connecting the motor via plug connector ................................................. 53
5.12 Connecting the motor via terminal strip .................................................... 58
5.13 Connecting the brake ................................................................................ 60
5.14 Accessory equipment................................................................................ 62
6
Startup................................................................................................................ 70
6.1
Before startup ........................................................................................... 71
6.2
During startup ........................................................................................... 71
6.3
Motors with reinforced bearings ................................................................ 72
6.4
Changing the blocking direction off motors with backstop ........................ 73
Inspection/Maintenance ................................................................................... 75
7.1
Inspection and maintenance intervals....................................................... 76
7.2
Bearing lubrication ................................................................................... 77
7.3
Reinforced bearing.................................................................................... 78
7.4
Corrosion protection.................................................................................. 78
7.5
Motor and brake maintenance preliminary work .................................... 79
7.6
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 motors .................................. 86
7.7
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 brakemotors ......................... 91
7.8
Inspection/maintenance for DR.315 motor ............................................. 107
7.9
Inspection/maintenance for DR.315 brakemotors................................... 110
7.10 Inspection/maintenance DUB .............................................................. 121

8
Technical Data ................................................................................................ 125

8.1
Work done, working air gap, braking torques ........................................ 125
8.2
Braking torque assignment ..................................................................... 127
8.3
Operating currents .................................................................................. 128
8.4
Resistors ................................................................................................. 131
8.5
Brake rectifier combinations.................................................................... 134
8.6
Brake control system ............................................................................. 135
8.7
Permitted rolling bearing types ............................................................... 137
8.8
Lubricant tables....................................................................................... 138
8.9
Order information for lubricants and anti-corrosion agents ..................... 138
8.10 Encoders................................................................................................. 139

8.11 Markings on the nameplate..................................................................... 142
8.12 Characteristic values of functional safety................................................ 143
9
Malfunctions .................................................................................................... 144

9.1
Motor malfunctions.................................................................................. 145
9.2
Brake malfunctions ................................................................................ 147
9.3
Malfunctions when operated with a frequency inverter ........................... 149
9.4
Customer service .................................................................................... 149
9.5
Disposal .................................................................................................. 149
Contents
10
Appendix.......................................................................................................... 150
10.1 Wiring diagrams ...................................................................................... 150
10.2 Auxiliary terminals 1 and 2 ...................................................................... 163
11
Address List .................................................................................................... 164

Index................................................................................................................. 175
General Information
How to use this documentation
1
1
General Information
1.1
How to use this documentation

The documentation is an integral part of the product and contains important information
on operation and service. The documentation is written for all employees who assemble,
install, startup, and service this product.
The documentation must be accessible and legible. Make sure that persons responsible
for the system and its operation, as well as persons who work independently on the unit,
have read through the documentation carefully and understood it. If you are unclear
about any of the information in this documentation, or if you require further information,
contact SEW-EURODRIVE.
1.2
Structure of the safety notes
1.2.1
Meaning of the signal words

The following table shows the grading and meaning of the signal words for safety notes,
notes on potential risks of damage to property, and other notes.
Signal word
1.2.2
Meaning
Consequences if disregarded
DANGER
Imminent danger
WARNING
CAUTION
Minor injuries
NOTICE
Damage to the drive system or its environment
INFORMATION
Useful information or tip: Simplifies the handling of the drive

system.
Structure of the section-related safety notes

Section safety notes do not apply to a specific action, but to several actions pertaining
to one subject. The used symbols indicate either a general or a specific hazard.
This is the formal structure of a section safety note:
SIGNAL WORD
Type and source of danger.
1.2.3
Structure of the embedded safety notes

Embedded safety notes are directly integrated in the instructions just before the description of the dangerous action.
This is the formal structure of an embedded safety note:
SIGNAL WORD Nature and source of hazard.

General Information
Rights to claim under warranty
1.3
Rights to claim under warranty

A requirement of fault-free operation and fulfillment of any rights to claim under limited
warranty is that you adhere to the information in the documentation. Read the documentation before you start working with the unit!
1.4
Exclusion of liability
You must comply with the information contained in this documentation to ensure safe
operation of the DR.. AC motors units and to achieve the specified product characteristics and performance requirements. SEW-EURODRIVE assumes no liability for injury to
persons or damage to equipment or property resulting from non-observance of the documentation. In such cases, any liability for defects is excluded.
1.5
Copyright
2011 - SEW-EURODRIVE. All rights reserved.
Copyright law prohibits the unauthorized duplication, modification, distribution, and use
of this document, in whole or in part.
1.6
Product name and trademarks

The brands and product names contained within this publication are trademarks or registered trademarks of the titleholders.
Safety Notes
Preliminary information
2
2
Safety Notes
The following basic safety notes must be read carefully to prevent injury to persons and
damage to property. The operator must ensure that the basic safety notes are read and
adhered to. Make sure that persons responsible for the system and its operation, as well
as persons who work independently on the unit, have read through the operating instructions carefully and understood them. If you are unclear about any of the information in
this documentation or if you require further information, please contact
SEW-EURODRIVE.
2.1
Preliminary information
The following safety notes are primarily concerned with the use of the following components: DR.. AC motors. If using gearmotors, please also refer to the safety notes in the
corresponding operating instructions for:
Gear unit
Also observe the supplementary safety notes in the individual sections of this documentation.
2.2
General information
WARNING
During operation, the motors and gearmotors can have live, bare (in the event of open
connectors/terminal boxes) and movable or rotating parts as well as hot surfaces, depending on their enclosure.
All work related to transportation, storage, installation, assembly, connection,

startup, maintenance and repair may only be carried out by qualified personnel, in
strict observance of:
The relevant detailed operating instructions
The warning and safety signs on the motor/gearmotor
All other project planning documents, operating instructions and wiring diagrams related to the drive
The specific regulations and requirements for the system
The national/regional regulations governing safety and the prevention of accidents
Never install damaged products
Immediately report any damage to the shipping company
Removing the required protection cover or the housing without authorization, improper
use as well as incorrect installation or operation may result in severe injuries to persons
or damage to property.
This documentation provides additional information.
Safety Notes
Target group
2.3
Target group
Any mechanical work may only be performed by adequately qualified personnel. Qualified staff in the context of this documentation are persons familiar with the design, mechanical installation, troubleshooting and servicing of the product who possess the following qualifications:
Training in mechanical engineering, e.g. as a mechanic or mechatronics technician

Any electronic work may only be performed by adequately qualified electricians. Qualified electricians in the context of this documentation are persons familiar with electrical
installation, startup, troubleshooting and servicing of the product who possess the following qualifications:
Training in electrical engineering, e.g. as an electrician, electronics or mechatronics

technician (final examinations must have been passed).
All work in further areas of transportation, storage, operation and waste disposal must
only be carried out by persons who are trained appropriately.
All qualified personnel must wear appropriate protective clothing.
2.4
Functional safety technology (FS)

SEW-EURODRIVE drives can be supplied with safety-rated components.
MOVIMOT, encoders or brakes, or other accessories, can be integrated in the AC
motor as safety-relevant components either individually or in combination.
SEW-EURODRIVE indicates such an integration by the FS mark and a number on the
nameplate (page 18).
The number is a code that indicates which components in the drive are safety-related.
See the following code table for all products:
Functional
Safety
01
Inverter
(e.g.
MOVIMOT)
Brake
Manual
brake
release
monitoring
Brake monitoring
Motor protection
02
03
04
05
06
07
x
x
x
08
09
10
11
12
13
Encoder
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Safety Notes
Designated use
Brake
Manual
brake
release
monitoring
15
16
17
Functional
Safety
14
Inverter
(e.g.
MOVIMOT)
Brake monitoring
Motor protection
x
x
x
x
x
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Encoder
If the drive bears the FS mark on the nameplate, you must adhere to the information in
the following documents:
"MOVIMOT MM..D Functional Safety" manual
"Functional Safety for AC Motors DR.71-225, 315 Geber" addendum to the operating instructions
"Functional Safety for AC Motors DR.71-225, 315 Brakes" addendum to the operating instructions
You find the characteristic safety values of the following components in the technical
data (page 143) section so you can determine the security level for systems and machines yourself:
Characteristic safety values for brakes: B10d values
Characteristic safety values for encoders: MTTFd values
The characteristic safety values of SEW components are also available on the SEW
homepage on the internet and in the SEW library for the BGIA Sistema software.
2.5
Designated use
The DR.. AC motors are intended for industrial systems.
When installed in machines, startup of the motors (i.e. start of designated operation) is
prohibited until it is determined that the machine meets the requirements stipulated in
Directive 2006/42/EC (Machinery Directive).
Use in potentially explosive atmospheres is prohibited, unless measures are expressly
taken to make it possible.
Air-cooled motors/gearmotors are dimensioned for ambient temperatures of -20 C to
+40 C and installation altitudes 1000 m above sea level. Note that information on the
nameplate may differ. The ambient conditions must comply with all the specifications on
the nameplate.
10
Safety Notes
2.6
2.6.1
DR.71225, 315 AC motors
The following publications and documents have to be observed as well:
2.7
Wiring diagrams provided with the motor
"Gear Unit Series R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W" operating instructions for
gearmotors
"DR Series AC Motors" catalog and/or
"DR Gearmotors" catalog
if required "Functional Safety for AC Motors DR.71-225, 315 Brakes" addendum to

the operating instructions
if required "Functional Safety for AC Motors DR.71-225, 315 - Encoders" addendum

to the operating instructions
if required "MOVIMOT MM..D Functional Safety" manual
Transport/storage
Inspect the shipment for any damage that may have occurred in transit as soon as you
receive the delivery. Inform the shipping company immediately. It may be necessary to
preclude startup.
Tighten the eyebolts securely. They are designed to only carry the weight of the motor/
gearmotor; do not attach any additional loads.
The built-in lifting eyebolts comply with DIN 580. Always observe the loads and regulations listed in this standard. If the gearmotor is equipped with two eyebolts, then both of
these should be used for transportation. In this case, the tension force vector of the
slings must not exceed a 45 angle according to DIN 580.
Use suitable, sufficiently rated handling equipment if required. Reattach these in the
case of further transportation.
Store the motor in a dry, dust-free environment if it is not to be installed straight away.
You must not store the motor in the open or on the fan guard. The motor can be stored
for one year without requiring any special measures before startup.
11
Safety Notes
Installation
2
2.8
Installation
Make sure that the supports are even, the foot and flange mounting is correct and if
there is direct coupling, align with precision. Resonances between the rotational frequency and the double network frequency caused by the structure are to be avoided.
Release the brake (if installed), turn rotor manually, check for unusual grinding noise.
Check the direction of rotation in decoupled status.
Only install or remove belt pulleys and couplings using suitable devices (heat up) and
cover with a touch guard. Avoid improper belt tension.
Make the pipe connections that may eventually be required. Mounting positions with
shaft ends pointing upwards should be equipped with a cover to prevent foreign objects
from falling into the fan. Ensure that ventilation openings are not obstructed and that
used air, including air from adjacent units, cannot be drawn in again straight away.
Observe the notes in the "Mechanical Installation" section.
2.9
Electrical connection
All work may only be carried out by qualified personnel. During work, the low-voltage
machine must be on standstill, enabled, and safeguarded against an accidental restart.
This also applies to auxiliary circuits (e.g. anti-condensation heating or forced cooling
fan).
Check that the motor is de-energized!
Exceeding the tolerances in EN 60034-1 (VDE 0530, part 1) voltage + 5%, frequency
+ 2%, curve shape, symmetry increases the heating and influences electromagnetic
compatibility. Also comply with EN 50110 (where necessary, observe other applicable
national regulations, such as DIN VDE 0105 for Germany).
Observe the wiring information and differing data on the nameplate as well as the wiring
diagram in the terminal box.
The connection should be a continuous secure electrical connection (no protruding wire
ends); use the cable end equipment intended for this purpose. Establish a secure protective earth connection. When the motor is connected, the distances to non-insulated
and live parts must not be shorter than the minimum values according to IEC 60664 and
national regulations. With low voltage, the distances should be no shorter than the following values, in compliance with IEC 60664:
Nominal voltage VN
Distance
500 V
3 mm
690 V
5.5 mm
The terminal box must be free of foreign objects, dirt and humidity. Unused cable entry
openings and the box itself must be closed so that they are dust and water proof. Secure
keys for test mode without output elements. When operating low-voltage machines with
brakes, check that the brake is functioning correctly before startup.
Observe the notes in the "Electrical Installation" chapter.
12
Safety Notes
Startup/operation
2.10
Startup/operation
Whenever changes to normal operation occur, such as increased temperatures, noise,
vibrations, etc., you should determine the cause. Consult the manufacturer if required.
Never deactivate protection devices, even in test mode. Switch off the motor if you are
not sure.
Regularly clean air ducts in dusty or dirty environments.
13
Motor Structure
DR.71 - DR.132 basic structure
3
3
Motor Structure
INFORMATION
The following illustration is intended to explain the general structure. It helps you to assign components to the spare parts list. Deviations are possible depending on the
motor size and version.
3.1
[123]
[132]
[262]
[131]
[156]
[119]
[117]
[118]
[116]
[134]
[113]
[112]
[707]
[115]
[111]
[129]
[705]
[706]
[35]
[30]
[9]
[13]
[392]
[12]
[16]
[24]
[108]
[42]
[41]
[22]
[109]
[32]
[100]
[103]
[106]
[1]
[90]
[93]
[107]
[11]
[7]
[44]
[2] [3]
[36]
[10]
173332747
[1] Rotor
[2] Retaining ring
[3] Key
[7] Flanged end shield
[9] Screw plug
[10] Retaining ring
[11] Grooved ball bearing
[12] Retaining ring
[13] Machine screw
[16] Stator
[22] Hex head screw
[24] Lifting eyebolt
14
[30] Oil seal

[32] Retaining ring
[35] Fan guard
[36] Fan
[41] Shim washer
[42] B-side endshield
[90[ Base plate
[93] Pan head screws
[100] Hex nut
[103] Stud
[106] Oil seal
[107] Oil flinger

[108] Nameplate
[109] Grooved pin
[111] Gasket for lower part
[112] Terminal box lower part
[113] Pan head screw
[115] Terminal board
[116] Terminal clip
[117] Hex head screw
[118] Lock washer
[129] Screw plug with O-ring

[131] Gasket for cover
[132] Terminal box cover
[156] Label
[262] Terminal clip, complete
[392] Sealing
[705] Canopy
[706] Spacer
Motor Structure
3.2

[117] [137]
[262]
[219]
[616]
[118]
[123]
[132]
[131]
[116]
[128]
[140]
[139]
[119]
[156]
[112]
[111]
[115]
[108]
[113] [129]
[134]
[390]
[109]
[24]
[9]
[12]
[7]
[707]
[106]
[107]
[706]
[17]
[103]
[100]
[14]
[10]
[104]
[94] [93]
[15] [16]
[90]
[41]
[19]
[42] [22]
[91]
[31]
[30]
[715]
[705]
[35]
[32]
[44]
[36]
[3] [1]
[11] [2]
527322635
[1] Rotor
[2] Retaining ring
[3] Key
[7] Flange
[9] Screw plug
[10] Retaining ring
[12] Retaining ring
[14] Washer
[15] Hex head screw
[16] Stator
[17] Hex nut
[19] Machine screw
[22] Hex head screw
[30] Sealing ring
[31] Key
[32] Retaining ring
[35] Fan guard
[36] Fan
[41] Cup spring
[90] Foot
[91] Hex nut
[93] Washer
[94] Machine screw
[100] Hex nut
[103] Stud
[104] Supporting ring
[106] Oil seal
[107] Oil flinger
[108] Nameplate
[109] Grooved pin
[113] Screw
[116] Serrated lock washer
[117] Stud
[118] Washer
[119] Machine screw
[121] Grooved pin

[137] Screw
[140] Washer
[153] Terminal strip
[156] Label
[219] Hex nut
[262] Terminal clip
[390] O-ring
[616] Retaining plate
[705] Canopy
[706] Spacer
15
Motor Structure
3
3.3

[117] [137]
[219]
[262]
[118]
[123]
[132]
[131]
[156]
[129]
[134]
[128]
[140]
[139]
[119]
[112]
[111]
[9]
[107]
[105]
[15]
[108]
[24]
[109]
[616]
[116]
[113]
[390]
[115]
[106]
[42]
[93]
[94]
[103]
[100]
[7]
[16]
[2]
[22]
[19] [26]
[25]
[30]
[35]
[715]
[706]
[705]
[36]
[90]
[21]
[44] [43]
[707]
[32]
[40]
[31]
[1]
[11]
[3]
1077856395
[1] Rotor
[2] Retaining ring
[3] Key
[7] Flange
[9] Screw plug
[15] Hex head screw
[16] Stator
[19] Machine screw
[21] Oil seal flange
[22] Hex head screw
[25] Machine screw
[26] Sealing washer
[30] Oil seal
16
[31] Key
[32] Retaining ring
[35] Fan guard
[36] Fan
[40] Retaining ring
[90] Foot
[93] Washer
[94] Machine screw
[100] Hex nut
[103] Stud
[105] Cup spring
[106] Oil seal
[107] Oil flinger

[108] Nameplate
[109] Grooved pin
[113] Machine screw
[117] Stud
[118] Washer
[119] Machine screw
[129] Screw plug

[134] Screw plug
[137] Screw
[140] Washer
[156] Label
[219] Hex nut
[262] Terminal clip
[390] O-ring
[705] Canopy
[706] Spacer bolt
Motor Structure
DR.315 basic structure
3.4
[123]
[452]
[634]
[633]
[151]
[454]
[132]
[131]
[119]
[156]
[112]
[111]
[117]
[219]
[118]
[116]
[128]
[140]
[139]
[115]
[134] [607]
[113]
[129]
[108] [109]
[24]
[16]
[7]
[103]
[15]
[90]
[707]
[716]
[705]
[706]
[30]
[715]
[26]
[35]
[22]
[25]
[19]
[42]
[40] [36]
[17]
[43]
[94]
[32]
[93]
[21] [44]
[1]
[31]
[609]
[608]
[9]
[3]
[11]
[606] [604]
[105]
[2]
[106]
[250] [100]
[107]
18014398861480587
[1] Rotor
[2] Retaining ring
[3] Key
[7] Flange
[9] Screw plug
[11] Rolling bearing
[15] Machine screw
[16] Stator
[17] Hex nut
[19] Machine screw
[22] Hex head screw
[25] Machine screw
[26] Sealing washer
[30] Oil seal
[31] Key
[32] Retaining ring

[35] Fan guard
[36] Fan
[40] Retaining ring
[90] Foot
[93] Washer
[94] Machine screw
[100] Hex nut
[103] Stud
[105] Cup spring
[106] Oil seal
[107] Oil flinger
[108] Nameplate
[109] Grooved pin

[113] Machine screw
[117] Stud
[118] Washer
[129] Screw plug
[134] Screw plug
[140] Washer
[151] Machine screw
[156] Label
[219] Hex nut
[250] Oil seal
[454] Top hat rail
[604] Lubrication ring
[606] Greasing nipple
[633] End bracket
[634] End plate
[705] Canopy
[706] Spacer bolt
[715] Hex nut
[716] Washer
17
Motor Structure
Nameplate, unit designation
3
3.5
Nameplate, unit designation
3.5.1
Nameplate of a DRE gearmotor with brake

The following figure shows an example of a nameplate:
76646 Bruchsal / Germany
RF47 DRE90M4BE2/TF/ES7S/Z/C
01.1207730203.0001.09
1420/25
50 Hz rpm
kW 1.1 S1
kW 1.1 S1
60 Hz rpm 1740/31
Ins.Cl. 130(B)
i 56,73
02
Inverter duty motor 3~IEC60034

IP 54
TEFC
220-242 /380-420
P.F. 0,79
eff % 82,4 IE2
4,45/2,55
eff % 84,0 IE2
P.F. 0,79
4,0/2,3
K.V.A.-Code K
254-277 /440-480
M.L. 02
Design IEC H
Vbr 220-277 AC
Nm 300/340
Nm 14
IM M1
BG1.5
CLP220 Miner.l/0.65l
1885723 Made in Germany
kg 41.000 AMB C -20..40
V
A
A
V
9007201693954571
The marks on the upper edge of the nameplate are only present when the motor has been certified accordingly or when it includes the relevant components.
3.5.2
Type designation of a DR. series AC brakemotor

The following diagram shows a type designation example:
DRE 90 M J 4 BE2 /FI /TF /ES7S
ES7S sine encoder accessory equipment
Thermal motor protection with TF thermistor
accessory equipment
IEC foot-mounted motor type
Motor with brake BE2
Number of poles
Rotor designation:
C = Copper rotor
J = Aluminum rotor with permanent magnets
Motor length
Motor size
DR motor series with code letter E
Energy-efficient motor type IE2 or MEPS AS
(Australia/New Zealand)
18
Motor Structure
Additional features
3.6
Additional features
3.6.1
Mechanical attachments
3.6.2
3.6.3
Designation
Option
BE..
Spring-loaded brake with specification of size
HR
Manual brake release of the brake, automatic disengaging

function
HF
Manual brake release, lockable
/RS
Backstop
/MSW
MOVI-SWITCH
/MI
Motor identification module for MOVIMOT
/MM03 MM40
MOVIMOT
/MO
MOVIMOT option(s)
Temperature sensor / temperature detection
Designation
Option
/TF
Temperature sensor (positive coefficient thermistor or PTC resistor)
/TH
Thermostat (bimetallic switch)
/KY
One KTY84 130 sensor
/PT
One / three PT100 sensor(s)
Designation
Option
Encoder
/ES7S /EG7S /EH7S Mounted speed sensor with sin/cos interface

/EV7S
/ES7R /EG7R /EH7R Mounted speed sensor with TTL (RS-422) interface,
V = 9 26 V
/EI7C
Mounted speed sensor with HTL interface
/EI76 /EI72 /EI71
Mounted speed sensor with HTL interface and 6 / 2 / 1 period(s)
/AS7W /AG7W
Mounted absolute encoder, RS-485 interface (multi-turn)
/AS7Y /AG7Y /AH7Y Mounted absolute encoder, SSI interface (multi-turn)

/ES7A/EG7A
Mounting adapter for encoders from the SEW portfolio
/XV.A
Mounting adapter for non-SEW encoders
/XV..
Mounted non-SEW encoders
19
Motor Structure
Additional features
3
3.6.4
Connection alternatives
Designation
Option
/IS
Integrated plug connector
/ASB.
HAN 10ES plug connector on terminal box with two-clamp closure (cage clamps on motor end)
/ACB.
HAN 10E plug connector on terminal box with two-clamp closure (crimp contacts on motor end)
/AMB. /ABB.
HAN Modular 10B plug connector on terminal box with twoclamp closure (crimp contacts on motor end)
/ADB. /AKB.
3.6.5
3.6.6
20
/ASE.
HAN 10ES plug connector on terminal box with single-clamp

closure (cage clamps on motor end)
/ACE.
HAN 10ES plug connector on terminal box with single-clamp

closure (crimp contacts on motor end)
/AME. /ABE.
/ADE. /AKE.
HAN Modular 10B plug connector on terminal box with singleclamp closure (crimp contacts on motor end)
/KCC
Terminal strip with cage clamps (for DR.71 DR.132)
/KC1
C1 profile compliant connection of the DR80 overhead trolley

drive (VDI guideline 3643) (for DR71, 80)
Designation
Option
/V
Forced cooling fan
/Z
Additional inertia (flywheel fan)
/AL
Metal fan
/U
Non-ventilated (without fan)
/OL
Non-ventilated (closed B side)
/C
Protection canopy for the fan guard
/LF
Air filter
/LN
Low-noise fan guard (for DR.71 132)
Designation
Option
/NS
Relubrication device (for DR.315 only)
/ERF
Reinforced bearing A-side with rolling bearing (for DR.315 only)
/NIB
Insulated bearing B-side (for DR.315 only)
Ventilation
Bearing
Motor Structure
Additional features
3.6.7
3.6.8
3.6.9
Condition monitoring
Designation
Option
/DUB
Diagnostic unit brake = brake monitoring
/DUV
Diagnostic unit vibration = vibration sensor
Explosion-proof motors
Designation
Option
/2GD
Motors according to 94/9/EC, category 2 (gas / dust)
/3GD
Motors according to 94/9/EC, category 3 (gas / dust)
/3D
Motors according to 94/9/EC, category 3 (dust)
/VE
Forced cooling fan for motors according to 94/9/EC, category 3

(gas / dust)
Other additional features
Designation
Option
/DH
Condensation drain hole
/RI
Reinforced winding insulation
/RI2
Reinforced winding insulation with increased resistance

against partial discharge
/2W
Second shaft end on the motor/brakemotor
21
Before you start
4
4
INFORMATION
Observe the safety notes in chapter 2 of these operating instructions for the mechanical installation.
If the nameplate of the drive bears the FS mark, also comply with the information on mechanical installation in the associated addendums to the operating instructions and/or
the associated manual.
4.1
Before you start

NOTICE
The mounting position for installation must correspond to the specifications on the
nameplate.
Only install the drive if the following conditions are met:
The specifications on the nameplate of the drive correspond to the supply system or
the output voltage of the frequency inverter
The drive is undamaged (no damage caused by transportation or storage)
All transport locks have been removed.
You are certain that the following requirements have been met:
Ambient temperature between -20 C and +40 C.
Note that the temperature range of the gear unit may also be restricted (see gear
unit operating instructions)
Note that information on the nameplate may differ. The ambient conditions must
comply with all the specifications on the nameplate.
No oil, acid, gas, vapors, radiation, etc.
Installation altitude max. 1000 m above sea level
Observe chapter "Electrical Installation" > "Ambient conditions during operation"
> "Installation altitude".
Note the restrictions for encoders
Special design: Drive configured in accordance with the ambient conditions
The above mentioned information refers to standard orders. The conditions might be different when you order drives other than the standard. Observe any differing conditions
in the order confirmation.
22
Long-term storage of motors
4.2
Note that the service life of the lubricant in the ball bearings is reduced by 10% per
year after the first year of storage.
Before startup, you should re-lubricate the lubrication devices on motors that have
been in storage for longer than 5 years. Observe the information on the motor lubricant plate.
Check whether the motor has absorbed moisture as a result of being stored for a long
time. Measure the insulation resistance for this purpose (measuring voltage 500 V).
The insulation resistance (see following figure) varies greatly depending on the
temperature. The motor must be dried if the insulation resistance is not adequate.
[M ]
100
10
0,1
20
60
40
80
[C ]
173323019
4.2.1
Drying the motor

Heating the motor either with warm air or via isolation transformer:
with warm air

DR.. motors with rotor designation "J": dry with warm air only
WARNING
The motor shaft may be subject to torque when drying via isolation transformer.
Possible injury.
DR.. motors with rotor designation "J" may be dried with warm air only.
Using isolation transformer

Connect the windings in series (see following figures)
Auxiliary AC voltage supply max. 10% of the rated voltage with max. 20% of the
rated current
Connection in wiring diagram R13:
[1]
2336250251
[1]
Transformer
23

[1]
V3
T8
W3
T9
U3
T7
V2
T5
W2
T6
U2
T4
V4
T11
W4
T12
U4
T10
U1
T1
V1
T2
W1
T3
[2]
2343045259
[1]
[2]
Motor terminal boards

Transformer

[1]
W2 W3 U2 U3 V2 V3
T6 T9 T4 T7 T5 T8
U1
T1
V1
T2
W1
T3
[2]
2343047179
[1]
[2]
Motor terminal board

Transformer
The drying process is finished when the minimum insulation resistance has been exceeded.
In the terminal box check that:
24
The inside is clean and dry
The connections and fixing parts are free from corrosion
The gasket and sealing surfaces are functioning
The cable glands are tight, otherwise clean or replace them
Motor installation notes
4.3
Motor installation notes

CAUTION
Sharp edges due to open keyway.
Minor injuries.
Insert key in keyway.

Pull protective sleeve over shaft.
NOTICE
Improper assembly may damage the drive and corresponding components.
Note the following:
Motor shaft ends must be thoroughly cleaned of anti-corrosion agents, contamination

or similar (use a commercially available solvent). Do not allow the solvent to penetrate the bearings or shaft seals this could damage the material.
Only install the gearmotor in the specified mounting position on a level, vibration-free
and torsionally rigid support structure.
Align the motor and the driven machine carefully in order to prevent the output shaft
from being exposed to unacceptable strain. Observe the permitted overhung and
axial forces.
Do not jolt or hammer the shaft end.
Use an appropriate cover, e.g. motor option /C "Canopy", to prevent objects or fluids
entering motors in vertical mounting positions (M4/V1).
Check that there is sufficient clearance around the motor to provide for adequate
cooling, and that the motor does not suck in warm air from other devices.
Balance components for subsequent mounting on the shaft with a half key (motor
shafts are balanced with a half key).
Existing condensation drain holes are sealed with closing plugs. If contaminated, the condensation drain holes must be checked for proper functioning
on a regular basis and cleaned if required.
If using brakemotors with manual brake release, screw in either the hand lever (with
HR self-reengaging manual brake release) or the setscrew (with HF lockable manual
brake release).
25
Mounting tolerances
4
4.3.1
4.4
4.5
Installation in damp locations or in the open
Use suitable cable glands for the incoming cable (use reducing adapters if necessary) according to the installation instructions.
If possible, arrange the terminal box so that the cable entries are pointing downwards.
Seal the cable entry properly.
Clean the sealing surfaces of the terminal box and the terminal box cover carefully
before re-assembly; replace embrittled gaskets.
If required, touch up the corrosion protection (especially at the eyebolts).
Check the degree of protection.
Mounting tolerances
Shaft end
Flanges
Diameter tolerance according to EN 50347

ISO j6 with 28 mm
ISO k6 with 38 mm up to 48 mm
ISO m6 at 55 mm
Center bore in accordance with DIN 332, shape
DR..
Centering shoulder tolerance in accordance with

EN 50347
ISO j6 with 250 mm
ISO h6 with 300 mm
Assembling the input elements

Input elements that are mounted on the motor shaft end, e.g. pinions, must be warmed
up prior to assembly in order to prevent damages to the encoder of stand-alone motors.
26
HR/HF manual brake release
4.6
4.6.1
manual brake release HF
You can use the optional lockable HF manual brake release to continuously mechanically release the BE.. brake with a setscrew and a release lever.
On delivery, the setscrew is inserted far enough to not fall out and to not affect the brake
performance. The setscrew is self-locking with a nylon coat in order to prevent it from
unintended further penetration or from falling out.
Proceed as follows to activate the lockable HF manual brake release:
Screw in the setscrew until there is no more play at the release lever. Additionally,
screw in the setscrew by another 1/4 or 1/2 revolution in order to manually release
the brake.
Proceed as follows to loosen the lockable HF manual brake release:
Loosen the setscrew at least until the floating clearance (see chapter "Retrofitting
HR/HF manual brake release") of the manual brake release has completely returned.
WARNING
Lacking functionality of the manual brake release due to improper brake installation,
e.g. setscrew inserted too far.
4.6.2
Only qualified staff may perform work on the brake.

Check the brake for proper function prior to startup.
Retrofitting HR/HF manual brake release
WARNING
Isolate the motor, brake, and forced cooling fan, if installed, from the power supply
before starting work, safeguarding them against unintentional re-start.
Carefully observe the steps described below.
1. Remove the following:

Forced cooling fan and incremental encoder (if installed)
See section "Motor and brake maintenance preliminary work" (page 79).
Flange cover or fan guard [35], circlip [32/62] and fan [36]
27
Non-SEW encoder mounting
2. Installing manual brake release:
for BE05 BE11:

Remove the sealing ring [95]
Screw in and glue studs [56], insert sealing ring for manual brake release [95]
and hammer in parallel pin [59].
Mount release lever [53], conical coil springs [57] and setting nuts [58].
for BE20 BE32:

Screw in studs [56].
Mount release lever [53], conical coil springs [57] and setting nuts [58].
3. Use setting nuts to set the floating clearance "s" between the conical coil springs
(pressed flat) and the setting nuts (see the following figure).
This floating clearance "s" is necessary so that the pressure plate can move
up as the brake lining wears. Otherwise, reliable braking is not guaranteed.
177241867
Brake
Floating clearance s [mm]
BE05; BE1; BE2
1.5
BE5; BE11, BE20, BE30, BE32
BE120, BE122
4. Reinstall the removed parts.
4.7
Non-SEW encoder mounting

If a drive was ordered with non-SEW encoder, SEW-EURODRIVE will deliver the drive
with enclosed coupling. You must not connect the coupling for operation without nonSEW encoder.
28
Connecting XV.A encoder mounting adapter to DR.71 225 motors
4.8

If you have ordered the XV.A encoder mounting adapter, the adapter and the coupling
are enclosed with the motor and are to be assembled by the customer.
The following figure shows how to assemble the coupling and the adapter:
[212]
[225]
[E]
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
[220]
[F]
[E]
[D]
[C]
[B]
[269]
[22]
[361] / [170]
[A]
[251] [232]
3633163787
[22]
[170]
[212]
[220]
[225]
[232]
[251]
Screw
forced cooling fan guard
Fan guard with encoder mount
Encoder
Intermediate flange (not with XV1A)
Screws (only with XV1A and XV2A)
Conical spring washers (only with XV1A
and XV2A)
[361]
[269]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
Extended fan guard

Grommet
Adapter
Retaining screw
Central retaining screw
Coupling (spread- or solid shaft coupling)
Retaining screw
Screw
1. If available, remove cover [361] or forced cooling fan guard [170].

2. For XV2A and XV4A: Remove intermediate flange [225].
3. Screw in the coupling [D] into the encoder bore of the motor shaft with the screw [C].
DR.71 132: Tighten the screw [C] with a tightening torque of 3 Nm [26.6 lb-in].
DR.160 225: Tighten the screw [C] with a tightening torque of 8 Nm [70,8 lb-in].
4. Push the adapter [A] on the encoder [220] and tighten it with the retaining screw [B]
with a tightening torque of 3 Nm [26.6 lb-in].
29
5. For XV2A and XV4A: Mount the intermediate flange [225] with the screw [F] with a
tightening torque of 3 Nm [26.6 lb-in].
6. Push the encoder and the adapter on the coupling [D] and tighten the retaining screw
[E] with a tightening torque of 3 Nm [26.6 lb-in].
7. With XV1A and XV2A: Arrange conical spring washers [251] with retaining screws
[232] and place in annular groove of the encoder [220] and tighten with a tightening
torque of 3 Nm (26.6 lb-in).
8. For XV3A and XV4A: Installation by the customer via the bores in the encoder plate.
INFORMATION
The XH1A, XH7A and XH8A encoder mounting adapters for hollow shaft encoders are
premounted on delivery.
Proceed according to chapter "Motor and brake maintenance preliminary work"
(page 79) to mount the encoder.
30
Turning the terminal box
4.9
Turning the terminal box
4.9.1
Terminal box with tension spring terminal strip
The following figure shows the structure of the terminal box in the design with tension
spring terminal strip:
[123]
[131]
[a]
[b]
[c]
[119]
[111]
3728956811
[111]
[119]
[123]
[131]
Sealing
Terminal box retaining screws (4 x)
Terminal box cover retaining screws (4 x)
Sealing
[a] Terminal
[b] Auxiliary terminal retaining screws (4 x)
[c] Retaining plate
31
Accessory equipment
Proceed as follows to turn the terminal box:

1. Loosen the screws [123] from the terminal box cover and remove the cover.
2. Remove the terminals [a], if available.
3. Remove the retaining screws [119] of the terminal box.
4. Clean the sealing surfaces at the stator shoulder, the bottom and the cover of terminal box.
5. Check the gaskets [111 and 131] for damages and replace them if necessary.
6. Position the terminal box as desired. Refer to the appendix (page 163) for the arrangement of the auxiliary terminals.
7. Tighten the screws of the lower part of the terminal box with the following tightening
torques:
DR.71-132: 5 Nm [44.3 lb-in]
DR.160-225: 25.5 Nm [225.7 lb-in]
Do not forget the retaining plate [c] if available.

8. Tighten the screws of the terminal box with the following tightening torques:
DR.71-132: 4 Nm [35.4 lb-in]
DR.160: 10.3 Nm [91.2 lb-in]
DR.180-225 (aluminum design): 10.3 Nm [91.2 lb-in]
DR.180-225 (gray cast iron design): 25.5 Nm [225.7 lb-in]
Check the correct seat of the gasket.
4.10
Accessory equipment
4.10.1 Air filter LF

The air filter, a kind of fleece mat, is mounted in front of the fan guard. It can be easily
removed and mounted again for cleaning purposes.
The air filter avoids that dust and other particles drawn in by the air are distributed. It
also prevents the ducts between the cooling fins from becoming clogged with dust.
In very dusty environments, the air filter protects the cooling fins from dirt or from becoming clogged.
The air filter must be cleaned or replaced depending on the amount of dust in the environment. No maintenance intervals can be specified due to the individuality of each drive
and the environment where it is installed.
Technical data
32
Air filter
Approvals
All approvals
Ambient temperature
-40 C to +100 C
Suitable for the following motor sizes:
DR.71 DR.132
Filter material
Viledon PSB290SG4 fleece
Accessory equipment
4.10.2 2nd shaft end with optional cover

As standard, SEW-EURODRIVE supplies the accessory equipment "2nd shaft end" with
inserted key and additional protection by means of a tape. No cover is supplied as standard. It can be ordered optionally for sizes DR.71 225.
The following figure shows the dimensions of the covers:
Sizes DR.71 132
Sizes DR.160 225
Sizes DR.160 225 (optional)

[361]
EA
[4]
[79]
L1
DA
DA
EA
[4]
[83]
[1553]
L2
L3
[34]
LB / LBS 1)
LB/LBS
L4
3519591947
[4]
[34]
[79]
Keyway
Tapping screw
Cap
Motor size
DR.71
DR.71 /BE
DR.80
DR.80 /BE
DR.90
DR.90 /BE
DR.100
DR.100 /BE
DR.112/132
DR.112/132 /BE
DR.160
DR.160 /BE
DR.180
DR.180 /BE
DR.200/225
DR.200/225 /BE
[83]
[361]
[1553]
DA
11
14
14
14
EA
23
30
30
30
Hex head screw

Extended fan guard
Cage nut
L1
2
2
2
2
LB/LBS Length of the motor/brakemotor

1)
L2
Refer to the catalog for

dimensions
L3
2
2
2
2
91.5
88
95.5
94.5
88.5
81
87.5
81
125
120.5
19
40
3.5
28
60
122
3.5
124
38
80
122
3.5
122
48
110
122
122
3.5
L4
193
187
233
236
230
246
33
Accessory equipment
4.10.3 Mounting adapter for measuring nipple

Depending on the respective order specifications, SEW-EURODRIVE delivers the
drives as follows:
with bore or
with bore and enclosed measuring nipples
The following figure shows a motor with bores and inserted measuring nipples [1]:
[1]
[1]
2706206475
[1]
Bore with inserted measuring nipples
Proceed as follows to connect the customer measuring device:
34
Remove the protective plugs from the bores.
Insert the measuring nipple in the bores of the motor and screw in the measuring nipple with a tightening torque of 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
Plug the mounting adapter of the measuring unit into the measuring nipple.
Electrical Installation
Additional regulations
If the motor includes safety-relevant components, observe the following safety note:
WARNING
Disabling functional safety devices.
Only qualified personnel is allowed to carry out work on functional safety components.
Any work on functional safety components must be carried out by strictly observing
the specifications in the operating instructions at hand and the respective addendum to the operating instructions. Else, the right to claim under warranty will become invalid.
WARNING
Danger of electric shock.
Severe or fatal injuries!
5.1
Note the following:
It is essential to comply with the safety notes in chapter 2 during installation!
Use switch contacts in utilization category AC-3 according to EN 60947-4-1 for

switching the motor and the brake.
Use switch contacts in utilization category DC-3 according to EN 60947-4-1 for

switching the brake with DC 24 V.
When motors are powered by inverters, you must adhere to the wiring instructions
issued by the inverter manufacturer.
Observe the operating instructions of the inverter.
Additional regulations
The generally applicable installation regulations for low-voltage electric equipment (such
as DIN IEC 60364, DIN EN 50110) must be complied with when setting up electrical machinery.
5.2
Wiring diagrams and terminal assignment diagrams

Connect the motor only as shown in the wiring diagram(s) included with the motor. Do
not connect or start up the motor if the wiring diagram is missing. You can obtain the
valid wiring diagrams free of charge from SEW-EURODRIVE.
5.3
Wiring notes
Comply with the safety notes during installation.
35
Special aspects for operation with a frequency inverter
5
5.3.1
Protecting the brake control system against interference

Unless they are shielded, brake cables must always be routed separately from other
power cables with phased currents to protect brake controls against interference. Power
cables with phased currents are in particular
5.3.2
Output cables from frequency inverters and servo controllers, soft start units and
brake units
Supply cables for braking resistors and similar options
Protecting the motor protection devices against interference

To protect against interference by SEW motor protection devices (temperature sensors
TF, winding thermostats TH):
5.4
You may route separately shielded supply cables together with switched-mode
power lines in one cable.
You must not route unshielded supply cables together with switched-mode power
lines in one cable.

When motors are powered from inverters, you must adhere to the wiring instructions issued by the inverter manufacturer. You must also observe the operating instructions for
the frequency inverter.
5.4.1
Motor on SEW inverter

SEW-EURODRIVE has tested operation of the motor on SEW frequency inverters. The
required dielectric strength values of the motors were confirmed and the startup routines
adjusted to the motor data. You can operate the DR motor with any frequency inverter
from SEW-EURODRIVE. To do this, start up the motor as described in the operating instructions for the frequency inverter.
36
5.4.2
Motor with non-SEW encoder

Operating SEW motors on non-SEW frequency inverters is permitted if the pulse voltages at the motor terminals indicated in the following figure are not exceeded.
2.0
permitted pulse voltage U LL [kV]
[1]
1.8
1.6
[2]
1.4
1.2
1.0
[3]
0.8
0.6
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.2
1.4
Rise time [s]
244030091
[1]
[2]
[3]
Permitted pulse voltage for DR motors with reinforced insulation (../RI)

Permitted pulse voltage for DR standard
Permitted pulse voltage according to IEC60034-17
On request, SEW-EURODRIVE provides the permitted pulse voltage with reinforced winding insulation with
increased resistance against partial discharge (../RI2).
INFORMATION
The diagram applies to motor operation of the motor. If the permitted pulse voltage is
exceeded, you must install limiting measures, such as filters, chokes or special motor
cables. Consult the manufacturer of the frequency inverter.
37
Improving the grounding (EMC)
5
5.5

For improved, low-impedance grounding at high frequencies, we recommend using the
following connections: SEW-EURODRIVE recommends to use corrosion-resistant connection elements.
If you require an NF equipotential bonding in addition to the HF equipotential bonding,
you can apply the conductor at the same point.
The "Improved grounding" option can be ordered as follows:
completely premounted or as
"connection element" kit for customer installation
INFORMATION
For further information regarding the grounding, refer to the SEW publication "Drive
Engineering Practical Implementation, EMC in Drive Engineering".
5.5.1
Size DR.71S / M and DR.80S / M

The following figure shows how to install the grounding:
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
Use of the pre-cast bore at the terminal-box

[4]
recess/foot
Grounding element with self-tapping screw DIN [5]
7500 M6 x 10, customer M8 x 16, tightening
[6]
torque 6 Nm (53.1 lb-in)
[3]
Ground strap
Disk ISO 7090

Serrated lock washer DIN 6798
M8 nut
You can order the complete connection element from SEW-EURODRIVE with part number 13633953.
38
5.5.2
Size DR.90M / L
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
Use of the pre-cast bore

[4]
Grounding element with self-tapping screw DIN [5]
7500 M6 x 10, customer M8 x 16, tightening
[6]
[3]
Ground strap
Disk ISO 7090

M8 nut
5.5.3
Size DR.100M
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
Use of the pre-cast bore

[4]
Self-tapping screw DIN 7500 M6 x 10, customer [5]
M8 x 16, tightening torque 6 Nm (53.1 lb-in)
[6]
[3]
Ground strap
Disk ISO 7090

M8 nut
39
5
5.5.4
Size DR.100L DR.132

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Use of tapped hole for lifting eyes

Disk ISO 7090
Ground strap
Disk ISO 7090
[5]
[6]

Hex head screw ISO 4017 M8 x 16, tightening
5.5.5
Size DR.160 DR.315

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Use of the tapped holes at the terminal box

Disk ISO 7090
Ground strap
Disk ISO 7090
Hex head screw ISO 4017 M8 x 16 (with aluminum terminal boxes size DR.160 225), tightening
Hex head screw ISO 4017 M10 x 25 (with gray cast iron terminal boxes size DR.160 225), tightening torque 10 Nm (88.5 lb-in)
Hex head screw ISO 4017 M12 x 30 (terminal boxes size DR.315), tightening torque 15.5 Nm
(137.2 lb-in)
For sizes DR.315 and sizes DR.160 225 with gray cast iron terminal boxes, the
grounding is pre-installed on delivery.
40
Specifics regarding switching operation
For aluminum terminal boxes size DR.160 225, you can order the "connection element" kit with part number 13633945.
5.6
Specifics regarding switching operation

When the motors are used in switching operation, possible interference of the switchgear must be excluded by ensuring suitable wiring. According to EN 60204 (electrical
equipment of machines), motor windings must have interference suppression to protect
the numerical or programmable logic controllers. As it is primarily switching operations
that cause interference, SEW-EURODRIVE recommends installing protective circuitry
in the switching devices.
If the drive has been delivered with a suppressor circuit in the motor, you must observe
the provided wiring diagram.
5.7
Special aspects of torque motors and low-speed motors

Due to the design of torque motors and low-speed motors, very high induction voltages
may be generated when they are switched off. Consequently, SEW-EURODRIVE recommends using the varistor circuit shown below for protection. The size of the varistors
depends, among other factors, on the starting frequency note the project planning.
U1
(T1)
V1
(T2)
W1
(T3)
797685003
41
Ambient conditions during operation
5
5.8
Ambient conditions during operation
5.8.1
Ambient temperature
Unless otherwise specified on the nameplate, you must observe the temperature range
of -20 C to +40 C. Motors intended for use in higher or lower ambient temperatures
have specific designations on the nameplate.
5.8.2
Installation altitude
The rated data on the nameplate apply to an installation altitude up to 1000 m asl. Installation altitudes above 1000 m asl require a different project planning for the motors
and gear units.
5.8.3
Hazardous radiation
Motors must not be subjected to hazardous radiation (such as ionizing radiation). Contact SEW-EURODRIVE if necessary.
5.8.4
Harmful gas, vapor and dust

The DR. AC motors are equipped with gaskets that are suitable for the designated use.
If the motor is operated in environments with high environmental impact, such as increased ozone values, DR motors can be equipped with high-quality gaskets. If you
have doubts regarding the stability of the gaskets in connection with the respective environmental impacts, consult SEW-EURODRIVE.
42
Notes regarding the connection of the motor
5.9
Notes regarding the connection of the motor

INFORMATION
It is essential to comply with the valid wiring diagram! Do not connect or start up the
motor if this wiring diagram is missing. You can obtain the valid wiring diagrams free
of charge from SEW-EURODRIVE.
INFORMATION
The terminal box must be free of foreign objects, dirt and humidity. Unused cable entry
openings and the terminal box itself must be closed so they are dust and water-proof.
Observe the following points when connecting the motor:
Check cable cross section
Arrange terminal links correctly
Properly tighten connections and protective earth
Check that the connection cables are not cramped in order not to damage the insulation.
Observe clearances, see chapter "Electrical connection"
In the terminal box: Check winding connections and tighten them if necessary
Perform the connection in accordance with the enclosed wiring diagram
Avoid protruding wire ends
Observe the specified direction of rotation
43
Connecting the motor via terminal block
5
5.10
5.10.1 According to wiring diagram R13

Arrangement of terminal links for connection
[1]
[2]
W1
[4]
(T3
(T2
(T1
U1
V1
[3]
[5]
Motor size DR.71-DR.225:
Motor size DR.315:

[6]
)
(T4
(T6
(T4
(T5
W2
U2
(T5
[3]
V2
[3]
[4]
(T3
W1
)
)
(T1
(T2
(T3
[2]
V1
U1
[4]
W1
)
(T2
(T1
U1
[2]
V1
V2
W2
[1]
U2
(T6
[1]
[5]
[6]
[1] Terminal link

[2] Terminal stud
[3] Flange nut
44
[4] Terminal board

[5] Customer connection
[6] Customer connection with split connection cable
T9
V1
T5/
T8
W1
[3]
[4]
T3
T1
U1
T4/
T7
T2
[2]
V2
/V3
T6/
W2
/W
3
U2
/U3
[5]
[1]
[2]
V2
T6
U2
W2
V3
T5
T2
W3
T7
[3]
W1
T1
V1
U1
U3
T4
T8
T3
T9
[4]
[5]
[1] Terminal link

[2] Terminal stud
[3] Flange nut
[4] Terminal board

INFORMATION
Three winding lead ends must be rewired to change from high to low voltage:
The lines designated U3 (T7), V3 (T8) and W3 (T9) must be reconnected.
U3 (T7) from U2 (T4) to U1 (T1)

V3 (T8) from V2 (T5 ) to V1 (T2)
W3 (T9) from W2 (T6) to W1 (T3)
Changing from low to high voltage is carried out in reverse order.

In both cases, the customer connection is made to U1 (T1), V1 (T2) and W1 (T3). You
can change the direction of rotation by interchanging 2 supply cables.
45

V3/T
8W
V2
/T5
3/T9
U3/T
V4
/T1
1
U2
/T4
[1]
[2]
/T1
[3]
U4
V1/T
[6]
V1/T
2W
1/T3
[4]
[5]
V3/T
8W
/T5
3/T9
U3/T
V2
V4
/T1
1
U2
/T4
T1
[1]
[2]
/T1
[3]
U4
V1/T
[6]
V1/T
2W
1/T3
[4]
[5]
[1] Terminal link

[2] Terminal stud
[3] Flange nut
46
[4] Terminal board

[6] Wiring designation plate
5.10.4 Connection variants via terminal block

The motors are supplied and connected differently depending on the electrical design.
Arrange the cables and terminal links as shown in the wiring diagram and screw them
on firmly. Observe the tightening torques specified in the following tables.
Motor size DR.71-DR.100
Connection
stud
Tightening
torque for the
hex nut
M4
M5
Customer
connection
Design
Connection
type
Scope of delivery
Cross sec.
1.6 Nm
(14.2 lb-in)
2.0 Nm
(17.7 lb-in)
M6
3.0 Nm
(26.5 lb-in)
Terminal
stud
Tightening
torque for the
hex nut
PE
Terminal
stud
PE design
1.5 mm
(AWG 16)
1a
Solid wire
Conductor end
sleeve
Pre-assembled
terminal links
6 mm2
(AWG 10)
1b
Ring cable lug
Pre-assembled
terminal links
6 mm2
(AWG 10)
Ring cable lug
Small connection
accessories
enclosed in bag
2.5 mm2
(AWG 14)
1a
Solid wire
Conductor end
sleeve
Pre-assembled terminal links
16 mm2
(AWG 6)
1b
Ring cable lug
Pre-assembled terminal links
16 mm2
(AWG 6)
Ring cable lug
Small connection
accessories
enclosed in bag
35 mm2
(AWG 2)
Ring cable lug
Small connection
accessories
enclosed in bag
M5
PE
Terminal
stud
PE design
M5
M6
Customer
connection
Design
Connection
type
Scope of delivery
Cross sec.
2.0 Nm
(17.7 lb-in)
3.0 Nm
(26.5 lb-in)
2.5 mm2
(AWG 14)
1a
Solid wire
Conductor end
sleeve
Pre-assembled
terminal links
16 mm2
(AWG 6)
1b
Ring cable lug
Pre-assembled
terminal links
16 mm2
(AWG 6)
Ring cable lug
Small connection
accessories
enclosed in bag
35 mm2
(AWG 2)
Ring cable lug
Small connection
accessories
enclosed in bag
M5
PE
Terminal
stud
PE design
Motor size DR.160

Terminal
stud
Tightening
torque for the
hex nut
M6
M8
Customer
connection
Design
Connection
type
Scope of delivery
Cross sec.
2
3.0 Nm
(26.5 lb-in)
35 mm
(AWG 2)
6.0 Nm
(53.1 lb-in)
70 mm2
(AWG 2/0)
Ring cable lug
Ring cable lug
Small connection
accessories
enclosed in bag
M8
Small connection
accessories
enclosed in bag
M10
47

Terminal
stud
Tightening
torque for the
hex nut
M8
M10
M12
Customer
connection
Design
Connection
type
Scope of delivery
Cross section
PE
Terminal
stud
PE design
6.0 Nm
(53.1 lb-in)
70 mm2
(AWG 2/0)
10 Nm
(88.5 lb-in)
95 mm2
(AWG 3/0)
15.5 Nm
(137.2 lb-in)
95 mm2
(AWG 3/0)
Ring cable lug
Ring cable lug
Ring cable lug
Small connection
accessories
enclosed in bag
M8
Small connection
accessories
enclosed in bag
M10
Small connection
accessories
enclosed in bag
M10
PE
Terminal
stud
PE design
Motor size DR.315

Terminal
stud
Tightening
torque for the
hex nut
Customer
connection
Design
Connection
type
Scope of delivery
Cross section
M12
15.5 Nm
(137.2 lb-in)
95 mm2
(AWG 3/0)
M16
30 Nm
(265.5 lb-in)
120 mm2
(AWG 4/0)
Ring cable lug
Connection parts
pre-assembled
M12
The designs in bold print apply to S1 operation for the standard voltages and standard
frequencies according to the data in the catalog. Other versions may have different connections, for example different terminal stud diameters and/or a different scope of delivery.
48
Design 1a:
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
M4: > 1.5 mm2

(AWG 16)
M5: > 2.5 mm2
(AWG 14)
88866955
[1] External connection
[2] Terminal stud
[3] Flange nut
[4] Terminal link
[5] Terminal washer
[6] Winding connection with Stocko connection terminal
49
5
Design 1b:
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
88864779
[1] External connection with ring cable lug, to DIN 46237 or DIN 46234, for example.
[2] Terminal stud
[3] Flange nut
[4] Terminal link
[5] Terminal washer
[6] Winding connection with Stocko connection terminal
Design 2
[1]
[2]
[5]
[6]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[8]
185439371
[1] Terminal stud
[2] Lock washer
[3] Terminal washer
[4] Winding connection
[5] Upper nut
[6] Washer
[8] Lower nut
50
Design 3
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[8]
[7]
199641099
[2] Terminal stud
[3] Upper nut
[4] Washer
[5] Terminal link
[6] Lower nut
[7] Winding connection with ring cable lug
Design 4
[5]
[4]
[2]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
1139606667
[1] Terminal box
[2] Terminal clip
[3] PE conductor
[4] Lock washer
[5] Hex head screw
51
5
Design 5
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[6]
1139608587
[1] Hex nut

[2] Washer
[3] PE conductor with cable lug
[5] Stud
[6] Terminal box
52
Connecting the motor via plug connector
5.11
5.11.1 IS plug connector
1009070219
The IS plug connector is supplied from the factory with its base fully wired-up, including
additional features such as a brake rectifier. The upper section of the IS connector is included in the scope of delivery and must be connected as shown in the wiring diagram.
WARNING
No grounding due to incorrect installation.
It is essential to comply with the safety notes in chapter 2 during installation.

Tighten the retaining screws of the IS plug connector properly with 2 Nm (17.7 lbin) as these screws also act as protective earth contacts.
The IS plug connector has CSA approval up to 600 V. Note for application according to
CSA regulations: Tighten the M3 terminal screws to a torque of 0.5 Nm (4.4 lb-in). See
the following table for American Wire Gauge (AWG) cable cross sections.
Cable cross section
Make sure that the type of cable complies with the applicable regulations. The rated currents are specified on the nameplate. The cable cross sections that can be used are
listed in the following table.
Without variable terminal link
With variable terminal link
Link cable
Double assignment
(motor and brake/SR)
0.25 - 4.0 mm2
0.25 - 2.5 mm2
max. 1.5 mm2
max. 1 x 2.5 und 1 x 1.5 mm2
AWG 24 - 12
AWG 24 - 14
max. AWG 16
max. 1 x AWG 14 und 1 x AWG 16
53
Wiring the upper

section of the plug
connector
Loosen the housing cover screws:

Remove the housing cover
Loosen the screws from the upper section of the plug connection.
Remove upper connector section from the cover
Strip the insulation off the connection lead:

Strip off about 9 mm of insulation
Pass the cable through the cable gland
Wiring up as
shown in wiring
diagram R83
Connect the lines as shown in the circuit diagram:
Wiring up as
shown in wiring
diagram R81
For / startup:
Tighten the clamping screws carefully!
Install the plug connector ( section "Installing the plug connector")
Connect with 6 lines:

Tighten the clamping screws carefully!
Motor contactors in the control cabinet
For or operation:
Connect as shown in the wiring diagram
According to the desired motor operation ( or ) Install the variable terminal link
as shown in the following figures.
798606859
54
798608523
Brake control system BSR preparing the variable terminal link
For operation:
On the side of the variable terminal link, remove only the bare metal pin of the marked
prong horizontally as shown in the following figure touch guard!
798779147
For operation:
On the side of the variable terminal link, completely remove 2 prongs horizontally as
shown in the following figure.
798777483
Wiring up as
shown in wiring
diagram R81 for
or operation with
double terminal
assignment
At terminal point for double assignment:

Connect the link cable
When operation is as required:

Insert the link cable in the variable terminal link
Installing the variable terminal link
At terminal point for double assignment:

Connect the motor lead above the variable terminal link
Connect the other lines as shown in the wiring diagram
798780811
55
Installing the plug

connector
The housing cover of the IS plug connector can be screwed onto the lower section of
the plug connector depending on the required position of the cable lead. The upper section of the plug connector shown in the following figure must first be installed in the housing cover so it will match the position of the lower section of the plug connector:
Define the required mounting position
Install the upper section of the plug connector into the housing cover in accordance
with the mounting position
Close the plug connector
Tighten the cable gland
798978827
Mounting position of the upper section of the plug connector in the housing cover
798785163
56
5.11.2 AB.., AD.., AM.., AK.., AC.., AS plug connectors:
798984587
The installed AB.., AD.., AM.., AK.., AC.. and AS connector systems are based on the
connector systems made by Harting.
AB.., AD.., AM.., AK.. Han Modular
AC.., AS.. Han 10E / 10ES
The plug connectors are located at the side of the terminal box. They are locked either
using two clamps or one clamp on the terminal box.
UL approval has been granted for the plug connectors.
The mating connector (sleeve housing) with socket contacts is not included in the
scope of delivery.
The enclosure is only applied when the mating connector is mounted and locked.
57
Connecting the motor via terminal strip
5
5.12
5.12.1 KCC terminal strip
Check the maximum cable cross section:

4 mm2 (AWG 12) rigid
4 mm2 (AWG 12) flexible
2,5 mm2 (AWG 14) flexible with conductor end sleeve
In the terminal box: Check winding connections and tighten them if necessary
Strip-off length 10-12 mm

58
5.12.2 KC1 terminal strip
Check the maximum cable cross section:

2.5 mm2 (AWG 14) rigid
2.5 mm2 (AWG 14) flexible
1.5 mm2 (AWG 16) flexible with conductor end sleeve
Strip-off length 8-9 mm

59
Connecting the brake
5
5.13

The brake is released electrically. The brake is applied mechanically when the voltage
is switched off.
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the hoist falls.
Comply with the applicable regulations issued by the relevant employer's liability
insurance association regarding phase failure protection and the associated circuit/
circuit modification!
Connect the brake according to the provided wiring diagram.
In view of the DC voltage to be switched and the high level of current load, it is essential to use either special brake contactors or AC contactors with contacts in utilization category AC-3 according to EN 60947-4-1.
5.13.1 Connecting the brake control

The DC disk brake is powered from a brake control system with protection circuit. It is
located in the terminal box/IS lower part or must be installed in the control cabinet.
60
Check the cable cross sections braking currents (see section "Technical
Data")
Connect the brake control system according to the wiring diagram supplied with the
brake
For motors in thermal class 180 (H), the brake rectifier and brake control systems are
usually installed in the control cabinet. If you have ordered a brakemotor with insulating plate, it will be delivered with the terminal box isolated thermally from the
brakemotor. In this case, the brake rectifier and brake control can be installed in the
terminal box. The insulating plate increases the height of the terminal box by 9 mm.
5.13.2 Connecting the DUB diagnostics unit

Connect the diagnostics unit as shown in the wiring connection diagram(s) provided with
the motor. The maximum permitted connection voltage is AC 250 V with a maximum
current of 6 A. With low voltage the maximum voltage is AC 24 V or DC 24 V with max.
0.1 A. Subsequent change to low voltage is not permitted.
Function monitoring
Wear monitoring
Function and wear monitoring

[1]
[1]
BK
[3]
[1]
BK
BK
[2]
BN1
BU1
[4]
BK
[2]
[2]
BN1
BN1
BU1
BU1
BN2
[2]
BU2
[1] Brake
[2] MP321-1MS microswitch
1145889675
[1] Brake
1145887755
[1] Brake
[3] Function monitoring
[4] Wear monitoring
1145885835
61
Accessory equipment
5
5.14
Accessory equipment
Connect accessory equipment as shown in the wiring connection diagram(s) provided
with the motor. Do not connect or start up the accessory equipment if the wiring
diagram is missing. You can obtain the valid wiring diagrams from SEW-EURODRIVE
free of charge.
5.14.1 TF temperature sensor
NOTICE
Damage of the temperature sensor due to excessive heat.
The drive system might be damaged.
Do not apply voltages > 30 V to the TF temperature sensor.
The PTC thermistors comply with DIN 44082.

Resistance measurement (measuring instrument with V 2.5 V or I < 1 mA):
Standard measured values: 20...500 , thermal resistance > 4000
When using the temperature sensor for thermal monitoring, the evaluation function must
be activated to maintain reliable isolation of the temperature sensor circuit. If the temperature reaches an excessive level, a thermal protection function must be triggered immediately.
If there is a second terminal box for the TF temperature sensor, you must connect the
temperature sensor in that terminal box.
5.14.2 TH winding thermostats
The thermostats are connected in series and open when the permitted winding temperature is exceeded. They can be connected in the drive monitoring loop.
AC V
DC V
Voltage U [V]
250
60
24
Current (cos = 1.0) [A]
2.5
1.0
1.6
Current (cos = 0.6) [A]
1.6
Contact resistance max. 1 ohm at DC 5 V / 1 mA
62
Accessory equipment
5.14.3 KTY84-130 temperature sensor
NOTICE
Excessive self-heating of the temperature sensor can damage the insulation of the
temperature sensor.
Avoid currents > 4 mA in the circuit of the KTY.

Observe the correct connection of KTY to ensure correct evaluation of the temperature sensor. Ensure correct polarity.
The characteristic curve in the following figure shows the resistance curve subject to the
motor temperature with a measuring current of 2 mA and correct pole connection.
3000
2500
2000
R [] 1500
1000
500
0
-100
-50
50
100
150
200
-250
300
350
T [C]
Technical Data
Connection
Total resistance at 20 - 25 C
Test current
KTY84 - 130
Red (+)
Blue (-)
540 < R < 640
< 3 mA
63
Accessory equipment
5.14.4 PT100 temperature detection
NOTICE
Excessive self-heating of the temperature sensor can damage the insulation of the
temperature sensor.
Avoid currents > 4 mA in the circuit of the PT100.

Observe the correct connection of PT100 to ensure correct evaluation of the temperature sensor. Ensure correct polarity.
The characteristic curve in the following figure shows the resistance curve subject to the
motor temperature.
300
250
200
R []
150
100
50
0
-100
-50
50
100
150
200
250
T [C]
Technical Data
Connection
Resistance at 20 - 25 C per PT100
Test current
64
PT100
Red/white
107 < R < 110
< 3 mA
Accessory equipment
5.14.5 V forced cooling fan
Connection in separate terminal box
Max. connection cross section 3 1.5 mm2 (3 AWG 15)
Cable gland M16 1.5
Motor size
Operating mode/connection
Frequency in Hz
DR.71 DR.132
1 ~ AC 1) ( )
50
100 - 127
DR.71 DR.132
3 ~ AC
50
175 - 220
3 ~ AC
DR.71 DR.132
1 ~ AC
DR.71 DR.180
1)
( )
Voltage V
50
100 - 127
50
230 - 277
DR.71 DR.315
3 ~ AC
50
346 - 500
DR.71 DR.315
3 ~ AC
50
200 - 290
Frequency in Hz
Voltage V
1 ~ AC 1) ( )
60
100 - 135
DR.71 DR.132
3 ~ AC
60
175 - 230
DR.71 DR.132
3 ~ AC
60
100 - 135
1)
Steinmetz circuit
Motor size
DR.71 DR.132
1 ~ AC
DR.71 DR.180
1)
( )
60
230 - 277
DR.71 DR.315
3 ~ AC
60
380 - 575
DR.71 DR.315
3 ~ AC
60
220 - 330
1)
Steinmetz circuit
Motor size
Voltage V
DC 24 V
24
DR.71 DR.132
INFORMATION
For information on how to connect the V forced cooling fan, refer to the wiring diagram
(page 161).
65
Accessory equipment
5.14.6 UWU52A switched-mode power supply

The forced cooling fan type V for DC 24 V includes the UWU52A switched-mode power
supply, if you have ordered it. If you have not specifically ordered the switched-mode
power supply, you can order it separately from SEW-EURODRIVE by quoting its part
number.
76
The following figure depicts the UWU52A switched-mode power supply:
101
38
111
576533259
Input:
AC 110 ... 240 V; 1.04 - 0.61 A; 50/60 Hz
Output:
DC 24 V; 2.5 A (40 C)
DC 110 ... 300 V; 0.65 - 0.23 A

DC 24 V; 2.0 A (55 C)
66
Connection:
Terminal screws 1.5 ... 2.5 mm2, separable
Degree of protection:
IP20; attachment to EN 60715 TH35 support rail in the control cabinet
Part number:
0188 1817
Accessory equipment
5.14.7 Overview of add-on encoders

Refer to the wiring connection diagrams on information on how to connect add-on encoders:
Encoder
Encoder
type
Motor size
Mounting type
Power supply
Wiring diagram
Signal
ES7S
DR.71-132
Incremental
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 7 30 V
1Vss sin/cos
68 180 xx 08
ES7R
DR.71-132
Incremental
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 7 30 V
TTL (RS422)
68 179 xx 08
ES7C
DR.71-132
Incremental
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 4.5 30 V
HTL / TTL (RS 422)
68 179 xx 08
AS7W
DR.71-132
Absolute
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 7 30 V
1Vss sin/cos
68 181 xx 08
AS7Y
DR.71-132
Absolute
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 7 30 V
1Vss sin/cos + SSI
68 182 xx 07
EG7S
DR.160-225
Incremental
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 7 30 V
1Vss sin/cos
68 180 xx 08
EG7R
DR.160-225
Incremental
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 7 30 V
TTL (RS422)
68 179 xx 08
EG7C
DR.160-225
Incremental
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 4.5 30 V
HTL / TTL (RS 422)
68 179 xx 08
AG7W
DR.160-225
Absolute
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 7 30 V
1Vss sin/cos
68 181 xx 08
AG7Y
DR.160-225
Absolute
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 7 30 V
1Vss sin/cos + SSI
68 182 xx 07
EH7S
DR.315
Incremental
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 10 30 V
1Vss sin/cos
08 259 xx 07
AH7Y
DR.315
Absolute
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 9 30 V
TTL+SSI (RS 422)
08 259 xx 07
AV6H +
XV.A
AV1H +
XV.A
DR.71-225
Absolute
encoder
Absolute
encoder
Flange centered
DC 7 12 V
Hiperface / 1Vss sin/cos
Flange centered
DC 7 12 V
Hiperface / 1Vss sin/cos
DR.71-225
AV1Y +
XV.A
DR.71-225
Absolute
encoder
Flange centered
DC 10 30 V
1Vss sin/cos + SSI
EV1C +
XV.A
DR.71-225
Incremental
encoder
Flange centered
DC 10 30 V
HTL / TTL
EV1S +
XV.A
DR.71-225
Incremental
encoder
Flange centered
DC 10 30 V
1Vss sin/cos
EV1R +
XV.A
DR.71-225
Incremental
encoder
Flange centered
DC 10 30 V
TTL
EV1T +
XV.A
DR.71-225
Incremental
encoder
Flange centered
DC 5 V
TTL
INFORMATION
Maximum oscillation load for encoders 10 g 100 m/s2 (10 Hz to 2 kHz)

Shock resistance 100 g 1000 m/s2 for the DR.71 DR.132
Shock resistance 200 g 2000 m/s2 for the DR.160 225, 315
With encoder series ES.., AS.., EG.., AG.., EH.. and AH.. the encoder covers are enclosed with the motor
67
Accessory equipment
5.14.8 Overview of built-in encoders
INFORMATION
For information on how to connect the built-in encoder, refer to the wiring diagram.
Observe chapter "Wiring diagrams" (page 154) for connection via terminal strip.
Observe the enclosed wiring diagram for connection via M12 connectors.
Encoder
Motor size
Power supply
EI71
EI72
EI76
Signals
HTL 1 period/revolution
DR.71-132
DC 9 30 V
EI7C
HTL 2 periods/revolution
The LED display (visible with the fan guard removed) provides an optical feedback according to the following table:
LED color
A track
B track
Track A
Track B
Orange (red and green)
Red
Green
Off
5.14.9 Encoder connection

When connecting the encoders to the inverters, observe the provided wiring diagrams
and the information in these operating instructions as well as the operating instructions/
wiring diagrams of the respective inverter and the operating instructions/wiring diagrams
provided with the non-SEW encoder if applicable.
Proceed according to chapter "Motor and brake maintenance" to connect the encoders
mechanically. Observe the following notes:
Maximum cable length (inverter - encoder):

100 m with a capacitance per unit length 120 nF/km
Core cross section: 0,20 ... 0,5 mm2 (AWG 24 to 20)
Use shielded cable with twisted pair conductors and apply shield over large area on
both ends:
To the connection cover of the encoder, in the cable gland, or in the encoder plug
To the inverter on the electronics shield clamp or to the housing of the D-sub connector
68
Install the encoder cables separately from the power cables, maintaining a distance
of at least 200 mm.
Compare the operating voltage with the permitted operating voltage range on the encoder nameplate. Deviations in the operating voltage may overheat and damage the
encoder.
Accessory equipment
Observe the clamping area of 5 to 10 mm of the cable gland of the connection cover.
If you use cables with a different cross section, you have to replace the provided
cable gland with a suitable other cable gland.
The cable glands for the cable entry must meet the following conditions:
Cramping area is suitable for the respective cable

The IP level of the encoder connection is at least as high as the IP level of the
actual encoder
The cable is suitable for the respective ambient temperature range.
Check the flawless state and the proper seat of the connection cover gasket.
Tighten the screws of the connection cover with a tightening torque of 2 Nm [17.7 lbin].
5.14.10 Anti-condensation heating

Observe the permitted voltage according to the nameplate and the enclosed terminal
assignment diagram.
69
Startup
Startup
INFORMATION
Observe the safety notes in section 2 during installation.

In case of problems, refer to the "Malfunctions" (page 144) chapter.
WARNING
WARNING
Danger of electric shock.
Severe or fatal injuries!
Note the following:
Use switch contacts in utilization category AC-3 according to EN 60947-4-1 for

switching the motor.
When motors are powered by inverters, you must adhere to the wiring instructions
issued by the inverter manufacturer.
Observe the operating instructions of the inverter.
CAUTION
The surface temperatures on the drive can be very high during operation.
Danger of burns.
Let the motor cool down before you start your work.
NOTICE
Limit the maximum speed at the inverter. For information on the procedure, refer to the
documentation of the inverter.
NOTICE
The maximum limit torque (Mpk) and the maximum current (Imax) may not be exceeded, not even for acceleration.
70
Limit the maximum current at the inverter.
Startup
Before startup
6.1
Before startup
Before startup, make sure that:
The drive is undamaged and not blocked
Any transport locks have been removed
The measures stipulated in chapter "Extended storage of motors" (page 23) are performed after extended storage periods
All connections have been made properly
The direction of rotation of the motor/gearmotor is correct

Motor rotating clockwise: U, V, W (T1, T2, T3) to L1, L2, L3
6.2
All protective covers have been properly installed
All motor protection equipment is active and set for the rated motor current
There are no other sources of danger
The lockable manual brake release is permitted
During startup
During startup, make sure that:
The motor is running properly, which means

No overload,
No speed fluctuation,
No loud noises,
No unusual vibrations, etc.
The braking torque corresponds to the respective application. Observe the "Technical Data" (page 125) chapter and the nameplate.
INFORMATION
On brakemotors with self-reengaging manual brake release, the lever must be removed after startup. A bracket is provided for storing the lever on the outside of the
motor housing.
71
Startup
Motors with reinforced bearings
0
6.2.1
DR.. motors with rotor designation "J"
WARNING
Voltage at the motor exceeds the permitted level.
Serious injury.
Equip the connection area of the motor with a touch guard.
Despite proper functioning of the drive the startup of DR.. motors with rotor designation
"J" may cause noise and vibration.
6.3
Motors with reinforced bearings

NOTICE
Motors with a reinforced bearing must not be operated without an overhung load. Otherwise you risk damaging the bearings.
72
Startup
Changing the blocking direction off motors with backstop
6.4
6.4.1
DR.71 DR.80 with backstop basic structure

[78]
[35]
[392]
[42]
[48]
[74]
[62]
[190]
[75]
[77]
[37]
[36]
[44] [41]
1142858251
[35] Fan guard
[36] Fan
[37] Sealing ring
[41] Cup spring
[42] Backstop endshield
6.4.2

[48] Spacing ring
[62] Retaining ring
[74] Wedge element ring, complete
[75] Sealing flange
[77] Screw
[78] Label
[190] Felt ring
[392] Sealing
DR.90 DR.315 with backstop basic structure

[78]
[35]
[48]
[35] Fan guard

[36] Fan
[37] Sealing ring
[48] Spacing ring
[74]
[62]
[190]
[702]
[703]
[62] Retaining ring

[74] Wedge element ring, complete
[78] Label
[190] Felt ring
[37]
[36]
1142856331
[702] Backstop housing, complete
[703] Machine screw
73
Startup
0
6.4.3
Changing the blocking direction

The backstop is used to block a direction of rotation of the motor. The direction of rotation is indicated by an arrow on the fan guard of the motor or on the gearmotor housing.
Observe the direction of rotation of the end shaft and the number of stages when you
mount the motor to the gear unit. Do not start up the motor in blocking direction (ensure
correct connection of power supply with motor). For inspection purposes, you can operate the backstop one time with half the motor voltage in the blocking direction:
WARNING
Before starting work, isolate the motor and, if installed, the forced cooling fan from
the power supply.
Safeguard against accidental startup.
Proceed as follows to change the blocking direction:

1. Remove forced cooling fan and incremental encoder (if installed).
2. Remove flange cover or fan guard [35]
3. For the DR.71 80: Remove the sealing flange [75].
For the DR.90 315: Completely remove the backstop housing [702]
4. Loosen the circlip [62].
5. Remove the wedge element ring [74] via screws in the forcing threads or using a
puller
6. Spacing ring [48], if provided, remains installed
7. Turn around wedge element ring [74], check the old grease and replace according to
the specifications below and reinstall the wedge element ring.
8. Install circlip [62]
9. For the DR.71 80: Apply Hylomar to cover sealing flange [75] and install it. Replace felt ring [190] and sealing ring [37] if required.
For the DR.90 315: Replace sealing [901], felt ring [190] and sealing ring [37] if required, and install the backstop housing [702].
10.Reinstall the removed parts.
11.Replace the label indicating the direction of rotation.
Lubricating the
backstop
The backstop is supplied with the corrosion protection low-viscosity grease Mobil LBZ.
If you want to use a different grease, make sure it complies with NLGI class 00/000, with
a base oil viscosity of 42 mm2/s at 40 C on a lithium saponified and mineral oil base.
The application temperature range is from -50 C to +90 C. See the following table for
the amount of grease required.
Motor type
71
80
90/100
112/132
160
180
200/
225
250/
280
315
Grease quantity [g]
11
15
20
30
45
80
80
120
The tolerance regarding the grease level is 30%.
74
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the hoist falls or in the event of uncontrolled unit behavior.
Secure or lower hoist drives (danger of falling)

Safeguard and/or protect the driven machine against touching
Only use genuine spare parts in accordance with the valid parts list.
Always install a new brake controller at the same time as replacing the brake coil.
WARNING
CAUTION
Danger of burns.
NOTICE
For assembly, the ambient temperature and the oil seals themselves may not be
colder than 0 C, else the oil seals might be damaged.
INFORMATION
Apply grease with a grease depot (Klber Patemo GHY133N) to the lip of the oil seal
before assembly.
Only SEW service staff, repair workshops or plants that provide the necessary expertise
may repair or modify the motor.
Before re-startup of the motor, make sure that all regulations are complied with and document this with a label on the motor or a written test report.
Always perform safety and functional tests following all maintenance and repair work
(thermal protection).
75
Inspection and maintenance intervals
7
7.1
Inspection and maintenance intervals

The following table lists the inspection and maintenance intervals:
Unit / unit part
Time interval
Required steps
BE brake
Inspecting the brake

Measuring the brake disk thickness
Brake disk, lining
Measuring and adjusting working air
gap
Pressure plate
Carrier/gearing
Pressure rings
Sucking off any abrasion
Inspect the switch contacts and
replace them if necessary (e.g. in case
of burn-out)
If used as a working brake:

At least every 3000 hours of operation1)
If used as a holding brake:

Every 2 to 4 years, depending on
operating conditions 1)
Motor
Every 10000 operating hours2) 3)
Motor inspection:
Check rolling bearing and change if
necessary
Replacing the oil seal
Clean the cooling air passages
Drive
Varies 3)
Touch up or renew the surfaces/anticorrosion coating

Check and clean the air filter.
if applicable, clean condensation drain
hole at the bottom of the fan guard
Clean clogged bores
1) The amount of wear depends on many factors and may be high. The machine designer must calculate the
required inspection/maintenance intervals individually in accordance with the project planning documents
(e.g. "Project Planning for Drives").
2) For the DR.315 with relubrication device, please note the shortened relubrication periods in the "Bearing
lubrication DR.315" section.
3) The interval depends on outer influences and can be very short, e.g. in the event of high dust concentration in the environment.
If you open the motor during inspection/maintenance, you have to clean it before you
close it.
7.1.1
Connection cables
Check the connection cable for damage at regular intervals and replace if necessary.
76
Bearing lubrication
7.2
Bearing lubrication
7.2.1
Bearing lubrication for DR.71- DR.225
In standard design, the bearings are lubricated for life.

7.2.2
Bearing lubrication for DR.315

Size 315 motors may be equipped with a lubrication device. The following figure shows
the positions of the lubrication devices.
375353099
[1] Lubrication device in type A in accordance with DIN 71412
Under normal operating conditions and at an ambient temperature between -20 C C to

+40 C, SEW-EURODRIVE uses ESSO Polyrex EM (K2P-20 DIN 51825), a polyureabased mineral high-performance, high-temperature grease for initial lubrication.
For motors in the low temperature range up to -40 C SEW-EURODRIVE uses SKF
GXN, which is also a polyurea-based mineral grease.
77
Reinforced bearing
7
Relubrication
You can purchase the lubricants in 400 g cartridges from SEW-EURODRIVE. For order
information, refer to the section "Lubricant tables for rolling bearings of SEW motors" .
INFORMATION
Only mix lubricants of the same thickness type, the same base oil and the same consistency (NLGI class)!
Grease the motor bearings in accordance with the information on the lubricant plate. The
used grease collects inside the motor and should be removed every 6 to 8 relubrication
cycles during an inspection. Each time you relubricate, ensure that the bearing is twothirds full.
After relubricating the motors, you should startup slowly, if possible, so that the grease
is distributed evenly.
Re-lubrication
period
The table below lists the relubrication intervals for the following conditions:
-20 C to +40 C Ambient temperature
4-pole speed
normal load
At greater speeds, higher loads or higher ambient temperatures, the re-lubrication intervals are shorter. Use 1.5 times the quantity for the initial filling.
Horizontal mounting position
Motor type
7.3
Vertical mounting position
Duration
Quantity
Duration
Quantity
EDR.315 /NS
5000 h
50 g
3000 h
70 g
EDR.315 /ERF /NS
3000 h
50 g
2000 h
70 g
Reinforced bearing
In the /ERF (reinforced bearing) option, cylindrical rolling bearings are installed on the A
side.
NOTICE
Bearings might be damaged due to missing overhung load.
Do not operate cylindrical roller bearings without overhung load.
The reinforced bearing is only offered with the /NS (relubrication) option so as to facilitate optimal lubrication of the bearing. For bearing lubrication, refer to the notes in chapter "Inspection/Maintenance" > "Bearing lubrication DR315".
7.4
Corrosion protection
If a drive is equipped with the /KS corrosion protection option and IP56 or IP66, you have
to replace the Hylomar at the studs.
78
Motor and brake maintenance preliminary work
7.5

WARNING
7.5.1
Before starting work, isolate the motor, brake, and if installed, the forced cooling
fan from the power supply.
Safeguard against accidental startup.
Remove the incremental encoder from DR.71 DR.132

The following figure illustrates the disassembly procedure using the ES7 incremental
encoder as an example:
[362]
[733] [367] [619]
[B]
[220]
[A]
[35]
[34]
[361]
3475618443
[34]
[35]
[220]
[361]
Disassembling
ES7.- and AS7.
encoders
Tapping screw
Fan guard
Encoder
Extended fan guard
[362] Torque arm

[367] Retaining screw
[619] Encoder cover
[733] Screws
[A]
Screws
[B]
Cone
1. Remove the cover [361].

2. Unscrew and remove the connection cover [619]. Do not disconnect the encoder
connection cable.
3. Loosen screws [733].
4. Unscrew the central retaining screw [367] by about two to three turns and loosen the
spread shaft by tapping lightly on the head of the screw.
Do not lose the cone [B].
5. Carefully remove the expansion anchor of the torque arm [362] from the cover grid
and the encoder form the rotor.
79
7
Re-assembly
Proceed as follows to re-assemble the encoder:

1. Apply NOCO Fluid to the encoder spigot.
2. Tighten the central retaining screw [367] with a tightening torque of 2.9 Nm
(25.7 lb-in).
3. Tighten the screw [733] in the expansion anchor with a maximum tightening torque
of 2.0 Nm (17.7 lb-in).
4. Assemble the encoder cover [619] and tighten the screws [A] with a tightening torque
of 2 Nm (17.7 lb-in).
5. Install the cover [361] with the screws [34].
80
7.5.2
Removing the incremental encoder from DR.160 DR.225

The following figure illustrates the disassembly procedure using the EG7. incremental
encoder as an example:
[715]
[35]
[1]
[220] [232] [619]
[706] [657]
[707]
[361]
[367]
[34]
[1]
[34]
[35]
[220]
Disassembling
EG7.- and AG7.
encoders
Rotor
Tapping screw
Fan guard
Encoder
[232] Screws
[361] Cover
[619] Connection cover

[657] Canopy
[706] Spacer bolt
2341914635
[707] Screws
[715] Screws
[A] Screws
1. Loosen screws [707] or [34] and remove canopy [657] or cover[361], respectively.
Use SW13 spacer bolts [706] to counterhold.
2. Unscrew and remove the connection cover [619].
3. Remove the screws [232].
4. Remove the fan guard [35].
5. Force off the encoder [220] by loosening the central retaining screw [367]
If the encoder is hard to loosen, you can loosen or counterhold the encoder shaft at
the installed SW17 spanner flat.
Re-assembly
1. Apply NOCO Fluid to the encoder shaft.

2. Place the encoder [220] in the rotor bore and tighten the central retaining screw [367]
8 Nm (70.8 lb-in).
3. Mount fan guard [35].
4. Attach the torque arm of the encoder to the air outlet using the 2 screws [232] with a
tightening torque of 6 Nm (53.8 lb-in).
5. Assemble the connection cover [619] and tighten the screws [A] with a tightening
torque of 2 Nm (17.7 lb-in).
6. Install the canopy [657] with the screws [707], or install the extended fan guard [361]
with the screws [34].
81
7
7.5.3
Removing the incremental encoder from DR.315

The following figure illustrates the disassembly procedure using the EH7. and AH7. incremental encoders as an example:
[367] [220]
[734]
[35]
[659]
[1]
[657]
EH7.
AH7.
[748] [367]
[35] Fan guard
[220] Encoder
EH7. Removing
the encoder:
[220]
9007199662370443
[734] Nut
[748] Screw
[657] Cover plate

[659] Screw
1. Remove the cover plate [657] by loosening the screws [659].

2. Separate the encoder [220] from the fan guard by loosening the nut [734].
3. Loosen the retaining screw [367] on the encoder and remove the encoder [220] from
the rotor [1].
AH7. Removing
the encoder:
1. Remove the protection cover [657] by loosening the screws [659].

2. Separate the encoder [220] from the fan guard by loosening the screws [748].
3. Loosen the retaining screw [367] on the encoder and remove the encoder [220] from
the shaft.
Re-assembly
Proceed as follows to re-assemble the encoder:

1. Apply NOCO Fluid to the encoder spigot.
2. Mount fan guard [35].
3. Push the encoder [220] on the shaft and fasten it with the retaining screw [367] applying a tightening torque according to the following table:
Encoder
Tightening torque
EH7.
0.7 Nm (6.2 lb in)
AH7.
3.0 Nm (26.6 lb in)
4. Mount the screw [748] and the nut [734].

5. Install the cover plate [657].
82
7.5.4
Removing/installing incremental encoders, absolute encoders and special encoders from/on

DR.71 225 with XV.A mounting adapter
The following figure illustrates the disassembly procedure using a non-SEW encoder as
an example:
[212]
[E] [D] [251]
[232] [A]
[225]
[220]
[269]
[22]
[361] / [170]
[B]
3568918283
[22]
[170]
[212]
[220]
[225]
[232]
[251]
EV.., AV.. and XV.

encoder removal
Screw
Fan guard with encoder mount
Encoder
Intermediate flange (not with XV1A)
Screws (enclosed with XV1A and XV2A)
Conical spring washers (enclosed with
XV1A and XV2A)
[361]
[269]
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
Cover (normal/long)
Grommet
Adapter
Clamping screw
Coupling (spread- or solid shaft coupling)
Clamping screw
1. Remove the protection cover [361] by loosening the screws [22] or remove forcedcooling fan guard [170].
2. Loosen the retaining screws [232] and turn the conical spring washers [251] outwards.
3. Loosen the clamping screw [E] of the coupling.
4. Remove the adapter [A] and the encoder [220].
Re-assembly
1. Proceed according to chapter "Connecting XV.A encoder mounting adapter to

DR.71 225 motors (page 29)" to mount the encoder.
83
7
7.5.5
Removing/installing hollow shaft encoders from/to XH.. of DR.71 225

The following figure illustrates the disassembly procedure using a non-SEW encoder as
an example:
Encoder connection via XH1A mounting adapter
[269]
Encoder connection via XH7A and XH8A mounting adapter
[361] / [170]
[E] [F]
[35] [1] [D] [220] [A] [B1] [C] [33] [34]

[G]
[35]
[1]
[33]
[34]
[35]
[170]
[220]
[269]
[361]
Removing hollow
shaft encoders
form XH1A mounting adapter
Rotor
Tapping screw
Washer
Fan guard
Encoder
Grommet
Extended fan guard
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[1]
[D] [220]
[361] / [170]
3633161867
Retaining screw
Encoder cover
Screw for torque arm
Nut of the torque arm
Screw
Clamping ring
Nut of the torque arm
1. Remove cover [361] or forced cooling fan guard [170].

2. Loosen encoder cover [B] vie screws [C].
3. Remove screw [A].
4. Loosen screw and nut of the torque arm [D] and remove torque arm.
5. Remove encoder [220] from rotor [1].
Removing hollow
shaft encoders
from XH7A and
XH8A mounting
adapter
84
1. Remove cover [361] or forced cooling fan guard [170].

2. Loosen screw [E] on clamping ring [F].
3. Remove nut of torque arm [G].
4. Remove encoder [220] from rotor [1].
Reinstalling hollow
shaft encoders to
XH1A mounting
adapter
1. Push encoder [220] on rotor [1].

2. Mount torque arm via screws [D].
3. Fasten encoder [220] via screw [A] with a tightening torque of 2.9 Nm [25.7 lb-in]
4. Fasten encoder cover [B] via screws [C] with a tightening torque of 3 Nm [26.6 lb-in]
5. Install cover [361] or forced cooling fan guard [170].
Reinstalling hollow
shaft encoders to
XH7A and XH8A
mounting adapter
1. Push encoder [220] on rotor [1].

2. Mount torque arm via nut [D] with a tightening torque of 10.3 Nm [91.2 lb-in].
3. Fasten clamping ring [F] via screw [E] with a tightening torque of 5 Nm [44.3 lb-in]
4. Install cover [361] or forced cooling fan guard [170].
85
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 motors
7
7.6
7.6.1
[123]
[132]
[262]
[131]
[156]
[119]
[117]
[118]
[116]
[134]
[113]
[112]
[707]
[115]
[111]
[129]
[705]
[706]
[35]
[30]
[9]
[13]
[392]
[12]
[16]
[24]
[108]
[42]
[41]
[22]
[109]
[32]
[100]
[103]
[106]
[1]
[90]
[93]
[107]
[11]
[7]
[44]
[2] [3]
[36]
[10]
173332747
[1] Rotor
[2] Retaining ring
[3] Key
[7] Flanged end shield
[9] Screw plug
[10] Retaining ring
[12] Retaining ring
[13] Machine screw
[16] Stator
[22] Hex head screw
86
[30] Oil seal

[32] Retaining ring
[35] Fan guard
[36] Fan
[41] Shim washer
[90[ Base plate
[93] Pan head screws
[100] Hex nut
[103] Stud
[106] Oil seal
[107] Oil flinger

[108] Nameplate
[109] Grooved pin
[116] Terminal clip
[118] Lock washer

[156] Label
[262] Terminal clip, complete
[392] Sealing
[705] Canopy
[706] Spacer
7.6.2

[117] [137]
[262]
[219]
[616]
[118]
[123]
[132]
[131]
[116]
[128]
[140]
[139]
[119]
[156]
[112]
[111]
[115]
[108]
[113] [129]
[134]
[390]
[109]
[24]
[9]
[12]
[7]
[707]
[106]
[107]
[706]
[17]
[103]
[100]
[14]
[10]
[104]
[94] [93]
[15] [16]
[90]
[22] [19]
[41] [42]
[91]
[31]
[30]
[715]
[705]
[35]
[32]
[44]
[36]
[3] [1]
[11] [2]
527322635
[1] Rotor
[2] Retaining ring
[3] Key
[7] Flange
[9] Screw plug
[10] Retaining ring
[12] Retaining ring
[14] Washer
[15] Hex head screw
[16] Stator
[17] Hex nut
[19] Machine screw
[22] Hex head screw
[30] Sealing ring
[31] Key
[32] Retaining ring
[35] Fan guard
[36] Fan
[41] Cup spring
[90] Foot
[91] Hex nut
[93] Washer
[94] Machine screw
[100] Hex nut
[103] Stud
[106] Oil seal
[107] Oil flinger
[108] Nameplate
[109] Grooved pin
[113] Screw
[117] Stud
[118] Washer
[119] Machine screw
[121] Grooved pin

[137] Screw
[140] Washer
[156] Label
[219] Hex nut
[262] Terminal clip
[390] O-ring
[705] Canopy
[706] Spacer
87
7
7.6.3

[117] [137]
[219]
[262]
[118]
[123]
[132]
[131]
[156]
[129]
[134]
[128]
[140]
[139]
[119]
[112]
[111]
[9]
[107]
[105]
[15]
[108]
[24]
[109]
[616]
[116]
[113]
[390]
[115]
[106]
[42]
[93]
[94]
[103]
[100]
[7]
[16]
[2]
[22]
[19] [26]
[25]
[30]
[35]
[715]
[706]
[705]
[36]
[90]
[21]
[44] [43]
[707]
[32]
[40]
[31]
[1]
[11]
[3]
1077856395
[1] Rotor
[2] Retaining ring
[3] Key
[7] Flange
[9] Screw plug
[15] Hex head screw
[16] Stator
[19] Machine screw
[22] Hex head screw
[25] Machine screw
[26] Sealing washer
[30] Oil seal
88
[31] Key
[32] Retaining ring
[35] Fan guard
[36] Fan
[40] Retaining ring
[90] Foot
[93] Washer
[94] Machine screw
[100] Hex nut
[103] Stud
[105] Cup spring
[106] Oil seal
[107] Oil flinger

[108] Nameplate
[109] Grooved pin
[113] Machine screw
[117] Stud
[118] Washer
[119] Machine screw
[129] Screw plug

[134] Screw plug
[137] Screw
[140] Washer
[156] Label
[219] Hex nut
[262] Terminal clip
[390] O-ring
[705] Canopy
[706] Spacer bolt
7.6.4
DR.71-DR.225 inspection steps
WARNING
Isolate the motor and forced cooling fan, if installed, from the power supply before
starting work, safeguarding them against unintentional re-start.

2. Remove fan guard [35] and fan [36].
3. Remove stator:
Size DR.71-DR.132: Remove machine screws [13] from flanged endshield [7]
and B-side endshield [42]. Remove stator [16] from flanged endshield [7].
Size DR.160-DR.180: Loosen hex head screw [19] and remove B-side endshield
[42]. Loosen hex head screw [15] and remove stator from flanged endshield.
Size DR.200-DR.225:
Loosen hex head screw [15] and remove the flanged endshield [7] from the
stator.
With gearmotors: Remove oil flinger [107]
Loosen hex head screw [19] and remove the complete rotor [1] together with
the B-side endshield [42].
Loosen hex head screw [25] and remove the complete rotor [1] from the B-side
endshield [42].
4. Visual inspection: Is there any moisture or gear unit oil inside the stator?
If not, proceed with step 7.
If there is moisture, proceed with step 5
If there is gear oil, have the motor repaired by a specialist workshop
5. If there is moisture inside the stator:
With gearmotors: Remove the motor from the gear unit
With motors without a gear unit: Remove the A-flange
Remove the rotor [1]
6. Clean the winding, dry it and check it electrically (see chapter "Drying the motor"
(page 23)).
89
7. Replace the grooved ball bearings [11], [44] with permitted ball bearings.
See section"Permitted rolling bearing types" (page 137).
8. Reseal the shaft:
A-side: Replace the oil seal [106]
B-side: Replace the oil seal [30]
Coat the sealing lip with grease (Klber Petamo GHY 133).
9. Reseal the stator seat:
Seal the sealing surface with duroplastic sealing compound
(operating temperature -40 C...+180 C) e.g. "Hylomar L Spezial".
For size DR.71-DR.132: Replace sealing [392].
10.Install the motor and accessory equipment.
90
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 brakemotors
7.7
7.7.1
DR.71-DR.80 brakemotor basic structure
[1]
[71]
[70]
[73]
[68]
[49]
[718]
[66]
[51]
[61]
[67]
[65]
[60]
[50]
[54]
[95] [59] [53] [56] [57] [58] [36] [62] [35] [22]
174200971
[1] Motor with brake endshield

[22] Hex head screw
[35] Fan guard
[36] Fan
[49] Pressure plate
[50] Brake spring
[11] Magnet, complete
[51] Hand lever
[53] Releasing lever
[56] Stud
[57] Conical coil spring
[58] Setting nut
[59] Parallel pin
[60] Stud 3x
[61] Hex nut
[65] Pressure ring
[66] Rubber sealing collar
[67] Counter spring
[68] Brake disk
[62] Retaining ring

[70] Carrier
[71] Key
[73] Terminal disk
[95] Sealing ring
[718] Damping plate
91
7
7.7.2
[51]
[900]
[70]
[1]
[71]
[550]
[95]
[59] [53]
[57]
[32] [22]
[36]
[58]
[56]
[35 ]
[62]
[901]
179981963
[22] Hex head screw
[32] Circlip
[35] Fan guard
[36] Fan
[51] Hand lever
92

[56] Stud
[58] Setting nut
[59] Parallel pin
[62] Circlip
[70] Carrier
[71] Key
[95] Sealing ring
[550] Pre-assembled brake
[900] Screw
[901] Sealing
7.7.3

[35]
[95]
[900]
[71]
[901]
[31]
[70]
[56] [51]
[53]
[47]
[36]
[55]
[32] [22]
[550]
[62]
[1]
[57] [58]
[698]
527223691
[22] Hex head screw
[31] Key
[32] Circlip
[35] Fan guard
[36] Fan
[47] O-ring
[51] Hand lever

[55] Closing piece
[56] Stud
[58] Setting nut
[62] Circlip
[70] Carrier
[71] Key
[95] Sealing ring

[698] Plug connector complete (only for
BE20-BE32)
[900] Screw
[901] O-ring
93
7
7.7.4
DR.71-DR.225 brakemotor inspection steps
WARNING

3. Remove stator:
Size DR.71-DR.132: Remove machine screws [13] from flanged endshield [7]
and brake endshield [42]. Remove stator [16] from flanged endshield [7].
Size DR.160-DR.180: Loosen hex head screw [19] and remove brake endshield
[42]. Loosen hex head screw [15] and remove stator from flanged endshield.
Size DR.200-DR.225:
Loosen hex head screw [15] and remove the flanged endshield [7] from the
stator.
With gearmotors: Remove oil flinger [107]
Loosen hex head screw [19] and remove the complete rotor [1] together with
the brake endshield [42].
Loosen hex head screw [25] and remove the complete rotor [1] from the brake
endshield [42].
4. Remove the brake cable:

BE05-BE11: Remove the terminal box cover and unfasten the brake cable from
the rectifier.
BE20-BE32: Loosen safety screws of the brake plug connector [698] and remove
plug connector.
5. Push the brake off the stator and carefully lift it off.
6. Pull the stator back by about. 3 to 4 cm.
With gearmotors: Remove the motor from the gear unit
With motors without a gear unit: Remove the A-flange
Remove the rotor [1]
9. Clean the winding, dry it and check it electrically (see chapter "Drying the motor"
(page 23)).
94
10.Replace the grooved ball bearings [11], [44] with permitted ball bearings.
11.Reseal the shaft:
A-side: Replace the oil seal [106]
B-side: Replace the oil seal [30]
Coat the sealing lip with grease (Klber Petamo GHY 133).
12.Reseal the stator seat:
Seal the sealing surface with duroplastic sealing compound
(Operating temperature - 40 C...+180 C) e.g. "Hylomar L Spezial".
For size DR.71-DR.132: Replace sealing [392].
13.Size DR-160-DR.225: Replace the O-ring [901] between the brake endshield [42]
and the pre-assembled brake [550]. Install the pre-assembled brake [550]
14.Install the motor, the brake and accessory equipment.
95
7
7.7.5
BE05-BE2 brakes (DR.71-DR.80) basic structure
[60]
[50]/[276]
[61]
[66]
[54]
[718]
[68]
[42]
[42]
[49]
[50]
[54]
[60]
7.7.6
[67]
[65] [49]
[73]
Brake bearing end shield

Pressure plate
Brake spring (normal)
Magnet, complete
Stud 3x
[61] Hex nut

[65] Pressure ring
[67] Counter spring
[68] Brake disk
[73] Terminal disk

[276] Brake spring (blue)
[718] Dampening plate
BE1-BE11 brake (DR.90-DR.160) basic structure

[66]
[718]
[702]
[69] [67]
[68]
[65]
[49] Pressure plate

[50] Brake spring (normal)
[60] Stud 3x
[61] Hex nut
96
[50/276]
[54]
[60] [61]
[49]
[65]
[66]
[67]
[68]
[69]
Pressure ring
Rubber sealing collar
Counter spring
Brake disk
Circular spring

[702] Friction disk
[718] Dampening plate
7.7.7
BE20 brake (DR.160-DR.180) basic structure
[66]
[28]
[61]
[60]
[54]
[50/276]
[702]
[28]
[49]
[50]
[54]
[60]
7.7.8
[69]
[67]
[68]
[65]
[49]
Closing cap
Pressure plate, complete
Magnet, complete
Stud 3x
[61] Hex nut

[65] Pressure ring
[67] Counter spring
[68] Brake disk
[69] Circular spring

[702] Friction disk
BE30-BE32 brake (DR.180-DR.225) basic structure
[28]
[50]/[276]
[69b]
[702] [69]
[68]
[68b] [49]
[67] [51]
[66]
[61]
[54]
[28]
[49]
[50]
[51]
[54]
Closing cap
Pressure plate, complete
Brake lining
Magnet, complete
[60] Stud 3x
[61] Hex nut
[67] Setting sleeve
[68] Brake disk
[60]
[69] Circular spring

[702] Friction disk
97
7
7.7.9
Setting the working air gap of BE05-BE32 brakes
WARNING

Flange cover or fan guard [35]
2. Push the rubber sealing collar [66] aside,
release the clamping strap, if necessary
3. Measure the brake disk [68]:
Minimum brake disk thickness see chapter "Technical Data" (page 125).
Replace brake disk if necessary, see chapter "Replacing the brake disk of BE05BE32 brakes" (page 100).
4. BE30-BE32: Unfasten the setting sleeves [67] by turning it towards the brake endshield.
5. Measure the working air gap A (see the following figure)
(use a feeler gauge and measure at three points offset by 120):
for BE05 11: between the pressure plate [49] and damping plate [718]
for BE20 32: between the pressure plate [49] and brake coil body [54]
A
1
12
12
2
120
179978635
98
6. BE05-BE20: Tighten the hex nuts [61] until the working air gap is set correctly, see
chapter "Technical Data" (page 125)
BE30-BE32: Tighten the hex nuts [61] until the working air gap is 25 mm.
7. If you are mounting the BE32 in a vertical position, set the 3 springs on the brake stationary disk to the following measurement:
Mounting position
X in [mm]
Brake at the top
7.3
Brake at the bottom
6.5
[49]
[68b]
[52b]
[68]
X
[900]
[49]
[52b]
[68]
[68b]
[900]
Pressure plate
Brake lining (BE32 only)
Brake disk
Brake disk (BE32 only)
Hex nut
8. BE30-BE32: Tighten the setting sleeves [67]

towards the magnet
until the working air gap is set correctly, see chapter "Technical Data" (page 125).
9. Put the rubber sealing collar back in place and re-install the dismantled parts.
99
7.7.10 Replacing the brake disk of BE05-BE32 brakes

In addition to the brake elements listed in column "BE brake", see chapter "Inspection
and maintenance intervals" (page 76), check the hex nut nuts [61] for wear when you
replace the brake disk. You must always replace the hex nuts [61] when you replace the
brake disk.
WARNING
INFORMATION
The brake of DR.71-DR.80 motor sizes cannot be removed from the motor because the BE brake is directly installed on the brake endshield of the motor.
The brake of DR.90 DR.225 motor sizes cannot be removed from the motor for
replacing the brake disk because the BE brake is pre-installed on the brake endshield of the motor with a friction disk .

2. Remove the brake cable
the rectifier.
plug connector.
3. Remove the rubber sealing collar [66]
4. Loosen hex nuts [61], carefully pull off the magnet [54] (brake cable!) and take out
the brake springs [50].
5. BE05-BE11: Remove the damping plate [718], pressure plate [49] and brake disk
[68]
BE20-BE30: Remove pressure plate [49] and brake disk [68]
BE32: Remove pressure plate [49], brake disk [68] and [68b]
6. Clean the brake components
7. Install a new brake disk(s).
8. Re-install the brake components,
Except for the fan and the fan guard, because the working air gap has to be set
first, see chapter "Setting the working air gap of the BE05-BE32 brakes"
(page 98).
100
9. With manual brake release: Use setting nuts to set the floating clearance "s" between
the conical coil springs (pressed flat) and the setting nuts (see following figure).
177241867
Brake
BE05; BE1; BE2
1.5
BE5; BE11, BE20; BE30; BE32
10.Put the rubber sealing collar back in place and re-install the dismantled parts.
INFORMATION
The lockable manual brake release (type HF) is already released when resistance
is encountered when operating the grub screw.
The self-reengaging manual brake release (type HR) can be operated with normal
hand pressure.
In brake motors with self-reengaging manual brake release, the manual brake release lever must be removed after startup/maintenance! A bracket is provided for
storing the lever on the outside of the motor.
INFORMATION
Important: After replacing the brake disk, the maximum braking torque is reached only
after several cycles.
101
7.7.11 Changing the braking torque of BE05-BE32 brakes

The braking torque can be altered in stages.
by changing the type and number of brake springs
by changing the complete magnet (only possible for BE05 and BE1)
by changing the brake (from motor size DR.90).
by changing to a two-disk brake (BE30 only)
For the possible braking torque steps, please refer to section "Technical Data"
(page 125).
7.7.12 Changing the brake spring of BE05-BE32 brakes
WARNING

the rectifier.
plug connector.
3. Remove the rubber sealing collar [66] and the manual brake release:
setting nuts [58], conical coil springs [57], studs [56], releasing lever [53], spiral
dowel pin [59]
4. Unfasten hex nuts [61] and pull off the magnet [54]
by approx. 50 mm (watch the brake cable)
5. Change or add brake springs [50/276]
Arrange brake springs symmetrically
6. Re-install the brake components
(page 98).
102
177241867
Brake
BE05; BE1; BE2
1.5
BE5; BE11, BE20, BE30, BE32
INFORMATION
Replace setting nuts [58] and hex nuts [61] if the removal procedure is repeated.
7.7.13 Changing the magnet of BE05-BE32 brakes
WARNING

setting nuts [58], conical coil springs [57], studs [56], releasing lever [53], spiral
dowel pin [59]
the rectifier.
plug connector.
103
4. Unfasten hex nuts [61], remove complete magnet [54], remove brake springs [50/
276].
5. Install new magnet with brake springs. For the possible braking torque steps, please
refer to section "Technical Data" (page 125).
first, see chapter"Setting the working air gap of the BE05-BE20 brakes"
(page 98).
177241867
Brake
BE05; BE1; BE2
1.5
BE5; BE11, BE20, BE30, BE32
9. Replace brake controller in the event of an interturn short circuit or a short circuit to
frame.
INFORMATION
104
7.7.14 Replacing the brake of DR.71-DR.80
WARNING

2. Remove the terminal box cover and loosen the brake cable from the rectifier. If necessary, attach trailing wire to brake cables.
3. Loosen machine screws [13] and remove brake endshield with brake from stator.
4. Guide the brake cable into the terminal box.
5. Align the cam of the brake endshield.
6. Mount oil seal [95].
177241867
Brake
BE05; BE1; BE2
1.5
105
7.7.15 Replacing the brake of DR.90-DR.225
WARNING

the rectifier.
plug connector.
3. Unfasten screws [900] and remove brake from brake endshield.
4. DR.90- DR.132: Observe the alignment of the sealing [901].
5. Connect brake cable.
6. Align the cam of the friction disk.
7. Mount oil seal [95].
177241867
106
Brake
BE05; BE1; BE2
1.5
BE5; BE11, BE20, BE30, BE32
Inspection/maintenance for DR.315 motor
7.8
7.8.1
[123]
[452]
[634]
[633]
[151]
[454]
[132]
[131]
[119]
[156]
[112]
[111]
[117]
[219]
[118]
[116]
[128]
[140]
[139]
[115]
[134] [607]
[113]
[129]
[108] [109]
[24]
[16]
[7]
[103]
[15]
[90]
[707]
[716]
[705]
[706]
[30]
[715]
[26]
[35]
[22]
[25]
[19]
[42]
[40] [36]
[17]
[43]
[94]
[32]
[93]
[21] [44]
[1]
[31]
[609]
[608]
[9]
[3]
[11]
[606] [604]
[105]
[2]
[106]
[250] [100]
[107]
18014398861480587
[1] Rotor
[2] Retaining ring
[3] Key
[7] Flange
[9] Screw plug
[15] Machine screw
[16] Stator
[17] Hex nut
[19] Machine screw
[22] Hex head screw
[25] Machine screw
[26] Sealing washer
[30] Oil seal
[31] Key
[32] Retaining ring

[35] Fan guard
[36] Fan
[40] Retaining ring
[90] Foot
[93] Washer
[94] Machine screw
[100] Hex nut
[103] Stud
[105] Cup spring
[106] Oil seal
[107] Oil flinger
[108] Nameplate
[109] Grooved pin

[113] Machine screw
[117] Stud
[118] Washer
[129] Screw plug
[134] Screw plug
[140] Washer
[151] Machine screw
[156] Label
[219] Hex nut
[250] Oil seal
[454] Top hat rail
[604] Lubrication ring
[633] End bracket
[634] End plate
[705] Canopy
[706] Spacer bolt
[715] Hex nut
[716] Washer
107
7
7.8.2
DR.315 inspection steps
WARNING

With gearmotors: Remove the motor from the gear unit.
3. Unfasten machine screws [25] and [19], and remove B-side endshield [42].
4. Unfasten machine screws [15] from the flange [7] and remove the complete rotor [1]
together with the flange. With gearmotors, pull off the oil flinger [107].
5. Loosen screws [609] and separate the rotor from the flange [7]. Before disassembly,
protect the oil seal seat from damage using adhesive tape or a protective sleeve.
Clean the winding, dry it and check it electrically (see chapter "Drying the motor"
(page 23)).
8. Replace the rolling bearing [11], [44] with permitted rolling bearing types.
Fill the bearing with grease until it is two-thirds full.
See section "Bearing lubrication DR.315" (page 77).
Important: Place the oil seal flange [608] and [21] onto the rotor shaft before installing
the bearings.
9. Starting on the A-side, mount the motor vertically.
10.Place the cup springs [105] and lubrication ring [604] into the bearing bore of the
flange [7].
Hang the rotor [1] onto the B-side thread, and guide into the flange [7].
Fasten the oil seal flange [608] to the flange [7] using the hex head bolts [609].
108
11.Mount the stator [16].

Reseal the stator seat: Seal the sealing surface with duroplastic sealing compound (operating temperature: -40 C ... +180 C) e.g. "Hylomar L Spezial".
Important: Protect the winding overhang from damage.
Screw in the stator [16] and flange [7] with screws [15].
12.Before mounting the B-side endshield [42], screw in the M8 setscrew approximately
200 mm into the oil seal flange [21].
13.Before mounting the B-side endshield [42], feed the setscrew in through a bore for
the screw [25]. Screw in the B-side endshield [42] and stator [16] using machine
screws [19] and hex nuts [17]. Lift the oil seal flange [21] with the setscrew, and fasten using 2 screws [25]. Remove the setscrew and screw in the remaining screws
[25].
14. Renew oil seals
A-side: Insert the oil seal [106] and for gearmotors the oil seal [250], and replace the oil flinger [107].
With gearmotors, fill about two-thirds of the space between the two oil seals with
grease (Klber Petamo GHY133).
B-side: Insert the oil seal [30], and coat the sealing lip with the same grease.
15.Install the fan [36] and fan guard [35].
109
Inspection/maintenance for DR.315 brakemotors
7
7.9
7.9.1
DR.315 brakemotor basic structure

[36]
[31]
[70]
[62]
[900]
[550]
[37][47]
[53]
[32]
[64] [56]
[71]
[1]
[22]
[35]
[55]
BE122
BE120
[57] [255] [256] [58]
353595787
[22] Hex head screw
[31] Key
[32] Retaining ring
[35] Fan guard
[36] Fan
[37] V-ring
[47] O-ring
110

[55] Closing piece
[56] Stud
[58] Setting nut
[62] Retaining ring
[64] Setscrew
[70] Carrier
[71] Key
[255] Conical seat
[256] Spherical washer
[900] Screw
[901] Gasket
7.9.2
BE120-BE122 brake basic structure

[733]
[28]
[732]
[50/276]
[69b]
[68b]
[67]
[49]
[52b]
[68]
[69]
[702]
[66]
[61]
[60]
[54]
353594123
[28]
[49]
[50]
[52b]
[54]
[60]
[61]
Closing cap
Pressure plate
Brake spring
Magnet, complete
Stud 3 x
Hex nut
[66]
[67]
[68]
[68b]
[69]
[69b]
[276]
Rubber sealing collar

Adjusting sleeve
Brake disk
Circular spring
Circular spring (BE122 only)
Brake spring
[702]
[732]
[733]
Friction disk
Cover plate
Screw
111
7
7.9.3
DR.315 brakemotor inspection steps
WARNING
1. Remove forced cooling fan and incremental encoder (if installed)

2. Remove fan guard [35] and fan [36]
3. Unfasten brake connector
4. Loosen screws [900] and remove pre-assembled brake [550] from brake endshield.
5. Unfasten machine screws [25] and [19], and remove B-side endshield [42].
6. Unfasten machine screws [15] from the flange [7] and remove the complete rotor [1]
together with the flange. With gearmotors, pull off the oil flinger [107].
7. Loosen screws [609] and separate the rotor from the flange [7]. Before disassembly,
protect the oil seal seat from damage using adhesive tape or a protective sleeve.
Clean the winding, dry it and check it electrically (see chapter "Preliminary work"
(page 79)).
10.Replace the rolling bearing [11], [44] with permitted rolling bearing types.
Fill two-thirds of the bearing with grease.
See section "Bearing lubrication DR.315" (page 77).
Important: Place the oil seal flange [608] and [21] onto the rotor shaft before installing
the bearings.
11.Starting on the A-side, mount the motor vertically.
12.Place the cup springs [105] and lubrication ring [604] into the bearing bore of the
flange [7].
Hang the rotor [1] onto the B-side thread, and guide into the flange [7].
Fasten the oil seal flange [608] to the flange [7] using the hex head bolts [609].
112
13.Mount the stator [16].

Reseal the stator seat: Seal the sealing surface with duroplastic sealing compound (operating temperature: -40 C ... +180 C) e.g. "Hylomar L Spezial".
Important: Protect the winding overhang from damage.
Screw in the stator [16] and flange [7] with screws [15].
14.Before mounting the brake endshield, screw in the M8 setscrew approximately 200
mm into the oil seal flange [21].
15.Before mounting the brake endshield [42], feed the setscrew in through a bore for the
screw [25]. Screw in the brake endshield and stator [16] using machine screws [19]
and hex nuts [17]. Lift the oil seal flange [21] with the setscrew, and fasten using 2
screws [25]. Remove the setscrew and screw in the remaining screws [25].
16. Renew oil seals
A-side: Insert the oil seals [106], the oil flinger [107], and the oil seal [250] for gearmotors.
Fill about two-thirds of the space between the two oil seals with grease (Klber
Petamo GHY133).
B-side: Insert the oil seal [30], and coat the sealing lip with the same grease. This
applies to gearmotors only.
17.Align the cam of the friction disk, and mount the brake onto the brake endshield using
a screw [900].
18.With manual brake release: Use setting nuts to set the floating clearance "s" between
S
353592459
Brake
BE120; BE122
19.Install the fan [36] and fan guard [35].

20.Install the motor and accessory equipment.
113
7
7.9.4
Setting the working air gap for BE120-BE122 brakes
WARNING

See section "Motor and brake maintenance preliminary work" (page 79)
2. Remove fan guard [35] and fan [36]
3. Push the rubber sealing collar [66] aside,
release the clamping strap, if necessary
4. Measure the brake disk [68, 68b]:
Replace brake disk if 12 mm.
See chapter "Replacing the brake disk of BE120-BE122 brakes" (page 116).
5. Unfasten the setting sleeves [67] by turning it towards the endshield
6. Measure the working air gap A (see the following figure)
(use a feeler gauge and measure at three points offset by 120):
A
1
12
12
2
120
179978635
114
7. Tighten the hex nuts [61]

8. If you are mounting the BE122 in a vertical position, set the 3 springs on the brake
stationary disc to the following measurement:
Mounting position
X in [mm]
Brake at the top
10.0
Brake at the bottom
10.5
[49]
[68b]
[52b]
[49]
[52b]
[68]
[68b]
[900]
[68]
X
[900]
Pressure plate
Brake disk
Hex nut
9. Tighten the setting sleeves

towards the magnet
Until the working air gap is set correctly, see chapter "Technical Data" (page 125)
115
7
7.9.5
Replacing the brake disk of BE120-BE122 brakes

In addition to the brake elements listed in column "BE brake", see chapter "Inspection
and maintenance intervals" (page 76), check the hex nut nuts [61] for wear when you
replace the brake disk. You must always replace the hex nuts [61] when you replace the
brake disk.
WARNING
Carefully observe the following steps!

2. Remove the fan guard [35], circlip [32] and fan [36]
3. Loosen the plug connector on the magnet
Setting nuts [58], conical seat [255], spherical washer [256], conical coil springs
[57], studs [56], releasing lever [53]
5. Unfasten hex nuts [61], carefully remove complete magnet [54] and remove brake
springs [50/265].
6. Remove the pressure plate [49] and brake disk [68b], and clean the brake components.
7. Install a new brake disk.
8. Re-install the brake components,
(page 114).
116
S
353592459
Brake
BE120; BE122
INFORMATION
The lockable manual brake release (type HF) is already released when resistance
is encountered when operating the grub screw.
After replacing the brake disk, the maximum braking torque is reached only after
several cycles.
117
7
7.9.6
Changing the braking torque of BE120-BE122 brakes

The braking torque can be altered in stages,
By changing the type and number of brake springs
By changing the brake
For the possible braking torque steps, please refer to section "Technical Data"
(page 125).
7.9.7
Changing the brake spring of BE120-BE122 brakes
WARNING

2. Remove the flange cover or fan guard [35], circlip [32] and fan [36]
3. Unfasten the plug connector on the magnet [54] and protect it from getting dirty
Setting nuts [58], conical seat [255], spherical washer [256], conical coil springs
[57], studs [56], releasing lever [53]
5. Unfasten hex nuts [61] and pull off the magnet [54]
by about 50 mm
6. Change or add brake springs [50/265]
Arrange brake springs symmetrically
(page 114).
118
S
353592459
Brake
BE120; BE122
INFORMATION
119
7
7.9.8
Replacing the brake of DR.315
INFORMATION
The mounting position for installation should correspond to the specifications on the
nameplate; make sure that the intended mounting position is permitted.
WARNING

2. Remove the flange cover or fan guard [35], circlip [32] and fan [36]
3. Unfasten brake connector
4. Unfasten screws [900] and remove brake from brake endshield.
5. Align the cam of the friction disk, and mount the brake onto the brake endshield using
a screw [900].
S
353592459
120
Brake
BE120; BE122
Inspection/maintenance DUB
7.10
7.10.1 DUB connected to DR.90-100 with BE2 basic structure
[379]
[945]
[112]
[946]
[561]
[560]
[66]
[49]
[556]
[559]
[555] [562] [558]

353595787
[49] Pressure plate for DUB

[66] Rubber sealing for DUB
[379] Cable gland
[555] Microswitch
[556] Angle bracket

[557] Bolts
[561]
[562]
[945]
[946]
Stud
Washer
Countersunk screw
Mounting plate, complete
121
7.10.2 DUB connected to DR.90-315 with BE5-BE122 basic structure
[379]
[112]
[66]
[49]
[562] [558]
[556]
[561] [557]
[555]
[560]
[559]
353595787
[49] Pressure plate for DUB
[66] Rubber sealing for DUB
[379] Cable gland
[555] Microswitch
122
[556] Angle bracket

[557] Bolts
[561] Stud
[562] Washer
7.10.3 Inspection/maintenance of the DUB for function monitoring
WARNING
1. Check and, if necessary, adjust the working air gap according to section "Setting the
working air gap for BE.. brake".
2. Screw hex head screw [560] against the actuator of microswitch [555] until it switches
over (brown-blue contacts closed).
While screwing, apply hex nut [561] to eliminate the longitudinal play from the thread.
3. Turn hex head screw [560] back until microswitch [555] switches back (contacts
brown-blue open).
4. To ensure operational reliability, turn hex head screw [560] further back by one-sixth
of a revolution (0.1 mm)
5. Tighten hex nut [561], while doing so, hold hex head screw [560] to keep it in the correct position.
6. Switch the brake on and off several times. Check whether the microswitch opens and
closes reliably in any motor shaft position. Therefore, change the position of the
motor shaft manually several times.
123
7.10.4 Inspection/maintenance of the DUB for wear monitoring
WARNING
1. Check and, if necessary, adjust the working air gap according to section "Setting the
working air gap for BE.. brake".
2. Screw hex head screw [560] against the actuator of microswitch [555] until it switches
over (brown-blue contacts closed).
While screwing, apply hex nut [561] to eliminate the longitudinal play from the thread.
3. For BE2-BE5: Loosen hex head screw [560] by a 3/4 revolution towards the microswitch [555] (with BE2 by about 0.375 mm / with BE5 by about 0.6 mm).
For BE11-BE122: Loosen hex head screw [560] towards the microswitch [555] by a
whole revolution (about 0.8 mm).
4. Tighten hex nut [561], while doing so, hold hex head screw [560] to keep it in the correct position.
5. If the brake lining reaches the wear limit, the microswitch automatically switches back
(contacts brown-blue open) and activates a relay or a signal.
7.10.5 Inspection/maintenance of the DUB for function and wear monitoring
If two DUB are connected to one brake, both monitoring statuses can be realized. In this
case, set the DUB for wear monitoring before you set the DUB for function monitoring.
124
Technical Data
Work done, working air gap, braking torques
Technical Data
8.1
kVA
i
P Hz
If you you use encoders and brakes with functional safety, the values for the maximum
working air gaps and the work done until maintenance reduce. For the new values, refer
to the "Safety-Rated Encoders Functional Safety for AC Motors DR.71225, 315" addendum to the operating instructions.
Brake
Type
Braking
work
until
Maintenance
[106 J]
Working air
gap
Brake
disk
[mm]
[mm]
min.
1)
max.
Part number
damping
plate/pole
sheet
Braking torque settings

Braking
torque
Type and number

of
brake springs
Order number of
brake springs
min.
[Nm (lb-in)]
Standard
Blue
Standard
Blue
6
4
3
0135 017 X
1374 137 3
BE05
120
0.25
0.6
9.0
1374 056 3
5.0 (44)
3.5 (31)
2.5 (22)
1.8 (16)
BE1
120
0.25
0.6
9.0
1374 056 3
10 (88.5)
7.0 (62)
5.0 (44)
6
4
3
0135 017 X
1374 137 3
1374 019 9
20 (177)
14 (124)
10 (88.5)
7.0 (62)
5.0 (44)
6
2
2
4
2
4
3
1374 024 5
1374 052 0
1374 069 5
55 (487)
40 (354)
28 (248)
20 (177)
14 (124)
6
2
2
4
2
4
3
1374 070 9
1374 071 7
1374 171 3
110 (974)
80 (708)
55 (487)
40 (354)
6
2
2
4
2
4
1374 183 7
1374 184 5
1374 171 3 +
1374 699 5
20 (177)
200 (1770)
150 (1328)
110 (974)
80 (708)
55 (487)
6
4
3
3
2
3
1374 322 8
1374 248 5
1374 675 8
40 (354)
300 (2655)
200 (1770)
150 (1328)
100 (885)
75 (667)
8
4
4
8
6
0187 455 1
1374 435 6
600 (5310)
500 (4425)
400 (3540)
300 (2655)
200 (1770)
150 (1328)
8
6
4
4
2
4
8
6
0187 455 1
1374 435 6
1374 673 1
100 (885)
BE2
BE5
BE11
BE20
BE30
BE32
180
390
640
1000
1500
1500
0.25
0.25
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.9
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
9.0
9.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
125
kVA
i
Brake
Type
Technical Data
P Hz
Braking
work
until
Maintenance
[106 J]
BE120
BE122
520
520
Working air
gap
Brake
disk
[mm]
[mm]
min.
1)
0.4
0.5
max.
1.2
1.2
Part number
damping
plate/pole
sheet
Braking torque settings

Braking
torque
Type and number

of
brake springs
Order number of
brake springs
min.
[Nm (lb-in)]
Standard
Blue
Standard
Blue
12.0
1000 (8851)
800 (7081)
600 (5310)
400 (3540)
8
6
4
4
2
4
1360 877 0
1360 831 2
2000 (17701)
1600 (14161)
1200 (10621)
800 (7081)
8
6
4
4
2
4
1360 877 0
1360 831 2
12.0
1) When checking the working air gap, note: Parallelism tolerances on the brake disk may cause deviations of 0.15 mm after a test run.
126
Technical Data
Braking torque assignment
8.2
Braking torque assignment
8.2.1
Motor
type
Brake
type
BE05
DR.71
DR.80
DR.90
1.8
(16)
2.5
(22)
3.5
(31)
5.0
(44)
7.0
(62)
10
(88)
5.0
(44)
7.0
(62)
10
(88)
BE2
5.0
(44)
7.0
(62)
10
(88.5)
BE1
5.0
(44)
7.0
(62)
10
(88)
BE2
5.0
(44)
7.0
(62)
10
(88)
1.8
(16)
2.5
(22)
3.5
(31)
BE1
BE2
8.2.2
Motor
type
P Hz
5.0
(44)
7.0
(62)
10
(88)
14
(124)
20
(177)
14
(124)
20
(177)
14
(124)
20
(177)
14
(124)
20
(177)
14
(124)
20
(177)
28
(248)
40
(354)
55
(487)
28
(248)
40
(354)
55
(487)

Brake
type
Braking torque steps [Nm (lb-in)]

28
(248)
40
(354)
55
(487)
BE11
20
(180)
40
(354)
55
(487)
BE5
28
(248)
40
(354)
55
(487)
BE11
20
(180)
40
(354)
BE11
20
(180)
DR.112
14
(124)
20
(180)
80
(708)
110
(974)
55
(487)
80
(708)
110
(974)
40
(354)
55
(487)
80
(708)
110
(974)
BE20
40
(354)
55
(487)
80
(708)
110
(974)
150
(1328)
200
(1770)
BE20
40
(354)
55
(487)
80
(708)
110
(974)
150
(1328)
200
(1770)
75
(667)
100
(885)
150
(1328)
200
(1770)
300
(2655)
100
(885)
150
(974)
200
(1770)
300
(2655)
100
(885)
150
(974)
200
(1770)
300
(2655)
100
(885)
150
(1328)
200
(1770)
300
(2655)
DR.132
DR.160
BE30
BE32
DR.200/
225
5.0
(44)
BE5
BE5
DR.180
5.0
(44)
BE5
DR.100
BE1
BE05
kVA
BE30
BE32
75
(667)
400
(3540)
400
(3540)
500
(4425)
600
(5310)
127
kVA
i
Technical Data
Operating currents
P Hz
8.2.3
Motor size DR.315
Motor type
Brake type

400
(3540)
BE120
DR.315
600
(5310)
800
(7081)
1000
(8851)
800
(7081)
BE122
8.3
Operating currents
8.3.1
Brake BE05, BE1, BE2
1200
(10621)
1600
(14161)
2000
(17701)
The current values IH (holding current) listed in the tables are r.m.s. values. Use only
appropriate instruments for measuring r.m.s. values. The inrush current (accelerator
current) IB only flows for a short time (about 160 ms) when the brake is released. There
is no increased inrush current if a BG or BMS brake rectifier is used or if there is a direct
DC voltage supply only possible with brakes up to size BE2.
BE05, BE1
BE2
5/10 (44/88)
20 (177)
Braking power [W (hp)]
32 (0.043)
43 (0.058)
Inrush current ratio IB/IH
BE05, BE1
BE2
Max. braking torque [Nm (lb-in)]
Nominal voltage VN
VDC
IH
[AAC]
IG
[ADC]
IH
[AAC]
IG
[ADC]
10
2,10
2.80
2.75
3.75
60 (57-63)
24
0.88
1.17
1.57
1.46
120 (111-123)
48
0.45
0.58
0.59
0.78
147 (139-159)
60
0,36
0,47
0,48
0.61
184 (174-193)
80
0.29
0.35
0.38
0.47
208 (194-217)
90
0.26
0.31
0.34
0.42
230 (218-243)
96
0.23
0.29
0.30
0.39
254 (244-273)
110
0.20
0.26
0.27
0.34
290 (274-306)
125
0.18
0.26
0.24
0.30
330 (307-343)
140
0.16
0.20
0.21
0.27
360 (344-379)
160
0.14
0.18
0.19
0.24
400 (380-431)
180
0.13
0.16
0.17
0.21
460 (432-484)
200
0.11
0.14
0.15
0.19
500 (485-542)
220
0.10
0.13
0.13
0.17
575 (543-600)
250
0.09
0.11
0.12
0.15
VAC
24 (23-26)
Key
IB
IH
IG
VN
128
Acceleration current brief inrush current

Holding current r.m.s. value in the connecting harness to the SEW brake rectifier
Direct current with direct DC voltage supply
Rated voltage (rated voltage range)
Technical Data
Operating currents
8.3.2
kVA
i
P Hz
Brakes BE5, BE11, BE20, BE30, BE32

current) IB only flows for a short time (about 160 ms) when the brake is released. A separate voltage supply is not possible.
BE5
BE11
BE20
BE30, BE32
55 (487)
110 (974)
200 (1770)
300/600
(2655/5310)
49 (0.066)
77 (0.10)
100 (0.13)
130 (0.17)
5.7
6.6
10
BE5
BE11
BE20
BE30, BE32
VDC
IH
[AAC]
IH
[AAC]
IH
[AAC]
IH
[AAC]
24
1.25
2.08
2.49
Nominal voltage VN
VAC
60 (57-63)
120 (111-123)
48
0.64
1.04
1.25
1.81
147 (139-159)
60
0.51
0.83
1.02
1.33
184 (174-193)
80
0.40
0.66
0.79
1.15
208 (194-217)
90
0.36
0.59
0.70
1.02
230 (218-243)
96
0.33
0.52
0.63
0.91
254 (244-273)
110
0.29
0.47
0.56
0.81
290 (274-306)
125
0.26
0.42
0.50
0.72
330 (307-343)
140
0.23
0.37
0.44
0.64
360 (344-379)
160
0.21
0.33
0.40
0.57
400 (380-431)
180
0.18
0.29
0.35
0.51
460 (432-484)
200
0.16
0.26
0.32
0.46
500 (485-542)
220
0.15
0.23
0.28
0.41
575 (543-600)
250
0.13
0.21
0.25
0.36
Key
IB
IH
IG
VN

129
kVA
i
8.3.3
Technical Data
Operating currents
P Hz
Brake BE120, BE122
current) IB only flows for a short time (about 400 ms) when the brake is released. A separate voltage supply is not possible.
BE120
BE122
1000 (8851)
2000 (17701)
250 (0.34)
250 (0.34)
4.9
4.9
Rated voltage VN
BE120
BE122
VAC
VDC
IH
[AAC]
IH
[AAC]
230 (218-243)
1.80
1.80
254 (244-273)
1.60
1.60
290 (274-306)
1.43
1.43
360 (344-379)
1.14
1.14
400 (380-431)
1.02
1.02
460 (432-484)
0.91
0.91
500 (485-542)
0.81
0.81
575 (543-600)
0.72
0.72
Key
IB
IH
IG
VN
130

Technical Data
Resistors
8.4
Resistors
8.4.1
Brake BE05, BE1, BE2, BE5
BE05, BE1
BE2
BE5
5/10 (44/88)
20 (177)
55 (487)
3 2 (0.043)
43 (0.058)
49 (0.066)
5.7
VAC
BE05, BE1
P Hz
Nominal voltage VN
8.4.2
kVA
BE2
BE5
VDC
RB
RT
RB
RT
RB
24 (23-26)
10
0.77
2.35
0.57
1.74
RT
-
60 (57-63)
24
4.85
14.8
3.60
11.0
2.20
10.5
42.0
120 (111-123)
48
19.4
59.0
14.4
44.0
8.70
147 (139-159)
60
31.0
94.0
23.0
69.0
13.8
66
184 (174-193)
80
48.5
148
36.0
111
22.0
105
208 (194-217)
90
61.0
187
45.5
139
27.5
132
230 (218-243)
96
77.0
235
58.0
174
34.5
166
254 (244-273)
110
97.0
295
72.0
220
43.5
210
290 (274-306)
125
122
370
91
275
55.0
265
330 (307-343)
140
154
470
115
350
69.0
330
360 (344-379)
160
194
590
144
440
87.0
420
400 (380-431)
180
245
740
182
550
110
530
460 (432-484)
200
310
940
230
690
138
660
500 (485-542)
220
385
1180
290
870
174
830
575 (543-600)
250
490
1480
365
1100
220
1050
Brake BE11, BE20, BE30, BE32
BE11
BE20
BE30, BE32
110 (974)
200 (1770)
600 (5310)
77 (0.10)
100 (0.13)
130 (0.17)
6.6
10
Nominal voltage VN
VAC
BE11
BE20
BE30, BE32
VDC
RB
RT
RB
RT
RB
60 (57-63)
24
1.20
7.6
1.1
7.1
RT
-
120 (111-123)
48
4.75
30.5
3.3
28.6
2.1
15.8
147 (139-159)
60
7.7
43.5
5.4
36.0
3.7
27.5
184 (174-193)
80
12.0
76.0
8.4
57
5.3
39.8
208 (194-217)
90
15.1
96
10.6
71.7
6.7
50
230 (218-243)
96
19.0
121
13.3
90.3
8.4
63
254 (244-273)
110
24.0
152
16.7
134
10.6
79.3
290 (274-306)
125
30.0
191
21.1
143
13.3
100
330 (307-343)
140
38.0
240
26.5
180
16.8
126
360 (344-379)
160
47.5
305
33.4
227
21.1
158
400 (380-431)
180
60
380
42.1
286
26.6
199
460 (432-484)
200
76
480
52.9
360
33.4
251
500 (485-542)
220
95
600
66.7
453
42.1
316
575 (543-600)
250
120
760
83.9
570
53.0
398
131
kVA
i
8.4.3
Technical Data
Resistors
P Hz
Resistance measurement BE05, BE1, BE2, BE5, BE30, BE32
Cutoff in the AC
circuit
The following illustration shows how to measure resistance with cutoff in the AC circuit.
RD
RB
WH
BU
RT
RD
BU
WH
Cut-off in the DC
and AC circuits
The following illustration shows how to measure resistance with cut-off in the DC and
AC circuits.
RD
RB
WH
BU
RD
WH
BS Accelerator coil
TS coil section
RB Accelerator coil resistance at 20 C []
RT Coil section resistance at 20 C []
UN Rated voltage (rated voltage range)
RT
BU
RD red
WH white
BU blue
INFORMATION
When measuring the resistance of the coil section (RSec) or the acceleration coil
(RAcc), remove the white conductor from the brake rectifier; if it remains connected,
the internal resistance of the brake rectifier will cause erroneous results.
132
Technical Data
Resistors
8.4.4
P Hz
Brake BE120, BE122
BE120
BE122
1000 (8851)
2000 (17701)
250 (0.34)
250 (0.34)
4.9
4.9
Nominal voltage VN
VAC
8.4.5
kVA
BE120
VDC
RB
BE122
RT
RB
RT
230 (218-243)
7.6
29.5
7.6
29.5
254 (244-273)
9.5
37.0
9.5
37.0
290 (274-306)
12.0
46.5
12.0
46.5
360 (344-379)
19.1
74.0
19.1
74.0
400 (380-431)
24.0
93.0
24.0
93.0
460 (432-484)
30.0
117.0
30.0
117.0
500 (485-542)
38.0
147.0
38.0
147.0
575 (543-600)
48.0
185.0
48.0
185.0
Resistance measurement BE120, BE122

The following illustration shows how to measure resistance with BMP 3.1.
RD
RB
WH
RT
BU
RD WH BU
BS Accelerator coil
TS coil section
RB Accelerator coil resistance at 20 C []
RT Coil section resistance at 20 C []
UN nominal voltage (nominal voltage range)
INFORMATION
When measuring the resistance of the coil section (RSec) or the acceleration coil
(RAcc), remove the white conductor from the brake rectifier; if it remains connected,
the internal resistance of the brake rectifier will cause erroneous results.
133
kVA
i
Technical Data
Brake rectifier combinations
P Hz
8.5
Brake rectifier combinations
8.5.1
Brake BE05, BE1, BE2, BE5, BE11, BE20, BE30, BE32

The table below shows the standard and optional combinations of brakes and brake rectifiers.
Size 1.5
Size
BGE
BS
BMS
BME
BMH
BMK
BE2
BE5
BE11
BE20
BE30, BE32
X1
X1
Size 3
BGE 1.5
X1
X1
X1
X1
BGE 3
X2
X2
X2
X2
BS 24
BMS 1.5
BMS 3
BME 1.5
BME 3
BMH 1.5
BMH 3
BMK 1.5
BMK 3
BMP 3
BMV
BMV 5
BSG
BSG
BSR
BUR
8.5.2
BE1
X1
BMP 1.5
BMP
X
X1
X2
BE05
BGE 3 + SR 11
BGE 3 + SR 15
BGE 1.5 + SR 11
BGE 1.5 + SR 15
BGE 3 + UR 11
BGE 1.5 + UR 15
Standard design
Standard design with brake rated voltage of AC 150 - 500 V
Standard design with brake rated voltage of AC 24/42 - 150 V
Optional
Not permitted
Brake BE120, BE122

The table below shows the standard and optional combinations of brakes and brake rectifiers.
BMP 3.1
134
BE120
BE122
Technical Data
Brake control system
8.6
8.6.1
Wiring space of the motor
kVA
i
P Hz
The following tables list the technical data of brake control systems for installation in the
motor wiring space and the assignments with regard to motor size and connection technology. The different housings have different colors (= color code) to make them easier
to distinguish.
Motor size DR.71DR.225
Type
Function
BG
One-way rectifier
BGE
One-way rectifier with

electronic switching
Voltage
Holding
current
IHmax [A]
Type
Part
number
Color
code
AC 150...500 V
1.5
BG 1.5
825 384 6
Black
AC 24...500 V
3.0
BG 3
825 386 2
Brown
AC 150...500 V
1.5
BGE 1.5
825 385 4
Red
AC 42...150 V
3.0
BGE 3
825 387 0
Blue
1.0
BGE 1.5 + SR 11
825 385 4
826 761 8
1.0
BGE 1.5 + SR 15
825 385 4
826 762 6
1.0
BGE 3 + SR11
825 387 0
826 761 8
1.0
BGE 3 + SR15
825 387 0
826 762 6
AC 150...500 V
BSR
One-way rectifier + current relay for cut-off in the

DC circuit
AC 42...150 V
One-way rectifier + voltage relay for cut-off in the

DC circuit
AC 150...500 V
1.0
BGE 1.5 + UR 15
825 385 4
826 759 6
AC 42...150 V
1.0
BGE 3 + UR 11
825 387 0
826 758 8
BS
Varistor protection circuit
DC 24 V
5.0
BS24
826 763 4
Water
blue
BSG
Electronic switching
DC 24 V
5.0
BSG
825 459 1
White
Type
Function
Voltage
Holding
current
IHmax [A]
Type
Part
number
Color
code
BMP
Half-wave rectifier with

electronic switching, integrated voltage relay for
cut-off in the DC circuit.
AC 230...575 V
2.8
BMP 3.1
829 507 7
BUR
Motor size DR.315
135
kVA
i
8.6.2
Technical Data
P Hz
Control cabinet
The following tables list the technical data of brake control systems for installation in the
control cabinet, and the assignment regarding the motor size and connection technology. The different housings have different colors (= color code) to make them easier to
distinguish.
Holding
current
IHmax [A]
Type
AC 150...500 V
1.5
BMS 1.5
825 802 3
Black
AC 42...150 V
3.0
BMS 3
825 803 1
Brown

electronic switching as
BGE
AC 150...500 V
1.5
BME 1.5
825 722 1
Red
AC 42...150 V
3.0
BME 3
825 723 X
Blue

electronic switching and
heating function
AC 150...500 V
1.5
BMH 1.5
825 818 X
Green
BMH
AC 42...150 V
BMH 3
825 819 8
Yellow
AC 150...500 V
1.5
BMP 1.5
825 685 3
White
BMP

cut-off in the DC circuit
AC 42...150 V
3.0
BMP 3
826 566 6
Light
blue
AC 150...500 V
1.5
BMK 1.5
826 463 5
Water
blue
AC 42...150 V
3.0
BMK 3
826 567 4
Bright
red
BMV
Brake control unit with

electronic switching, DC
24 V control input and
fast cut-off
DC 24 V
5.0
BMV 5
1 300 006 3
White
Type
Function
Voltage
Holding
current
IHmax [A]
Type
Part
number
Color
code
BMP
Half-wave rectifier with

cut-off in the DC circuit.
AC 230...575 V
2.8
BMP 3.1
829 507 7
Type
Function
BMS
One-way rectifier as BG
BME
BMK

electronic switch mode,
DC 24 V control input
and separation in the DC
circuit
Voltage
Part
number
Color
code
Motor size DR.315
136
Technical Data
Permitted rolling bearing types
8.7
Permitted rolling bearing types
8.7.1
Rolling bearing types for motor sizes DR.71 DR.225
Motor type
8.7.2
A-side bearing
IEC motor
kVA
i
P Hz
B-side bearing
Gearmotor
AC motor
Brakemotor
DR.71
6204-2Z-J-C3
6303-2Z-J-C3
6203-2Z-J-C3
6203-2RS-J-C3
DR.80
6205-2Z-J-C3
6304-2Z-J-C3
6304-2Z-J-C3
6304-2RS-J-C3
DR.90-DR.100
6306-2Z-J-C3
6205-2Z-J-C3
6205-2RS-J-C3
DR.112-DR.132
6308-2Z-J-C3
6207-2Z-J-C3
6207-2RS-J-C3
DR.160
6309-2Z-J-C3
6209-2Z-J-C3
6209-2RS-J-C3
DR.180
6312-2Z-J-C3
6213-2Z-J-C3
6213-2RS-J-C3
DR.200-DR.225
6314-2Z-J-C3
6314-2Z-J-C3
6314-2RS-J-C3
Rolling bearing types for motor size DR.315
Motor type
A-side bearing
IEC motor
Gearmotor
DR.315K
DR.315S
DR.315M
Motor with reinforced bearing /

ERF
B-side bearing
IEC motor
Gearmotor
6319-J-C3
6319-J-C3
Motor type
6319-J-C3
6319-J-C3
6322-J-C3
DR.315L
A-side bearing
6322-J-C3
B-side bearing
IEC motor
Gearmotor
DR.315K
DR.315S
DR.315M
6319-J-C3
NU319E
6319-J-C3
6322-J-C3
DR.315L
8.7.3
Current insulated rolling bearings for motor size DR.200 DR.315
Motor type
AC motor
Brakemotor
DR.200-DR.225
6314-C3-EI
6314-C3-EI
DR.315K
DR.315S
DR.315M
DR.315L
6319-J-C3
6319-J-C3
6322-J-C3
137
kVA
i
Technical Data
Lubricant tables
P Hz
8.8
Lubricant tables
8.8.1
Lubricant table for rolling bearings
INFORMATION
Using the wrong bearing grease might result in increased motor noise.
The bearings are 2Z or 2RS closed bearings and cannot be regreased.

Ambient temperature
Motor rolling
bearings
Manufacturer
-20 C ... +80 C
Esso
+20 C ... +100 C
Klber
-40 C ... +60 C
Kyodo Yushi
Type
Polyrex EM
DIN designation
1)
Barrierta L55/22)
Multemp
SRL2)
K2P-20
KX2U
K2N-40
1) mineral lubricant (= mineral-based rolling bearing grease)

2) synthetic lubricant (= synthetic-based rolling bearing grease)
Motor size DR.315
Motors of size DR.315 can be equipped with a relubrication device.
Motor rolling
bearings
Ambient temperature
Manufacturer
Type
DIN designation
-20 C ... +80 C
Esso
Polyrex EM1)
K2P-20
-40 C ... +60 C
SKF
GXN
1)
K2N-40
1) mineral lubricant (= mineral-based rolling bearing grease)
8.9
Order information for lubricants and anti-corrosion agents

Lubricants and anti-corrosion agents may be obtained directly from SEW-EURODRIVE
using the following order numbers.
Usage
Lubricant for rolling
bearings
Lubricant for
sealing rings
Anti-corrosion agent
and lubricant
138
Manufacturer
Type
Quantity
Order number
Esso
Polyrex EM
400 g
09101470
SKF
GXN
400 g
09101276
Klber
Petamo GHY 133
10 g
04963458
SEW-EURODRIVE
NOCO FLUID
5.5 g
09107819
Technical Data
Encoders
8.10
kVA
i
P Hz
Encoders
8.10.1 Encoders ES7., EG7. and EH7S
Encoder type
For motors
Supply voltage
ES7S
EG7S
ES7R
EG7R
ES7C
EG7C
EH7S
DR.71 132
DR.160
225
DR.71 132
DR.160
225
DR.71 132
DR.160
225
DR.315
VB
DC 7 V 30 V
DC 7 30 V
DC 4.75 30 V
DC 10 V
30 V
Iin
140 mARMS
160 mARMS
240 mARMS
140 mARMS
Max. pulse frequency
fmax
150 kHz
120 kHz
120 kHz
180 kHz
Periods per revolution
A, B
1024
1024
1024
1024
DC 2.5 V
DC 2.5 V
DC 0.5 V
DC 1.1 V
Max. current consumption
C
Output amplitude per track
Vhigh
1 VSS
Vlow
Signal output
1 VSS
Sin/cos
TTL
HTL
Sin/cos
10 mARMS
25 mARMS
60 mARMS
10 mARMS
Mark space ratio
Sin/cos
1 : 1 10 %
1 : 1 10 %
Sin/cos
Phase angle A: B
90 3
90 20
90 20
90 10
100 m/s
100 m/s
Output current per track
Iout
Vibration resistance
100 m/s
Shock resistance
Maximum speed
6000 min-1
nmax
Ambient temperature
Connection
100 m/s
200 m/s
1000 m/s 2000 m/s 1000 m/s 2000 m/s 1000 m/s 2000 m/s 2000 m/s
6000 min-1
6000 min-1
6000 rpm at
70 C /
3500 rpm at
80 C
IP66
IP66
IP66
IP65
-30 C to +60 C
-30 C to +60 C
-30 C to +60 C
-20 C to
+60 C
Terminal box on incremen- Terminal box on incremen- Terminal box on incremen- 12-pin plug
tal encoder
tal encoder
tal encoder
connector
8.10.2 Encoders AS7Y and AG7Y
Encoder type
For motors
Supply voltage
AS7Y
AG7Y
DR.71 132
DR.160 225
VB
DC 7 30 V
Iin
140 mARMS
fmax
200 kHz
A, B
2048
C
Vhigh
1 VSS
Vlow
Signal output
Sin/cos
10 mARMS
Iout
Mark space ratio
Sin/cos
Phase angle A: B
90 3
Scanning code
Gray code
Single-turn resolution
4096 increments / revolution
Multi-turn resolution
4096 revolutions
Data transfer
synchronous-serial
Serial data output
Driver according to EIA RS-485
Serial clock input
Optocoupler, recommended driver to EIA RS-485
Cycle frequency
Permitted range: 100 2000 kHz (max. 100 m cable length with 300 kHz)
Clock-pulse space period
12 30 s
100 m/s
Shock resistance
Maximum speed
1000 m/s
nmax
2000 m/s
6000 min-1
139
kVA
i
Technical Data
Encoders
P Hz
Encoder type
AS7Y
AG7Y
IP66
Ambient temperature
-20 C to +60 C
Connection
Terminal strip in pluggable connection cover
8.10.3 Encoders AS7W and AG7W
Encoder type
For motors
Supply voltage
AS7W
AG7W
DR.71 132
DR.160 225
VB
DC 7 30 V
Iin
150 mARMS
fmax
200 kHz
A, B
2048
C
Vhigh
1 VSS
Vlow
Signal output
Sin/cos
10 mARMS
Iout
Mark space ratio
Sin/cos
Phase angle A: B
90 3
Scanning code
Binary code
Single-turn resolution
8192 increments / revolution
Multi-turn resolution
65536 revolutions
Data transfer
RS485
Serial data output
Driver according to EIA RS-485
Serial clock input
Optocoupler, recommended driver to EIA RS-485
Cycle frequency
9600 baud
Clock-pulse space period

Shock resistance
Maximum speed
100 m/s
200 m/s
1000 m/s
2000 m/s
6000 min-1
nmax
Ambient temperature
IP66
-20 C to +60 C
Connection
Terminal strip in pluggable connection cover
8.10.4 Encoder EI7.
Encoder type
EI7C
EI76
For motors
VB
DC 9 30 V
Imax
120 mARMS
fmax
A, B
Supply voltage
C
0.5 VSS
Iout
60 mARMS
HTL
1 : 1 20 %
Phase angle A: B
90 20
100 m/s
2
VB -2.5 VSS
Shock resistance
140
Vlow
Mark space ratio
Maximum speed
EI71
1,54 kHz
24
Vhigh
Signal output
EI72
DR.71 132
1000 m/s
nmax
3600 min-1
IP65
kVA
Technical Data
Encoders
Encoder type
Ambient temperature
EI7C
A
EI76
EI72
P Hz
EI71
-30 C to +60 C
Connection
Terminal strip in the terminal box or M12 (4- or 8-pin)
8.10.5 Encoder EV1.
Encoder type
EV1T
EV1S
For motors
Supply voltage
EV1R:
VB
DC 5 V
Iin
180 mARMS
DC 10 V 30 V
160 mARMS
fmax
120 kHz
A, B
1024
C
EV1C
DR.71 225
340 mARMS
2.5 VDC
VB DC - 3.5 V
DC 0.5 V
1.5 VDC
Vhigh
DC 2.5 V
Vlow
DC 0.5 V
Signal output
180 mARMS
1 VSS
TTL
Sin/cos
TTL
HTL
20 mARMS
40 mARMS
20 mARMS
60 mARMS
Mark space ratio
1 : 1 20 %
Sin/cos
Phase angle A: B
90 20
90
Iout
1000 m/s
nmax
Ambient temperature
90 20
300 m/s
Shock resistance
Maximum speed
1 : 1 20 %
6000 min-1
IP66
Connection
-30 C to +60 C
Terminal box on incremental encoder
141
kVA
i
8.11
Technical Data
Markings on the nameplate
P Hz
Markings on the nameplate
The following table lists all markings that can occur on a nameplate and an explanation
of what they mean:
Mark
Meaning
CE mark to state compliance with European guidelines, such as the Low Voltage
Directive
ATEX mark to state compliance with the European Directive 94/9/EC
UR logo to confirm that UL (Underwriters Laboratory) is informed about the registered components; register number by UL: E189357
DoE mark to confirm compliance with US-American efficiency limit values for AC
motors.
UL logo to confirm that a component is UL (Underwriters Laboratory) tested, also

valid for CSA in conjunction with the register number
CSA mark to confirm the Canadian Standard Association (CSA) and the market
conformity of AC motors
CSAe mark to confirm compliance with the Canadian efficiency limit values for AC
motors
CCC logo to confirm the adherance to the Chinese regulation for small appliances
VIK mark to confirm the compliance with the directive of the German Association of
Industrial Machines (V.I.K.)
FS mark with code number to identify functional safety relevant components
02
142
Technical Data
Characteristic values of functional safety
8.12
kVA
i
P Hz
Characteristic values of functional safety
8.12.1 Characteristic safety values of the brakes BE05 BE122

Definition of the characteristic safety value B10d:
The value B10d specifies the number of cycles at which 10% of components have failed
dangerously (definition according to standard EN ISO 13849-1). Failed dangerously
means in this context that the brake is not applied when required. This means the brake
does not deliver the necessary braking torque.
Size
B10d
Switching cycles
BE05
16.000.000
BE1
12.000.000
BE2
8.000.000
BE5
6.000.000
BE11
3.000.000
BE20
2.000.000
BE30
1.500.000
BE32
1.500.000
BE120
250.000
BE122
250.000
8.12.2 Characteristic safety values of the encoders EG7S, ES7S, AG7W, AG7Y, AS7Y
Definition of the characteristic safety value MTTFd:
The value MTTFd (Mean Time To Failure) specifies theh mean time to dangerous failure
/ component fault.
Motor size
DR.71-132
DR.160-225, 315
Designation
MTTFd1) [a]
Service life [a]
ES7S
61
20
AS7W
41
20
AS7Y
41
20
EG7S
61
20
AG7W
41
20
AG7Y
41
20
1) Referring to an ambient temperature of 40 C
143
kVA
Malfunctions
P Hz
Malfunctions
WARNING
De-energize the motor before you start working on the unit.

Secure the motor against unintended power-up.
CAUTION
Danger of burns.
NOTICE
Improper troubleshooting measures may damage the drive.
144
Note the following information.
Use only genuine spare parts in accordance with the valid parts list.
Strictly observe the safety notes in the individual chapters.
Malfunctions
Motor malfunctions
9.1
Motor malfunctions
Malfunction
Possible cause
Remedy
Motor does not start up
Supply cable interrupted
Check the connections and (intermediate) terminal points,

correct if necessary )
Brake does not release
See chapter "Brake malfunctions"
Supply cable fuse has blown
Replace fuse
Motor protection (switch) has triggered
Check that the motor protection (switch) is set correctly;

current specification is on the nameplate
Motor protection does not trip
Check motor protection control
Malfunction in control or in the control process
Observe the switching sequence; correct if necessary
Motor power designed for delta connection

but connected in star
Correct the connection from star to delta; follow the wiring

diagram
Motor power designed for star-star connection but only connected in star
Correct the connection from star to star-star; follow the

wiring diagram
Voltage or frequency deviate considerably

from setpoint, at least while being switched
on
Provide better power supply system; reduce the power

supply load;
Check cross section of supply cable, replace with cable of
larger cross section if need be
Star connection does not provide sufficient

torque
If the delta inrush current is not too high (observe the regulations of the power supplier), start up directly in delta;
Check the project planning and use a larger motor or special version if necessary (consult SEW-EURODRIVE)
Contact fault on star/delta switch
Check the switch, replace if necessary;

Check the connections
Incorrect direction of rotation
Motor connected incorrectly
Swap two phases of the motor supply cable
Motor hums and has high

current consumption
Brake does not release
See chapter "Brake malfunctions"
Winding defective
Send motor to specialist workshop for repair
Motor only starts with difficulty or does not start at all
Motor does not start in star

connection, only in delta
connection
Rotor rubbing
Fuses blow or motor protection trips immediately
Short circuit in the motor supply cable
Repair short circuit
Supply cables connected incorrectly
Correct the wiring, observe the wiring diagram
Short circuit in motor
Send motor to specialist workshop for repair
Ground fault on motor

Severe speed loss under
load
Motor heats up excessively

(measure temperature)
Motor overload
Measure power, check project planning and use larger

motor or reduce load if necessary
Voltage drops
Check cross section of supply cable, replace with cable of

larger cross section if need be
Overload
Measure power, check project planning and use larger

motor or reduce load if necessary
Insufficient cooling
Provide for cooling air supply or clear cooling air passages, retrofit forced cooling fan if necessary. Check the
air filter, clean or replace if necessary
Ambient temperature too high
Observe the permitted temperature range, reduce the

load if necessary
Motor in delta connection instead of star

connection as provided for
Correct the wiring, observe the wiring diagram
Loose contact in supply cable (one phase

missing)
Tighten loose contact, check connections, observe wiring

diagram
Fuse has blown
Look for and rectify cause (see above); replace fuse
Supply voltage deviates from the rated

motor voltage by more than 5% (range A)/
10% (range B).
Adjust motor to supply voltage.
Rated operation type (S1 to S10, DIN

57530) exceeded, e.g. through excessive
starting frequency
Adjust the rated operating mode of the motor to the

required operating conditions; consult a professional to
determine the correct drive if necessary
145
Malfunctions
Motor malfunctions
146
Malfunction
Possible cause
Remedy
Excessively loud
Ball bearing compressed, dirty or damaged
Re-align motor and the driven machine, inspect rolling

bearing and replace if necessary. See section"Permitted
rolling bearing types" (page 137).
Vibration of rotating parts
Look for the case, possibly an imbalance; correct the

cause, observe method for balancing
Foreign bodies in cooling air passages
Clean the cooling air passages
For DR.. motors with rotor designation "J":

Load too high
Reduce load
Malfunctions
Brake malfunctions
9.2
Brake malfunctions
Malfunction
Possible cause
Remedy
Brake does not

release
Incorrect voltage on brake control unit
Apply the correct voltage; brake voltage specified on the nameplate
Brake control unit failed
Install a new brake control, check resistors and insulation of

the brake coils (see "Resistors" section for resistance values).
Check switchgear, replace if necessary
Max. permitted working air gap exceeded

because brake lining worn down.
Measure and set working air gap.

See the following sections:
"Setting the working air gap of brakes BE05-BE32"
(page 98)
(page 114)
If the brake disk is too thin, replace the brake disk.
"Replacing the brake disk of BE05-BE32 brakes"
(page 100)
"Replacing the brake disk of brakes BE120-BE122"
(page 116)
Voltage drop on supply cable > 10%
Provide correct connection voltage: brake voltage specifications on the nameplate. Check the cross section of the brake
supply cable, increase cross section if necessary.
Inadequate cooling, brake overheats
Provide for cooling air supply or clear cooling air passages,

check air filter, clean or replace if necessary. Replace type BG
brake rectifier with type BGE.
Brake coil has interturn short circuit or a

short circuit to frame
Check resistors and insulation of the brake coils (see "Resistors" section for resistance values).
Replace complete brake and brake control (specialist workshop),
Check switchgear, replace if necessary
Rectifier defective
Replace rectifier and brake coil; it may be more economical to

replace the complete brake.
Working air gap not correct
Measure and set working air gap.

(page 98)
(page 114)
If the brake disk is too thin, replace the brake disk.
(page 100)
(page 116)
Brake lining worn
Replace entire brake disk.

(page 100)
(page 116)
Incorrect braking torque.
Check the project planning and change the braking torque if

necessary; see chapter "Work done, working air gap, braking
torques" (page 125)
by changing the type and number of brake springs.
"Changing the braking torque of brakes BE05-BE32"
(page 102)
"Changing the braking torque of brakes BE120BE122" (page 118)
by selecting a different brake
See section "Braking torque assignment" (page 127)
Brake does not brake
147
Malfunctions
Brake malfunctions
148
Malfunction
Possible cause
Remedy
Brake does not brake
Working air gap so large that setting nuts for

the manual release come into contact.
Set the working air gap.

(page 98)
(page 114)
Manual brake release device not set correctly
Set the setting nuts for the manual release correctly

(page 102)
(page 118)
Brake locked by manual brake release HF
Loosen the setscrew, remove if necessary
Brake is applied with

time lag
Brake is switched only on AC voltage side
Switch both the DC and AC sides (e.g. through retrofitting the

current relay from SR to BSR or the voltage relay from UR to
BUR); observe wiring diagram
Noises in vicinity of
brake
Gearing wear on the brake disk or the carrier caused by jolting startup
Check the project planning, replace the brake disk if necessary

(page 100)
(page 116)
Have a specialist workshop replace the carrier
Alternating torques due to incorrectly set frequency inverter
Check correct setting of frequency inverter according to its

operating instructions, correct if necessary.
Malfunctions
Malfunctions when operated with a frequency inverter
9.3
Malfunctions when operated with a frequency inverter

The symptoms described in section "Motor malfunctions" may also occur when the
motor is operated with a frequency inverter. Please refer to the frequency inverter operating instructions for the meaning of the problems that occur and to find information
about rectifying the problems.
9.4
Customer service
Please have the following information to hand if you require the assistance of our
customer service:
9.5
Nameplate data (complete)
Type and extent of the problem
Time the problem occurred and any accompanying circumstances
Assumed cause
Environmental conditions e.g.:
Ambient temperature
Humidity
Installation altitude
Dirt
etc.
Disposal
Dispose of the motors in accordance with the material structure and the regulations in
force:
Iron
Aluminum
Copper
Plastic
Electronic components
Oil and grease (not mixed with solvents)
149
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10
10
Appendix
10.1
Wiring diagrams
INFORMATION
The motor should be connected as shown in the connection wiring diagram or the assignment diagram, which are supplied with the motor. The following section only
shows a selection of the common types of connections. You can obtain the relevant
wiring diagrams free of charge from SEW-EURODRIVE.
10.1.1 Delta and star connection in wiring diagram R13

AC motor
For all motors with one speed, direct switching-on or -/ startup.
connection
The following figure shows connection for low voltage.
W2
(T6)
[2]
U2
(T4)
V2
(T5)
U1
[3] (T1)
V1
(T2)
W1
(T3)
L2
L3
[1]
U2
(T4)
V2
W2
(T5) (T6)
U1
(T1)
V1
W1
(T2) (T3)
L1
242603147
[1] Motor winding
[2] Motor terminal board
[3] Supply cables
connection
The following figure shows connection for high voltage.
U2
(T4)
[1]
V2
(T5)
W2
(T6)
U1
(T1)
V1
(T2)
W1
(T3)
[3]
W2
(T6)
[2]
U2
(T4)
V2
(T5)
U1
(T1)
V1
(T2)
W1
(T3)
L1
L2
L3
242598155
[1] Motor winding
[3] Supply cables
Change in direction of rotation: Swap connection of 2 supply cables, L1 - L2
150
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10
10.1.2 Delta connection in wiring diagram R72

AC motor
For all motors with one speed and direct switching-on.
connection,
connection
The following figure shows connection for high voltages and connection for low
voltages.
U1
T1
V1
T2
W1
T3
U2
T4
V2
T5
W2
T6
U3
T7
V3
T8
W3
T9
U4
T10
V4
T11
W4
T12
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
L1
[2]
W3
T9
U3
T7
V3
T8
W3
T9
U3
T7
V2
T5
W2
T6
U2
T4
V2
T5
W2
T6
U2
T4
V4
T11
W4
T12
U4
T1
V4
T11
W4
T12
U4
T10
U1
T1
V1
T2
W1
T3
U1
T1
V1
T2
W1
T3
V3
T8
L2
L3
[3]
L1
L2
L3
Motor winding
Supply cables
151
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10
10.1.3 Star connection in wiring diagram R76

AC motor
For all motors with one speed and direct switching-on.
connection,
connection
The following figure shows connection for high voltages and connection for low
voltages.
U1
T1
V1
T2
W1
T3
U2
T4
V2
T5
W2
T6
U3
T7
V3
T8
W3
T9
[1]
[4]
W2
T6
U1 U3
T1 T7
[3]
[1]
[2]
L1
U2
T4
V2
T5
W2 W3 U2 U3
T6 T9 T4 T7
[2]
V1 V3 W1 W3
T2 T8 T3 T9
L2
[3]
L3
Motor winding
[3]
[4]
V2 V3
T5 T8
U1
T1
V1
T2
W1
T3
L1
L2
L3
[2]
Supply cables
Star point connected in motor
152
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10
10.1.4 Motor protection with TF or TH for DR.71-DR.225

TF/TH
The following illustrations show the connection of the motor protection with TF PTC
thermistor sensors or TH bimetallic thermostats.
Either a two-pole terminal clip or a five-pole terminal strip is available for connecting to
the trip switch.
Example: TF/TH to a two-pole terminal strip
1b
2b
1b
2b
TF/TH
TF/TH
Example: 2 x TF/TH to a five-pole terminal strip
2xTF/TH / with
anti-condensation
heating
1b
2b
3b
4b
5b
1.TF/TH
1.TF/TH
2.TF/TH
2.TF/TH
The following illustration shows the connection of the motor protection with 2 TF PTC
thermistor sensors or TH bimetallic thermostats and Hx anti-condensation heating.
1b
2b
1b
2b
Hx
Hx
1b
2b
3b
4b
5b
1.TF/TH
1.TF/TH
2.TF/TH
2.TF/TH
153
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10
10.1.5 Motor protection with TF or TH for DR.315

TF/TH
The following figures show the connection of motor protection with TF PTC thermistor
sensors or TH bimetallic thermostats.
Depending on the version, an "x-pole" terminal strip is available for connection to the trip
switch.
Example: TF/TH to terminal strip
1.TF/ 1.TF/
1.TH 1.TH
Example: 2 x TF/TH to terminal strip
1.TF/ 1.TF/ 2.TF/ 2.TF/

1.TH 1.TH 2.TH 2.TH
10.1.6 EI7. Built-in encoder

Connection via terminal strip
The encoder is equipped with a 10-pole terminal strip:
154
10
1e
2e
3e
4e
5e
6e
7e
8e
9e
10e
+UB
(GY)
GND
(PK)
A(cos)
(BN)
A(cos)
(WH)
B(sin)
(YE)
B(sin)
(GN)
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
Connection via
M12 plug connector
10
A 4-pin or an 8-pin M12 plug connector is available for the connection:

4-pin M12 plug connector
A coding
female
8-pin M12 plug connector

Pin 1 : A(cos)
Pin 2 : GND
A coding
male
Pin 1 : VB
Pin 2 : GND
Pin 3 : B(sin)
Pin 4 : +VB
Pin 3 : A
2
3
Pin 4 : A
7
8
6
4 5
Pin 5 : B
Pin 6 : B
Pin 7 : TF
Pin 8 : TF
10.1.7 Brake control BGE; BG; BSG; BUR

BE brake
BGE, BG, BSG, BUR brake control;
Apply voltage to release the brake (see nameplate).
Contact rating of the brake control: AC3 in accordance with EN 60947-4-1.
The voltage can be distributed as follows:
Through a separate supply cable
From the motor terminal board
This does not apply to multi-speed and frequency-controlled motors.

BG / BGE
The following figure shows the wiring for BG and BGE brake rectifiers for the AC-side
cut-off as well as the DC and AC-side cut-off.
DC
AC
AC
BGE
BG
BGE
BG
WH
4
RD
5
BU
WH
RD
[1]
[1]
BU
U AC
U AC
242604811
[1] Brake coil
155
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10
BSG
The following figure shows the DC 24 V connection of the BSG control unit
BSG
WH
5
BU
RD
[1]
- +
24V DC
242606475
[1] Brake coil
BUR
WARNING
Malfunction caused by incorrect connection for frequency operation.
Do not connect terminal board to motor.
The following illustration shows the wiring for the BUR brake control
BGE
BG
RD
[4]
[1]
U~
(VAC )
WH
RD
BU
BU
[2]
BN / BK
[3]
BN / BK
[3]
242608139
[1] Brake coil
[2] UR11/UR15 voltage relay
UR 11 (42-150 V) = BN
UR 15 (150-500 V) = BK
156
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10
10.1.8 BSR brake control

BE brake
BSR brake control
Brake voltage = Phase voltage
The white connecting leads are the ends of a converter loop and, depending on the
motor connection, must be connected to the motor terminal block instead of the or
bridge.
Factory set to in
wiring diagram
R13
The following figure shows the factory wiring for the BSR brake control
Example: Motor: AC 230 V / AC 400 V
Brake: AC 230 V
BGE
BG
BGE
BG
WH
RD
RD
RD
WH
[1]
[1]
BU
BU
RD
BU
BU
[2]
WH
[2]
WH
WH
W2
(T6)
U2
(T4)
V2
(T5)
U1
(T1)
V1
(T2)
W1
(T3)
L1
L2
L3
L1
WH
W2
(T6)
U2
(T4)
U1
(T1)
W1
V1 (T3)
(T2)
L2
V2
(T5)
L3
242599819
[1] Brake coil

[2] SR11 / 15 current relay
157
10
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
Factory set to in
wiring diagram
R76
Brake: AC 230 V
BGE
BG
1
WH
RD
[3]
BU
RD
BU
[1]
[4]
WH
WH
U2 (T4) V2 (T5)
W3 (T9) U3 (T7) V3 (T8)
U1 (T1) V1 (T2) W1 (T3)
[5]
W2
(T6)
L1
L2
L3
[2]
2319077003

[2] Supply cables
[3] Brake coil
[5] Auxiliary terminal
158
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
Connection alternative: Factory set

to in wiring
diagram R76
10
Brake: AC 230 V
BGE
BG
1
WH
RD
[3]
BU
RD
BU
[1]
[4]
WH
(T5)
V2
(T4)
U2
WH
U3 (T7) V3(T8) W3 (T9)

U1 (T1) V1(T2) W1 (T3)
[5]
W2
(T6)
L1
L2
L3
[2]
2337824139

[2] Supply cables
[3] Brake coil
[5] Auxiliary terminal
159
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10
10.1.9 BMP3.1 brake control in the terminal box

Brake BE120; BE122
BMP3.1 brake control
Apply voltage to release the brake (see nameplate).
Contact rating of the brake contactors: AC3 according to EN 60947-4-1
Separate supply cables are required for the voltage supply.
BMP3.1
The following figure shows the wiring for the BMP3.1 brake rectifier for the AC-side cutoff as well as the DC and AC-side cut-off.
U AC
U AC
DC
AC
AC
BMP3.1
13
RD
[1]
14
WH
BMP3.1
13
15
BU
14
RD
15
WH BU
[1]
365750411
[1] Brake coil
160
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10
10.1.10 V forced cooling fan

- Steinmetz
The following figure shows the wiring of the V forced cooling fan for delta-Steinmetz connection for 1-phase operation
PE L1
U1
(T1)
N
V1
(T2)
W1
(T3)
W2
U2
(T4)
(T5)
U1
V1
(T1)
U2
V2
W2
(T4)
(T5)
(T6)
V2
(T6)
W1
(T2)
(T3)
N
523348491
connection
The following figure shows the wiring of the V forced cooling fan for connection.
PE L1
U1
(T1)
U2
(T4)
L2
V1
(T2)
V2
(T5)
L3
W1
(T3)
W2
(T6)
W2
(T4)
U1
(T1)
U2
(T5)
V1
(T2)
V2
(T6)
W1
(T3)
L1
L2
L3
523350155
connection
The following figure shows the wiring of the V forced cooling fan with connection.
PE L1
U1
(T1)
L2
V1
(T2)
L3
W1
(T3)
W2
U2
V2
(T4)
(T5)
(T6)
V1
W1
U1
(T1)
U2
V2
W2
(T4)
(T5)
(T6)
L1
(T2)
L2
(T3)
L3
523351819
161
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10
DC 24 V connection
The following figure shows the wiring of the V forced cooling fan for DC 24 V.
A
BU
RD
[2]
M
=
[1]
B
+
DC 24 V
2393384075
[1]
[2]
Forced cooling fan

Terminal strip
A
B
Factory wiring
Customer
It is essential that you observe the polarity.
162
Appendix
Auxiliary terminals 1 and 2
10.2
10
Auxiliary terminals 1 and 2

The following figure shows the arrangement of the auxiliary terminals for the different
terminal box positions.
Terminal box position 2 and X, here X1)
Terminal box position 1 and 3, here 3
[2]
[A]
[1]
[3]
[B]
[x]
3572208523
1) If auxiliary terminal 2 is not provided, you can install auxiliary terminal 1 in the same position.
[1]
[2]
[3]
Terminal box position 1

[X]
[A]
[B]
terminal box position X

Auxiliary terminal 1
Auxiliary terminal 2
Regardless of the terminal box position, auxiliary terminal 1 must always be mounted
parallel to the terminal board.
The terminal structure can vary depending on the terminal box design.
163
Address List
11
11
Address List
Germany
Headquarters
Production
Sales
Bruchsal

D-76646 Bruchsal
P.O. Box
Postfach 3023 D-76642 Bruchsal
Tel. +49 7251 75-0

Fax +49 7251 75-1970
http://www.sew-eurodrive.de
sew@sew-eurodrive.de
Production / Industrial Gears
Bruchsal

Christian-Phr-Str.10
D-76646 Bruchsal
Tel. +49 7251 75-0

Fax +49 7251 75-2970
Central

D-76676 Graben-Neudorf
Tel. +49 7251 75-1710

Fax +49 7251 75-1711
sc-mitte@sew-eurodrive.de
North

Alte Ricklinger Strae 40-42
D-30823 Garbsen (near Hannover)
Tel. +49 5137 8798-30

Fax +49 5137 8798-55
sc-nord@sew-eurodrive.de
East

Dnkritzer Weg 1
D-08393 Meerane (near Zwickau)
Tel. +49 3764 7606-0

Fax +49 3764 7606-30
sc-ost@sew-eurodrive.de
South

Domagkstrae 5
D-85551 Kirchheim (near Mnchen)
Tel. +49 89 909552-10

Fax +49 89 909552-50
sc-sued@sew-eurodrive.de
West

Siemensstrae 1
D-40764 Langenfeld (near Dsseldorf)
Tel. +49 2173 8507-30

Fax +49 2173 8507-55
sc-west@sew-eurodrive.de
Electronics

D-76646 Bruchsal
Tel. +49 7251 75-1780

Fax +49 7251 75-1769
sc-elektronik@sew-eurodrive.de
+49 180 5 SEWHELP

+49 180 5 7394357
14 euro cents/min on the German landline network. Max 42 euro cents/min
from a German mobile network. Prices
for mobile and international calls may
differ.
Additional addresses for service in Germany provided on request!

France
164
Production
Sales
Service
Haguenau
SEW-USOCOME
48-54 route de Soufflenheim
B. P. 20185
F-67506 Haguenau Cedex
Tel. +33 3 88 73 67 00
Fax +33 3 88 73 66 00
http://www.usocome.com
sew@usocome.com
Production
Forbach
SEW-USOCOME
Zone industrielle
Technople Forbach Sud
B. P. 30269
F-57604 Forbach Cedex
Tel. +33 3 87 29 38 00
Assembly
Sales
Service
Bordeaux
SEW-USOCOME
Parc d'activits de Magellan
62 avenue de Magellan - B. P. 182
F-33607 Pessac Cedex
Tel. +33 5 57 26 39 00
Fax +33 5 57 26 39 09
Lyon
SEW-USOCOME
Parc d'affaires Roosevelt
Rue Jacques Tati
F-69120 Vaulx en Velin
Tel. +33 4 72 15 37 00
Fax +33 4 72 15 37 15
Address List
11
France
Nantes
SEW-USOCOME
Parc dactivits de la fort
4 rue des Fontenelles
F-44140 Le Bignon
Tel. +33 2 40 78 42 00
Fax +33 2 40 78 42 20
Paris
SEW-USOCOME
Zone industrielle
2 rue Denis Papin
F-77390 Verneuil I'Etang
Tel. +33 1 64 42 40 80
Fax +33 1 64 42 40 88
Additional addresses for service in France provided on request!

Algeria
Sales
Alger
REDUCOM Sarl
16, rue des Frres Zaghnoune
Bellevue
16200 El Harrach Alger
Tel. +213 21 8214-91

Fax +213 21 8222-84
info@reducom-dz.com
http://www.reducom-dz.com
Buenos Aires
SEW EURODRIVE ARGENTINA S.A.

Centro Industrial Garin, Lote 35
Ruta Panamericana Km 37,5
1619 Garin
Tel. +54 3327 4572-84

Fax +54 3327 4572-21
sewar@sew-eurodrive.com.ar
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.ar
Melbourne

27 Beverage Drive
Tullamarine, Victoria 3043
Tel. +61 3 9933-1000

Fax +61 3 9933-1003
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.au
Sydney

9, Sleigh Place, Wetherill Park
New South Wales, 2164
Tel. +61 2 9725-9900

Fax +61 2 9725-9905
Wien
SEW-EURODRIVE Ges.m.b.H.
Richard-Strauss-Strasse 24
A-1230 Wien
Tel. +43 1 617 55 00-0

Fax +43 1 617 55 00-30
http://www.sew-eurodrive.at
sew@sew-eurodrive.at
Minsk
SEW-EURODRIVE BY
RybalkoStr. 26
BY-220033 Minsk
Tel.+375 17 298 47 56 / 298 47 58

Fax +375 17 298 47 54
http://www.sew.by
sales@sew.by
Assembly
Sales
Service
Brussels
SEW-EURODRIVE
Researchpark Haasrode 1060
Evenementenlaan 7
BE-3001 Leuven
Tel. +32 16 386-311

Fax +32 16 386-336
Industrial Gears
SEW-EURODRIVE
Rue de Parc Industriel, 31
BE-6900 Marche-en-Famenne
Tel. +32 84 219-878

Fax +32 84 219-879
service-wallonie@sew-eurodrive.be
Sao Paulo
SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda.

Avenida Amncio Gaiolli, 152 - Rodovia Presidente Dutra Km 208
Guarulhos - 07251-250 - SP
SAT - SEW ATENDE - 0800 7700496
Tel. +55 11 2489-9133

Fax +55 11 2480-3328
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.br
sew@sew.com.br
Argentina
Assembly
Sales
Service
Australia
Assembly
Sales
Service
Austria
Assembly
Sales
Service
Belarus
Sales
Belgium
Brazil
Production
Sales
Service
165
Address List
11
Bulgaria
Sales
Sofia
BEVER-DRIVE GmbH
Bogdanovetz Str.1
BG-1606 Sofia
Tel. +359 2 9151160

Fax +359 2 9151166
bever@bever.bg
Douala
Electro-Services
Rue Drouot Akwa
B.P. 2024
Douala
Tel. +237 33 431137

Fax +237 33 431137
electrojemba@yahoo.fr
Toronto

210 Walker Drive
Bramalea, ON L6T 3W1
Tel. +1 905 791-1553

Fax +1 905 791-2999
http://www.sew-eurodrive.ca
l.watson@sew-eurodrive.ca
Vancouver

Tilbury Industrial Park
7188 Honeyman Street
Delta, BC V4G 1G1
Tel. +1 604 946-5535

Fax +1 604 946-2513
b.wake@sew-eurodrive.ca
Montreal

2555 Rue Leger
Lasalle, PQ H8N 2V9
Tel. +1 514 367-1124

Fax +1 514 367-3677
a.peluso@sew-eurodrive.ca
Cameroon
Sales
Canada
Assembly
Sales
Service
Additional addresses for service in Canada provided on request!

Chile
Santiago de
Chile
SEW-EURODRIVE CHILE LTDA.

Las Encinas 1295
Parque Industrial Valle Grande
LAMPA
RCH-Santiago de Chile
P.O. Box
Casilla 23 Correo Quilicura - Santiago - Chile
Tel. +56 2 75770-00

Fax +56 2 75770-01
http://www.sew-eurodrive.cl
ventas@sew-eurodrive.cl
Production
Assembly
Sales
Service
Tianjin
SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd.

No. 46, 7th Avenue, TEDA
Tianjin 300457
Tel. +86 22 25322612

Fax +86 22 25323273
info@sew-eurodrive.cn
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.cn
Assembly
Sales
Service
Suzhou
SEW-EURODRIVE (Suzhou) Co., Ltd.

333, Suhong Middle Road
Suzhou Industrial Park
Jiangsu Province, 215021
Tel. +86 512 62581781

Fax +86 512 62581783
suzhou@sew-eurodrive.cn
Guangzhou
SEW-EURODRIVE (Guangzhou) Co., Ltd.

No. 9, JunDa Road
East Section of GETDD
Guangzhou 510530
Tel. +86 20 82267890

Fax +86 20 82267922
guangzhou@sew-eurodrive.cn
Shenyang
SEW-EURODRIVE (Shenyang) Co., Ltd.

10A-2, 6th Road
Shenyang Economic Technological Development Area
Shenyang, 110141
Tel. +86 24 25382538

Fax +86 24 25382580
shenyang@sew-eurodrive.cn
Wuhan
SEW-EURODRIVE (Wuhan) Co., Ltd.

10A-2, 6th Road
No. 59, the 4th Quanli Road, WEDA
430056 Wuhan
Tel. +86 27 84478388

Fax +86 27 84478389
wuhan@sew-eurodrive.cn
Assembly
Sales
Service
China
166
Address List
11
China
Xi'An
SEW-EURODRIVE (Xi'An) Co., Ltd.

No. 12 Jinye 2nd Road
Xi'An High-Technology Industrial Development
Zone
Xi'An 710065
Tel. +86 29 68686262

Fax +86 29 68686311
xian@sew-eurodrive.cn
Additional addresses for service in China provided on request!

Colombia
Assembly
Sales
Service
Bogot
SEW-EURODRIVE COLOMBIA LTDA.

Calle 22 No. 132-60
Bodega 6, Manzana B
Santaf de Bogot
Tel. +57 1 54750-50

Fax +57 1 54750-44
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.co
sewcol@sew-eurodrive.com.co
Zagreb
KOMPEKS d. o. o.
Zeleni dol 10
HR 10 000 Zagreb
Tel. +385 1 4613-158

Fax +385 1 4613-158
kompeks@inet.hr
Prague
SEW-EURODRIVE CZ S.R.O.
Business Centrum Praha
Lun 591
CZ-16000 Praha 6 - Vokovice
Tel. +420 255 709 601

Fax +420 220 121 237
http://www.sew-eurodrive.cz
sew@sew-eurodrive.cz
Copenhagen
SEW-EURODRIVEA/S
Geminivej 28-30
DK-2670 Greve
Tel. +45 43 9585-00

Fax +45 43 9585-09
http://www.sew-eurodrive.dk
sew@sew-eurodrive.dk
Cairo
Copam Egypt
for Engineering & Agencies
33 EI Hegaz ST, Heliopolis, Cairo
Tel. +20 2 22566-299 +1 23143088

Fax +20 2 22594-757
http://www.copam-egypt.com/
copam@datum.com.eg
Tallin
ALAS-KUUL AS
Reti tee 4
EE-75301 Peetri kla, Rae vald, Harjumaa
Tel. +372 6593230

Fax +372 6593231
veiko.soots@alas-kuul.ee
Assembly
Sales
Service
Lahti
SEW-EURODRIVE OY
Vesimentie 4
FIN-15860 Hollola 2
Tel. +358 201 589-300

Fax +358 3 780-6211
sew@sew.fi
Production
Assembly
Karkkila
SEW Industrial Gears Oy

Valurinkatu 6, PL 8
FI-03600 Karkkila, 03601 Karkkila
Tel. +358 201 589-300

Fax +358 201 589-310
sew@sew.fi
Libreville
ESG Electro Services Gabun

Feu Rouge Lalala
1889 Libreville
Gabun
Tel. +241 741059

Fax +241 741059
esg_services@yahoo.fr
Croatia
Sales
Service
Czech Republic
Sales
Denmark
Assembly
Sales
Service
Egypt
Sales
Service
Estonia
Sales
Finland
Gabon
Sales
167
Address List
11
Great Britain
Assembly
Sales
Service
Normanton
SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd.
Beckbridge Industrial Estate
Normanton
West Yorkshire
WF6 1QR
Tel. +44 1924 893-855

Fax +44 1924 893-702
http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.uk
info@sew-eurodrive.co.uk
Tel. 01924 896911
Athens
Christ. Boznos & Son S.A.

12, K. Mavromichali Street
P.O. Box 80136
GR-18545 Piraeus
Tel. +30 2 1042 251-34

Fax +30 2 1042 251-59
http://www.boznos.gr
info@boznos.gr
Hong Kong
SEW-EURODRIVE LTD.
Unit No. 801-806, 8th Floor
Hong Leong Industrial Complex
No. 4, Wang Kwong Road
Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel. +852 36902200

Fax +852 36902211
contact@sew-eurodrive.hk
Budapest
SEW-EURODRIVE Kft.
H-1037 Budapest
Kunigunda u. 18
Tel. +36 1 437 06-58

Fax +36 1 437 06-50
office@sew-eurodrive.hu
Registered Office
Assembly
Sales
Service
Vadodara

Plot No. 4, GIDC
POR Ramangamdi Vadodara - 391 243
Gujarat
Tel. +91 265 3045200, +91 265

2831086
Fax +91 265 3045300, +91 265
2831087
http://www.seweurodriveindia.com
salesvadodara@seweurodriveindia.com
Assembly
Sales
Service
Chennai

Plot No. K3/1, Sipcot Industrial Park Phase II
Mambakkam Village
Sriperumbudur - 602105
Kancheepuram Dist, Tamil Nadu
Tel. +91 44 37188888

Fax +91 44 37188811
saleschennai@seweurodriveindia.com
Vadodara

Unit No. 301, Savorite Bldg,
Plot No. 143, Vinayak Society,
off old Padra Road,
Vadodara - 390 007. Gujarat
Tel. +91 265 2325258

Fax +91 265 2325259
salesvadodara@seweurodriveindia.com
Dublin
Alperton Engineering Ltd.

48 Moyle Road
Dublin Industrial Estate
Glasnevin, Dublin 11
Tel. +353 1 830-6277

Fax +353 1 830-6458
info@alperton.ie
http://www.alperton.ie
Tel-Aviv
Liraz Handasa Ltd.

Ahofer Str 34B / 228
58858 Holon
Tel. +972 3 5599511

Fax +972 3 5599512
http://www.liraz-handasa.co.il
office@liraz-handasa.co.il
Greece
Sales
Service
Hong Kong
Assembly
Sales
Service
Hungary
Sales
Service
India
Ireland
Sales
Service
Israel
Sales
168
Address List
11
Italy
Assembly
Sales
Service
Solaro
SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s.

Via Bernini,14
I-20020 Solaro (Milano)
Tel. +39 02 96 9801

Fax +39 02 96 799781
http://www.sew-eurodrive.it
sewit@sew-eurodrive.it
Abidjan
SICA
Socit industrielle & commerciale pour
l'Afrique
165, Boulevard de Marseille
26 BP 1115 Abidjan 26
Tel. +225 21 25 79 44
Fax +225 21 25 88 28
sicamot@aviso.ci
Iwata
SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD

250-1, Shimoman-no,
Iwata
Shizuoka 438-0818
Tel. +81 538 373811

Fax +81 538 373855
http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.jp
sewjapan@sew-eurodrive.co.jp
Almaty
"-"
., 348
050061 .

. +7 (727) 334 1880

+7 (727) 334 1881
http://www.sew-eurodrive.kz
sew@sew-eurodrive.kz
Riga
SIA Alas-Kuul
Katlakalna 11C
LV-1073 Riga
Tel. +371 6 7139253

Fax +371 6 7139386
http://www.alas-kuul.com
info@alas-kuul.com
Sales
Beirut
Gabriel Acar & Fils sarl

B. P. 80484
Bourj Hammoud, Beirut
Tel. +961 1 510 532

Fax +961 1 494 971
ssacar@inco.com.lb
Jordan
Kuwait
Saudi Arabia
Syria
Beirut
Middle East Drives S.A.L. (offshore)

Sin El Fil.
B. P. 55-378
Beirut
Tel. +961 1 494 786

Fax +961 1 494 971
info@medrives.com
http://www.medrives.com
Alytus
UAB Irseva
Statybininku 106C
LT-63431 Alytus
Tel. +370 315 79204

Fax +370 315 56175
info@irseva.lt
http://www.sew-eurodrive.lt
Brussels
SEW Caron-Vector
Research park Haasrode
Evenementenlaan 7
BE-3001 Leuven
Tel. +32 16 386-311

Fax +32 16 386-336
Johore
SEW-EURODRIVE SDN BHD

No. 95, Jalan Seroja 39, Taman Johor Jaya
81000 Johor Bahru, Johor
West Malaysia
Tel. +60 7 3549409

Fax +60 7 3541404
sales@sew-eurodrive.com.my
Ivory Coast
Sales
Japan
Assembly
Sales
Service
Kazakhstan
Sales
Latvia
Sales
Lebanon
Lithuania
Sales
Luxembourg
Assembly
Sales
Service
Malaysia
Assembly
Sales
Service
169
Address List
11
Mexico
Assembly
Sales
Service
Quretaro
SEW-EURODRIVE MEXICO SA DE CV
SEM-981118-M93
Tequisquiapan No. 102
Parque Industrial Quretaro
C.P. 76220
Quretaro, Mxico
Tel. +52 442 1030-300

Fax +52 442 1030-301
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.mx
scmexico@seweurodrive.com.mx
Casablanca
Afit
Route DEl Jadida
KM 14 RP8
Province de Nouaceur
Commune Rurale de Bouskoura
MA 20300 Casablanca
Tel. +212 522633700

Fax +212 522621588
fatima.haquiq@premium.net.ma
http://www.groupe-premium.com
Rotterdam
VECTOR Aandrijftechniek B.V.

Industrieweg 175
NL-3044 AS Rotterdam
Postbus 10085
NL-3004 AB Rotterdam
Tel. +31 10 4463-700

Fax +31 10 4155-552
http://www.vector.nu
info@vector.nu
Auckland

P.O. Box 58-428
82 Greenmount drive
East Tamaki Auckland
Tel. +64 9 2745627

Fax +64 9 2740165
http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.nz
Christchurch

10 Settlers Crescent, Ferrymead
Christchurch
Tel. +64 3 384-6251

Fax +64 3 384-6455
Moss
SEW-EURODRIVE A/S
Solgaard skog 71
N-1599 Moss
Tel. +47 69 24 10 20
Fax +47 69 24 10 40
http://www.sew-eurodrive.no
sew@sew-eurodrive.no
Karachi
Industrial Power Drives

Al-Fatah Chamber A/3, 1st Floor Central Commercial Area,
Sultan Ahmed Shah Road, Block 7/8,
Karachi
Tel. +92 21 452 9369

Fax +92-21-454 7365
seweurodrive@cyber.net.pk
Lima
SEW DEL PERU MOTORES REDUCTORES

S.A.C.
Los Calderos, 120-124
Urbanizacion Industrial Vulcano, ATE, Lima
Tel. +51 1 3495280

Fax +51 1 3493002
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.pe
sewperu@sew-eurodrive.com.pe
Lodz
SEW-EURODRIVE Polska Sp.z.o.o.

ul. Techniczna 5
PL-92-518 d
Tel. +48 42 676 53 00

Fax +48 42 676 53 45
http://www.sew-eurodrive.pl
sew@sew-eurodrive.pl
Morocco
Sales
Netherlands
Assembly
Sales
Service
New Zealand
Assembly
Sales
Service
Norway
Assembly
Sales
Service
Pakistan
Sales
Peru
Assembly
Sales
Service
Poland
Assembly
Sales
Service
24 Hour Service
170
Tel. +48 602 739 739

(+48 602 SEW SEW)
serwis@sew-eurodrive.pl
Address List
11
Portugal
Assembly
Sales
Service
Coimbra
SEW-EURODRIVE, LDA.
Apartado 15
P-3050-901 Mealhada
Tel. +351 231 20 9670

Fax +351 231 20 3685
http://www.sew-eurodrive.pt
infosew@sew-eurodrive.pt
Bucharest
Sialco Trading SRL

str. Madrid nr.4
011785 Bucuresti
Tel. +40 21 230-1328

Fax +40 21 230-7170
sialco@sialco.ro
St. Petersburg
ZAO SEW-EURODRIVE
P.O. Box 36
195220 St. Petersburg Russia
Tel. +7 812 3332522 +7 812 5357142

Fax +7 812 3332523
http://www.sew-eurodrive.ru
sew@sew-eurodrive.ru
Dakar
SENEMECA
Mcanique Gnrale
Km 8, Route de Rufisque
B.P. 3251, Dakar
Tel. +221 338 494 770

Fax +221 338 494 771
senemeca@sentoo.sn
http://www.senemeca.com
Beograd
DIPAR d.o.o.
Ustanicka 128a
PC Koum, IV floor
SCG-11000 Beograd
Tel. +381 11 347 3244 / +381 11 288

0393
Fax +381 11 347 1337
office@dipar.rs
Singapore
SEW-EURODRIVE PTE. LTD.

No 9, Tuas Drive 2
Jurong Industrial Estate
Singapore 638644
Tel. +65 68621701

Fax +65 68612827
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.sg
sewsingapore@sew-eurodrive.com
Bratislava
Rybnin 40
SK-831 06 Bratislava
Tel. +421 2 33595 202

Fax +421 2 33595 200
http://www.sew-eurodrive.sk
ilina
Industry Park - PChZ
ulica M.R.tefnika 71
SK-010 01 ilina
Tel. +421 41 700 2513

Fax +421 41 700 2514
Bansk Bystrica
Rudlovsk cesta 85
SK-974 11 Bansk Bystrica
Tel. +421 48 414 6564

Fax +421 48 414 6566
Koice
Slovensk ulica 26
SK-040 01 Koice
Tel. +421 55 671 2245

Fax +421 55 671 2254
Celje
Pakman - Pogonska Tehnika d.o.o.

UI. XIV. divizije 14
SLO - 3000 Celje
Tel. +386 3 490 83-20

Fax +386 3 490 83-21
pakman@siol.net
Romania
Sales
Service
Russia
Assembly
Sales
Service
Senegal
Sales
Serbia
Sales
Singapore
Assembly
Sales
Service
Slovakia
Sales
Slovenia
Sales
Service
171
Address List
11
South Africa
Assembly
Sales
Service
Johannesburg

Eurodrive House
Cnr. Adcock Ingram and Aerodrome Roads
Aeroton Ext. 2
Johannesburg 2013
P.O.Box 90004
Bertsham 2013
Tel. +27 11 248-7000

Fax +27 11 494-3104
http://www.sew.co.za
info@sew.co.za
Cape Town

Rainbow Park
Cnr. Racecourse & Omuramba Road
Montague Gardens
Cape Town
P.O.Box 36556
Chempet 7442
Cape Town
Tel. +27 21 552-9820

Fax +27 21 552-9830
Telex 576 062
cfoster@sew.co.za
Durban

2 Monaco Place
Pinetown
Durban
P.O. Box 10433, Ashwood 3605
Tel. +27 31 700-3451

Fax +27 31 700-3847
cdejager@sew.co.za
Nelspruit
SEW-EURODRIVE (PTY) LTD.

7 Christie Crescent
Vintonia
P.O.Box 1942
Nelspruit 1200
Tel. +27 13 752-8007

Fax +27 13 752-8008
robermeyer@sew.co.za
Ansan-City
SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD.

B 601-4, Banweol Industrial Estate
1048-4, Shingil-Dong
Ansan 425-120
Tel. +82 31 492-8051

Fax +82 31 492-8056
http://www.sew-korea.co.kr
master.korea@sew-eurodrive.com
Busan
SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA Co., Ltd.

No. 1720 - 11, Songjeong - dong
Gangseo-ku
Busan 618-270
Tel. +82 51 832-0204

Fax +82 51 832-0230
master@sew-korea.co.kr
Bilbao
SEW-EURODRIVE ESPAA, S.L.

Parque Tecnolgico, Edificio, 302
E-48170 Zamudio (Vizcaya)
Tel. +34 94 43184-70

Fax +34 94 43184-71
http://www.sew-eurodrive.es
sew.spain@sew-eurodrive.es
Jnkping
SEW-EURODRIVE AB
Gnejsvgen 6-8
S-55303 Jnkping
Box 3100 S-55003 Jnkping
Tel. +46 36 3442 00

Fax +46 36 3442 80
http://www.sew-eurodrive.se
jonkoping@sew.se
Basel
Alfred lmhof A.G.

Jurastrasse 10
CH-4142 Mnchenstein bei Basel
Tel. +41 61 417 1717

Fax +41 61 417 1700
http://www.imhof-sew.ch
info@imhof-sew.ch
Chonburi
SEW-EURODRIVE (Thailand) Ltd.

700/456, Moo.7, Donhuaroh
Muang
Chonburi 20000
Tel. +66 38 454281

Fax +66 38 454288
sewthailand@sew-eurodrive.com
South Korea
Assembly
Sales
Service
Spain
Assembly
Sales
Service
Sweden
Assembly
Sales
Service
Switzerland
Assembly
Sales
Service
Thailand
Assembly
Sales
Service
172
Address List
11
Tunisia
Sales
Tunis
T. M.S. Technic Marketing Service

Zone Industrielle Mghira 2
Lot No. 39
2082 Fouchana
Tel. +216 79 40 88 77
Fax +216 79 40 88 66
http://www.tms.com.tn
tms@tms.com.tn
Istanbul
SEW-EURODRIVE
Hareket Sistemleri San. ve Tic. Ltd. Sti.
Bagdat Cad. Koruma Cikmazi No. 3
TR-34846 Maltepe ISTANBUL
Tel. +90 216 4419163 / 4419164

Fax +90 216 3055867
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.tr
sew@sew-eurodrive.com.tr
Dnepropetrovsk
SEW-EURODRIVE
Str. Rabochaja 23-B, Office 409
49008 Dnepropetrovsk
Tel. +380 56 370 3211

Fax +380 56 372 2078
http://www.sew-eurodrive.ua
sew@sew-eurodrive.ua
Sharjah
Copam Middle East (FZC)

Sharjah Airport International Free Zone
P.O. Box 120709
Sharjah
Tel. +971 6 5578-488

Fax +971 6 5578-499
copam_me@eim.ae
Production
Assembly
Sales
Service
Corporate Offices
Southeast
Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
1295 Old Spartanburg Highway
P.O. Box 518
Lyman, S.C. 29365
Tel. +1 864 439-7537

Fax Sales +1 864 439-7830
Fax Manufacturing +1 864 439-9948
Fax Assembly +1 864 439-0566
Fax Confidential/HR +1 864 949-5557
http://www.seweurodrive.com
cslyman@seweurodrive.com
Assembly
Sales
Service
Northeast
Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
Pureland Ind. Complex
2107 High Hill Road, P.O. Box 481
Bridgeport, New Jersey 08014
Tel. +1 856 467-2277

Fax +1 856 845-3179
csbridgeport@seweurodrive.com
Midwest Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
2001 West Main Street
Troy, Ohio 45373
Tel. +1 937 335-0036

Fax +1 937 332-0038
cstroy@seweurodrive.com
Southwest
Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
3950 Platinum Way
Dallas, Texas 75237
Tel. +1 214 330-4824

Fax +1 214 330-4724
csdallas@seweurodrive.com
Western Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
30599 San Antonio St.
Hayward, CA 94544
Tel. +1 510 487-3560

Fax +1 510 487-6433
cshayward@seweurodrive.com
Turkey
Assembly
Sales
Service
Ukraine
Sales
Service
United Arab Emirates

Sales
Service
USA
Additional addresses for service in the USA provided on request!

Venezuela
Assembly
Sales
Service
Valencia
SEW-EURODRIVE Venezuela S.A.

Av. Norte Sur No. 3, Galpon 84-319
Zona Industrial Municipal Norte
Valencia, Estado Carabobo
Tel. +58 241 832-9804

Fax +58 241 838-6275
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.ve
ventas@sew-eurodrive.com.ve
sewfinanzas@cantv.net
173
Address List
11
Vietnam
Sales
Ho Chi Minh City
Hanoi
174
All sectors except for ports, mining and offshore:

Nam Trung Co., Ltd
250 Binh Duong Avenue, Thu Dau Mot Town,
Binh Duong Province
HCM office: 91 Tran Minh Quyen Street
District 10, Ho Chi Minh City
Tel. +84 8 8301026

Fax +84 8 8392223
namtrungco@hcm.vnn.vn
truongtantam@namtrung.com.vn
khanh-nguyen@namtrung.com.vn
Ports, mining and offshore:

DUC VIET INT LTD
Industrial Trading and Engineering Services
A75/6B/12 Bach Dang Street, Ward 02,
Tan Binh District, 70000 Ho Chi Minh City
Tel. +84 8 62969 609

Fax +84 8 62938 842
totien@ducvietint.com
Nam Trung Co., Ltd

R.205B Tung Duc Building
22 Lang ha Street
Dong Da District, Hanoi City
Tel. +84 4 37730342

Fax +84 4 37762445
namtrunghn@hn.vnn.vn
Index
Index
A
Absolute encoder removal .....................................84
AB.., AD.., AM.., AK.., AC.., AS plug connectors ...58
Accessory equipment.......................................32, 63
Additional features
Overview ............................................................19
Add-on encoder .....................................................68
AG7. .......................................................................68
AH7. .......................................................................68
Air filter LF..............................................................32
Ambient conditions.................................................42
Hazardous radiation...........................................42
Ambient temperature .............................................42
Anti-condensation heating .....................................70
Assembly ...............................................................25
Encoder mounting adapter.................................29
Measuring nipple................................................34
XH.A encoder mounting adapter........................30
Assembly, conditions .............................................22
AS7. .......................................................................68
Auxiliary terminals, arrangement..........................164
Brake control....................................................36, 61
BG.................................................................... 156
BGE ................................................................. 156
BMP3.1 ............................................................161
BSG ................................................................. 156
BSR ................................................................. 158
BUR ................................................................. 156
Control cabinet.................................................137
Motor wiring space...........................................136
Brake control system ...........................................136
Brake malfunctions ..............................................148
Brake rectifier combinations ................................ 135
Brakemotor inspection
DR.315............................................................. 113
DR.71-DR.225 ...................................................95
Brakemotor structure
DR.160-DR.225 .................................................94
DR.315............................................................. 111
DR.71-DR.80 .....................................................92
DR.90-DR.132 ...................................................93
Braking torques............................................126, 128
Built-in encoder..............................................69, 155
B
Backstop ................................................................74
Bearing
Reinforced....................................................73, 79
Bearing lubrication .................................................78
BE05-BE2 ..............................................................97
BE1-BE11 ..............................................................97
BE120-BE122 ......................................................112
BE20 ......................................................................98
BE30-BE32 ............................................................98
Blocking direction
Change ..............................................................74
Brake
BE05-BE2 ..........................................................97
BE1-BE11 ..........................................................97
BE120-BE122 ..................................................112
BE20 ..................................................................98
BE30-BE32 ........................................................98
Braking torques................................................126
Work done........................................................126
Working air gap................................................126
Brake connection ...................................................61
C
Changing the brake spring
BE05-BE32 ...................................................... 103
BE120-BE122 ..................................................119
Changing the braking torque
BE05-BE32 ...................................................... 103
BE120-BE122 ..................................................119
Changing the magnet
BE05-BE32 ...................................................... 104
Characteristic safety values .................................144
Condensation drain holes ......................................25
Connecting the diagnostics unit .............................62
Connecting the motor ............................................43
AB.., AD.., AM.., AK.., AC.., AS plug
connectors .........................................................58
IS plug connector...............................................54
KCC terminal strip..............................................59
KC1 terminal strip ..............................................60
Terminal box .......................................... 44, 45, 46
Via plug connector .............................................54
Via terminal block ..............................................44
Via terminal strip ................................................59
175
Index
Connection
Cable..................................................................77
Encoder..............................................................69
Connection variants ...............................................20
Copyright..................................................................7
Corrosion protection...............................................79
Cover .....................................................................33
Customer service .................................................150
D
Delta connection
R13 ..................................................................151
R72 ..................................................................152
Design
DR.160-DR.225 with BE ....................................94
DR.90-DR.132 mit with ......................................93
Designated use ......................................................10
Disposal ...............................................................150
Drying the motor ....................................................23
DUB diagnostics unit..............................................62
DUB (Diagnostic Unit Brake)................................124
Dust........................................................................42
E
EG7. .......................................................................68
EH7. .......................................................................68
EI7........................................................................155
EI7..........................................................................69
Electrical connection ..............................................12
Electrical Installation ..............................................35
Embedded safety notes ...........................................6
EMC .......................................................................38
Encoder..................................................................19
AG7....................................................................68
AH7. ...................................................................68
EG7....................................................................68
EH7. ...................................................................68
EI7......................................................................69
ES7. ...................................................................68
Non-SEW encoder mounting .............................28
Technical data..................................................140
Encoder connection
...........................................................................69
Encoder mounting adapter.....................................29
Encoder removal ..............................................84, 85
EV.., AV.. and XV...............................................84
EV.., AV.. and XV...............................................84
Encoders................................................................68
AS7. ...................................................................68
Equipment, accessory .....................................32, 63
ES7. .......................................................................68
Explosion-proof motors ..........................................21
Extended storage...................................................23
F
Features, additional ...............................................19
Forced cooling fan V..............................................66
Frequency inverter operation.................................36
Functional safety..................................................144
G
Gas ........................................................................42
General safety notes................................................8
Grounding ..............................................................38
H
Hollow shaft encoder .............................................30
Hollow shaft encoder removal ...............................85
Retrofit ...............................................................27
I
Improving the grounding ........................................38
Incremental encoder removal ................................84
EV.., AV.. and XV. .............................................84
Input elements, assembly ......................................26
Inspection ..............................................................76
DUB for function and wear monitoring............. 125
DUB for function monitoring............................. 124
DUB for wear monitoring .................................125
Inspection intervals ................................................77
Installation........................................................12, 25
Electrical ............................................................35
In damp locations or in the open........................26
Mechanical.........................................................22
Installation altitude .................................................42
Installation regulations ...........................................35
Insulation resistance ..............................................23
Intervals, inspection and maintenance ..................77
IS plug connector...................................................54
Isolation transformer ..............................................23
Isolation, reinforced ...............................................37
K
KCC terminal strip..................................................59
176
Index
KC1 terminal strip...................................................60

KTY84-130 .............................................................64
KTY84-130 temperature sensor.............................64
L
LF ...........................................................................32
Low-speed motors .................................................41
Low-voltage equipment ..........................................35
Lubricant table .....................................................139
Lubrication .............................................................78
M
Maintenance ..........................................................76
Maintenance intervals ............................................77
Malfunctions .........................................................145
Malfunctions when operated with a frequency
inverter .............................................................150
Measuring nipple, mounting adapter......................34
Mechanical installation ...........................................22
Motor
Connection.........................................................43
Connection via plug connector...........................54
Connection via terminal block ............................44
Connection via terminal strip..............................59
Drying.................................................................23
Installation..........................................................25
Long-term storage..............................................23
Motor and brake maintenance preliminary work .80
Motor inspection
DR.315.............................................................109
DR.71-DR.225 ...................................................90
Motor malfunctions...............................................146
Motor protection ...........................................154, 155
TF.............................................................154, 155
TH ............................................................154, 155
Motor protection device..........................................36
Motor structure .......................................................14
DR.160-DR.180 ...........................................15, 88
DR.200-DR.225 ...........................................16, 89
DR.315.......................................................17, 108
DR.71-DR.132 .............................................14, 87
Mounting adapter ...................................................29
Measuring nipple................................................34
XH.. ....................................................................85
XV.A...................................................................84
Mounting tolerances...............................................26
N
Nameplate .............................................................18
Non-SEW encoder mounting .................................28
Notes
Designation in the documentation .......................6
O
Operating currents ...............................................129
Operation with a frequency inverter .......................36
Options ..................................................................19
Electrical ............................................................63
Mechanical.........................................................32
Other applicable documentation ............................11
P
Plug connector.......................................................54
AB.., AD.., AM.., AK.., AC.., AS .........................58
IS .......................................................................54
PT100 ....................................................................65
Pulse voltages .......................................................37
R
Reinforced bearing
.....................................................................73, 79
Relubrication ..........................................................79
Relubrication device ..............................................78
Re-lubrication periods............................................79
Removing the encoder............................... 80, 82, 83
EG7. and AG7. ..................................................82
EH7 and AH7.....................................................83
ES7. and AS7. ...................................................80
Removing the incremental encoder ...........80, 82, 83
EG7. and AG7. ..................................................82
EH7. and AH7....................................................83
ES7. and AS7. ...................................................80
Replacing the brake
DR.315............................................................. 121
DR.71-DR.80 ................................................... 106
DR.90-DR.225 .................................................107
Replacing the brake disk
BE05-BE32 ...................................................... 101
BE120-BE122 ..................................................117
Resistance measurement, brake .................133, 134
Resistors..............................................................132
Retrofitting HR/HF manual brake release ..............27
Rolling bearing types ...........................................138
Rotor designation "J" .............................................73
RS..........................................................................74
177
Index
Safety notes .............................................................8

Designated use ..................................................10
Designation in the documentation........................6
Electrical connection ..........................................12
General information .............................................8
Installation..........................................................12
Operation ...........................................................13
Structure of the embedded safety notes ..............6
Structure of the section-related safety notes .......6
Transport............................................................11
Safety, functional .................................................144
Second shaft end ...................................................33
Section-related safety notes ....................................6
Setting the working air gap
BE05-BE32 ........................................................99
BE120-BE122 ..................................................115
Signal words in the safety notes ..............................6
Special design........................................................22
Special encoder removal........................................84
Specifics
Low-speed motors .............................................41
Switching operation............................................41
Torque motors....................................................41
Star connection
R13 ..................................................................151
R76 ..................................................................153
Startup ...................................................................71
Storage, long-term .................................................23
Structure
Brakemotor ....................................92, 93, 94, 111
DR.160 - DR.180 .........................................15, 88
DR.200-DR.225 ...........................................16, 89
DR.315.......................................................17, 108
DR.315 with BE................................................111
DR.71-DR.132 .............................................14, 87
DR.71-DR.80 with BE ........................................92
DUB .........................................................122, 123
Motor......................14, 15, 16, 17, 87, 88, 89, 108
Switched-mode power supply
UWU52A ............................................................67
Switching operation................................................41
Technical data .....................................................126

ASI absolute encoder ...................................... 141
Built-in encoder................................................ 141
Incremental encoders with plug-in shaft .......... 140
Incremental encoders with solid shaft..............142
Incremental rotary encoders with spread shaft 140
SSI absolute encoder ...................................... 140
Temperature detection
PT100 ................................................................65
Terminal arrangement ......................................... 164
terminal block.........................................................44
Terminal box
Turning...............................................................31
Terminal box positions......................................... 164
Terminal strip .........................................................59
KCC ...................................................................59
KC1....................................................................60
TF ..........................................................63, 154, 155
TF temperature sensor ..........................................63
TH ..........................................................63, 154, 155
TH winding thermostats .........................................63
Tolerances
Mounting ............................................................26
Torque motors .......................................................41
Transport ...............................................................11
Type designation ...................................................18
Temperature detection.......................................19
Type designation DR
Bearing ..............................................................20
Condition monitoring..........................................21
Connection variants ...........................................20
Encoder .............................................................19
Explosion-proof motors......................................21
Mechanical attachments ....................................19
Other additional features ...................................21
Temperature sensor and temperature
detection ............................................................19
Ventilation ..........................................................20
V
V forced cooling fan ...............................................66
Vapor .....................................................................42
W
Wear ......................................................................77
Wiring diagram
BMP3.1 ............................................................161
178
Index
Wiring diagrams ...................................................151

BG....................................................................156
BGE .................................................................156
BSG .................................................................157
BSR..................................................................158
Delta connection R13...............................151, 152
Star connection
R13151
Star connection R76 ........................................153
TF.............................................................154, 155
TH ............................................................154, 155
Work done ...........................................................126

Working air gap.................................................... 126
X
XH.A ......................................................................30
XV.A.......................................................................29
0 ... 9
2. shaft end ............................................................33
179
SEW-EURODRIVE
Driving the world

P.O. Box 3023
D-76642 Bruchsal/Germany
Phone +49 7251 75-0
Fax +49 7251 75-1970
sew@sew-eurodrive.com
www.sew-eurodrive.com
Inductive sensor
rotational speed monitor
DBI10U-M30-AP4X2
Threaded barrel, M30 x 1.5
Chrome-plated brass
Large monitoring range of 3 to 3000 1/

min
Adjustable via potentiometer
Fixed start-up delay 5 s
Magnetic field immune
DC 3-wire, 1065 VDC
NO contact, PNP output
Cable connection
Wiring diagram
Type
Ident-No.
DBI10U-M30-AP4X2
1582231
Rotational speed range, adjustable
Hysteresis
Ambient temperature
0.0550 Hz
adjustable via potentiometer
315 %
10 mm
flush
(0,81 x Sn) mm
2%
10 %
15 %, -25 C v +70 C
315 %
-30+85 C
Operating voltage
Residual ripple
1065 VDC
10 % Uss
DC rated operational current

No-load currentI0
200 mA
20 mA
Residual current
Rated insulation voltage
Short-circuit protection
Voltage drop atIe
0.1 mA
0.5 kV
yes/ cyclic
1.8 V
Wire breakage / Reverse polarity protection

Output function
Protection class
yes/ complete
3-wire, NO contact, PNP
Design
Dimensions
Housing material
Material active face
End cap
Tightening torque of housing nut
Connection
Cable quality
Cable cross section
threaded barrel, M30 x 1.5

64 mm
Metal, CuZn, chrome-plated
Plastic, PBT
Plastic, EPTR
75 Nm
cable
5.2 mm, LifYY, PVC, 2 m
Edition 2011-10-22T11:07:46+02:00
Hysteresis (rotational-speed range)

Rated operating distance Sn
Mounting condition
Assured sensing range
Repeatability
Temperature drift
The rotational speed is detected by periodic

damping of the integrated inductive sensor.
This can be accomplished via metal targets
or teeth on the monitored shaft. The pulse
sequence generated is compared to an adjustable reference value in a comparator circuit If the rotational speed is below the reference value, the output is switched on (0). If
the reference value is exceeded, the output is
switched off (1). The start-up time delay (A)
is triggered by applying voltage to the device
and closes the output for 5 s (start-up time of
the drive).
Diagram
Shock resistance
Protection class
3 x 0.34 mm
55 Hz (1 mm)
30 g (11 ms)
IP67
Operating voltage
Switching state
LED green
LED green / yellow / blue
1/3
Functional principle
Hans Turck GmbH & Co.KG D-45472 Mlheim an der Ruhr Witzlebenstrae 7 Tel. 0208 4952-0 Fax 0208 4952-264 more@turck.com www.turck.com
Inductive sensor
DBI10U-M30-AP4X2
minimum distances
2xB
Distance W
3 x Sn
Distance T
3xB
Distance S
1.5 x B
Distance G
6 x Sn
Diameter of the active area B
30 mm
Edition 2011-10-22T11:07:46+02:00
Mounting instructions
Distance D
2/3
Inductive sensor
DBI10U-M30-AP4X2
Accessories
Type code
Ident-No.
Short text
BST-30B
6947216
Fixing clamp for threaded barrel devices, with dead-stop; ma-
Dimension drawing
terial: PA6
QM-30
6945103
Quick-mount bracket with dead-stop; material: Chrome-plated brass Male thread M36 x 1.5. Note: The switching distance of proximity switches can be reduced by the use of
quick-mount brackets.
MW-30
6945005
Mounting bracket for threaded barrel devices; material: Stainless steel A2 1.4301 (AISI 304)
BSS-30
6901319
Mounting bracket for smooth and threaded barrel devices;
Edition 2011-10-22T11:07:46+02:00
material: Polypropylene
3/3
1LA5/6/7/9, 1LE1, 1LG4/6, 1LP7/9,
1
___________________
Introduction
1MA6/7, 1MF6/7, 1MJ6/7, 1PC1/3,
2
___________________
Safety information
1PP6/7/9
3
___________________
Description
4
___________________
Preparing for use
Low-Voltage Motors
1LA5/6/7/9, 1LE1, 1LG4/6, 1LP7/9,
1MA6/7, 1MF6/7, 1MJ6/7, 1PC1/3,
1PP6/7/9
Operating Instructions
5
___________________
Assembly
6
___________________
7
___________________
Commissioning
8
___________________
Operation
9
___________________
Maintenance
10
___________________
Spare parts
11
___________________
Disposal
A
___________________
Appendix
B
___________________
Technical data and drawings
12
___________________
Notes
06/2011
5 610 00000 02 000
Legal information
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the relevant information is not taken into account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products

Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 48 48
90026 NRNBERG
GERMANY
Order number: 5 610 00000 02 000

08/2011
Copyright Siemens AG 2011.

Technical data subject to change
Table of contents
1
Introduction................................................................................................................................................ 9
1.1
About these instructions.................................................................................................................9
1.2
Information for the reader ..............................................................................................................9
Safety information.................................................................................................................................... 11
2.1
Information for those responsible for the plant or system............................................................11
2.2
The five safety rules:....................................................................................................................11
2.3
Qualified personnel ......................................................................................................................12
2.4
The safe use of electrical machines ............................................................................................12
2.5
Safety instructions: Explosion-proof machines ............................................................................13
2.6
Special designs and construction versions..................................................................................13
2.7
Special conditions for explosion-proof machines.........................................................................14
Description............................................................................................................................................... 15
3.1
3.1.1
Area of application .......................................................................................................................15

CE marking ..................................................................................................................................15
3.2
Delivery ........................................................................................................................................16
3.3
Rating plates ................................................................................................................................16
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.3.1
3.4.3.2
3.4.3.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.4.7
3.4.8
Installation ....................................................................................................................................18
Machine design ............................................................................................................................18
Regulations ..................................................................................................................................18
Cooling and ventilation.................................................................................................................19
General ........................................................................................................................................19
Machines with a fan .....................................................................................................................20
Machines without a fan (optional) ................................................................................................21
Bearings .......................................................................................................................................22
Balancing .....................................................................................................................................22
Types of construction/method of installation................................................................................22
Degree of protection ....................................................................................................................25
Optional built-on and built-in accessories ....................................................................................26
Preparing for use ..................................................................................................................................... 27

4.1
Transport......................................................................................................................................27
4.2
Storage.........................................................................................................................................28
4.3
Electromagnetic compatibility ......................................................................................................29
Assembly ................................................................................................................................................. 31
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
Installation ....................................................................................................................................31
Safety instructions........................................................................................................................31
Safety instructions: Explosion-proof machines ............................................................................31
Machine installation .....................................................................................................................32
1LA5/6/7/9, 1LE1, 1LG4/6, 1LP7/9, 1MA6/7, 1MF6/7, 1MJ6/7, 1PC1/3, 1PP6/7/9

Operating Instructions, 06/2011, 5 610 00000 02 000
Table of contents
5.1.4
5.1.4.1
5.1.5
5.1.6
5.1.6.1
5.1.7
Cooling ........................................................................................................................................ 33
Ventilation.................................................................................................................................... 33
Machines with type of construction IM B15, IM B9, IM V8 and IM V9 ........................................ 34
Balancing..................................................................................................................................... 35
Mounting and withdrawing output elements................................................................................ 36
Noise emission............................................................................................................................ 37
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
Alignment and fastening.............................................................................................................. 37

Flatness of supporting surfaces .................................................................................................. 39
Machine frame mounting feet (special design) ........................................................................... 39
Electrical connection................................................................................................................................ 41
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.1.6
6.1.7
6.1.7.1
6.1.8
6.1.8.1
6.1.8.2
6.1.8.3
6.1.8.4
6.1.8.5
6.1.8.6
Connection of the machine ......................................................................................................... 41

General........................................................................................................................................ 41
Terminal designations ................................................................................................................. 43
Direction of rotation ..................................................................................................................... 43
Connection with/without cable lugs............................................................................................. 43
Connection with cable lug for explosion-protected machines..................................................... 44
Connecting protruding cables ..................................................................................................... 44
Cable glands ............................................................................................................................... 45
Mounting position of sheet metal nuts in screw-type connections.............................................. 45
Terminal box ............................................................................................................................... 46
General........................................................................................................................................ 46
Versions ...................................................................................................................................... 47
Protruding connection cables...................................................................................................... 49
Connecting the temperature sensor/anti-condensation heater................................................... 50
Cable entry .................................................................................................................................. 52
Thread sizes in terminal box ....................................................................................................... 53
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
Tightening torques ...................................................................................................................... 56

Electrical connections - Termincal board connections................................................................ 56
Cable glands ............................................................................................................................... 56
Terminal boxes, end shields, grounding conductors, sheet metal fan covers ............................ 57
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
Conductor connection ................................................................................................................. 58

General information on conductor connection ............................................................................ 58
Type of conductor connection..................................................................................................... 59
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
Connecting the ground conductor............................................................................................... 62

General information on connecting the grounding conductor ..................................................... 62
Grounding connection type ......................................................................................................... 62
Minimum surface area of grounding conductor........................................................................... 63
Size of grounding conductor screw............................................................................................. 64
6.5
Final measures............................................................................................................................ 64
6.6
6.6.1
6.6.1.1
6.6.1.2
Connection of optional add-on units ........................................................................................... 65

External fan, incremental encoder, brake ................................................................................... 65
Mounting a brake ........................................................................................................................ 65
Mounted external fan .................................................................................................................. 65
6.7
Connection to the converter ........................................................................................................ 66
Commissioning ........................................................................................................................................ 69
7.1
7.1.1
Insulation resistance ................................................................................................................... 69

Checking the insulation resistance ............................................................................................. 69
Table of contents
7.2
Measures before start-up.............................................................................................................71
7.3
Switching on.................................................................................................................................73
Operation................................................................................................................................................. 75
8.1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
Safety instructions........................................................................................................................75
Safety instructions during operation ............................................................................................75
Safety instructions for cleaning ....................................................................................................77
Safety information for explosion-protected machines in operation..............................................77
Machines with textile fan covers ..................................................................................................78
8.2
Stoppages ....................................................................................................................................78
8.3
Fault tables...................................................................................................................................79
8.4
Deactivating .................................................................................................................................80
8.5
8.5.1
Class ............................................................................................................................................81
Zone 1 with type of protection Ex de II (Flameproof Enclosure "d" for the machine and
Increased Safety "e" for the terminal box) ...................................................................................81
Zone 1 with Ex e II type of protection (Increased Safety "e") ......................................................81
Zone 2 with type of protection Ex nA II (non-sparking)................................................................82
Zone 21 ........................................................................................................................................82
Zone 22 ........................................................................................................................................83
8.5.2
8.5.3
8.5.4
8.5.5
9
Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................ 85
9.1
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
Preparation and notes..................................................................................................................85

North American market ................................................................................................................86
Touch up any damaged paintwork...............................................................................................86
Repainting ....................................................................................................................................86
9.2
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
Inspection.....................................................................................................................................87
General inspection specifications ................................................................................................87
Optional built-on accessories.......................................................................................................87
Initial inspection............................................................................................................................87
Main inspection ............................................................................................................................88
9.3
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.3.4
Maintenance.................................................................................................................................89
Maintenance intervals ..................................................................................................................89
Regreasing (optional)...................................................................................................................90
Cleaning .......................................................................................................................................90
Drain condensate.........................................................................................................................91
9.4
9.4.1
9.4.2
9.4.2.1
9.4.2.2
9.4.3
9.4.3.1
9.4.3.2
9.4.4
9.4.4.1
9.4.4.2
9.4.4.3
9.4.4.4
Corrective maintenance ...............................................................................................................92

Instructions for repair ...................................................................................................................92
Storage.........................................................................................................................................92
Changing bearings.......................................................................................................................94
Replacing bearings in explosion-proof machines ........................................................................94
Dismantling ..................................................................................................................................94
Bearing bushes ............................................................................................................................95
Links.............................................................................................................................................95
Assembly......................................................................................................................................95
Assemly........................................................................................................................................96
Assemly........................................................................................................................................96
Installing bearing bushes .............................................................................................................96
Reassembling bearings ...............................................................................................................96

Table of contents
9.4.4.5
9.4.4.6
9.4.4.7
9.4.4.8
9.4.5
9.4.6
9.4.7
9.4.8
9.4.9
10
11
Spare parts ............................................................................................................................................ 101

10.1
Spare parts ordering ................................................................................................................. 101
10.2
10.2.1
10.2.2
Spare parts................................................................................................................................ 102

Spare parts frame size 100 ... 315 cast iron ............................................................................. 104
Spare parts 1LG........................................................................................................................ 105
10.3
Standardized parts .................................................................................................................... 106
Disposal................................................................................................................................................. 109
11.1
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 109
11.2
Preparing for disassembly......................................................................................................... 109
11.3
Dismantling the machine........................................................................................................... 109
11.4
Disposal of components............................................................................................................ 110
Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 111
A.1
SIEMENS Service Center ......................................................................................................... 111
A.2
Language versions on the Internet ........................................................................................... 111
A.3
Further documents .................................................................................................................... 112
Technical data and drawings ................................................................................................................. 113

B.1
B.1.1
B.1.2
B.1.3
B.1.4
B.1.5
B.1.6
B.1.7
B.1.8
B.1.9
B.1.10
B.1.11
B.1.12
B.1.13
B.1.14
B.1.15
B.1.16
12
Reassembling fans...................................................................................................................... 97
Refitting the fan cover ................................................................................................................. 97
Refitting the canopy; incremental encoder under canopy........................................................... 97
Reassembly: Miscellaneous information..................................................................................... 98
Screw-type connections .............................................................................................................. 98
Electrical connections - Termincal board connections................................................................ 98
Cable glands ............................................................................................................................... 98
Terminal boxes, end shields, grounding conductors, sheet metal fan covers ............................ 99
Optional add-on units ................................................................................................................ 100
Exploded drawings.................................................................................................................... 113

1LA,1LP,1MA,1MF,1PP6/7/9 FS 56 ... 90L .............................................................................. 113
1LA,1LP,1MA,1MF,1PP6/7/9 FS 100 ... 160 ............................................................................ 114
1LA5180 ... 225......................................................................................................................... 115
1MA6180 ... 200........................................................................................................................ 116
Terminal boxes 1MA6180 ... 200 .............................................................................................. 117
1MJ6070 ... 200 ........................................................................................................................ 118
Terminal boxes 1MJ6070 ... 160............................................................................................... 119
Terminal boxes 1MJ6180 ... 200 (Ex e) .................................................................................... 120
Terminal boxes 1MJ6180 ... 200 (Ex d) .................................................................................... 121
1LE1 FS 80 ... 160 aluminum ................................................................................................... 122
1LE1 FS 100 ... 200 cast iron.................................................................................................... 123
1LE1 FS 225 ... 315 cast iron.................................................................................................... 124
1LG4/6 FS 180 ... 315............................................................................................................... 125
1LG4/6 gk330, gt320, gk430, gt420.......................................................................................... 126
1LG4/6 gk431, gt421, gt520, gt540 .......................................................................................... 127
1LG4/6 gt620, gt640, gt791 ...................................................................................................... 128
Notes ..................................................................................................................................................... 129

Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 130
Table of contents

Introduction
1.1
About these instructions

These instructions describe the machine and explain best practices in machine handling,
from initial delivery to final disposal of the equipment.
Read these operating instructions before you handle the machine to become familiar with its
design and operating principles and thus ensure safe, problem-free machine operation and
long service life.
If you find any mistakes or have suggestions for improvements, please contact our
Service Center.
Text format features

The warning notice system is explained on the rear of the inside front. Always follow the
safety instructions and notices in these instructions.
In addition to the safety-related warning notices which you must read, you will find the text in
these instructions is formatted in the following way:
1. Handling instructions are always formatted as a numbered list. Always perform the steps
in the order given.
Lists are formatted as bulleted lists.
Lists on the second level are hyphenated.
Note
A Note is an important item of information about the product, handling of the product or the
relevant section of the document. Notes provide you with help or further suggestions/ideas.
1.2
Information for the reader
Explanation of the icons

Information for 1LE1, 1PC1, and 1PC3 machines
Information about explosion-protected machines

Introduction
1.2 Information for the reader
10
Safety information
2.1
Information for those responsible for the plant or system

This electric machine has been designed and built in accordance with the specifications
contained in Directive 2006/95/EC ("Low-Voltage Directive") and is intended for use in
industrial plants. Please observe the country-specific regulations when using the electric
machine outside the European Community.
Follow the local and industry-specific safety and setup regulations.
The persons responsible for the plant must ensure the following:
Planning and configuration work and all work carried out on and with the machine is only
to be done by qualified personnel.
The operating instructions must always be available for all work.
The technical data as well as the specifications relating to the permissible installation,
connection, ambient and operating conditions are taken into account at all times.
The specific setup and safety regulations as well as regulations on the use of personal
protective equipment are observed.
Note
Use the services and support provided by the appropriate Service Center for planning,
installation, commissioning, and servicing work.
In the individual chapters of this document, you will find safety instructions that must be
obeyed absolutely, for your own safety, to protect other people and to avoid damage to
property.
Observe the following safety instructions for all activities on and with the machine.
2.2
The five safety rules:

For your personal safety and to prevent material damage when working on the machine,
always observe the safety instructions and the following five safety rules, according to
EN 50110-1 ("Working in a voltage-free state). Apply the five safety rules in the order stated
before starting work at the machine.
Five safety rules

1. Disconnect the system.
Disconnect the auxiliary circuits, for example anti-condensation heating
2. Prevent reconnection.
3. Make sure that the equipment is at zero voltage
11
Safety information
2.3 Qualified personnel
4. Ground and short-circuit
5. Cover or isolate nearby components that are still live.
To energize the system, apply the measures in reverse order.
2.3
Qualified personnel
All work at the machine must be carried out by qualified personnel only. For the purpose of
this documentation, qualified personnel is taken to mean people who fulfill the following
requirements:
Through appropriate training and experience, they are able to recognize and avoid risks
and potential dangers in their particular field of activity.
They have been instructed to carry out work on the machine by the appropriate person
responsible.
2.4
The safe use of electrical machines

WARNING
Live parts
Electrical machines contain live parts.
Fatal or severe injuries and substantial material damage can occur if the required covers
are removed or if the machines are not handled, operated, or maintained properly.
Only remove covers in compliance with the applicable regulations.
Operate the machines properly.
Perform regular maintenance on the machine.
WARNING
Rotating parts
Electrical machines contain dangerous rotating parts.
Perform regular maintenance on the machine.
Secure free-standing shaft extensions.
12
Safety information
2.5 Safety instructions: Explosion-proof machines
WARNING
Hot surfaces
Electrical machines have hot surfaces.
Allow the machine to cool down before starting any work on it.
2.5
Safety instructions: Explosion-proof machines

CAUTION
The increased level of danger in hazardous areas demands that you pay particular
.
attention to the notes marked with
2.6
Special designs and construction versions

NOTICE
If any problems or uncertainties arise, we urgently recommend that you contact the
manufacturer specifying the type designation and serial number (No. ...., see rating plate)
or have the equipment repaired by a Siemens Service Center.

13
Safety information
2.7 Special conditions for explosion-proof machines
2.7
Special conditions for explosion-proof machines

Special conditions for the safe application of explosion-protected machines marked with X
(excerpt from the EC type-examination certificate, point 17)
Flameproof enclosure "d"
Flameproof joints may only be repaired strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's design
specifications. Repair in accordance with the values in Tables 1 and 2 of EN 60079-1 is not
permitted.
Zone 21
Do not operate the motors with excessively thick deposits of dust.
When the motors are mounted with the free shaft end pointing upwards, prevent foreign
bodies from dropping into the ventilation openings using an appropriate mechanical
design.
For motors with a fixed connecting cable: The free end of the cable must be connected
according to valid regulations for electrical installations.
14
Description
3.1
Area of application
Overview
The three-phase machines of this series are used as industrial drives. They are designed for
a wide range of drive applications both for line operation as well as in conjunction with
frequency converters.
They are characterized by their high power density, extreme robustness, long service life
and outstanding reliability.
Intended use of the machines

These machines are intended for industrial installations. They comply with the harmonized
standards of the series IEC/EN 60034 (VDE 0530). Their use in hazardous areas is
forbidden unless the marking on the rating plate expressly permits this operation. If
other/more wide-ranging demands (e.g. protection so that they cannot be touched by
children) are made in special cases i.e. use in non-industrial installations these conditions
must have been complied with in the plant or system itself when the motors are installed.
Note
Machine directive
Low-voltage motors are components designed for installation in machines in accordance
with the current Machinery Directive. They must not be commissioned until it has been
verified that the end product complies with this directive (refer to EN 60204-1).
3.1.1
CE marking
Note
Use of machines without CE identification
Machines without
marking are intended for operation outside the European Economic
Area (EEA). Do not use any machines without CE mark within of the EEA!

15
Description
3.2 Delivery
3.2
Delivery
Checking the delivery for completeness

The drive systems are put together on an individual basis. When you take receipt of the
delivery, please check immediately whether the items delivered are in accordance with the
accompanying documents. Siemens will not accept any claims relating to items missing from
the delivery and which are submitted at a later date.
Register a complaint about
any apparent transport damage with the delivery agent immediately.
any apparent defects/missing components with the appropriate SIEMENS office
immediately.
Keep the safety and commissioning notes, which are part of the scope of delivery, in an
accessible place; this also applies to the optionally available operating instructions.
The rating plate optionally enclosed as a loose item with the delivery is provided to enable
the machine data to be shown on or near the machine or installation.
3.3
Rating plates
Rating plate
The rating plate shows the identification data and the most important technical data. The
data on the rating plate and the contractual agreements define the limits of proper usage.
16
Description
3.3 Rating plates
Data on the rating plate

Table 3- 1
Item
Machine rating plate

Description
Item
General data
Description
Electrical data
Type of machine
31
50 Hz data
Machine type
32
60 Hz data
Serial number (incl. date of manufacture YY.MM )
33
Rated voltage [V]
Standards
34
Winding connections
Additional details (optional)
35
Frequency [Hz]
Customer data (optional)
36
Rated power [kW]
Country of origin
37
Rated current [A]
Production location
38
Power factor [cos]
Identification number of testing agency (optional)
39
Rated speed [rpm]
10
Regulations (optional)
Mechanical data
40
Efficiency class
41
Efficiency
11
Frame size
42
Torque [Nm] (optional)
12
Type of construction
43
Rated power [hp] (optional)
13
44
Service factor (optional)
14
Machine weight [kg]
45
Starting current ratio (optional)
15
Temperature class
46
Operating mode (optional)
16
Coolant temperature range (optional)
47
NEMA data (optional)
17
Installation altitude (only if higher than 1000 m)
48
Anti-condensation heating (optional)
18
Vibration severity grade
19
Bearing sizes
20
Relubrication data (optional)
21
Brake data (optional)

(2)
(3)
(1)
(3)
(7/8)
(14)
(12)
(11)
(4/40)
(4/10)
(13)
(15)
(16)

(10)
(31/43)
(17/18/19/41/46)
(32/43)
(44/45/48)
(6/41/47)
(7)
(15)
(10)

(15)
(19)
(1)
(12)
(11)
(16)
(20)
(4)
(33) (34)
(14)
(18)
(13)
(17)
(21)
(12)
(36)
(3)
(13)
(14)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(31)
(9)
(33) (36) (37) (38) (39) (40)
(2)
(11)
(35)
(41)
(32)
(42)
(31)
(32)
(47)
(5)
Figure 3-1
(48)
(6)
(7)
Rating plates

17
Description
3.4 Installation
3.4
Installation
3.4.1
Machine design
Machines of this series are self-ventilated low-voltage three-phase asynchronous drives with
a cylindrical shaft end and featherkey way. They can be supplied as single-speed machines
with different efficiency classes or as pole changing machines for several speeds.
In the case of machines with feet (IM B3 type of construction), the feet are cast or bolted on.
It is possible to change the feet bolted on the housing of the machine, e.g. to change the
position of the terminal box; however, only have this performed by an authorized retrofit
partner.
With the appropriate post working, ensure that the foot mounting surfaces are again on one
plane and parallel to the machine shaft, and shim when required. Professionally touch up
damaged painted surfaces.
3.4.2
Regulations
Machine design
The regulations and standards used as basis to design and test this machine are stamped
on the rating plate. The machine design basically complies with the following standards:
Table 3- 2
Applicable general regulations
Feature
Standard
Dimensions and operating performance
IEC / EN 60034-1
IEC / EN 60034-5
Cooling
IEC / EN 60034-6
IEC / EN 60034-7
Terminal designations and direction of rotation
IEC / EN 60034-8
Noise emission
IEC / EN 60034-9
Restart characteristics for rotating electrical

machines
IEC / EN 60034-12
Vibration severity grades
IEC / EN 60034-14
Efficiency classification of three-phase squirrelcage induction motors
IEC / EN 60034-30
IEC standard voltages
IEC 60038
18
Description
3.4 Installation
Supplementary regulations for

Table 3- 3
explosion-proof machines
Regulations applied for explosion-proof machines
Feature
Standard
Electrical equipment for hazardous gas atmospheres, Part 0:

General requirements
IEC / EN 60079-0

IEC / EN 60079-1

Increased safety "e"
IEC / EN 60079-7
Electrical equipment for hazardous gas atmospheres, Part

14: Electric installations for endangered atmospheres (except
underground excavation)
IEC / EN 60079-14

15: Type of protection "n"
IEC / EN 60079-15

19: Repairs and overhauls
IEC / EN 60079-19
Electrical equipment for use in the presence of combustible

dust - Part 0: General requirements
IEC / EN 61241-0

dust - Part 1: Protection by enclosure "tD"
IEC / EN 61241-1

IEC / EN 61241-17
dust - Part 17: Inspection and maintenance of electrical
IEC / EN 60079-17
systems in hazardous areas (except underground excavation)
Directive on the approximation of the laws of the Member
States concerning equipment and protective systems
intended for use in hazardous areas.
3.4.3
Cooling and ventilation
3.4.3.1
General
RL94/9/EC
The machines of this series are three-phase asynchronous machines with a closed primary
(internal) cooling circuit and an open secondary cooling circuit (surface cooling). The surface
cooling varies depending on the version.

19
Description
3.4 Installation
3.4.3.2
Machines with a fan
Self-ventilation (standard): Type of cooling IC 411 in accordance with IEC / EN 60034-6

Located at the ND end of the stator housing is an air intake cowl that guides the external air
on its way to the motor. The external air is drawn in through openings in the air intake cowl
and flows axially across the outer cooling ribs of the motor frame. The fan wheel responsible
for the external flow of cooling air is attached to the machine shaft.
The fan wheels are independent of the direction of rotation.
Check the cooling effect below rated speed in the case of frequent switching or braking or if
the speed is controlled continually below the rated speed.
Machines for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22 have a metal fan.
20
Description
3.4 Installation
Forced ventilation (optional): Cooling method IC 416 in accordance with IEC/EN 60034-6
WARNING
Hot surfaces
Operating the machine without external fan results in overheating. This may result in
personal injury and material damage.
Never commission the machine without an external fan.
Cooling that does not depend on the speed is achieved by means of a separately driven fan
wheel (forced ventilation). Forced ventilation does not depend on the operating state of the
machine.
The fan wheel for the external flow of cooling air is powered by an independent module and
is enclosed by the fan cover.
3.4.3.3
Machines without a fan (optional)
Surface cooling by free convection: Type of cooling IC 410 in accordance with IEC / EN 60034-6
,&,&$$
Figure 3-2
IC410

21
Description
3.4 Installation
Surface cooling by relative movement of cooling air: Type of cooling IC 418 in accordance with IEC /
EN 60034-6
,&,&$$
Figure 3-3
3.4.4
IC418
Bearings
In order to support the machine shaft and maintain its position in the non-moving part of the
machine, only 2 rolling-contact bearings are used. One roller bearing performs the function
of a location bearing that transfers axial and radial forces from the rotating machine shaft to
the non-moving part of the machine. The second roller bearing is implemented as floating
and support bearing in order to allow thermal expansion inside the machine and transfer
radial forces.
The nominal (calculated) useful life of the bearings according to ISO 281 is at least 20,000
hours with utilization of the permissible radial/axial forces. However, the achievable useful
life of the bearings can be significantly longer in the case of lower forces (e.g. operation with
self-aligning couplings).
Avoid rigid couplings.
Roller bearings with permanent lubrication are maintenance-free. For bearings that can be
relubricated, observe the data on the rating plate or lubricant plate.
3.4.5
Balancing
The machines are balanced dynamically with a half featherkey (code "H") in accordance with
ISO 8821.
The balancing quality corresponds to vibration severity grade "A" for the complete machine;
vibration severity grade "B" is possible as an option.
3.4.6
Types of construction/method of installation
Further possible fields of application

The type of construction of the machine is stated on the rating plate.
CAUTION
When lifting the machines for transport, only lift them in a position that corresponds to their
basic construction type.
22
Description
3.4 Installation
Table 3- 4
Basic type of
construction code
Graphics-Based
Representation
IM B3 (IM 1001)
Other methods of
installation
Graphics-Based
Representation
IM V5 (IM 1011)
IM V6 (IM 1031)
IM B6 (IM 1051)
IM B7 (IM 1061)
IM B8 (IM 1071)
Basic type of
construction code
Graphics-Based
Representation
IM B5 (IM 3001)
Other methods of
installation
Graphics-Based
Representation
IM V1 (IM 3011)
IM V3 (IM 3031)
Basic type of
construction code
Graphics-Based
Representation
IM B14 (IM 3601)
Other methods of
installation
Graphics-Based
Representation
IM V18 (IM 3611)
IM V19 (IM 3631)
Basic type of
construction code
Graphics-Based
Representation
IM B35 (IM 2001)

IM B34 (IM 2101)

23
Description
3.4 Installation
Types of construction/Installation conditions for explosion-proof machines

The type of construction of the machine is stated on the rating plate.
DANGER
In the case of explosion-proof machines where the shaft extensions point downwards
(types of construction IM V5, IM V1 or IM V18 ) a protective top cover is mandatory.
Explosion-proof machines with IM V5, IM V1 and IM V18 types of construction are fitted
with a canopy at the factory.
For types of construction with a shaft extension facing upwards, a suitable cover must
be fitted to prevent small parts from falling into the fan cover (see also standard IEC/EN
60079-0).
Prevent the cooling airflow from being reduced as a result of covers that might be in
place.
Table 3- 5
Construction type with protective top cover

Conditions of installation
Graphics-Based Representation
IM V5 (IM 1011)
IM V1 (IM 3011)
IM V18 (IM 3611)
24
Description
3.4 Installation
3.4.7
The degree of protection the machines feature is stated on the rating plate. They can be
installed in dusty or humid environments.
WARNING
Dangerous voltage
Condensation drain holes (optional)
Inserting objects into the condensation drain holes can damage the winding and can result
in death, serious injury and damage to property!
Note the following to maintain the degree of protection:
Switch off the machine so that it is in a no-voltage condition, before you open the
condensation drain holes.
Close the condensation drain holes (e.g. using T-plugs) before commissioning the
machine.
NOTICE
Storage
If the machines are used or stored outdoors, we recommend keeping them under a shelter
or an additional cover.
Avoid exposing them to direct, intense solar radiation, rain, snow, ice, or dust for
extended periods.
If necessary, please consult us or seek advice regarding technical issues.
Environmental requirements
The machines are suitable for operation in tropical climates.
Guide value for the standard version 60 % relative humidity at a coolant temperature (CT) of
40 C.
Ambient temperature: -20 C to +40 C
Installation altitude: 1000 m
Air with normal oxygen content, usually 21 % (V/V)
If the environmental requirements are different from the details listed here, then the values
on the rating plate will apply.
Machines intended for use in Zone 1 (type of protection Flameproof Enclosure "d" or
Increased Safety "e") or in Zone 2 (type of protection "n") are designed with IP 55 degree of
protection.
Machines intended for use in Zone 21 have IP 65 degree of protection. Machines intended
for use in Zone 22 have IP 55 degree of protection and can be used in dusty environments
such as grinders, silos, animal feed plants, and malthouses, as well as in certain areas of the
chemical industry.

25
Description
3.4 Installation
3.4.8
Optional built-on and built-in accessories

In addition to the current-dependent overload protective device located in the connecting
leads, we recommend that you use temperature sensors embedded in the stator winding in
order to monitor the temperature and protect the stator winding from overheating.
Machines whose winding is exposed to the danger of condensation due to the climate, e.g.
machines at a standstill in a damp environment or machines which are exposed to large
temperature fluctuations, can be equipped with an anti-condensation heater.
As an option, the machines can be fitted with additional built-on accessories on the
ventilation side (e.g. brake, rotary pulse encoder).
Optional built-on and built-in accessories for explosion-proof machines

If the temperatures are within the specified limits at the mounting location, in the case of
external sources of heat or cold, no additional measures are necessary. Using the type tests,
for special applications with external sources of heat or cold, check the effect on the max.
surface and operating temperatures, and if necessary, apply suitable measures.
Select mounted equipment such as brakes, forced ventilation or incremental encoders
according to the requirements of the Directive 94/9/EC.
26
Preparing for use

4.1
Transport
WARNING
Use lifting eyes
The machine must only be transported and lifted using the lifting eyes, in a position that is
appropriate for its type of construction. Otherwise, it could fall over or slip in the lifting
tackle.
This can result in death, serious injury, or material damage.
Use all the lifting eyes on the machine.
Any eyes that are screwed in must be tightly fastened.
Eyebolts must be screwed in right up to their supporting surface.
If necessary, use suitable, sufficiently-sized transport equipment such as lifting straps
(EN1492-1) and lashing straps (EN12195-2).
WARNING
Suspended transport
If several items of transport material are used for fastening, two straps must be able to
carry the whole load.
Use additional, suitable means of support for transport and during installation.
Secure the support equipment to prevent it from slipping.
Remove any transport locks before start-up and either keep them in a safe place or unlock
them. You can then use them again for transporting further items or you can apply them
again.
The machines are packed in different ways depending on how they are transported and their
size. If not otherwise contractually agreed, the packaging corresponds to the packing
guidelines according to ISPM (International Standards for Phytosanitary Measures).
Comply with the images shown on the packaging. Their meaning is as follows:
Up
Fragile
goods
Protect
against
moisture
Protect
against
heat
Center of
gravity
Hand hooks
forbidden
Attach
here

27
Preparing for use

4.2 Storage
4.2
Storage
Storing outdoors
Choose a dry storage location which is safe from flooding and free from vibration. Repair any
damage to the packaging before putting the equipment into storage if this is necessary to
ensure proper storage conditions. In order to ensure protection against ground moisture,
locate machines, equipment and crates on pallets, wooden beams or foundations. Prevent
equipment from sinking into the ground. Do not impede air circulation under the stored items.
Covers or tarpaulins used to protect the equipment against the weather must not come into
contact with the surfaces of the equipment. Use wooden spacer elements to ensure that air
can circulate freely around the equipment.
CAUTION
Take all appropriate precautions under extreme climatic conditions, e.g. salt-laden and/or
dusty, moist/humid atmospheres.
Storing indoors
The storage rooms must provide protection against extreme weather conditions. They must
be dry, free from dust, frost and vibration and well ventilated.
Bare metal surfaces

For transport, the bare fitting surfaces (shaft ends, flange surfaces, centering edges) should
be coated with an anti-corrosion agent which will last for a limited amount of time (<6
months). Apply suitable anti-corrosion measures for longer storage times.
Condensation drain hole

Open any condensation drain holes to drain the condensation (<6 months).
Storage time
Turn the shafts 1x every year to avoid bearing brinelling. Prolonged storage periods reduce
the useful life of the bearing grease (aging).
Open bearings
For open bearings e.g. 1Z, check the state of the bearing grease over 12 months.
Replace the grease if it can be identified that the grease has lost oil content or has
become dirty (ingress of condensation leads to consistency changes of the grease).
Closed bearings
For closed bearings, replace the DE and NDE bearings after a storage time of 48 months
28
Preparing for use

4.3 Electromagnetic compatibility
4.3
Electromagnetic compatibility
NOTICE
If the torque levels are very unequal (e.g. when a reciprocating compressor is being driven),
a non-sinusoidal machine current will be induced whose harmonics can have an
impermissible effect on the supply system and cause impermissible interference emissions
as a result.
NOTICE
Converter
If operated with a frequency converter, the emitted interference varies in strength,
depending on the design of the converter (type, interference suppression measures,
manufacturer).
Prevent the limit values stipulated by EN 61000-6-3 for the drive system (consisting of
the machine and converter) from being exceeded.
You must observe the EMC information from the manufacturer of the converter.
The most effective method of shielding is to conductively connect a shielded machine
supply cable to the metal terminal box of the machine (with a metal screw connection)
over a large surface area.
On machines with integrated sensors (e.g. PTC thermistors), disturbance voltages
caused by the converter may occur on the sensor cable.
When used in accordance with their intended purpose and operated on an electrical supply
system with characteristics in accordance with EN 50160, the enclosed motors (IP 55 and
higher) comply with the requirements of the current guidelines for electromagnetic
compatibility.
Immunity to interference
The machines fulfill the requirements relating to interference immunity in conformance with
EN 61000-6-2. If machines with integrated sensors (e.g. PTC thermistors) are used, the
operating company must ensure sufficient interference immunity by selecting a suitable
sensor signal lead (possibly with shielding, connected in the same way as the machine
feeder cable) and a suitable evaluation unit.
When operating the machines from a converter at speeds higher than the rated speed, then
the mechanical speed limits must be carefully observed (safe operating speed IEC / EN
60034-1).

29
Preparing for use

4.3 Electromagnetic compatibility
30
Assembly
5.1
Installation
5.1.1
Safety instructions
WARNING
Hot surfaces
Electrical machines have hot surfaces.
Allow the machine to cool down before starting any work on it.
It must be ensured that parts (cables etc.) do not come into contact with the machine
enclosure.
CAUTION
Before start-up, please check that
the customer has set the correct direction of rotation of the machine - e.g. by decoupling
from the driven machine - by taking appropriate measures!
there are no temperature-sensitive parts (cables etc.), which are in contact with the
machine enclosure.
condensation drain holes are always located at the lowest point of the motor!
NOTICE
Please note the technical data on the rating plates on the machine enclosure.
5.1.2
Safety instructions: Explosion-proof machines

CAUTION
The increased level of danger in hazardous areas demands that you pay particular
.
attention to the notes marked with

31
Assembly
5.1 Installation
5.1.3
Machine installation
General
NOTICE
After installing, tighten the eyebolts or remove them!
Note
Do not use mounted components (e.g. rotary pulse encoder) to help lift the motor!
For vertical installation, use all of the eyebolts provided and when necessary, hoisting
straps (DIN EN 1492-1) and/or lashing straps (DIN EN 12195-2) to stabilize the position
of the motor.
Prevent foreign bodies from falling into the fan cover! For vertical machine installation
with the shaft end facing downwards, attach a protective canopy.
If the shaft extension is facing upwards, users must prevent liquid from flowing along the
shaft and entering the motor!
Clean bare metal surfaces with anti-corrosion agent using white spirit to ensure proper
installation and / or machine mounting!
Do not obstruct the ventilation! Do not draw off the discharged air directly also from
adjacent equipment!
Avoid exposing them to direct, intense solar radiation, rain, snow, ice, or also dust for
extended periods. Attach a covering structure or an additional cover when using or
storing outdoors.
Do not exceed the permissible axial and radial forces!
Only use explosion-protected machines in appropriate areas in accordance with directive
1999/92/EG .
If the certificate is supplemented by an X, observe the special conditions listed in the EC
type examination certificate. Auto-Hotspot
When installing electrical systems in hazardous zones, carefully observe EN 60079-14
and the corresponding country regulations.
The machine temperature class specified on the rating plate must be equal to or greater
than the temperature class of any combustible gases that may develop.
See also
Special conditions for explosion-proof machines (Page 14)
32
Assembly
5.1 Installation
5.1.4
Cooling
5.1.4.1
Ventilation
CAUTION
Ventilation
Do not obstruct ventilation.
Prevent the air expelled by neighboring equipment from being immediately sucked in
again.
On the vertical type of machine construction with air intake from above, protect the air
inlets from the ingress of foreign bodies and water.
If the shaft extension is facing upwards, liquid must be prevented from entering by
moving along the shaft.
Table 5- 1
Air guidance
Incorrect
Correct
[

33
Assembly
5.1 Installation
Incorrect
Correct
The minimum dimension "x" for the distance between neighboring modules
Table 5- 2
5.1.5
Minimum dimension "X" for the distance between neighboring modules

Frame size
(BG)
X
mm
63 ... 71
15
80 ... 100
20
112
25
132
30
160
40
180 ... 225
45
180 ... 200 (1LG)
90
225 ... 250 (1LG, 1MA6, 1MJ7)
100
280 ... 315
110
Machines with type of construction IM B15, IM B9, IM V8 and IM V9
Special types of construction

CAUTION
Follow these instructions:
The IM B3 bearing shield with built-in distance ring mounted at the DE is only used as
transport lock. A warning label is attached to this bearing shield!
The spacer ring is not a roller bearing!
Remove the bearing shield and the spacer ring!
Remove the transport lock before commissioning!
34
Assembly
5.1 Installation
These machines do not have their own bearing system for the machine shaft at the drive end
(DE). The machine shaft is accepted by the (hollow) shaft or coupling of the plant or driven
machine.
Using the centering flange, the machine is aligned with respect to enclosures, flanges or
driven machines.
Note that the temperature of the machine and machine shaft increases during operation. The
thermal expansion of the machine shaft must be compensated by the customer in the form of
suitable measures.
Use the spring washers provided to locate the NDE bearing without any play.
5.1.6
Balancing
CAUTION
Safety precautions
The general touch protection measures for drive output elements must be observed.
Output elements may only be attached or withdrawn using the correct equipment.
The feather keys are only secured against falling out during shipping. If you commission
a machine without an output element, the feather keys must be secured to prevent them
from being thrown out.
The rotors are balanced dynamically. The balancing quality corresponds to vibration severity
grade "A" for the complete machine as standard. The optional vibration severity grade "B" is
indicated on the rating plate.
The declaration regarding the type of featherkey for balancing is generally marked on the
rating plate and optionally on the face of the shaft end.
Designation:
As a standard measure, balancing is carried out dynamically with a half featherkey (code
"H") in accordance with ISO 8821.
"F" means balancing with a whole featherkey (optional version).
"N" means balancing without a featherkey (optional version).

35
Assembly
5.1 Installation
The featherkey declaration on the shaft and transmission element must indicate the correct
type of balancing in each case and must be correctly mounted.
The balancing quality corresponds to vibration severity grade "A" for the complete machine;
vibration severity grade "B" is possible as an option, i.e. in order to ensure the desired
balancing quality, it must be ensured that the featherkey declarations on the hub and
machine shaft complement each other in the case of a shorter or longer transmission
element.
Note
Measures conforming to ISO 10816 must be taken in order to compensate any offset
between electrical machines and driven machines.
The foundation must be designed according to DIN 4024.
5.1.6.1
Mounting and withdrawing output elements
Withdrawing output elements
36
Assembly
5.2 Alignment and fastening
Mounting output elements
Note
When mounting output elements (coupling, gear wheel, belt pulley etc. ) use the thread at
the shaft end and - if possible - heat up the output elements as required.
Use a suitable device when withdrawing output elements.
Do not apply any blows when mounting and withdrawing the output element (e.g. with
hammer or similar).
Transfer no more than the radial or axial forces specified in the catalog to the machine
bearings via the shaft extension.
5.1.7
Noise emission
NOTICE
When the noise that is emitted at workplaces of the personnel responsible for operating the
equipment is assessed, it must be borne in mind that the A-weighted sound pressure level,
measured in accordance with ISO 1680, namely 70 dB(A), is not exceeded if the threephase machines are operated with the rated output.
5.2
Alignment and fastening
General
When aligning and fastening the machine, please bear the following in mind:
The machine must be level.
Feet and flanges must be fastened securely.
Alignment must be precise in the case of direct coupling.
Fastening surfaces must be clean
Look out for any damage to paint; this must be rectified immediately and correctly.

37
Assembly
Look out for traces of anti-corrosion protection agents; these must be removed using
mineral turpentine.
Look out for installation-related resonances with the rotating frequency and double line
frequency; these must be prevented.
Listen for unusual noises when turning the rotor manually.
Check the direction of rotation with the machine decoupled.
Avoid using rigid coupling measures.
Measures
The following measures are required in order to compensate any radial offset at the coupling
and to horizontally adjust the electrical machine with respect to the driven load:
Vertical positioning.
When vertically positioning the machine, place thin metal shins under the mounting feet in
order to avoid tensioning and deforming the machine. The number of shims should be
kept as low as possible i.e. only stack a few shims.
Horizontal positioning
To position the machine horizontally, push it sideways on the foundation and ensure that
the axial position is maintained (angularity error).
When positioning the motor, ensure that a uniform axial gap is maintained around the
coupling.
Smooth running
Stable, vibration-free design of the foundations in accordance with DIN 4024 and precise
alignment of the coupling, as well as a well-balanced output element (coupling, belt
pulleys, fans, etc.), are prerequisites for smooth running with low vibration levels.
Complete balancing of the machine with the output element may be necessary.
For details and evaluation criteria, refer to ISO 10816.
Foot/flange mounting
Use thread sizes specified in EN 50347 for mounting the machine to foundations or to
machine flanges. Attach the machine at four foot or flange holes in a rectangular
configuration with respect to one another. The customer is responsible for selecting the
strength of the fixing elements.
For the fixing elements up to and including frame size 160, property class 5.6 or higher is
recommended, from frame size 180, property class 8.8 or higher.
For IM B14 flanges, select the correct screw length.
Note
Only use authorized retrofit partners to change over the mounting feet bolted to the
machine frame, e.g. in order to change the position of the terminal box.
In order to prevent the machine from being deformed, ensure that the mounting feet
surfaces are located in one plane and parallel to the machine shaft by post working or by
using shims.
38
Assembly
5.2.1
Flatness of supporting surfaces
Flatness of the supporting surfaces for conventional motors

Frame size
(FS)
5.2.2
Flatness
mm
132
0.10
160
0.15
180
0.20
Machine frame mounting feet (special design)

Frame size
(FS)
Type of feet
1LA / 1MA FS 90S/L
Cast-on feet with double hole
1LE16/5 frame size 132S/M, 160M/L
Cast-on feet with double hole
1MA6/1MJ6 FS 180M/L
Screwed-on feet with double hole
1LG/LE frame size 180 ... 280 S/L
Cast or bolted-on feet with double hole
1LG/LE frame size 315 S/M/L
1LG/LE frame size 315 S
1LG/LE frame size 315 M/L
1MA6 frame size 180 / 225

1MA6 frame size 280 ... 315
Cast or bolted-on feet with double hole
1MJ7 frame size 180 / 225

1MJ7 frame size 280 ... 315
NOTICE
Maintain the standardized foot dimensions with type of construction IM B3 according to EN
50347!

39
Assembly
40
6.1
Connection of the machine
6.1.1
General
WARNING
Note the following safety information before connecting-up the machine:
Only qualified and trained personnel should carry out work on the machine while it is
stationary.
Disconnect the machine from the power supply and take measures to prevent it being
reconnected. This also applies to auxiliary circuits, e.g. anti-condensation heating.
Check that the machine really is in a no-voltage condition.
Establish a safe protective conductor connection before starting any work.
If the incoming power supply system displays any deviations from the rated values in
terms of voltage, frequency, curve form or symmetry, such deviations will increase the
temperature and influence electromagnetic compatibility.
WARNING
Line supply with non-grounded neutral point
Operating the machine on a line supply system with a non-grounded neutral point is only
permitted over short time intervals that occur rarely, e.g. the time leading to a fault being
eliminated (ground fault of a cable, EN 60034-1).
Observe the information in IEC / EN 60034-1 (VDE 0530-1) regarding operation at the limits
of the A zones (5 % voltage difference or 2 % frequency difference) and the B zones,
especially in respect of temperature increase and deviation of the operating data from the
rated data on the rating plate. Never exceed the specified limits!
Connect up so that a permanently safe electrical connection is guaranteed (no protruding
wire ends); use the assigned cable-end fittings (e.g. cable lugs, end sleeves).
Connect up the line supply voltage and arranged the disconnecting link in accordance with
the circuit diagram provided in the terminal box.
Select the connecting cables in accordance with DIN VDE 0100 and in accordance with the
rated current and the installation-specific conditions (e.g. ambient temperature, routing
method etc. according to DIN VDE 0298 and/or IEC/EN 60204-1).
The technical specifications stipulate the following that have to be taken into account with
respect to the motor connection:

41
6.1 Connection of the machine
Direction of rotation.
The number and arrangement of the terminal boxes.
The circuit and connection of the machine winding.
The following features make this type of electrical connection different from that for standard
machines:
Maintain the area A in IEC/EN 60034-1 (VDE 0530-1) (5 % voltage or 2 % frequency
deviation, waveform, line supply symmetry) so that the temperature rise remains within
the permissible limits.
Larger deviations from the rated data may result in electrical machines heating up to
impermissible levels. This information must be specified on the rating plate. Under no
circumstances exceed the limits!
Protect every machine with type of protection increased safety "e" in accordance with EN
60079-14 against an inadmissible temperature rise using a current-dependent, delayed
circuit breaker with phase failure protection and asymmetry detection corresponding to
EN 60947 or using an equivalent device in all phases.
For machines with type of protection increased safety "e", select the overcurrent device
with current-dependent delayed trip so that the tripping time, which should be taken from
the characteristic of the switch for the ratio IA / IN of the machine to be protected, is no
longer than the safe-locked rotor time tE. Take the ratio IA / IN as well as the safe-locked
rotor time tE from the rating plate. Set the protective device to the rated current. Use a
certified tripping unit in accordance with RL 94/9/EC.
For machines with increased safety "e" type of protection, in the event of a locked rotor
the protective device must disconnect within the tE time specified for the relevant
temperature class. Protect electrical machines for heavy duty starting (acceleration time >
1.7 x tE time) according to the specifications of the EC-type examination certificate using
a starting monitoring function.
Direct monitoring of the winding temperature is permissible as a means of thermal
machine protection, provided that this is certified and specified on the rating plate.
With pole-changing machines, separate, interlocked protective devices are required for
each speed step. Devices with an EC-type examination certificate are recommended.
42
6.1.2
Terminal designations
The following definitions apply in principle to the terminal designations of three-phase
machines in accordance with DIN VDE 0530 Part 8 or IEC 60034-8:
Table 6- 1
1
Terminal designations (with the 1U1-1 as an example)

-
Index showing the pole assignment for pole-changing machines (where

applicable, a lower number indicates a lower speed) or, in special cases, for a
subdivided winding.
x
Phase designation (U, V, W)

x
Index showing the start (1) / end (2) or tapping point of the winding (if there is
more than one connection per winding)
x
6.1.3
Designation
Additional index for cases in which it is obligatory to connect parallel power

feed cables to several terminals with otherwise identical designations
Direction of rotation
The standard motors are suitable for clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation.
Connection of the power cables in the phase sequence L1, L2, L3 to U, V, W results in
clockwise rotation (looking at the DE shaft end on the drive side). If two of the connections
are interchanged then the resulting direction of rotation is counter-clockwise (e.g. L1, L2, L3
at V, U, W).
In the case of machines intended for only one direction of rotation, the defined direction of
rotation e.g. for machines with an axial fan, is marked by a direction arrow on the machine.
6.1.4
Connection with/without cable lugs

In the case of terminals with terminal clamps, distribute the conductors in such a way that the
clamping heights on both sides of the fillet are about the same. This method of connection
requires that you must bend a single conductor in a U shape or use a cable lug. The same
applies to the inner and outer terminals of the ground conductor
When connecting up using cable lugs, select their size corresponding to the required cable
cross-section and the stud size. A inclined arrangement is only permitted provided the
required air clearances and creepage distances are carefully maintained.
Remove the insulation from the conductor ends so that the remaining insulation is almost
long enough to reach the cable lug.
Note
The direct contact between the cable lug surfaces and the contact nuts or contact screws
ensure that the connection can conduct current.

43
6.1.5
Connection with cable lug for explosion-protected machines

CAUTION
Connection using cable lugs
You must bend single-core line conductors into a U shape in order to prevent the contact
force being transferred at just one side.
In order to prevent the cable lug from rotating, for a line connection using a cable lug, angle
single- or multi-core cables through approx. 40 downwards!
6.1.6
Connecting protruding cables

In the case of connection cables brought out of the machine, no terminal board is installed
on the terminal base of the machine housing. The connection cables are directly connected
to stator winding terminals at the factory.
The connection cables are color coded or labeled and are provided with end sleeves by the
customer. The customer directly connects individual cables in the control cabinet for their
system in accordance with the labeling.
44
6.1.7
Cable glands
Cable glands with (sheet metal) nuts (EN 50262)

Nut
O ring
Cable glands with reductions and (sheet metal) nuts (EN 50262)

6.1.7.1
Nut
O ring
Mounting position of sheet metal nuts in screw-type connections

O ring
Mounting position of metal-sheet
nuts
Cable glands with connecting thread in the terminal box (EN 50262)

O ring

45
6.1.8
Terminal box
6.1.8.1
General
DANGER
Dangerous voltage
Electric machines contain hazardous voltages.
If the machine is not de-energized and brought into a no-voltage condition, death or serious
injury will occur.
When work is carried out on the machine with the terminal box open, it must not be
electrically connected!
CAUTION
Damage to property
Note the following information to avoid damage to the terminal box.
Make sure that the components inside the terminal box e.g. terminal board and cable
connections) are not damaged!
It must be ensured that there are no foreign bodies, dirt or moisture in the terminal box.
Cable entries into the terminal box according to DIN 42925.
Close any additional open cable entries with O-rings or suitable flat gaskets, the terminal
box itself must be sealed so that it is dust and water tight using the original seal.
Please observe the tightening torques for cable glands and other screws.
When performing a test run, secure the feather keys without output elements.
NOTICE
The terminal box must be sealed so that dust and water cannot enter.
Frame sizes 80 to 90
WARNING
Dangerous voltage
Loosening the safety torx screw can result in death, serious injury or material damage!
Do not loosen the safety torx screw with respect to the center terminal, as this ensures a
conductive connection between the grounding conductor and frame!
CAUTION
Serious damage to the machine
Failure to observe these measures will result in serious damage to the machine!
Do not rotate the terminal box unless the connection cables have not yet been laid.
If you release the safety torx screw to both sides of the outer connecting terminals, this
can destroy the machine!
Remove the three large snap hooks on the terminal board before rotating the the
terminal box. Keep the snap hooks pressed while rotating the terminal box and use a
screwdriver to re-engage when finished.
46
6.1.8.2
Versions
Standard design
It is possible to turn the top side of a machine terminal box 4 x 90 degrees (if screwed on).
The terminal box can be turned 4x90 degrees on the terminal base of the machine's housing
in the case of a terminal board with 6 terminal studs (standard design).
For machines with frame sizes 80 to 90, it is possible to rotate the terminal box continuously
through 360 degrees.
Installation instructions
1. Press the three large snap hooks over the flange of the terminal box towards the
inside.
2. Hold the snap hooks pressed inwards, detach the terminal box, raise it slightly and
rotate it to the required POSITION. Observe the arrow for the position of the terminal box
.
3. Press the terminal box lightly towards the machine housing. Use a screwdriver to allow
the large snap hooks to engage over the flange of the terminal box.

Flange
Terminal box positioner
Snap hooks
Safety Torx screws

47
Terminal box 1LE 80...90 optional terminal board

CAUTION
Arcing at the optional terminal board can destroy the machine
Failure to observe this information can result in destruction of the machine as a result of
arcing.
To change the operating mode, always press the jumper fully into the base of the slot and
use the red locking lever to ensure that it is engaged.
Connection methods for two-pole and four-pole machines

Machines of sizes 80 to 90 can be delivered with standard terminal board or with optional
terminal board.
All electrical connections and locking elements on the terminal board are operable using flathead/cross-tip screwdrivers.
Optional terminal board (star or delta circuit)

You can use the jumpers to set the operating mode for machines that have an optional
terminal board.
Installation instructions
1. Open the red locking lever and remove the jumper from the slot.
2. Release the snap hook on the compartment and remove the jumper .
3. Press the jumper fully into the base of the slot and engage the locking lever at its end
position.
4. Press the jumper into the compartment and allow the snap hooks to re-engage at the
compartment.

48
Explosion-protected machines (with the exception of machines for Zone 22) are equipped
with terminal boxes with type of protection increased safety "e".
For 1MJ machines, terminal boxes with type of protection flameproof enclosure "d" with
explosion group IIC are available as an option.
Please note in this regard design, connection options and spare parts.
Note the explosion protection information designated with
in the operating instructions!
Have authorized Siemens workshops perform any repairs.
6.1.8.3
Protruding connection cables

WARNING
Short-circuit hazard
During disassembly and particularly when installing the cover plate, make sure that the
connection cables are not clamped between enclosure parts and the cover plate.
CAUTION
It must be ensured that there are no foreign bodies, dirt, or moisture in the terminal base of
the machine enclosure.
Use O-rings or suitable flat gaskets to seal entries in cover plates (DIN 42925) and other
open entries.
Seal the terminal base of the machine enclosure using the original seal of the cover
plate to prevent dust and water from entering.
Please observe the tightening torques for cable glands and other screws.
When performing a test run, secure the feather keys without output elements.

49
6.1.8.4
Connecting the temperature sensor/anti-condensation heater

The temperature sensor / anti-condensation heater is connected in the terminal box.
Figure 6-1
Connection to terminal strip
Figure 6-2
Connection to terminal board
50
The temperature sensor / anti-condensation heater is connected in the terminal box.
Table 6- 2
Connection to terminal strip
Aluminum
Cast iron
Connection at the temperature sensor using a spring-loaded connection system


Flat-head screwdriver
Sensor cable
Tension spring

51
6.1.8.5
Cable entry
Knockout openings
NOTICE
Knockout openings
Knockout openings in the terminal box must be knocked out using appropriate methods.
Take care not to damage the terminal box or its interior components (the terminal board,
cable connections, and so on).
Assembly and laying of cables

Screw the screw-type connection into the housing or fasten with a nut.
Note
The screw-type connections must have been matched to the connecting cables used
(armoring, braid, shield).
CAUTION
Damage to terminal board
Observe the following measures to prevent damage to the terminal board:
Remove the screw-type connections (EN 50262) only when the terminal box is closed.
Tighten the screw-type connections to rated torque value only when the terminal box is
closed.
Tighten the screw-type connections only finger tight when the terminal box is open.
Make sure that the three large snap hooks are engaged when tightening the screw-type
connections!
52
Cable entries for explosion-proof machines

The cable glands must have an EC-type examination certificate and be certified for the
respective hazardous zone.
Any openings that are not being used must be sealed using the corresponding certified
plugs.
Please observe the manufacturer's specifications when fitting cable entries.
Before installing the cable, remove the dust protection element or plug from the cable
gland.
6.1.8.6
Thread sizes in terminal box

Table 6- 3
Frame size
(BG)
Thread sizes in the cast iron terminal box

Type
71 ... 90
1MJ6
71 ... 90
1MJ6
100 ... 132
1LA6
1MA6
100 ... 132
1MJ6
100 ... 132
1MJ6
160
1LA6
1MA6
160M/L
1MJ6
160
1MJ6
180
1MA6
1MJ6
180
1MJ6
180
1LG4
1LG6
200
1MA6
1MJ6
200
1MJ6
Type of protection/Zone

Zone 21
Zone 21
Standard thread
Size
Number
M 25x1.5
M 16x1.5
2
1
M 25x1.5
Additional threads with

mounting parts
Size
Number
M 20x1.5
M 32x1.5
M 16x1.5
M 32x1.5
M 16x1.5
2
1
M 20x1.5

Non sparking "n"
Zone 22
Zone 21
Zone 21
Zone 21
Zone 21
Zone 21
Zone 21
M 32x1.5
M 40x1.5
M 16x1.5
M 40x1.5
M 16x1.5
M 40x1.5
M 20x1.5
M 40x1.5
M 16x1.5
M 40x1.5
M 20x1.5
M 40x1.5
M 20x1.5
M 50x1.5
M 16x1.5
M 50x1.5
M 20x1.5
Non sparking "n"

Zone 21
Zone 22
Zone 21
Zone 21

53
Frame size
(BG)
200
225
250 ... 315
Type
1LG4
1LG6
1LG4
1LG6
1MA6
1MJ7
1LG4
1LG6
1MA6
1MJ7
Standard thread
Additional threads with

mounting parts
Non sparking "n"

Zone 21
M 50x1.5
M 20x1.5
M 50x1.5
M 20x1.5
M63 x 1.5
M 20x1.5
Zone 22
Non sparking "n"
Zone 21
Zone 22
Non sparking "n"
Zone 21
Zone 22
54
Table 6- 4
Thread sizes in the aluminum terminal box
Frame size
(BG)
Type
Standard thread
Size
63 ... 90
1LA7
1LA9
1MA7
71 ... 90
1MJ6
100 ... 132
1LA7
1LA9
1MA7
100 ... 132
1MJ6
160
1LA7
1LA9
1MA7
160M
1MJ6
180
1LA5
180
1LG4
1LG6
180
1MA6
1MJ6
200 ... 225
1LA5
200
1MA6
1MJ6
200
1LG4
1LG6
225
1LG4
1LG6
1MA6
Additional threads
with mounting
parts
Number Size
Number

Non sparking "n"
Zone 21
M 16 x 1.5
M 25 x 1.5
1
1
M 25x1.5
M 32x1.5
M 32x1.5
M 40x1.5
M 40x1.5
Zone 22
Zone 21
M 16x1.5
M 16x1.5
M 16x1.5
M 40x1.5
M 16x1.5
M 40x1.5
M 20x1.5
M 40x1.5
M 16x1.5
M 50x1.5
M 16x1.5
M 50x1.5
M 16x1.5
M 50x1.5
M 20x1.5
M 50x1.5
M 20x1.5

Non sparking "n"
Zone 21
Zone 22
Zone 21
Zone 21
Zone 22
Zone 21
Zone 21
Zone 22
Non sparking "n"
Zone 21
Zone 22
Zone 21
Zone 21
Zone 22
Zone 21
Non sparking "n"
Zone 21
Zone 22
Non sparking "n"
Zone 21
Zone 22

55
6.2 Tightening torques
6.2
Tightening torques
6.2.1
Electrical connections - Termincal board connections
Table 6- 5
Tightening torques for electrical connections on the terminal board

Thread
M 3,5
M4
M5
M6
M8
M 10
M 12
M 16
min
0,8
0,8
1,8
2,7
5,5
14
27
Max.
1,2
1,2
2,5
13
20
40
Nm
6.2.2
Cable glands
NOTICE
Take care not to damage the cable jacket.
Tightening torques must be adapted to suit the type of cable jacket material in use.
You should refer to the table in order to find the correct tightening torque for any metal and
plastic cable glands that are to be mounted directly on the machine, as well as for any other
screw-type connections (such as adapters).
Table 6- 6
Tightening torques for cable glands

Metal
Plastic
10%
Nm
10%
Nm
Clamping range in mm
Cord
mm
Standard
-30 C ... 100 C
Ex
-30 C ... 90 C
Ex
-60 C ... 105 C
M 12 x 1,5
1,5
3,0 ... 7,0
M 16 x 1,5
10
4,5 ... 10,0
6,0 ... 10,0
M 20 x 1,5
12
M 25 x 1,5
M 32 x 1,5
18
6
M 40 x 1,5
M 50 x 1,5
M 63 x 1,5
20
O ring
7,0 ... 13,0
6,0 ... 12,0
9,0 ... 17,0
10,0 ... 16,0
11,0 ... 21,0
13,0 ... 20,0
19,0 ... 28,0
20,0 ... 26,0
26,0 ... 35,0
25,0 ... 31,0
34,0 ... 45,0
56
6.2 Tightening torques
Any openings that are not being used must be sealed using using the appropriate
certified plugs.
Please observe the manufacturer's specifications when fitting cable glands.
6.2.3
Terminal boxes, end shields, grounding conductors, sheet metal fan covers
Note
The specified tightening torques are applicable unless other values are indicated.
Table 6- 7
Tightening torques for screws on the terminal box, end shields, screw-type grounding conductor connections
Thread
M4
M5
M6
M8
M 10
M 12
M 16
M20
min
3.5
16
28
46
110
225
max
24
42
70
165
340
Nm
Table 6- 8 Tightening torques for self-tapping screws on the terminal box, end shields, screw-type grounding
conductor connections, sheet metal fan covers
Thread
M4
M5
M6
min
7,5
12,5
Max.
9,5
15,5
Nm

57
6.3 Conductor connection
6.3
Conductor connection
6.3.1
General information on conductor connection

Cross-sections that can be connected depending on the size of the terminal (possibly
reduced due to size of cable entries)
WARNING
Short-circuit hazard
Electric machines contain hazardous voltages.
If the appropriate precautions are not taken, death or serious physical injury can occur.
Do not lay connection cables over the central dome of the terminal board.
Observe the opening direction and the mounting position of the cover washers on the
terminal board.
Table 6- 9
Table 6- 10
Max. conductor connection for standard machines and Zone 22

Frame size
(BG)
Max. connectable conductor cross-section

mm2
56 ... 90
1,5
2.5 with cable lug
100 ... 112
4,0
132
6,0
160 ... 180
16,0
200
25,0
225
35.0 with cable lug
250 ... 280
120,0
315
240,0
Max. conductor connection for explosion-proof machines (with the exception of Zone 22
and 1MJ) and VIK standard version
Frame size
(BG)

mm2
56 ... 112
4,0
132
6,0
160
16,0
180
10,0
180 (1LG4, 1LG6)
16,0
200 ... 225
50,0
250 ... 280
120,0
315
240,0
58
Table 6- 11
6.3.2
Max. conductor connection for standard 1MJ machines

Frame size
(BG)

mm2
71 ... 80
4,0
90 ... 160 M
6,0
160 L
16,0
180
25,0
200 ... 225
50,0
250 ... 280
120,0
315
240,0
Type of conductor connection

Table 6- 12
Type of connection
If a connection is made with a DIN cable lug, then this must be angled downwards. DIN 46 234
25 mm 2
Connection of an individual conductor with terminal clamp.

10 mm 2

Connection of two conductors of approximately the same thickness with terminal clamp.
25 mm 2

Link rail
Power supply cord
Motor connection cable
Cover washer

59
If a connection is made with a DIN cable lug, the latter must be angled downwards.
10 mm 2
1MA618.
35 mm 2
1MA620.
25 mm 2
1MA618. ... 20.
Connection of an individual conductor with terminal clamp
Connection of two conductors of the same thickness with terminal clamp
25 mm 2
1MA618. ... 20.
2,5 25 mm 2
1MA618. ... 22.
10 95
mm 2
1MA625. ... 28.
25 135
mm 2
Connecting terminal for cross-sections 16 mm2
1MA631.
50 300 mm 2
1MA631. + L00
16 mm 2
1MA618. ... 22.
35 mm 2
1MA625. ... 28.
70
mm 2
1MA631.
mm 2
1MA631. + L00
120
16 50 mm 2
1MA618. ... 22.
50 120
mm 2
1MA625. ... 28.
95 240
mm 2
120 400 mm 2
1MA631.
1MA631. + L00
60
Connecting terminal
0
1P
0
1P
2,5 ... 25 mm 2
1MJ618.
2,5 ... 25 mm 2
1MJ62. /
1MJ722.
10 ... 95 mm 2
1MJ725. ... 28.
25 ... 135 mm 2
1MJ731.
16 mm 2
1MJ62. /
1MJ722.
35 mm 2
1MJ725. ... 28.
0
1P
Connecting terminal 1MJ62.. / 1MJ722. ... 31.

01P
01P
70
01P
01P
01P
01P
01P
01P
mm 2
1MJ731.
16 ... 50 mm 2
1MJ62. /
1MJ722.
50 ... 120 mm 2
1MJ725. ... 28.
95 ... 240 mm 2
1MJ731.
Recommended connection variants


Cable lugs DIN 46237 with insulating sleeve (round and open)
Rigid cable (insulation removed at ends 8 mm)
End sleeves DIN 46228 8 mm
If air gaps 5.5 mm (up to 690 V) are observed between non-insulated components, you can also use
alternative connection elements without insulating sleeve, for example cable lugs acc. to DIN 46234 .

61
6.4 Connecting the ground conductor
6.4
Connecting the ground conductor
6.4.1
General information on connecting the grounding conductor

Note
The machine's grounding conductor cross-section must comply with DIN EN 60034-1 .
Please also observe installation regulations such as those specified in IEC 60204-1..
Basically, there are two ways of connecting a grounding conductor to the machine.
Internal grounding with connection in terminal box at the location intended for this
purpose and marked accordingly.
External grounding with connection at the stator housing at one of the two locations
intended for this purpose and marked accordingly.
6.4.2
Grounding connection type

Table 6- 13
Type of connection
Connection of an individual conductor under the external grounding bracket.
10 mm 2
Where a connection is made using a DIN cable lug under the external grounding bracket. DIN 46 234
25 mm 2
External grounding
... 25 mm 2
1MJ6071 ... 132
... 35 mm 2
1MJ6160 L
',1
62
6.4 Connecting the ground conductor
01P
01P
... 35 mm 2
1MJ618.
... 50 mm 2
1MJ620.
01P
01P
',1
6.4.3
Minimum surface area of grounding conductor

Table 6- 14
Minimum cross-sectional area of grounding conductor
Minimum cross-sectional area of phase

conductor for installation
S
mm2
Minimum surface area of associated grounding

connection
S 16
mm2
16 < S 35
16
S > 35
0.5 S
Internal ground terminal

Please note when connecting, that
the connecting surface is bare and is protected against corrosion using a suitable
substance, e.g. acid-free Vaseline
The cable lug must be inserted between the terminal clamps.
The spring washer must be under the head of the screw.
External ground terminal

Please note when connecting, that
the connecting surface is bare and is protected against corrosion using a suitable
substance, e.g. acid-free Vaseline
The cable lug must be inserted between the contact bracket and the grounding bracket; it
is not permissible to remove the contact bracket pressed into the enclosure.
The spring washer must be under the head of the screw.
The tightening torque of the terminal screw must be as specified in the table.

63
6.5 Final measures
6.4.4
Size of grounding conductor screw

Table 6- 15
Frame size
(BG)
Thread size for the grounding conductor
63 ... 90
M3.5 / M4
100 ... 112
M5
132 ... 180
M6
200 ... 225
M8
200 1LG4/6, 1LE1
2x M6
200 ... 315 1LG, 1LE, 1MA
2x M8
Table 6- 16
6.5
Size of grounding conductor screw (except for 1MJ machines)
Size of grounding conductor screw for 1MJ machines
Frame size
(BG)
Thread size for the grounding conductor
71 ... 180
2x M6
200 ... 315
2x M8
Final measures
Before closing the terminal box/terminal base of the machine enclosure, check the following:
Establish the electrical connections in the terminal box in accordance with the details in
the sections above and tighten with the correct torque.
The clearances between non-insulated parts have been maintained:
5.5 mm to 690 V, 8 mm to 1000 V.
Avoid protruding wire ends!
In order not to damage the cable insulation, freely arrange the connecting cables.
Connect the machine corresponding to the specified direction of rotation.
Keep the inside of the terminal box clean and free from trimmed-off ends of wire.
Ensure that all seals and sealing surfaces are undamaged and clean.
Correctly and professionally close unused openings in the terminal boxes.
The pressure relief device is undamaged (depending on the type of terminal box, this
involves either cast-in slots or an overpressure diaphragm). Only repair damage after
prior consultation with the person responsible for the safety of the equipment and use
only original parts.
64
6.6 Connection of optional add-on units
Before closing the terminal box, check that
the air clearances for explosion-protected machines (with the exception of machines for
Zone 22) between non-insulated parts are maintained: 10 mm to 690 V.
the minimum creepage distance for explosion-protected machines (with the exception of
machines for Zone 22) between non-insulated parts is maintained: 12 mm to 690 V.
6.6
Connection of optional add-on units
6.6.1
External fan, incremental encoder, brake

See the list of additional operating instructions: Further documents (Page 112)
Select mounted components such as external fans, incremental encoders or brakes
according to the requirements of the directive 94/9/EG .
6.6.1.1
Mounting a brake
Table 6- 17
Assigning standard brakes for 1LE1 machines
Frame size
Brake type
(BG)
6.6.1.2
Size assignment of the

company INTORQ
for PINTSCH BUBENZER
Tightening torque of manual

lifting lever
Nm
100
2LM8 0405NA10
12
4,8
112
2LM8 0606NA10
14
12
132
2LM8 1007NA10
16
12
160
2LM8 2608NA10
20
23
180
2LM8 3150NA10
20
23
200
2LM8 4000NA10
25
23
225
2LM8 4000NA10
25
23
250
KFB 63
63
40
280
KFB 100
100
40
315
KFB 160
160
40
Mounted external fan

Tightening torque applied to the fastening screws used for attaching external fans to the
housing, see Terminal boxes, end shields, grounding conductors, sheet metal fan covers
(Page 57)

65
6.7 Connection to the converter
6.7
Connection to the converter

CAUTION
The standard insulating system is suitable for converter voltages up to 460 V. For higher
voltages, a special insulating system must be used or special measures must be taken,
e.g. an output filter.
CAUTION
Machines must always be connected to frequency converters using shielded machine
supply cables. The most effective method of shielding is to conductively connect the cable
to the metal terminal box of the machine (with a metal screw connections) over a large
surface area.
Note
EMC
Please observe the section containing instructions on ensuring electromagnetic compatibility.
See the list of additional operating instructions: Further documents (Page 112)
WARNING
Operating explosion-protected machines on a converter
Always with PTC thermistor monitoring. For this purpose, tripping units according to
directive 94/9/EC are necessary.
Machines with increased safety "e" type of protection
Converter operation for these machines must be expressly certified. It is essential that you
observe the separate manufacturer's information and instructions. Converter and protective
devices must be marked as belonging together and the permitted operating data must be
defined in the common EC-type examination certificate.
Machines operated from a converter for Zone 21 and Zone 22
These machines are generally equipped with 3 PTC thermistors in accordance withDIN
44082 with a rated response temperature that depends on the max. possible surface
temperature. Select the PTC thermistors in accordance with this standard. The maximum
temperature at the cable entries is 120 C. Use suitable cables for this temperature. Do not
exceed the maximum frequency dependent on the number of poles, which is stamped on the
rating plate.
System, converter-cable-electrical machine
For line supplies with operating voltages up to 690 V, the maximum value of the voltage
peaks at the end of the cable must not exceed twice the value of DC link voltage of the
converter (approx. 2 KV). Also observe the information provided in EN 60034-17 and EN
60034-25.
66
Machines with type of protection flameproof enclosure "d" or "de"

Temperature sensors for tripping
These machines are equipped with three temperature sensors in the winding and one
temperature sensor in the gland plate in order that the temperature class is maintained.
Connect the temperature sensors in series according to circuit diagram.
Temperature sensors for alarm and trip
These machines have three temperature sensors in the winding and one temperature sensor
in the gland plate. Connect the temperature sensors in series according to circuit diagram.
Mechanical limit speeds for converter operation

Table 6- 18
Motor-
Explosion-protected motors in Zone 1 with type of protection "de" (motor series 1MJ)
Motor type
frame size
2-pole 1)
4-pole
6-pole
8-pole
nmax
fmax
nmax
fmax
nmax
fmax
nmax
fmax
rpm
Hz
rpm
Hz
rpm
Hz
rpm
Hz
1MJ6
71 M
1MJ6 07.
6000
100
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
80 M
1MJ6 08 .
6000
100
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
90 L
1MJ6 09 .
6000
100
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
100 L
1MJ6 10 .
5400
90
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
112 M
1MJ6 11 .
5400
90
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
132 S/M
1MJ6 13 .
4800
80
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
160 M/L
1MJ6 16 .
4500
75
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
180 M/L
1MJ6 18 .
5100
85
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
200 L
1MJ6 20 .
5100
85
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
225 S/M
1MJ7 22 .
4500
75
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
250 M
1MJ7 25 .
3900
65
3700
100
2000
100
1500
100
280 S
1MJ7 28 .
3600
60
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
315 S/M
1MJ7 31 .
3600 2)
60 2)
2600
87
2000
100
1500
100
1MJ7

67
Table 6- 19
Motor-
Explosion-proof motors in Zones 2, 21 and 22 with type of protection "n" or protection against dust explosions
(motor series 1LA, 1LG)
Motor type
2-pole 1)
frame size
nmax
fmax
rpm
Hz
4pole
nmax
rpm
6-pole
8-pole
fmax
nmax
fmax
nmax
fmax
Hz
rpm
Hz
rpm
Hz
1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7, 1LA9

56 M
1LA7/1LA9
05.
6000
100
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
63 M
1LA7/1LA9
06.
6000
100
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
71 M
1LA7/1LA9
07.
6000
100
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
80 M
1LA7/1LA9
08.
6000
100
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
90 L
1LA7/1LA9
09.
6000
100
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
100 L
1LA6/1LA7/1LA9
10.
5400
90
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
112 M
1LA6/1LA7/1LA9
11.
5400
90
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
132 S/M
1LA6/1LA7/1LA9
13.
4800
80
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
160 M/L
1LA6/1LA7/1LA9
16.
4500
75
180 M/L
1LA5/1LA9
18.
200 L
1LA5/1LA9
20.
225 S/M
1LA5
22.
5100 4)
85 4)
180 M/L
1LG4/1LG6
18.
4500
200 L
1LG4/1LG6
20.
225 S/M
1LG4/1LG6
22.
250 M
1LG4/1LG6
280 S/M
315 S/M/L
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
85
3) 4)
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
85
3) 4)
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
75
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
4500
75
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
4500
75
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
25.
3900
65
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
1LG4/1LG6
28.
3600
60
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
1LG4/1LG6
31.
2600
87
2000
87
1500
100
5100
3) 4)
5100
3) 4)
1LG4, 1LG6
3600
1)
60
1)
1)
For continuous operation in the range fmax(nmax), an inquiry is required.
2)
For vertical mounting nmax= 3000 rpm, fmax= 50 Hz.
3)
For 1LA9 motors, frame sizes 180 M/L and 200 L, nmax= 4500 min-1and fmax= 75 Hz.
4)
For explosion-protected motors with option D19
Frame size
Nmax
fmax
rpm
Hz
180 M/L
3300
55
200 L
3100
51
225 S/M
3000
50
68
Commissioning
7.1
Insulation resistance
7.1.1
Checking the insulation resistance
WARNING
Working on electrical power installations
Only appropriately trained personnel may carry out this work.
Before starting commissioning, install all covers that are designed to prevent active or
rotating parts from being touched, or which are necessary to ensure correct air guidance
and thus effective cooling.
WARNING
Hazardous voltage at the terminals
Dangerous voltages are sometimes present on the terminals during and immediately after
measurement of the winding insulation resistance. Contact with these can result in death,
serious injury or material damage.
If any power cables are connected, check to make sure line supply voltage cannot be
connected. Once you have measured the insulation resistance, discharge the winding by
connecting to the ground potential.
Checking the insulation resistance

CAUTION
The insulation resistance needs to be checked prior to start-up and again after any
extended periods of storage or periods during which the equipment is not in operation.
Before you begin measuring the insulation resistance, please read the operating manual for
the insulation resistance meter you are going to use. Disconnect any main-circuit cables
that are connected to the terminals before measuring the insulation resistance.

69
Commissioning
7.1 Insulation resistance
NOTICE
If the critical insulation resistance is less than or equal to this value, the windings must be
dried or, if the fan is removed, cleaned thoroughly and dried.
Please note that the insulation resistance of dried, clean windings is lower than that of
warm windings. The insulation resistance can only be properly assessed after conversion to
the reference temperature of 25 C.
NOTICE
If the measured value is close to the critical value, you must check the insulation resistance
at suitably frequent intervals.
Measuring the insulation resistance

1. Before you begin measuring the insulation resistance, please read the operating manual
for the insulation resistance meter you are going to use.
2. Disconnect any main circuit cables from the terminals before measuring the insulation
resistance.
3. Where possible, measure the insulation resistance of the winding with respect to the
motor enclosure when the winding temperature is between 20 ... 30 C. Different
insulation resistance values apply for other temperatures.
4. When measuring, wait until the final resistance value is reached. This is reached after
approximately one minute. Then read off the insulation resistance.
Limit values of the stator winding insulation resistance

The following table indicates the measuring circuit voltage and the limit values for the
minimum insulation resistance and the critical insulation resistance of the stator winding.
Table 7- 1
Insulation resistance of the stator unwinding at 25 C

Rated voltage Urated< 2 kV
Measuring circuit voltage
500 V
Minimum insulation resistance for new, cleaned or

repaired windings
10 M
Critical specific insulation resistance after a long operating

time
0,5 M / kV
70
Commissioning
7.2 Measures before start-up
Note the following:
If the measurements are performed at winding temperatures 25 C, convert the
measured value to the reference temperature of 25 C in order to be able to compare the
values with the table above.
The insulation resistance halves every time the temperature rises by 10 K.
The resistance doubles every time the temperature falls by 10 K.
Dry, new windings have a typical insulation resistance of more than 100 ... 2000 M
depending on the winding size, design and rated voltage. An insulation resistance value
close to the minimum value could be due to moisture and/or dirt accumulation.
During operation, the insulation resistance of the windings can fall to the critical insulation
resistance due to ambient and operational influences. The critical insulation resistance
value for a winding temperature of 25 C can be calculated by multiplying the rated
voltage (kV) by the specific critical resistance value (0,5 M / kV).
Example:
Critical resistance for rated voltage UN = 690 V:
690 V x 0,5 M / kV = 0,345 M
NOTICE
Critical insulation resistance reached or fallen below
If the critical insulation resistance is reached or fallen below, this can result in damage to
the insulation or voltage flashovers.
Contact your Siemens Service Center.
If the measured value is close to the critical value, you must check the insulation
resistance at suitably frequent intervals.
See also
SIEMENS Service Center (Page 111)
7.2
Measures before start-up
Measures before commissioning

Once the system has been correctly installed, you should check the following prior to
commissioning:
The machine has been assembled and aligned correctly.
The machine has been connected so that it rotates in the direction specified.
The operating conditions match the data specified on the rating plate.

71
Commissioning
7.2 Measures before start-up
The bearings have been lubricated as appropriate for the version used. Rolling-contact
bearing machines which have been in storage for more than 24 months have been
relubricated.
Any supplementary machine monitoring equipment has been connected correctly and is
functioning as it should.
For versions with bearing thermometers, the bearing temperatures must be checked
during the machine's first period of operation. The warning and shutdown values are set
on the monitoring device.
Appropriately configured control and speed monitoring functions ensure that the machine
cannot exceed the permissible speeds specified on the rating plate.
The output elements have the correct settings for their type (e.g. alignment and balancing
of couplings, belt forces in the case of a belt drive, tooth forces and tooth face clearance
in the case of toothed-wheel power output, radial and axial clearance in the case of
coupled shafts).
The minimum insulation resistance and minimum clearance values have been adhered
to.
The grounding and equipotential bonding connections have been established correctly.
All fixing screws, connection elements, and electrical connections have been tightened to
the specified torques.
Lifting eyes that were screwed in have been removed following installation or secured to
prevent them becoming loose.
The rotor can turn without coming into contact with the stator.
All touch protection measures for both moving and live parts have been implemented.
In cases where the shaft extension is not being used and is, therefore, exposed, it has
been covered and the feather key has been secured to prevent it from being thrown out.
If being used, the external fan is ready for operation and connected so that it rotates in
the direction specified.
The flow of cooling air is not obstructed.
If a brake is being used, it is functioning correctly.
The specified mechanical limit speed n max is adhered to.
If the design of the machine requires the converter to be assigned in a particular way, the
relevant information will be provided on the rating plate or an additional label.
Note
It may be necessary to perform additional checks and tests in accordance with the specific
situation on site.
72
Commissioning
7.3 Switching on
7.3
Switching on
Measures for start-up

After installation or inspections, the following measures are recommended for normal startup of the machines:
Start the machine without a load; to do this, close the motor starter protector and do not
switch the machine off prematurely. You should limit how often you switch the machine
off while it is starting up and still running at a slow speed, for checking the direction of
rotation or the required dimensions, for example. Allow the machine to run to a standstill
before switching it back on again.
Check the mechanical operation for noises or vibrations at the bearings and bearing end
shields.
If the motor does not run smoothly and/or there are any abnormal noises, switch it off and
determine the cause as it slows down.
If mechanical operation improves immediately after the machine is switched off, then the
cause is magnetic or electrical. If mechanical operation does not improve immediately
after switching the machine off, then the cause is mechanical, such as an imbalance in
the electrical machines or in the driven machine, inadequate alignment of the machine
set, operation of the machine with the system resonating (system = machine + base
frame + foundation, etc.).
If there are no problems with the machine's mechanical operation, switch on any cooling
devices that are being used and continue to monitor the machine for a while during noload operation.
If it runs perfectly, connect a load. Check that it runs smoothly, and read off and
document the values for voltage, current and power. As far as possible, read off and
document the corresponding values for the driven machine as well.
WARNING
The vibration values encountered during operation comply with ISO 10816 (otherwise
the machine could be damaged or destroyed).
Monitor and document the temperatures of the bearings, windings, etc. until the system
reaches a steady state, in as much as this is possible with the available measuring
instruments.

73
Commissioning
7.3 Switching on
Measures to take when commissioning explosion-proof machines

After installation or inspections, the following measures are recommended for normal startup of the machines:
Start the machine without a load; to do this, close the motor starter protector and do not
switch the machine off prematurely.
You should limit how often you switch the machine off while it is starting up and still
running at a slow speed, for checking the direction of rotation or the required dimensions,
for example.
Allow machines to reach a standstill before switching them back on.
74
Operation
8.1
Safety instructions
8.1.1
Safety instructions during operation
Switching on the machine with anti-condensation heating (optional)

CAUTION
Before switching on, always make sure that the (optional) anti-condensation heating is
switched off.
Machine operation
WARNING
Line supply with non-grounded neutral point
Operating the machine on a line supply system with a non-grounded neutral point is only
permitted over short time intervals that occur rarely, e.g. the time leading to a fault being
eliminated (ground fault of a cable, EN 60034-1).
WARNING
Do not remove covers when the motor is running
Rotating or live parts are dangerous. Death, serious injury, or material damage can result if
the required covers are removed.
De-energize the machine and bring it into a no voltage condition before removing any
covers.
Ensure that any covers, which are designed to prevent active or rotating parts from
being touched, which are necessary to ensure correct air guidance and thus effective
cooling, or which guarantee the degree of protection of the machine, remain closed
during operation.
CAUTION
The surfaces of the machines can reach high temperatures, which can lead to burns if
touched.

75
Operation
8.1 Safety instructions
CAUTION
Minimum load for cylindrical roller bearings
Be sure to comply with the minimum radial load of 30% of the cylindrical roller bearings in
accordance with catalog data.
WARNING
Faults during operation
Deviations from conditions during normal operation, such as an increase in power
consumption, temperatures or vibrations, unusual noises or odors, tripping of monitoring
devices, etc., indicate that the machine is not functioning properly. This can cause faults
which can result in eventual or immediate death, severe injury or material damage.
Immediately inform the maintenance personnel.
If you are in doubt, immediately switch off the machine, being sure to observe the
system-specific safety conditions.
CAUTION
Risk of corrosion due to condensation
When changing machines and/or ambient temperatures, air humidity can condense within
the machines.
If available, remove the screw plugs to drain the water depending on the ambient and
operating conditions.
Reinsert them afterwards.
If the machine is equipped with drainage plugs, the water can drain away automatically.
WARNING
Machines with textile fan covers
The machine fan is not completely protected against contact.
The customer must put suitable measures in place, e.g. housings or protective grating, to
prevent manual intervention.
76
Operation
8.1 Safety instructions
8.1.2
Safety instructions for cleaning
Cleaning
To ensure problem-free machine cooling, the air ducts (ventilation grilles, channels, cooling
fins, tubes) must be free of pollution.
DANGER
Explosion hazard
This electrical equipment is not suitable for operation in a hybrid explosive environment.
This may result in death, serious injury and material damage.
Usage in atmospheres where there is a risk of explosion caused by both gas and dust is
prohibited.
DANGER
Explosion hazard
It is forbidden to clean the machine in an explosive atmosphere!
This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Surfaces can become statically charged and discharge to ignite potentially explosive
atmospheres.
8.1.3
Safety information for explosion-protected machines in operation

Only install machines with type of protection flameproof enclosure "d", increased safety "e",
and machines for Zone 2 in hazardous areas, according to the regulations laid down by the
responsible supervisory authority. They are responsible for determining the hazard level of
each area (division into zones). Layers of dust on machines for Zone 21 and Zone 22 must
under no circumstances be higher than 5 mm.
If there are no other specifications in the EC-type examination certificate or on the rating
plate regarding operating mode and tolerance, electrical machines are designed for
continuous duty and normal startup procedures that are performed infrequently and do
not result in excessive temperature rise. Only use these machines for the operating mode
specified on the rating plate.
Measures for maintaining the temperature class:
For S1 line supply operation, a function-tested, current-dependent protective device that
monitors all three phase conductors provides sufficient protection for the machine. This
protective device is set to the rated current and must switch off machines with 1.2x the
rated current within 2 hours or less. Do not switch off the machines within 2 hours for 1.05
times the rated current. Pole-changing machines require a separate switch for each
number of poles. If an anti-condensation heating system is available, it may only be
switched on when the machines are not in operation.
For S2 to S9 line supply operation, equip machines with type of protection flameproof
enclosure "d" with at least 3 temperature sensors (one per phase) and a suitable
electronic tripping device with a temperature sensor in the gland plate.

77
Operation
8.2 Stoppages
8.1.4
Machines with textile fan covers

In order to guarantee an essentially unobstructed flow of cooling air containing fluff, remains
of materials or similar dirt, machines with a fan cover for textile applications have a larger air
discharge cross-section between the edge of the cover and the cooling ribs of the machine
frame.
These machines have a warning sticker on the fan cover.
8.2
Stoppages
Overview
If the machine remains out of service for an extended period of time (> 1 month), it should be
commissioned regularly (around once a month) or, at the very least, the rotor should be
turned. Please refer to the instructions in the section titled "Switching on" before
recommissioning the machine. If a rotor locking device has been fitted to the machine, you
must remove it before the rotor starts to turn.
CAUTION
If the machine is to be out of service for a period in excess of 12 months, you must take
suitable anti-corrosion, mothballing, packaging, and drying measures.
Switching on the anti-condensation heater

If an anti-condensation heater is provided, switch it on during the machine stoppages.
Taking the machine out of service

For details of measures that need to be implemented, please refer to Section Preparing for
use (Page 27).
Lubricating before recommissioning

CAUTION
The machine must be relubricated during commissioning if it has been out of service for
more than 1 year, in order to ensure that the grease is distributed throughout the bearings.
The shaft must rotate for the grease to be distributed.
Please observe the information on the lubricant plate if carrying out relubrication using
relubrication equipment.
See also the section titled "Application planning - Bearing lifetime".
78
Operation
8.3 Fault tables
8.3
Fault tables
Overview
NOTICE
Before rectifying any faults, please read the information in the section titled Safety
information (Page 11).
Note
In the event that electrical faults occur while the machine is being operated with a converter,
please also refer to the operating instructions for the frequency converter.
The tables below list general faults caused by mechanical and electrical influences.
Table 8- 1
Fault table, electrical causes

Electrical fault characteristics
Machine will not start up
Machine starts up reluctantly
Rumbling noise during startup
Rumbling noise during operation
Overheating during no-load operation
Overheating when under load
X
X
X
X
X
Overheating of individual winding sections

Possible causes of faults
Remedial measures1)
Overload
Reduce load
Interruption of a phase in the supply line
Check switches and supply lines
Interruption of a phase in the supply line

after switching on
Check switches and supply lines
Supply voltage too low, frequency too

high
Check power supply conditions
Supply voltage too high, frequency too

low
Check power supply conditions
Stator winding incorrectly connected
Check winding connections
Winding short circuit or phase short

circuit in stator winding
Measure the winding resistances and insulation

resistances, repair after consultation with
manufacturer
Incorrect direction of rotation of axial fan
Check connections
(1) As well as eliminating the cause of the fault (as described under "Remedial measures"),
you must also rectify any damage the machine may have suffered.

79
Operation
8.4 Deactivating
Table 8- 2
Fault table, mechanical causes

Mechanical fault characteristics
Grinding noise
Overheating
Radial vibrations
X
X
Axial vibrations
Possible causes of faults
Remedial measures1)
Rotating parts are grinding
Determine cause and adjust parts concerned
Reduced air supply, fan possibly rotating in the wrong

direction
Check airways, clean machine
Rotor not balanced.
Check feather key declaration (H, F, N)
Rotor out of true, shaft bent
Please consult the manufacturer.
Poor alignment
Align machine set,

check coupling 2)
Coupled machine not balanced
Re-balance coupled machine
X
X
Surges from coupled machine
Inspect coupled machine
Imbalance originating from gearing
Adjust/repair gearing
Resonance in the overall system (comprising machine Reinforce foundation following consultation
and foundation)
Changes in foundation
Determine cause of changes; eliminate if

necessary; realign machine
(1) As well as eliminating the cause of the fault (as described under "Remedial measures"),
you must also rectify any damage the machine may have suffered.
2) Note any changes that take place while the temperature is rising.
8.4
Deactivating
Note
Switch off the machine and disconnect it from the power supply!
Measures for shutting down the machine

Commission any devices provided for protection against condensation after switching off the
machine, e.g. anti-condensation heating.
80
Operation
8.5 Class
8.5
Class
8.5.1
Zone 1 with type of protection Ex de II (Flameproof Enclosure "d" for the

machine and Increased Safety "e" for the terminal box)
158
8.5.2
II
Ex
IIC
T4
CE marking
Identification number of designated testing agency
Code for prevention of explosions
Device group: II For hazardous areas, except mines
Device category: 2 For occasional danger, and for use in Zone 1
Atmosphere: G For gas
Explosion protection: International
Type of protection: "d" Flameproof Enclosure of machine
Type of protection: "e" Increased Safety of terminal box
Explosion group: IIC For acetylene
Temperature class: T4 For maximum surface temperature of 135C
Zone 1 with Ex e II type of protection (Increased Safety "e")

158
II
Ex
II
T3
CE marking
Device category: 2 for occasional danger
Type of protection: "e" Increased Safety

81
Operation
8.5 Class
8.5.3
Zone 2 with type of protection Ex nA II (non-sparking)
PTB 05 ATEX 3006
8.5.4
Ex
nA
II
T3
CE marking
Declaration of conformity no. for designated testing agency
Device category: 3 For infrequent, short-term danger
Type of protection: "nA" For non-sparking
Zone 21
158
II
II
Ex
tD
21
IP65
T125C
CE marking
Device category: 2 For occasional danger
Atmosphere: D For dust
Type of protection: "tD" For protection by enclosure
Version: A For process A to EN 61241-1
Zone in which the equipment can be used: 21 For Zone 21
Degree of protection of enclosure: IP 65
Maximum surface temperature: T 125 C or T 135 C
82
Operation
8.5 Class
8.5.5
Zone 22
II
Ex
tD
22
IP55
T125C
CE marking
Device category: 3 For infrequent, short-term danger
Atmosphere: D For dust
Type of protection: "tD" For protection by enclosure
Version: A For process A to EN 61241-1
Zone in which the equipment can be used: 22 For Zone 22
Degree of protection of enclosure: IP 55
Maximum surface temperature: T 125 C or T 135 C

83
Operation
8.5 Class
84
Maintenance
9.1
Preparation and notes

WARNING
Safety instructions
Before starting work on the machines, make sure that the plant or system has been
disconnected in a manner that is compliant with the appropriate specifications and
regulations.
In addition to the main currents, make sure that supplementary and auxiliary circuits,
particularly in heating devices, are also disconnected.
Certain parts of the machine may reach temperatures above 50 C. Physical contact
with the machine could result in burn injuries! Check the temperature of parts before
touching them.
When carrying out cleaning using compressed air, make sure that appropriate methods
of extracting fumes are in place and that personal protective gear such as gloves,
goggles, face masks, or similar are worn.
If you are using chemical cleaning agents, observe the instructions and any warnings
provided in the relevant safety data sheet. Chemical agents must be compatible with the
machine's components, especially if these contain plastics.
Note
Operation characteristics can vary widely. For this reason, only general maintenance
intervals can be specified here.
Preparation and notes for explosion-protected machines
Only have the machines repaired in authorized Siemens workshops!
For machines intended for use in hazardous areas, only have modifications, repairs and
overhaul work carried out by appropriately qualified personnel.
It is essential that you observe the regulations laid down in IEC 60079-19!
When making changes or performing repair or overhauling work on machines intended
for use with combustible dust, please observe the regulations laid down by EN 61241-17.

85
Maintenance
9.1 Preparation and notes
9.1.1
North American market
Machines for the North American market (optional)

When making changes or repairs, maintain the corresponding design standards! These
machines are labeled on the rating plate with the following markings.
Table 9- 1
Markings for the North American market
Underwriters Laboratories
Canadian Standard Association
Canadian Standard Association Energy Efficiency Verification
9.1.2
Touch up any damaged paintwork

If the paint is damaged, it must be repaired in order to protect the unit against corrosion.
CAUTION
Paint system
Contact the Service Center before you repair any paint damage. They will provide you with
more information about the correct paint system and methods of repairing paint damage.
9.1.3
Repainting
WARNING
Repainting explosion-proof motors
The paint coat can become electrostatically charged where there is a thick coat. A
discharge may occur, e.g. by diversion of the charge to ground when a person approaches.
There is a risk of explosion if potentially explosive mixtures are also present at this moment.
This can result in personal injury or damage.
You must comply with one of the following requirements when you repaint painted surfaces:
86
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection
Limit the total paint coating thickness according to the explosion protection group:
IIA, IIB: Total paint coating thickness 2 mm
IIC: Overall coating thickness 0.2 mm for motors of group II (gas)
Limit the surface resistance of the paint used:
IIA, IIB, IIC, III: Surface resistance 1 G for motors of groups II and III (gas and
dust)
Breakdown voltage 4 kV for explosion group III (dust only)
9.2
Inspection
9.2.1
General inspection specifications
Instructions relevant to safety

NOTICE
Pay particular attention to the relubrication intervals required for rolling bearings that
deviate from the inspection intervals.
Note
When servicing a three-phase machine, it is generally not necessary to dismantle it. The
machine only has to be dismantled if the bearings are to be replaced.
9.2.2
Optional built-on accessories

See the list of additional operating instructions: Appendix (Page 111)
9.2.3
Initial inspection
Inspection interval
The first inspection after installation or repair of the three-phase machine is, under normal
circumstances, conducted after approx. 500 operating hours, but at the latest after 1/2 year.

87
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection
Procedure
While the motor is running, check that:
The electrical parameters are maintained.
The permissible bearing temperatures are not exceeded.
The smooth running characteristics and noise of the three-phase machine have not
deteriorated during operation.
With the machine at a standstill, check that:
The motor foundations have no indentations or cracks.
NOTICE
Further tests are also necessary in line with the additional instructions assigned or in
line with the particular system-specific conditions.
NOTICE
Immediately correct any impermissible deviations that are determined in the inspection.
9.2.4
Main inspection
Inspection interval
1x yearly
Procedure
While the motor is running, check that:
The electrical parameters are maintained.
The permissible bearing temperatures are not exceeded.
The smooth running characteristics and noise of the three-phase machine have not
deteriorated during operation.
With the machine at a standstill, check that:
The machine foundation has no indentations or cracks.
The three-phase machine is aligned within the permissible tolerance ranges.
All of the fixing bolts/screws for the mechanical and electrical connections are tight.
88
Maintenance
9.3 Maintenance
The winding insulation resistances are sufficiently high.
Cables and insulating parts and components are in a good condition and are not
discolored.
NOTICE
Immediately correct any impermissible deviations that are determined in the inspection.
9.3
Maintenance
9.3.1
Maintenance intervals
General
The machines have grease-lubricated, rolling-contact bearings. A regreasing device is
optional.
Carry out careful and regular maintenance, inspections, and revisions to detect faults at an
early stage and eliminate them before they can cause further damage.
Operating situations and characteristics can vary widely. For this reason, only general
maintenance intervals can be specified here. Maintenance intervals should therefore be
scheduled to suit the local conditions (dirt, starting frequency, load, etc.).
NOTICE
In the event of faults or extraordinary conditions that lead to the three-phase machine being
overloaded either electrically or mechanically (e.g. overload, short circuit, etc.), immediately
carry out an inspection.
Measures, intervals
Measures after operating period intervals have elapsed:
Table 9- 2
Operating period intervals
Measures
Operating period intervals
Intervals
Initial inspection
After 500 operating hours
After 1/2 year at the latest
Relubrication (optional)
(see lubrication instruction plate)
Clean
depending on local degree of pollution
Main inspection
Approximately every 16000 operating

hours
Drain condensate
depending on climatic conditions
After 2 years at the latest

89
Maintenance
9.3 Maintenance
9.3.2
Regreasing (optional)
General
As a standard feature, the machines have rolling-contact bearings which are permanently
lubricated with grease (UNIREX N3, made by ESSO). A regreasing device is possible as an
option. In this case, you can find information about relubrication intervals, quantities and
types of grease, and, if required, additional data on the rating plate or lubricant plate.
Note
Do not mix different types of grease!
Prolonged storage periods reduce the useful life of the bearing grease. Check the condition
of the grease if the equipment has been in storage for more than 12 months. If the grease is
found to have lost oil content or to be contaminated, the machine must be immediately
relubricated before commissioning. For information on permanently-greased bearings,
please refer to the section titled Storage (Page 92).
Note
Regreasing
1. Clean the grease nipples at the drive end and non-drive end.
2. Press in the type and quantity of grease specified (see rating/lubricant plate data).
Please observe the information on the rating and lubricant plates.
Regreasing should be carried out when the machine is running (max. 3600 rpm)!
The bearing temperature rises sharply at first, then drops to the normal value again when the
excess grease is displaced out of the bearing.
9.3.3
Cleaning
Cleaning the greasing channels and used grease chambers

The used grease collects outside each bearing in the used grease chamber of the outer
bearing cap. When replacing bearings, remove the used grease.
NOTICE
You have to separate the active parts of the bearings to replace the grease that is in the
greasing channel.
90
Maintenance
9.3 Maintenance
Cleaning the cooling air passages

Regularly clean the cooling air passages through which the ambient air flows, e.g. using dry
compressed air.
NOTICE
Never direct compressed air in the direction of the shaft outlet or machine openings.
In the case of machines with textile fan covers, regularly remove fluff balls, fabric remnants,
and similar types of contamination (particularly at the air passage opening between the fan
cover and cooling fins of the machine enclosure) to ensure that the cooling air can flow
without obstruction.
NOTICE
The frequency of the cleaning intervals depends on the local degree of contamination.
WARNING
Particularly when carrying out cleaning using compressed air, make sure you use suitable
extraction equipment and wear personal protective gear (safety goggles, respiratory filter,
etc.).
See also
Safety instructions for cleaning (Page 77)
9.3.4
Drain condensate
If there are condensate drain holes present, these must be opened at regular intervals,
depending on climatic conditions.
NOTICE
To maintain the degree of protection, any condensation drain holes need to be closed.

91
Maintenance
9.4 Corrective maintenance
9.4
Corrective maintenance
9.4.1
Instructions for repair
Qualified personnel
Only appropriately qualified persons should be deployed to commission and operate
equipment. Qualified persons, as far as the safety instructions specified in this manual are
concerned, are those who have the necessary authorization to commission, ground and
identify/tag equipment, systems and circuits in accordance with the relevant safety
standards.
Instructions relevant to safety

WARNING
Before you begin working on the three-phase machine, in particular before you open the
covers of active parts, make sure that the three-phase machine or system is properly
isolated from the supply.
NOTICE
If it is necessary to transport the machine, carefully observe the information provided in
Chapter Preparing for use !
See also
Preparing for use (Page 27)
9.4.2
Storage
Take the bearing used up to frame size 90 only for special versions, and generally for frame
size 100 and higher from the rating plate.
Bearing lifetime
Prolonged storage periods reduce the useful life of the bearing grease. In the case of
permanently lubricated bearings, this leads to a shorter bearing lifetime.
Bearing or grease replacement is recommended after a storage time of 12 months, for
longer than 4 years, replace the bearings or grease.
92
Maintenance
Replacing bearings
Recommended interval after which bearings are to be replaced under normal operating
conditions:
Table 9- 3
Bearing replacement intervals
Coolant temperature
Principle of operation
Bearing replacement intervals
40 C
Horizontal coupling operation
40 000 h
40 C
With axial and radial forces
20 000 h
Note
Special operating conditions
Examples of factors that can reduce operating hours are vertical machine installation, high
vibrational and impact loads, frequent reversing, higher coolant temperature, higher speeds,
etc.
NOTICE
Do not reuse bearings that have been removed.

93
Maintenance
9.4.2.1
Changing bearings
Replacing bearings
9.4.2.2
Replacing bearings in explosion-proof machines

When changing the bearings, renew the sealing rings and only use original Siemens
spare parts.
When installing the sealing rings, the space in the middle of the sealing ring and in the
end shield hub should be completely filled with a suitable type of grease.
9.4.3
Dismantling
NOTICE
Before commencing disassembly, you should mark how each of the fastening elements has
been assigned, as well as how internal connections are arranged, for re-assembly
purposes.
Fan
Take care not to damage the snapping mechanisms on fans that are equipped with these.
To ensure this, the fans should be heated to a temperature of approximately 50 C around
the area of the hub. If any damage is caused, request new parts.
94
Maintenance
Fan cover
Carefully lever the snap openings on the cover out of the snap-in lugs one after the other;
do not apply the lever directly under the web (risk of breakage).
Do not damage the snap mechanisms. If any damage is caused, request new parts.
Canopy; incremental encoder under the canopy

Loosen the fixing screws on the external surface of the protective cover.
Under no circumstances should the spacing bolts be disassembled or forcibly separated
from each other or the cover. Forcibly removing or separating the spacing bolts or fan cover
can result in damage to them.
9.4.3.1
Bearing bushes
Note
Protect the bearings against the ingress of dirt and moisture!
9.4.3.2
Links
Links
Replace any corroded screws.
Take care not to damage the insulation of live parts.
Document the position of any rating and supplementary plates that have been removed.
Avoid damaging the centering edges.
9.4.4
Assembly
Notes on assembly
If possible, assemble the machine on and alignment plate. This ensures that the mounting
feet surfaces are all on the same plane.

95
Maintenance
9.4.4.1
Assemly
NOTICE
Avoid damaging the windings protruding out of the stator enclosure when fitting the end
shield.
9.4.4.2
Assemly
Apply Fluid-D to the centering edge.
Check the terminal box seals and if required, replace.
Repair any damage to the paint (also on screws/bolts).
Take the necessary measures to ensure compliance with the applicable degree of
protection.
Do not forget the foam cover in the cable entry (seal all holes completely and prevent
cables from touching any sharp edges).
For flameproof machines, apply just a small amount of acid-free, non-resinous grease to the
centering edges. Do not use any sealing agents.
See also
Terminal boxes, end shields, grounding conductors, sheet metal fan covers (Page 99)
9.4.4.3
Installing bearing bushes

Carefully observe the specified screw tightening torques.
9.4.4.4
Reassembling bearings
Sealing the bearings

V rings on shaft
Use the prescribed bearings and check that sealing washers are in the correct position
Do not forget the elements for keeping the bearings in position (correct side).
Fixed bearings (retaining ring or bearing cover)
96
Maintenance
Table 9- 4
Mounting dimension "x" of V rings

Frame size
(BG)
100 ... 112
6 0,8
132 ... 225
7 1
180 ... 225

(1LG, 1MA622.)
11 1
225
(1LG, 1LE; 2-pole)
9.4.4.5
X
mm
250 ... 315

(1LG, 1LE; 4 ... 8-pole)
13,5 1,2
225
(1LG, 1LE; 2-pole)
11 1
250 ... 315

(1LG, 1LE; 2-pole)
13,5 1,2
250 ... 315

(1MJ7; 2 ... 8-pole)
13,5 1,2
Reassembling fans
Fans
Take care not to damage the snapping mechanisms on fans that are equipped with these.
To ensure this, the fans should be heated to a temperature of approximately 50 C around
the area of the hub.
If any damage is caused, request new parts.
9.4.4.6
Refitting the fan cover
Fan cover
When fitting the cover, do not overstretch it (risk of breakage).
First engage two snap openings positioned next to one other, then carefully press the
cover into position with the two openings situated opposite these using the snap-in lugs,
and snap it into place.
Latch all snap openings cleanly into the snap-in lugs.
9.4.4.7
Refitting the canopy; incremental encoder under canopy
Canopy; incremental encoder under the canopy

Guide the fixing screws through the holes on the external surface of the canopy and tighten
to a torque of 3 Nm 10%.

97
Maintenance
9.4.4.8
Reassembly: Miscellaneous information
Miscellaneous
Number and position of rating plates and additional labels as in original condition
If necessary, fix cables in place.
Check the tightening torques of all screws, as well as those of screws which have not
been unscrewed.
The number on the EC-type examination certificate for machines with flameproof enclosure
"d" type of protection is represented by an X, since the flameproof joints deviate from IEC
standard 60079-1, Table 2. Only perform repairs following consultation with the manufacturer
and be sure to use original parts.
9.4.5
Screw-type connections
Screw lock washers

Nuts or bolts that are mounted together with locking, resilient and/or force-distributing
elements (e.g., safety plates, spring-lock washers, etc.) must be refitted together with
identical, fully functional elements.
Always replace locking elements.
9.4.6
Table 9- 5
Electrical connections - Termincal board connections

Tightening torques for electrical connections on the terminal board
Thread
M 3,5
M4
M5
M6
M8
M 10
M 12
M 16
min
0,8
0,8
1,8
2,7
5,5
14
27
Max.
1,2
1,2
2,5
13
20
40
Nm
9.4.7
Cable glands
NOTICE
Take care not to damage the cable jacket.
Tightening torques must be adapted to suit the type of cable jacket material in use.
You should refer to the table in order to find the correct tightening torque for any metal and
plastic cable glands that are to be mounted directly on the machine, as well as for any other
screw-type connections (such as adapters).
98
Maintenance
Table 9- 6
Tightening torques for cable glands

Metal
Plastic
10%
Nm
10%
Nm
M 12 x 1,5
Clamping range in mm
O ring
Cord
mm
Standard
-30 C ... 100 C
Ex
-30 C ... 90 C
-60 C ... 105 C
3,0 ... 7,0
1,5
Ex
M 16 x 1,5
10
4,5 ... 10,0
6,0 ... 10,0
M 20 x 1,5
12
7,0 ... 13,0
6,0 ... 12,0
9,0 ... 17,0
10,0 ... 16,0
11,0 ... 21,0
13,0 ... 20,0
19,0 ... 28,0
20,0 ... 26,0
26,0 ... 35,0
25,0 ... 31,0
34,0 ... 45,0
M 25 x 1,5
18
M 32 x 1,5
M 40 x 1,5
M 50 x 1,5
20
M 63 x 1,5
Any openings that are not being used must be sealed using using the appropriate
certified plugs.
Please observe the manufacturer's specifications when fitting cable glands.
9.4.8
Terminal boxes, end shields, grounding conductors, sheet metal fan covers
Note
The specified tightening torques are applicable unless other values are indicated.
Table 9- 7
Tightening torques for screws on the terminal box, end shields, screw-type grounding conductor connections
Thread
M4
M5
M6
M8
M 10
M 12
M 16
M20
min
3.5
16
28
46
110
225
max
24
42
70
165
340
Nm

99
Maintenance
Table 9- 8 Tightening torques for self-tapping screws on the terminal box, end shields, screw-type grounding
conductor connections, sheet metal fan covers
Thread
M4
M5
M6
min
7,5
12,5
Max.
9,5
15,5
Nm
9.4.9
Optional add-on units

See the list of additional operating instructions: Appendix (Page 111)
Table 9- 9
Assigning standard brakes for 1LE1 machines
Frame size
Brake type
Size assignment of the

company INTORQ
for PINTSCH BUBENZER
Tightening torque of manual

lifting lever
Nm
100
2LM8 0405NA10
12
4,8
112
2LM8 0606NA10
14
12
132
2LM8 1007NA10
16
12
160
2LM8 2608NA10
20
23
180
2LM8 3150NA10
20
23
200
2LM8 4000NA10
25
23
225
2LM8 4000NA10
25
23
(BG)
250
KFB 63
63
40
280
KFB 100
100
40
315
KFB 160
160
40
Tightening torque applied to the fastening screws used for attaching external fans to the
housing, see Terminal boxes, end shields, grounding conductors, sheet metal fan covers
(Page 57)
100
10
Spare parts
10.1
Spare parts ordering
General
In addition to the exact part designation, please specify the machine type and the serial
number in all orders for spare parts. The part designation should be identical to the
designation stated in the list of spare parts and specified together with the appropriate part
number.
Table 10- 1
Ordering example
End shield, drive end
1.40 End shield
Machine type *
1LA7163-4AA60
ID no. *
E0705/1234567 01 001
* corresponding to the rating plate
Table 10- 2
Ordering example
End shield, drive end
1.40 End shield
Machine type *
1LE1002-1DB43-4AA0
ID no. *
E0605/0496382 02 001
* corresponding to the rating plate
Take the type and serial number from the rating plate and the machine documentation.
When replacing rolling-contact bearings, in addition to the bearing identification code, the
replacement code for the bearing version is required. Both of these codes are specified on
the rating plate and in the machine documentation. They are also shown on the installed
bearings.
The graphical representations in this chapter show schematic diagrams of the basic
versions. They are used for spare parts definitions. The supplied version may differ in details
from these representations.

101
Spare parts
10.2 Spare parts
10.2
Spare parts
Part
Description
1.00
DE bearings
Part
Description
1.31
Spring lock washer to SN 60727
5.30
Rubber stopper (1MA618.-20.)
1.40
End shield
5.31
Terminal clamp (1MA618.-20.)
1.43
Shaft sealing ring
5.32
Angle (1MA618.-20.)
1.44
Bearing cover
5.33
Washer (1MA618.-20.)
1.46
Cover ring
5.43
Cable gland
1.47
O ring
5.44
Terminal box top side
1.56
Spacer washer
5.48
1.58
Spring washer
5.52
Cable gland
1.60
Roller bearing
5.53
Sealing plug
1.61
Spring band for end shield hub (FS 90 only)
5.54
O ring
1.64
DE bearing cover, inner
3.00
Rotor, complete
3.88
Featherkey for fan
Terminal box, complete
5.70
Terminal clamp
5.72
Contact bracket
5.76
Terminal Board
5.78
5.79
Bolt
4.00
Stator, complete
5.82
O ring
4.07
Housing foot
5.83
Seal
4.08
Housing foot, left
5.84
Terminal box cover
4.09
Housing foot, right
5.86
Protection mark
4.10
5.88
4.12
Nut
5.89
Bolt
4.14
Nut
5.90
The top side of the terminal box can be rotated 4 x 90

degrees, complete
(for subsequent mounting)
4.18
Rating plate
5.92
Terminal box cover
4.19
Self-tapping screw
5.93
Seal
4.20
Cover
5.95
4.30
Contact bracket
5.96
Sealing plug
4.31
Grounding bracket
5.97
Nut
4.37
Terminal board
5.98
Metal-sheet nut
4.38
5.98
Seal
4.39
Grounding screw (self-tapping screw)
5.99
Adapter plate
5.00
6.00
NDE bearings
5.02
spacer
6.10
Roller bearing
5.03
Seal
6.11
Spring band for end shield hub
5.04
Seal
6.20
End shield
5.08
Spacer sleeve
6.23
Shaft sealing ring
5.10
Complete terminal board
6.24
Bearing cover NDE, outer
5.11
Terminal strip (for 1MJ machines: Bushing)
6.26
Cover
5.12
Ex d terminal box (1MJ6) (star point

connection)
6.64
Nut
5.13
Link rail
6.30
Bearing cover NDE, inner
102
Spare parts
10.2 Spare parts
5.14
Terminal box underside
5.15
Plug (1MJ6)
7.00
Complete ventilation
(not applicable for 1LP6, 1LP7, 1LP9, 1PP6, 1PP7,
1PP9, 1MF6, 1MF7)
5.16
7.04
Fan
7.40
Fan cover
5.20
Cable entry, complete
7.41
bracket
5.22
Connecting terminal
7.47
Sleeve
5.23
Cable entry, complete
7.48
5.18
Tools for mounting and withdrawing roller bearings; fans and output elements cannot be supplied!
Part Description
Part Description
1.00 DE bearings
5.00 Terminal box, complete
1.40 End shield
5.10 Complete terminal board
1.43 Shaft sealing ring
5.11 Terminal strip
1.49 Self-tapping screw (frame size 100/112)
5.19 Self-tapping screw
1.50 Flanged nut
5.44 Terminal box housing, including seal
1.58 Spring washer
1.60 Roller bearing
5.70 Terminal clamp
1.61 Spring band for end shield hub (not for

FS160)
4.00 Stator, complete
5.84 Terminal box cover, including seal

4.07 Housing foot
5.96 Sealing plug
4.08 Housing foot, left
5.97 Nut
4.09 Housing foot, right
5.98 Metal-sheet nut
4.12 Flanged nut

4.18 Rating plate
6.00 NDE bearings
6.10 Roller bearing
4.20 Cover
6.11 Spring band for end shield hub (not for

FS160)
4.30 Contact bracket
6.20 End shield
4.31 Grounding bracket
6.23 Shaft sealing ring
4.39 Grounding screw (self-tapping screw)
6.29 Self-tapping screw (frame size 100/112)

7.00 Complete ventilation
7.04 Fan
7.40 Fan cover

103
Spare parts
10.2 Spare parts
Frame sizes 80 ... 90

Part Description
Part Description
5.00 Terminal box
7.00 Complete ventilation
5.25 Combination screws M3.5
7.40 Fan cover
5.26 Set: Jumper plug Y, jumper plug

5.84 Terminal box cover including seal, screw
5.96 Sealing plug
10.2.1
Spare parts frame size 100 ... 315 cast iron
Table 10- 3
Cast iron version frame size 100 ... 315
Part Description
Part Description
1.00
DE bearings
5.21
Screw (drilled)
1.40
End shield
5.44
Terminal box housing
1.43
Shaft sealing ring
5.49
Self-tapping screw
1.44
DE bearing cover
5.70
Terminal clamp
1.46
Cover ring
5.79
Self-tapping screw
1.49
Self-tapping screw
5.83
Seal
1.58
Spring washer
5.84
Terminal box cover
1.60
Roller bearing
5.89
Self-tapping screw
1.61
T plugs
5.96
Sealing plug
4.00
Stator, complete
6.00
NDE bearings
4.08
Housing foot, left
6.10
Roller bearing
4.09
Housing foot, right
6.11
Spring band for end shield hub (not for FS160)
4.18
Rating plate
6.20
End shield
4.19
Self-tapping screw
6.23
Shaft sealing ring
4.20
Cover
6.24
Bearing cover NDE
4.31
Grounding bracket
6.25
Lubrication sleeve
4.37
Terminal board
6.29
Self-tapping screw
4.35
Spacer ring
6.65
Grease nipple
4.39
Grounding screw (self-tapping screw)
5.00
7.00
5.03
Seal
7.04
Fan
5.10
7.40
Fan cover
5.19
Self-tapping screw
104
Spare parts
10.2 Spare parts
10.2.2
Spare parts 1LG

Part
Description
Part
Description
1.00
DE bearings
6.00
NDE bearings
1.40
End shield
6.10
Roller bearing
1.43
Shaft sealing ring
6.20
End shield
1.58
Spacer washer
6.23
Shaft sealing ring
1.60
Roller bearing
6.24
Bearing cover NDE, outer
1.61
Sealing plug
6.25
Grease tube
1.65
DE bearing cover, inner
6.26
Outer bearing cover
1.67
Outer bearing cover
6.65
Grease nipple
1.68
Grease slinger (optional)
6.67
Rubber bush
1.69
Compression spring
6.72
Grease slinger
3.00
Rotor, complete
7.00
7.04
Fan
4.00
Stator, complete
7.40
Fan cover
4.07
Housing foot
7.41
Bracket
4.18
Rating plate
7.49
Bolt
4.35
Disk
4.41
Grounding lug
5.00
5.03
Seal
5.10
5.12
Clamp for PE conductor
5.19
High saddle terminal
5.22
Clamp
5.23
Lower saddle terminal
5.44
5.45
Housing
5.47
Entry plate
5.51
Nut
5.52
Link
5.70
Terminal clamp
5.83
Seal
5.84
Terminal box cover
5.95
Terminal
5.96
Mounting rail
5.97
Strut, complete
5.99
Contact plate

105
Spare parts
10.3 Standardized parts
10.3
Table 10- 4
No
Standardized parts
Standardized parts are to be obtained from free trade outlets in accordance with their necessary dimensions,
materials and surface finish.
Standard
Picture
No
DIN 471
3.02
6.02
7.12
Standard
Picture
DIN 939
DIN 6912
DIN 472
DIN 580
4.04
DIN 582
1.60
6.10
DIN 625
3.38
DIN 6885
1.33
6.30
EN ISO 4032
1.30
1.32
1.45
1.49
4.11
5.09
5.17
5.19
5.24
5.42
5.49
5.79
5.87
5.89
5.91
5.94
6.29
6.45
7.49
DIN 7964
EN ISO 4014
EN ISO 4017
EN ISO 4762
EN ISO 7045
EN ISO 7049
4.05
7.48
EN ISO 7089
EN ISO 7090
Note
1MJ spare parts
Use screws of property class 8.8 and in the case of nuts, 8.
106
Spare parts
Table 10- 5
Standardized parts are to be obtained from free trade outlets in accordance with their necessary dimensions,
materials and surface finish.
No
Standard
6.02
DIN 472
(frame size 160)
Picture
No
1.49
(frame size
132/160)
Standard
Picture
EN ISO 4014
EN ISO 4017
4.11
4.04
DIN 580
6.29
(frame size
132/160)
EN ISO 4762
3.38
DIN 6885
4.05
EN ISO 7089
EN ISO 7090

107
Spare parts
108
11
Disposal
11.1
Introduction
Protecting the environment and preserving its resources are corporate goals of the highest
priority for us. Our worldwide environmental management system to ISO 14001 ensures
compliance with legislation and sets high standards in this regard. Environmentally friendly
design, technical safety and health protection are always firm goals even at the product
development stage.
Recommendations for the environmentally friendly disposal of the machine and its
components are given in the following section. Be sure to comply with local disposal
regulations.
11.2
Preparing for disassembly

Disassembly of the machine must be carried out and/or supervised by qualied personnel
with appropriate expert knowledge.
1. Contact a certified waste disposal organization in your vicinity. Clarify what is expected in
terms of the quality of dismantling the machine and provision of the components.
2. Follow the five safety rules (Page 11).
3. Disconnect all electrical connections.
4. Remove all liquids such as oil, cooling liquids,
5. Remove all cables.
6. Detach the machine fixings.
7. Transport the machine to a suitable location for disassembly.
Refer also to the information in the section headed "Maintenance" (Page 92).
11.3
Dismantling the machine

Dismantle the machine using the general procedures commonly used in mechanical
engineering.
WARNING
Machine parts can fall
The machine is made up of heavy parts. These parts are liable to fall during dismantling.
This can result in death, serious injury, or material damage.
Secure the machine parts being dismantled to prevent them falling.

109
Disposal
11.4 Disposal of components
11.4
Disposal of components
Components
The machines consist for the most part of steel and various proportions of copper and
aluminum. Metals are generally considered to be unlimitedly recyclable.
Sort the components for recycling according to whether they are:
Iron and steel
Aluminum
Non-ferrous metal, e.g. windings
The winding insulation is incinerated during copper recycling.
Insulating materials
Cables and wires
Electronic waste
Process materials and chemicals

Sort the process materials and chemicals for recycling according to whether they are for
example:
Oil
Grease
Cleaning substances and solvents
Paint residues
Anti-corrosion agent
Dispose of the separated components according to local regulations or via a specialist
disposal company. The same goes for cloths and cleaning substances which have been
used while working on the machine.
Packaging material
If necessary, contact a suitable specialist disposal company.
Wooden packaging for sea transport consists of impregnated wood. Observe the local
regulations.
The foil used for water-proof packaging is an aluminum composite foil. It can be recycled
thermically. Dirty foil must be disposed of via waste incineration.
110
Appendix
A.1
SIEMENS Service Center

Details regarding the design of this electrical machine and the permissible operating
conditions are described in these instructions.
Field service visits and spare parts

If you wish to request a field service call or order spare parts, please contact your local
Siemens sales office. This office will contact the responsible service center on your behalf.
You can find your local contact partner here.
Technical queries or additional information

If you have any technical queries or you require additional information, please contact the
Siemens Service Center.
Please have the following machine data ready:
Machine type
Serial number
You can find this data on the rating plate of the machine.
Service numbers
Table A- 1
Siemens Service Center contact details
Time zone
Telephone
Fax
Internet
Europe / Africa
+49 911 895 7222
+49 911 895 7223
http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request
(http://www.siemens.de/automation/support-request)
Americas
+1 423 262 2522
+1 423 262 2200
mailto:techsupport.sea@siemens.com
Asia / Pacific
+86 1064 757 575
+86 1064 747 474
mailto:support.asia.automation@siemens.com
A.2
Language versions on the Internet
Language versions can be found on the Internet

Internet page: http://www.siemens.com/motors (http://www.siemens.com/motors)
If you require additional language versions, please contact the Siemens Service Center.

111
Appendix
A.3 Further documents
A.3
Further documents
These operating instructions can also be obtained at the following Internet site:
http://www.siemens.com/motors
General Documentation
1.517.30777.30.000
1XP8001 encoder
5.610.70000.02.015
External fan
5.610.70000.10.020
Spring-loaded brake
5 610 00002 09 000
Incremental encoder 1XP8012-1x
5 610 00002 09 001
Incremental encoder 1XP8012-2x
112

[

,0%

1LA,1LP,1MA,1MF,1PP6/7/9 FS 56 ... 90L

B.1.1

Exploded drawings

B.1

,0%

113
114
,0%

,0%

B.1.2


B.1 Exploded drawings
1LA,1LP,1MA,1MF,1PP6/7/9 FS 100 ... 160

%*

%*
,0%

,0%

B.1.3


1LA5180 ... 225
115


,0%

,0%

1MA6180 ... 200

B.1.4
116

B.1.5
Terminal boxes 1MA6180 ... 200

%*

%*


117
118

,0%

,0%

%*6/

%*0/

%*0/
%*6/

%*

B.1.6

%*6/

1MJ6070 ... 200

%*/([H
%*([G

B.1.7

%*0([H

Terminal boxes 1MJ6070 ... 160

CHANGE FS 71...160 Ex d
119

B.1.8
Terminal boxes 1MJ6180 ... 200 (Ex e)

%*0/([H
%*0/([H

PP

PP
120

B.1.9
Terminal boxes 1MJ6180 ... 200 (Ex d)

%*([G

%*
%*

PP

PP

121
122

,0%

B.1.10
,0%

%*

1LE1 FS 80 ... 160 aluminum

1LE1 FS 100 ... 200 cast iron

,0%

,0%

B.1.11

123

1LE1 FS 225 ... 315 cast iron

,0%
,0%

%*

%*

B.1.12
124

1LG4/6 FS 180 ... 315
%*
%*
%*
%*
B.1.13

125

B.1.14
1LG4/6 gk330, gt320, gk430, gt420

gk 330
gk 430
gt 320
gt 420
126

B.1.15
1LG4/6 gk431, gt421, gt520, gt540

gt 431
gt 421
5.16
gt 520
gt 540

127

B.1.16
1LG4/6 gt620, gt640, gt791

gt 620
gt 640
gt 791
gt 791
128
Notes
12

129
Notes
Glossary
AS
DE
Drive end (DE)
Drive end (D end of shaft)
BA
EC type-examination certificate
Evidence of a machine certified by

an inspection body
BG
EMC
Frame size
Electromagnetic compatibility
CE
Ex
CE marking
Codes for explosion-protected

equipment
Code F
Balanced with whole featherkey
(full)
Code H
Balanced with half featherkey (half)
IC
International Cooling (standard)
IM
International mounting standard
design
CSA
Internet
www.siemens.com/motors
CSA E
Energie Efficiency Verification
CT
Coolant temperature
IP
ISPM
International Standards for
Phytosanitary Measures
130
Index
N code
Zone 22
Balanced without featherkey (non)
NDE
Atmosphere: Dust; Danger level:

Infrequent and short-term danger;
Type of protection: Protection by
enclosure "tD"
Non-drive end
NE/NDE
Non-drive end
SH
Shaft height
UL
Underwriters Laboratories
VIK
Verband der industriellen Energieund Kraftwirtschaft e.V. (German
Association of Industrial Energy
Users and Self-Generators)
Zone 1
Atmosphere: Gas; Danger level:
Occasional danger; Type of
protection: Increased Safety "e" +
Flameproof Enclosure "d"
Zone 2
Atmosphere: Gas; Danger level:
Infrequent and short-term danger;
Type of protection: Non-sparking
"n"
Zone 21
Atmosphere: Dust; Danger level:
Occasional danger; Type of
protection: Protection by enclosure
"tD"

131
Index
132

Filter Operating Instructions

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Filter Operating Instructions

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

I N S T R U C T I O N S

2012 Intensiv-Filter GmbH & Co. KG. All rights reserved.

Design and function ...............................................5

Functional description ............................................................. 6

Characteristic properties of filter media ................................ 11

Technical data .......................................................13

Dust discharge systems ....................................................... 19

Preliminary comment ............................................................ 23

Intended use ......................................................................... 23

Basic safety regulations ........................................................ 23

Meaning of safety instructions .............................................. 25

General safety regulations .................................................... 26

Product-specific dangers and danger zones ........................ 27

Inspection door ..................................................................... 31

Measures in case of alarm signals and warnings ................. 33

Causes of malfunctions .........................................................34

Inspection and maintenance ............................... 39

Cover door ............................................................................41

Filter bags .............................................................................45

Inspection cover ....................................................................47

Measures in case of alarm signals and warnings .................51

Cover door ............................................................................53

Nozzle tube ...........................................................................57

Filter bag ...............................................................................61

Supporting cage ....................................................................63

Inlet nozzle ............................................................................69

Fastening the inlet nozzle .....................................................71

Valve chamber ......................................................................73

Diaphragm valve ...................................................................75

Pilot valves ............................................................................77

Inspection cover ....................................................................79

Disassembly and disposal .................................. 81

Spare parts ............................................................................85

Additional information ........................................................... 86

Design and function

Representation of principle of a filter with components

Raw gas baffle plate

Dust is discharged continuously.

Chain trough conveyor

The following dust discharge systems are possible:

Double pendulum flap

Constructional layout of the clean gas plenum

Clean gas flap

In offline mode, the filter media to be cleaned are regenerated by interrupting

Various designs are available for different areas of application.

The filtering installations are divided into:

Diagrammatic illustration of series filters

Series filter clean gas plenum

Series filter bunker attachment

Clean gas chamber

Clean gas chamber

Electrical heating for dust collection chamber

Characteristic properties of filter media

Operating data, e.g. temperature and static pressure

Composition of the dust

Particle size distribution of the dust

Composition of the raw gas

Installation technology / process engineering

Required residual dust values in the clean gas

Customer: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loesche GmbH

Gas type:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air

Water dew point

Filter area: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,6 m

Expected pressure difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . approx. 1200 1500 Pa